https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11433-1 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — staircase measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11433-2 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — staircase measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11433-3 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — staircase measurement Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11430-1 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — staircase measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11430-2 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — staircase measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11430-3 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — staircase measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11431-1 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — staircase measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11431-2 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — staircase measurement Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11431-3 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — staircase measurement Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11432-1 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — staircase measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11432-2 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — staircase measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11432-3 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — staircase measurement Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-21T01:17:46.127Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11427-1 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11427-2 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11427-3 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11428-1 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11428-2 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c7jak2TlfDA/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Bullnose Stair — Stair Treads Begin by measuring the total length and width of the bullnose stair. First, measure from the inside corner of the wall around the bullnose curve to the outer corner, bending the tape measure around the nose. This measurement is 28 inches. Next, measure the length of the entire stair, wrapping the tape measure along the base where the carpet will be installed. This measurement is 57 inches. Finally, measure the width of the stair tread, which is 29 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c7jak2TlfDA 34 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11428-3 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11426-1 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EJ4JekN2j_g/hqdefault.jpg Measure Room and Order Carpet Squares — Stair Treads The first essential step is to accurately measure the area of the room or space where the carpet squares will be installed. Once measurements are taken, order the appropriate number of carpet squares. It is highly recommended to order approximately 10% more tiles than calculated to account for any miscuts, future replacements, or unforeseen issues during installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EJ4JekN2j_g 9 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11426-2 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/afrUJ1YBtdE/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Flooring Material Needs — Stair Treads Begin by determining the amount of new flooring and materials needed. Measure the room's length and multiply it by its width to calculate the total square footage. To account for potential mistakes, warped boards, and cuts, add an additional 10% to your calculated square footage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/afrUJ1YBtdE 11 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11426-3 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IJwbac-AflM/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Waste Percentage — Stair Treads A common mistake people make is not accounting for waste. For flooring projects, it's essential to add an additional 10% to your total calculated square footage. This extra material covers cuts, potential mistakes, dropped or damaged pieces, and defective material. To calculate 10% of your total (148 sq ft in this example), multiply 148 by 0.10, which equals 14.8 sq ft. Alternatively, a quick trick is to move the decimal point one place to the left (148.0 becomes 14.8). https://www.youtube.com/embed/IJwbac-AflM 83 2026-10-20T18:36:02.992Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11415-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cxkyDByk8-Q/hqdefault.jpg Place Indoor Test Kits — Mold Testing Kit Select several locations within your home to place the mold test kits. The video shows examples of placing kits on a bathroom counter and a bedroom nightstand. For each location, open a petri dish and expose the growth medium to the air for the duration specified in the kit's instructions (typically 30 minutes to 1 hour) to collect airborne mold spores. After the sampling period, securely close the petri dish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cxkyDByk8-Q 2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11415-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Ambient Air Culture Plate (DIY Visual Check) — Mold Testing Kit For ambient air sampling, a pre-filled agar plate is used. The host explains that this type of plate is designed to be simply opened and left exposed in the desired location for a specified duration, typically one hour. During this time, airborne mold spores will settle onto the agar surface. She mentions having previously used this method in her basement for assessment. After exposure, the plate is sealed and incubated for mold growth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 28 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11415-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Conduct Rapid Mold Test (Swab & Strips) — Mold Testing Kit The host demonstrates the use of a rapid mold test kit (Healthful Home branded). She takes a cotton swab from the kit, which has previously been used to collect a mold sample (shown in a pre-recorded clip at 2:27). This swab is then inserted into a vial containing a solution. A plunger is depressed to release the solution into the swab, and the vial is vigorously shaken for 10 seconds to ensure the mold particles mix thoroughly with the liquid. Finally, five drops of the prepared solution are dispensed into small wells on two separate test strips, one for 'Asp/Pen' (Aspergillus/Penicillium) and the other for 'Stachybotrys' mold species. Results appear within 10-15 minutes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 81 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11416-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Inoculate and Package Culture Plate (For Lab Analysis) — Mold Testing Kit After collecting the mold sample on a cotton swab (from Step 5), the host takes the swab and gently rubs it across the surface of the agar gel in the Petri dish that was prepared earlier (in Step 2). This action transfers the collected mold spores onto the growth medium. Once inoculated, the Petri dish is sealed securely with tape to prevent external contamination and to keep it closed during transport. The sealed Petri dish is then placed into a business reply envelope provided with the kit, ready to be mailed to a laboratory for detailed species identification and concentration assessment. Lab payment is typically completed online. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 28 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11416-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nwLI8zU8rKg/hqdefault.jpg Secure the Sample in the Sterile Tube — Mold Testing Kit After collecting the sample on the swab tip, carefully break the seal on the swab tube. It is crucial to perform this action without touching the white fabric tip of the swab or allowing the swab to come into contact with any other surfaces to avoid contamination. Discard the swab tube cap, and then firmly place the swab, tip first, into the sterile tube. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nwLI8zU8rKg 13 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11416-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ecpe463Byrc/hqdefault.jpg Collect Sample with Tape Lift Kit — Mold Testing Kit If using a tape lift kit, which is generally considered easier to use and less prone to error than a swab, begin by taking the small hard case. If collecting multiple samples, use a permanent marker to label the case clearly with the sample location (e.g., 'Bedroom Wall'). Open the case to expose the double-sided adhesive tape. Press the adhesive side firmly onto the suspected mold growth area on a surface like drywall, then lift it off. Close the case securely to protect the sample. This sample, along with a completed custody sheet (provided with the kit), will be sent to the lab. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ecpe463Byrc 99 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11417-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/klcY5n41pjM/hqdefault.jpg Complete Instruction Sheet and Obtain PIN — Mold Testing Kit After registering your kit, fill in the date and time of sampling and a brief sample description (e.g., 'Asbestos ceiling and flooring tests'). The system will then generate a unique PIN number for your kit. This PIN number must be accurately written on the instruction sheet included in your kit. Fill out all remaining required fields on the physical instruction sheet, including your name, state of sample collection, where the kit was purchased, and any special instructions corresponding to your samples (e.g., 'Sample 1 - popcorn ceiling', 'Sample 2 - flooring'). https://www.youtube.com/embed/klcY5n41pjM 22 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11417-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ecpe463Byrc/hqdefault.jpg Identify Sampling Locations and Submit to Lab — Mold Testing Kit After collecting your samples using either the tape lift or sterile swab method, you'll need to submit them for professional analysis. Several common areas for mold growth that you might consider testing include: around baseboards, on heating and air conditioning (HVAC) vents or registers, return air grilles (where dust often accumulates), around the toilet or under sinks in bathrooms (ensure surfaces are dry before sampling, not right after a shower), the joists or subfloor in a crawl space, and the trusses in an attic (especially if there's been a roof leak). Once all samples are properly packaged in their respective bags and the custody sheet is filled out with all necessary information (including sample locations), mail them to the Assured Bio Labs. The lab will then email you the results, identifying the types of mold found and their concentrations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ecpe463Byrc 80 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11417-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N9AwxmFxBwg/hqdefault.jpg Complete Submission Form — Mold Testing Kit After packaging your soil sample, accurately and completely fill out the provided submission form. This form typically asks for grower information, commercial representative details, sample origin, and crop information. Make sure all fields are correctly completed. Always retain a copy of the filled-out form for your personal records, as it contains important information regarding your sample and potential results. https://www.youtube.com/embed/N9AwxmFxBwg 6 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11418-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xd4dZRslIhA/hqdefault.jpg Register, Pay, and Mail Samples — Mold Testing Kit With the samples collected, the presenter moves to the final steps of preparing them for lab analysis. He reviews the 'Mail-In Registration & Payment Form', carefully filling out his personal information and selecting the type of samples. He applies the provided 'Test Kit Identification' stickers to both the registration form and the corresponding sample bags. He then pays the $40 lab fee online (which covers two samples at $20 each). Finally, he places the completed registration form and the two sealed sample bags into the 'First-Class PKG Return Service' mailer envelope. The presenter then travels to the post office and deposits the mailer, emphasizing the 'Time Sensitive Material' requirement for mailing within 24 hours. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xd4dZRslIhA 70 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11418-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Cap Vials and Prepare for Mailing — Mold Testing Kit Once the designated testing period has elapsed (between 48 and 96 hours), retrieve the test vials. Immediately put the caps back onto both test vials securely. Then, meticulously fill out the provided data card with all necessary information, including your contact details, test location, and the start/end times of the test. Complete any payment forms or enclose payment if required by the lab. Finally, place both capped test vials, the filled-out data card, and any payment information into the pre-addressed envelope. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 13 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11418-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/g_DI3_LmY5k/hqdefault.jpg Submit Samples for Lab Testing — Mold Testing Kit Place the double-bagged and labeled samples into the provided padded pre-paid envelope along with the submission form. Ensure the reference number obtained during online registration is clearly noted on the form. Mail the envelope according to the kit's instructions. The presenter sent his samples on April 11th and received results via email on April 17th. https://www.youtube.com/embed/g_DI3_LmY5k 8 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11419-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cxkyDByk8-Q/hqdefault.jpg Interpret Results and Consider Professional Advice — Mold Testing Kit Compare the growth on your indoor test dishes to your outdoor control dishes. In the video's results, the outdoor test dishes (on the right) showed significantly more and diverse mold growth compared to the indoor dishes (on the left), which had minimal to no growth. The presenter expresses doubt about the overall accuracy of these DIY kits, especially since known mold was present in the home (shown earlier). Therefore, while these kits can give a superficial indication, the key takeaway is that if you suspect a genuine mold problem, the most reliable course of action is to hire a professional mold inspector for accurate assessment and remediation advice. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cxkyDByk8-Q 10 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11419-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dTea1kDc3EM/hqdefault.jpg Receive Results and Final Notes — Mold Testing Kit Within a few business days of submitting your samples, you can expect to receive your certified results electronically. Remember, while the kit provides materials, certified laboratory analysis, and prepaid shipping, it is your responsibility to ensure proper sample collection and correct shipping back to the lab. Thank you for taking steps to protect yourself and your family; referrals are always appreciated. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dTea1kDc3EM 32 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11419-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Interpret Culture Plate Results and Compare Methods — Mold Testing Kit The host reveals the results of the Petri dish culture plates after 72 hours of incubation (which would have been the ambient air sample from Step 3, and the surface sample from Step 5 after lab analysis, although here it is shown for direct comparison). Both the 'Garage' and 'Basement' labeled plates show extensive, multi-colored mold growth, indicating a significant presence of various mold species. She contrasts these results with the earlier negative rapid test, highlighting that while the rapid test gave a quick, specific (negative) answer, the culture plates clearly showed mold was present, albeit without specific species identification. The host expresses a preference for culture plates that can be sent to a lab for detailed analysis, as they offer a more definitive answer regarding the presence of mold, even if an initial visual check is inconclusive. This approach provides lab-verified results, which is more reliable than purely visual interpretation of home culture plates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 31 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11412-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4jS0xOsJq0k/hqdefault.jpg Assess Mold and Prepare Work Area — Mold Testing Kit Begin by assessing all mold-affected areas on ceilings, walls, window sills, and any other surfaces. This includes identifying the extent of the mold growth and any peeling paint. Before starting any work, ensure you are wearing appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), including a full hazmat suit, gloves, goggles, and a respirator mask, to prevent exposure to mold spores and chemicals. Prepare the work area by covering furniture and flooring with plastic sheeting to protect them from spills and falling debris. Remove any items, such as plants, from the immediate vicinity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4jS0xOsJq0k 45 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11412-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EHFi9-bhdM4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Work Area with Containment — Mold Testing Kit Lay a black plastic drop sheet on the ground directly below the area of the wall or door frame that needs to be prepared. Ensure the sheet covers enough area to catch all falling debris. Secure the edges of the plastic drop sheet tightly to the surface of the wall or door frame using blue painter's tape. This creates a sealed containment area, preventing lead-contaminated debris from spreading. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EHFi9-bhdM4 12 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11412-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b6ZiyfadYDQ/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Work Area — Mold Testing Kit Before starting any work, protect your furniture and carpets by covering them completely with appropriate protective sheets or drop cloths. Ensure adequate ventilation in the room by keeping windows and doors fully open. This is crucial for both safety during application and proper drying of the product. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b6ZiyfadYDQ 10 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11413-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LqQi5rhyfMs/hqdefault.jpg Don Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) — Mold Testing Kit Before disturbing any mold, don appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) to minimize exposure to spores. This includes a full-coverage Tyvek coverall, safety glasses, and a respirator equipped with particulate filters (and optionally, charcoal filters for odor). https://www.youtube.com/embed/LqQi5rhyfMs 65 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11413-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Collect Physical Surface Mold Sample (For Lab-Bound Culture) — Mold Testing Kit Wearing disposable gloves, an N95 respirator mask, and safety glasses, the host demonstrates how to collect a physical mold sample from a visible patch of mold, specifically from a shower corner. She uses a cotton swab to rub directly onto the black mold growth, transferring a sufficient amount of the mold onto the tip of the swab. This collected sample will then be transferred to a Petri dish prepared for lab submission. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 9 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11413-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dTea1kDc3EM/hqdefault.jpg Prepare for Sampling (PPE & Wetting) — Mold Testing Kit Before collecting your asbestos sample, prioritize safety. First, put on your disposable latex non-powdered gloves to protect your hands from direct contact with the material. Next, securely put on your respirator or filter mask to prevent inhalation of any potentially released asbestos fibers. Once your personal protective equipment is in place, use a wet mister or a generic water sprayer to thoroughly wet the area from which you intend to collect the sample with water. This action helps to make any asbestos fibers heavier and wetter, effectively containing them and minimizing their potential release into the air during sampling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dTea1kDc3EM 23 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11414-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ecpe463Byrc/hqdefault.jpg Collect Sample with Tape Lift Kit — Mold Testing Kit If using a tape lift kit, which is generally considered easier to use and less prone to error than a swab, begin by taking the small hard case. If collecting multiple samples, use a permanent marker to label the case clearly with the sample location (e.g., 'Bedroom Wall'). Open the case to expose the double-sided adhesive tape. Press the adhesive side firmly onto the suspected mold growth area on a surface like drywall, then lift it off. Close the case securely to protect the sample. This sample, along with a completed custody sheet (provided with the kit), will be sent to the lab. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ecpe463Byrc 99 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11414-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ecpe463Byrc/hqdefault.jpg Collect Sample with Sterile Swab Kit — Mold Testing Kit For the sterile swab kit, open the sterile packaging carefully, being mindful not to touch the cotton swab tip with your bare hands to avoid contamination. Hold the swab by its handle, keeping the tip sterile. Lightly rub the swab back and forth over a 1-inch (2.5 cm) area of suspected mold. Do not roll the swab, just apply a back-and-forth motion. Once the sample is collected, open the lid of the sterile case (typically a tube). Insert the swab into the case, making sure the collected sample doesn't touch the sides, and then securely close the lid. Place the sealed swab into the plastic bag provided with the kit, ready for mailing. Remember to fill out the custody sheet with the sample location. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ecpe463Byrc 85 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11414-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Collect Physical Surface Mold Sample (For Lab-Bound Culture) — Mold Testing Kit Wearing disposable gloves, an N95 respirator mask, and safety glasses, the host demonstrates how to collect a physical mold sample from a visible patch of mold, specifically from a shower corner. She uses a cotton swab to rub directly onto the black mold growth, transferring a sufficient amount of the mold onto the tip of the swab. This collected sample will then be transferred to a Petri dish prepared for lab submission. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 9 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11410-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3o6y-6Dr6Ms/hqdefault.jpg Introduction and Kit Overview — Mold Testing Kit The host begins by discussing common symptoms that might indicate mold presence in a home, such as unexplained sneezing, headaches, or musty smells, particularly in areas like basements. She then introduces three primary types of DIY mold test kits. The first is a Petri dish culture kit that requires a separate solution to be added. The second is a rapid test kit that includes a swab, a solution, and two test strips for specific mold types. The third is a pre-filled agar plate for ambient air sampling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3o6y-6Dr6Ms 61 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11411-1 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ecpe463Byrc/hqdefault.jpg Identify Sampling Locations and Submit to Lab — Mold Testing Kit After collecting your samples using either the tape lift or sterile swab method, you'll need to submit them for professional analysis. Several common areas for mold growth that you might consider testing include: around baseboards, on heating and air conditioning (HVAC) vents or registers, return air grilles (where dust often accumulates), around the toilet or under sinks in bathrooms (ensure surfaces are dry before sampling, not right after a shower), the joists or subfloor in a crawl space, and the trusses in an attic (especially if there's been a roof leak). Once all samples are properly packaged in their respective bags and the custody sheet is filled out with all necessary information (including sample locations), mail them to the Assured Bio Labs. The lab will then email you the results, identifying the types of mold found and their concentrations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ecpe463Byrc 80 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11411-2 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rSSgz5yykmA/hqdefault.jpg Inspect for Visible Signs of Damage — Mold Testing Kit Begin by visually inspecting the areas where you suspect a problem. In this case, mold is visible on the wall behind a vanity and has grown more extensively inside the vanity cabinet, indicating a persistent moisture issue in that location. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rSSgz5yykmA 10 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11411-3 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XpJ1-3zt2Mk/hqdefault.jpg Inspect for Signs of Mold Growth — Mold Testing Kit Once the carpet is lifted, closely examine the exposed carpet padding, the wooden tack strips, and the subfloor (the floor directly beneath the padding). Look for any visual indicators of mold, such as black, green, brown, or pinkish discoloration. The video clearly shows dark, splotchy discoloration on the wooden tack strips, indicating significant mold growth. Also, pay attention to any musty or earthy odors, which are classic signs of mold. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XpJ1-3zt2Mk 5 2026-10-20T14:23:50.887Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11404-1 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i0aWZBW2uWs/hqdefault.jpg Access the Air Filter Housing — Engine Air Filter Replacement Begin by opening the car's hood. Identify the engine air filter housing, which is usually a prominent black plastic box situated near the engine. Carefully unsnap or unclip any latches or fasteners holding the cover of this housing in place. These latches are typically found on the sides of the air filter housing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i0aWZBW2uWs 4 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11404-2 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1SWUI8w5JIo/hqdefault.jpg Access Engine Air Filter Box — Engine Air Filter Replacement Begin by accessing the engine bay. The engine air filter is located within a large black plastic box on the passenger side of the engine compartment. Identify the clips securing the air filter box cover. Use a flathead screwdriver or a similar tool to gently lift the center of the main push-pin clip located on the top of the air filter box, then pull the entire clip out to release it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1SWUI8w5JIo 20 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11404-3 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_wEdt06Tma8/hqdefault.jpg Access Engine Air Filter — Engine Air Filter Replacement Next, locate the engine air filter housing on the driver's side of the engine bay. The housing cover is secured by several Torx screws. Use a T25 Torx bit (as shown in the video) with a wrench or ratchet to loosen and remove these screws. Note that some screws might not fully detach from the housing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_wEdt06Tma8 28 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11406-1 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0aoMuX5ofTk/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Air Filter — Engine Air Filter Replacement Once the air filter cover is removed, carefully pull out the old, dirty air filter from its housing. Note its orientation within the housing, as the new filter will need to be installed in the same manner. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0aoMuX5ofTk 3 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11406-2 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K4dMBqvpskQ/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Air Filter — Engine Air Filter Replacement After loosening the screws, lift the air filter box cover to expose the old air filter. Carefully pull out the old filter element from its housing. The host notes that the old filter is visibly dirty and discolored. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K4dMBqvpskQ 15 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11406-3 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7_uvhi6DC28/hqdefault.jpg Removing Old Filter and Preparing for New — Engine Air Filter Replacement With the air intake tube disconnected and clips released, the top of the air filter housing can be lifted and moved aside. The old air filter is then pulled out from its slot. The host dons a pair of disposable gloves to prevent getting engine grease on his hands. He notes that the intake area looks clean and doesn't require vacuuming. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7_uvhi6DC28 83 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11407-1 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bLhgPBgTf3c/hqdefault.jpg Clean Air Filter Housing — Engine Air Filter Replacement Before installing the new filter, use a shop vacuum to clean out any accumulated dirt, leaves, or debris from inside the air filter housing. A clean housing ensures that no new contaminants are immediately introduced to the new filter or the engine's intake system. Avoid using water or any liquid cleaners inside the housing, as moisture can damage engine components or sensors. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bLhgPBgTf3c 5 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11407-2 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bnmEushTW1w/hqdefault.jpg Clean Air Filter Housing — Engine Air Filter Replacement Before placing the filters back, take a clean rag and wipe down the interior of the air filter housing. This will remove any loose dirt, dust, or debris that may have collected, ensuring a clean environment for the filters and preventing contamination of the engine. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bnmEushTW1w 9 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11407-3 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TJdEHHOehi8/hqdefault.jpg Clean Airbox Housing — Engine Air Filter Replacement Before installing the new filter, it's a good practice to clean out any accumulated dirt and debris from the bottom of the airbox. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove leaves, dust, and other particles that might have settled in the housing. This prevents new debris from immediately contaminating the new filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TJdEHHOehi8 25 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11408-1 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0aoMuX5ofTk/hqdefault.jpg Install New Air Filter — Engine Air Filter Replacement Take the new air filter and carefully position it inside the air filter housing. Ensure it sits snugly and correctly, matching the orientation noted when removing the old filter. The filter should slide into place without excessive force. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0aoMuX5ofTk 2 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11408-2 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bLhgPBgTf3c/hqdefault.jpg Install New Air Filter — Engine Air Filter Replacement Take the new air filter and carefully place it into the air filter housing, ensuring it sits flush and properly sealed within its designated slot. Pay attention to any directional arrows on the filter itself or the housing, as some filters are designed for airflow in a specific direction. Improper seating can lead to unfiltered air entering the engine. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bLhgPBgTf3c 5 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11408-3 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i77_YqQsnPs/hqdefault.jpg Install New Air Filter — Engine Air Filter Replacement Take the new air filter and carefully position it into the cleaned filter cover, ensuring it sits snugly. Align the tabs on the filter cover with the corresponding slots in the engine's housing. Once aligned, rotate the cover upwards until it snaps firmly into place, securing the new air filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i77_YqQsnPs 12 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11409-1 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DpjGsehd6qI/hqdefault.jpg Reattach Air Filter Housing Cover — Engine Air Filter Replacement To re-install the air filter housing cover, first align the 'ears' or tabs on the back of the cover with their corresponding slots on the air filter housing base. Push the cover back so these tabs engage. Then, press down firmly on the front of the cover until the two clips engage and lock into place, securing the housing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DpjGsehd6qI 19 2026-10-19T14:23:08.193Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11401-1 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Curved Stair Measurement Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11401-2 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Curved Stair Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11401-3 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Curved Stair Measurement Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11402-1 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Curved Stair Measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11402-2 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Curved Stair Measurement To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11402-3 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Create Custom Tread Templates — Curved Stair Measurement New stair treads typically come as 1x12 red oak boards, ¾ inch thick and 11 ½ inches wide. Since these might be too wide, they need to be cut down from the back to maintain the pre-formed nosing on the front. Because the space between the skirt boards may not be perfectly square or parallel, a custom template is required for each tread. Begin by taking an old, cut-down tread that fits loosely in the opening and placing a piece of paper (or cardboard) on top. Mark a reference line on the riser. Then, use a small combination square or a piece of straight metal/wood as a guide to trace the contours of the skirt board onto the paper, keeping the guide tight against the skirt board. Slide the guide along the length of the paper, making continuous pencil lines at each end and several points in between, ensuring the lines are not bridged by any dips in the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 194 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11403-1 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Curved Stair Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11403-2 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Curved Stair Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11403-3 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Curved Stair Measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11400-1 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — Curved Stair Measurement Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11400-2 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FiwJtKWIGJk/hqdefault.jpg Preparation of Stairs and Gathering Tools — Curved Stair Measurement Before starting the installation, gather all necessary tools and materials as shown. Prepare the existing stairs by removing any old staples, nails, fasteners, or adhesives using a scraping tool. Thoroughly sweep and vacuum all step treads and risers to ensure they are clean, smooth, and structurally sound. If your stairs have an existing overhang, modify them by either cutting off the overhang or filling in the area beneath it to ensure the riser is flush with the step edge. Use a drill to secure any loose elements, ensuring all modifications comply with local building codes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FiwJtKWIGJk 55 2026-10-18T21:04:08.021Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11397-1 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11397-2 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11397-3 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11398-1 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11398-2 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Custom Size Landing Tread Order To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11398-3 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11396-1 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11396-2 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Custom Size Landing Tread Order First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11396-3 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Custom Size Landing Tread Order Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-10-18T17:17:03.536Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11389-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7yxoREbqiRA/hqdefault.jpg Access the Evaporator Coil — AC Coil Cleaning To reach the evaporator coil, locate the access panel on your furnace unit. This panel is generally secured by multiple screws around its perimeter. Using a screwdriver, carefully remove all screws and then gently pull the access panel away from the unit. The evaporator coil will be exposed inside, typically positioned where the refrigerant lines from the outdoor air conditioning unit enter the furnace, above the internal drain pan. For better visibility in confined spaces, a flashlight can be very helpful. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7yxoREbqiRA 35 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11389-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zVX6U87hLmc/hqdefault.jpg Access Evaporator Coils — AC Coil Cleaning To gain access to the evaporator coils, you will need to remove one or more access panels from the furnace or air handler unit. Use a screwdriver to unthread any retaining screws securing these panels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zVX6U87hLmc 12 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11389-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6M43-BVP1io/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Access Evaporator Coils — AC Coil Cleaning Begin by locating the air handler unit, which houses the evaporator coils. These units are typically found in an attic or a utility closet. Identify the refrigerant lines (often insulated) entering the unit. The evaporator coils will be behind the panel where these lines enter. Use an appropriate screwdriver to remove the screws securing this access panel to open the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6M43-BVP1io 44 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11390-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zVX6U87hLmc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Cleaner to Evaporator Coils — AC Coil Cleaning While wearing appropriate eye and skin protection, apply an even, saturating spray of the universal coil cleaner to the exposed evaporator coils. Allow the detergent to set for at least 10 minutes. The cleaner will work to loosen accumulated dirt and debris during this time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zVX6U87hLmc 14 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11390-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6M43-BVP1io/hqdefault.jpg Apply Evaporator Coil Cleaner — AC Coil Cleaning Apply a specialized evaporator coil cleaner generously over all the coil fins. Ensure complete coverage. Some coil cleaners are self-rinsing, meaning the condensation from the air conditioner will gradually wash away the cleaner and dirt. However, for heavily soiled coils or if you prefer a more thorough clean, it's beneficial to manually rinse. Allow the cleaner to soak for a few minutes as directed on the product label. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6M43-BVP1io 14 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11390-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BCfcwkBvDX0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Evaporator Coil Cleaner — AC Coil Cleaning After physically removing the bulk of the debris, apply a commercial coil cleaner, such as the 'Coil Cleaner' brand shown in the video (which was purchased at Lowe's for approximately $7), directly and thoroughly onto the evaporator coils. Ensure the entire dirty surface is covered with the foaming cleaner. Allow the coil cleaner to sit on the coils for approximately 15 to 20 minutes to penetrate and break down the remaining grime. For heavily soiled coils, a second application and waiting period might be necessary. It is highly recommended to place an old towel or a drip pan beneath the coils to catch any dissolved dirt and excess cleaning solution that drips off the coils. A video overlay suggests that cleaning the surface again with your brush after applying the cleaner can be beneficial to work the cleaner into stubborn areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BCfcwkBvDX0 39 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11391-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zVX6U87hLmc/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Evaporator Unit — AC Coil Cleaning Once the cleaner has had sufficient time to work, reattach all access panels to the furnace or air handler, securing them with the screws previously removed. Rinsing of the evaporator coils is typically not required, as the condensation generated when the system runs will naturally flush out any remaining contaminants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zVX6U87hLmc 10 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11391-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JLwHqOSa_vo/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble AC Unit and Test — AC Coil Cleaning Once the coils are thoroughly rinsed and any remaining debris is removed, begin reassembling the AC unit. First, reattach the top and bottom metal covers to the side of the unit. Ensure they are securely fastened. Next, insert a new, clean AC filter into the designated slot. Finally, reinstall the air intake grill cover. After confirming that everything is correctly reassembled and the coils are completely dry, you can turn the AC unit back on at the thermostat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JLwHqOSa_vo 18 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11391-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B1_I4mgicyg/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble the Unit — AC Coil Cleaning Once the cleaning and drying are complete, remove the cardboard and garbage bag from inside the furnace. Reinsert the drainage hose into the evaporator coil unit. Carefully place the sheet metal panels back into their original positions, aligning them correctly. Use the screwdriver to reattach all the sheet metal screws that were removed earlier, ensuring the panels are securely fastened. Finally, apply aluminum tape over all the seams and small cracks around the reattached panels and any access points. This step is critical to prevent air leakage, which can reduce the efficiency of the air conditioning system, particularly in areas like a basement where cool air might be unnecessarily pumped. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B1_I4mgicyg 72 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11392-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q1ExUAab3V8/hqdefault.jpg Access Outdoor Condenser Coils — AC Coil Cleaning Begin by ensuring the power to the outdoor HVAC condenser unit is completely turned off at the circuit breaker to prevent accidental startup and ensure personal safety during the maintenance process. Once power is confirmed off, locate the retaining screws that secure the side panel of the condenser unit. Using a suitable screwdriver (often a Phillips head or hex driver, depending on the unit), carefully remove these screws. After all screws are disengaged and removed, gently pull the panel away from the unit, setting it aside in a safe location where it won't be damaged or lost. This action provides clear and unobstructed access to the condenser coils, making them ready for the cleaning process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q1ExUAab3V8 4 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11392-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AY77tFBBqzM/hqdefault.jpg Remove Access Panels — AC Coil Cleaning With the power safely disconnected, proceed to remove the protective outer panels of the air conditioning condenser unit. Using a screwdriver (or a cordless drill with an appropriate bit), carefully remove all screws that secure these panels to the unit's frame. There are typically multiple screws along the edges of each panel. Once the screws are removed, gently lift and detach the panels. These panels are often made of metal and can be heavy or have sharp edges, so handle them with care and set them aside in a safe location, ensuring not to damage any internal wiring or components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AY77tFBBqzM 5 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11392-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7e4EymfCDK8/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble the AC Condenser Unit — AC Coil Cleaning To safely access and thoroughly clean the condenser coils, first, ensure the electrical power to the AC unit is completely disconnected at the outdoor disconnect box. Using an impact driver or drill, remove all screws securing the top grille and fan assembly. Carefully lift this assembly and move it to the side, ensuring not to strain or disconnect any electrical wiring. Next, remove the screws holding the side panels of the condenser unit, then detach and set aside the panels to fully expose the coils. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7e4EymfCDK8 11 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11393-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IVPpbp4G_6o/hqdefault.jpg Clean Condenser Coil — AC Coil Cleaning Begin by washing the outdoor condenser coil. Use a hose with a spray nozzle to thoroughly rinse the coil, starting from one side and working your way around to remove dirt, debris, and grime. Before washing, inspect the floor of the unit for any rust or corrosion to ensure there are no openings where water could penetrate inside the unit, potentially causing damage or staining to internal components or roof tiles below. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IVPpbp4G_6o 52 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11393-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/M3NYdZIzx2U/hqdefault.jpg Pre-rinse Coils — AC Coil Cleaning Using a garden hose with a spray nozzle, pre-wash the condenser coils thoroughly. Start by spraying water from the inside of the unit, directing it outward through the fins. Then, spray the coils from the outside inward. This initial rinse helps to dislodge and remove larger debris, and also pre-soaks and loosens old, hardened dirt within the coil fins, preparing them for the cleaner. https://www.youtube.com/embed/M3NYdZIzx2U 17 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11393-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6APa3OUc0RI/hqdefault.jpg Rinse Condenser Coils (Unitary Split System) — AC Coil Cleaning With the power off, use the water hose set to a 'jet' stream. Begin spraying the condenser coils from the top down, working your way around the entire unit. Focus the spray in a downward motion to help dislodge and wash away any debris, dust, or contaminants. Continue until water runs clear from the bottom. This method effectively cleans the coil without causing damage, as shown by visible dirt being rinsed out even from a seemingly clean coil. The water flow also helps clear drainage holes at the bottom of the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6APa3OUc0RI 87 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11394-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Aua6029tT6E/hqdefault.jpg Straighten Coil Fins (Optional) — AC Coil Cleaning If the evaporator coil fins are bent or crimped, an HVAC fin comb can be used to carefully straighten them. Select the appropriate fin spacing on the comb that matches your coil. Gently pull the comb across the bent fins to align them. This step improves airflow through the coils, enhancing the efficiency of the HVAC system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Aua6029tT6E 20 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11394-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e-LQe4ToRcg/hqdefault.jpg Straighten Bent Fins — AC Coil Cleaning After cleaning, inspect the coil for any bent fins. If you find any, use a fin comb to carefully straighten them. Maintaining straight fins is important because bent fins restrict airflow, which can be as detrimental to efficiency as a dirty coil, as air cannot move effectively across the coil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e-LQe4ToRcg 15 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11394-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_M-JLzIQHtk/hqdefault.jpg Straighten Bent Fins (Optional) — AC Coil Cleaning If you notice any significantly bent or crushed aluminum fins on the heat exchanger that are visibly blocking airflow, you may choose to carefully straighten them. A specialized tool called an A/C SAFE FIN-TOOL (or a generic fin comb) is designed for this purpose. This tool features a series of wire-like teeth. To use it, select the appropriate tooth spacing for your fins, gently push the teeth into the bent section, and then carefully move the tool up and down to align and straighten the fins. Exercise extreme caution, as these fins are very fragile and can be easily damaged further or broken if too much force is applied. For minor bends, it's often best to leave them as is. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_M-JLzIQHtk 33 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11395-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fufqIrp1m8s/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Unit and Reconnect Power — AC Coil Cleaning Once the coils are clean and most of the water has drained from the unit, carefully remove the protective covering from the electrical control box and wires. Gently place the top fan assembly back onto the unit, aligning the screw holes with their respective positions. Reinstall all the screws that were removed earlier, using the power drill to secure the top part firmly in place. Double-check that all connections are snug and the unit is fully reassembled. Then, go back to the outdoor electrical disconnect box and restore power by pushing in the fuse block or flipping the switch. Finally, return to your main circuit breaker panel and switch the AC breaker back to the 'ON' position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fufqIrp1m8s 8 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11395-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nsRHhU6q5RY/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Unit and Restore Power — AC Coil Cleaning Once the coils are thoroughly rinsed and the foamy residue has largely dissipated, reverse the disassembly steps to put your AC unit back together. Carefully fold the fan assembly back into its original position, ensuring that the electrical wire is not kinked or pinched. Then, replace any panels you removed, starting with the rear panel if it was taken off first. Gently push the panels down to ensure they are seated correctly. Finally, replace all the screws you removed, making sure they are snug but not overtightened. You do not need to wait for the unit to dry before restoring power; it's designed to be wet. Go back to your outdoor service disconnect box, open it, and flip the main breaker switch back to the 'ON' position. Then, return to your indoor thermostat and turn the AC unit back on to test its operation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nsRHhU6q5RY 78 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11395-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/k7PSzi7NSyc/hqdefault.jpg Reassembly and Power Restoration — AC Coil Cleaning Carefully place the top panel back onto the AC unit, making sure it aligns correctly and overlaps all sides of the unit's exterior walls. Reinsert all the removed screws and tighten them by hand using the 5/16" driver. Avoid using power tools for tightening to prevent stripping the metal threads. Once the unit is reassembled, return to the outdoor electrical disconnect box. Open the cover, reinsert the black handle/fuse into its proper position, and close the box cover. The power is now restored to the AC unit, which should now operate more efficiently due to the thorough cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/k7PSzi7NSyc 67 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11388-1 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJrNMPx_JyI/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Power to AC Units — AC Coil Cleaning For safety, it is crucial to turn off the power to both the indoor and outdoor AC units before beginning any maintenance. Locate the corresponding circuit breaker in your home's breaker box and switch it off for the indoor unit. For the outdoor unit, identify and turn off its dedicated on-off switch, which is typically found near the unit itself. This prevents accidental startup and electrical hazards while working on the system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJrNMPx_JyI 12 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11388-2 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yLed1Dg5O0o/hqdefault.jpg Power Off the AC Unit — AC Coil Cleaning Before attempting any maintenance on your AC unit, it is crucial to power off the entire system to prevent electrical shock. Locate the main power switch on the AC unit itself and turn it off. Additionally, go to your home's main electrical breaker box and turn off the breaker that controls the AC unit. Some units may also have an additional light switch-like cutoff switch nearby that should also be turned off. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yLed1Dg5O0o 17 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11388-3 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/o77xSwu9BzQ/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — AC Coil Cleaning Before beginning any maintenance on an air conditioning unit, it is absolutely crucial to disconnect its power supply. Locate the breaker in your home's electrical panel that controls the outside air conditioning unit and switch it to the 'off' position. Additionally, turn off the air conditioning unit from the thermostat inside your home. Some outdoor units may also have a fuse block or a dedicated breaker switch located near the unit itself; ensure this is also disengaged. This step prevents accidental startup and potential electrical shock hazards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/o77xSwu9BzQ 9 2026-10-18T14:21:49.947Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11384-1 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Tread Measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11384-2 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Stair Tread Measurement To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11384-3 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11385-1 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ubEN4NHJKPI/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Individual Riser Height — Stair Tread Measurement With the total vertical rise determined (173 inches) and the total number of risers known (24 risers for this staircase), use a calculator to divide the total rise by the number of risers. For example, 173 inches / 24 risers = 7.2083333 inches per riser (approximately 7 and 1/4 inches or 7.25 inches). This calculation provides the precise height for each individual riser to ensure uniformity across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ubEN4NHJKPI 37 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11385-2 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/reF4dSqKIho/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Vertical Rise — Stair Tread Measurement Accurately measure the vertical distance from the top surface of the lower floor to the top surface of the upper floor where the stairs will connect. This measurement is crucial for all subsequent calculations. For this example, a total rise of 35 inches will be used. https://www.youtube.com/embed/reF4dSqKIho 27 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11385-3 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Number of Risers and Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Measure the total vertical distance (total rise) from the top of the lower floor (where the stairs begin) to the top of the upper floor (where the stairs end). For instance, if the measurement is 8 feet 9 inches (105 inches). Then, divide the total rise (in inches) by a desired individual riser height (e.g., 7 or 7.5 inches, common building code standards) to determine the number of risers. For example, 105 inches / 7.5 inches = 14 risers. Remember that the number of treads will be one less than the number of risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 232 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11387-1 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11387-2 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11387-3 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11383-1 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11383-2 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11383-3 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Measurement With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11386-1 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0K-WWKcB2vY/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit and Confirm Measurements of First Stringer — Stair Tread Measurement After cutting the first stringer, take it to the deck and roughly set it in place on the landing pad. Use a measuring tape to double-check the rise of each step and the overall height against your initial calculations. It's helpful to have a piece of tread material (like a 2x6 deck board) to visually confirm the fit and ensure all dimensions align with the desired rise and run, especially the top surface and bottom surface. If the dimensions are correct, this first cut stringer can then serve as a template for cutting the remaining stringers, ensuring consistency across all stair components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0K-WWKcB2vY 52 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11386-2 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VmvmYwomlgI/hqdefault.jpg Review Marked Stringer Dimensions — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by understanding the primary dimensions of the marked stringer. The presenter points out a section corresponding to the stair tread, which is 11 and a quarter inches wide. He then indicates the stair riser, which measures 7 and a half inches. A smaller 2 and three-quarter inch section is also highlighted, representing the bottom-most cut for the first riser. These dimensions define the steps and are critical for accurate stringer fabrication. The top of the stringer will align with the existing floor, while the cutouts will accommodate treads and risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VmvmYwomlgI 29 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11386-3 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PNeGtwOlfPw/hqdefault.jpg Lay Out and Cut the First Stringer — Stair Tread Measurement Obtain a 2x12 piece of lumber for the stringer. Using a framing square, carefully transfer the calculated rise and run dimensions onto the 2x12, marking all cut lines with a pencil. After marking, use a circular saw to meticulously cut along these lines to create the first stringer. This initial stringer is critical as it will serve as a template; use it to accurately trace and cut all subsequent stringers, ensuring consistency across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PNeGtwOlfPw 11 2026-10-18T13:30:14.215Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11375-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cUjLarKDlOI/hqdefault.jpg Replace Indoor Air Filter — Heat Pump Repair Gently slide out the old air filter from its slot. Observe how dirty it is; a heavily clogged filter will restrict airflow and force your system to work harder. Note the dimensions printed on the side of the filter (e.g., '16x25x1 inches'), which indicate its size (length, width, and thickness). You can purchase replacement filters with these dimensions at a home center. While some filters can be vacuumed, replacing them with new ones is generally more effective. Unwrap a new filter and slide it into the slot, ensuring the airflow arrow (if present) points towards the furnace/air handler. You cannot change this filter enough, as a clean filter ensures optimal airflow and system performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cUjLarKDlOI 36 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11375-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tk9RCrwGB8A/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Remove Air Filter — Heat Pump Repair The technician removes the existing air filter from the return air duct or air handler. Visually inspect the filter for excessive dust and debris buildup, which can restrict airflow and lead to system inefficiency or malfunction. In this video, the filter is described as "nasty," indicating significant dirt accumulation. The filter itself is a 3M brand. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tk9RCrwGB8A 1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11375-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7umFh6jur3g/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Indoor Air Handler and Filter — Heat Pump Repair Locate the indoor air handler or furnace. Remove the access panel for the filter compartment (often at the bottom of the unit). Inspect the air filter for excessive dirt, dust, or blockages. Additionally, use a flashlight to visually examine the blower wheel inside the unit for accumulated dirt or debris, which can significantly restrict airflow and reduce system efficiency. The video noted a dirty/missing filter and filthy blower wheel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7umFh6jur3g 115 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11376-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0eQ43CVKICk/hqdefault.jpg Initial Unit Power-Up and Observation — Heat Pump Repair Begin by observing the outdoor heat pump unit (a Payne brand unit is shown) during its initial operation. Ensure the unit is powered on and appears to be functioning as expected. Listen for any unusual noises or vibrations, and note the overall state of the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0eQ43CVKICk 4 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11377-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaTbpQd7OxE/hqdefault.jpg Identify Frozen Suction Line — Heat Pump Repair Begin by identifying the problem: observing the large, insulated pipe (suction line) connected to your outdoor AC condenser unit. This pipe, usually thicker than the other refrigerant line, will be completely frozen over with a thick layer of ice, indicating a malfunction in your AC system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaTbpQd7OxE 9 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11377-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i7GAVbeEVlo/hqdefault.jpg Identify a Frozen HVAC Coil — Heat Pump Repair The first step when suspecting an HVAC issue, especially poor cooling, is to check if the system is frozen. Go to your outdoor HVAC unit and visually inspect the larger insulated copper line, often referred to as the 'suction line'. If you observe significant ice buildup on this copper line, it indicates that your indoor evaporator coil is likely frozen. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i7GAVbeEVlo 7 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11377-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U9EJJGGfdi0/hqdefault.jpg Observe Frozen Line Set and Diagnose Potential Causes — Heat Pump Repair The technician visually inspects the AC unit's line set, confirming that it is completely frozen, indicating a significant issue with the system. He explains that a frozen line set or evaporator coil points to either a lack of proper airflow or a low refrigerant charge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U9EJJGGfdi0 55 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11378-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lfnDP1hQhs0/hqdefault.jpg Check Thermostat Settings — Heat Pump Repair Begin by checking your thermostat. Without making any immediate adjustments, observe its current settings. Ensure the system switch is correctly set to 'Heat' mode. Additionally, verify that the temperature setting is set higher than the current room temperature; this ensures the thermostat is 'calling for heat.' Be mindful of programmable thermostats, as their settings might have inadvertently changed due to schedules or other reasons. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lfnDP1hQhs0 40 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11378-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tk9RCrwGB8A/hqdefault.jpg Verify Thermostat Settings — Heat Pump Repair Check the thermostat for the current temperature setting and mode of operation. Ensure the system is set to 'Cool' and the desired temperature is below the ambient room temperature to initiate a cooling call. The thermostat in the video is a White-Rodgers model, displaying a setting of 76 degrees. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tk9RCrwGB8A 1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11378-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OaN2oeofdlw/hqdefault.jpg Verify Thermostat Settings — Heat Pump Repair Check the indoor thermostat settings. Ensure the system is in 'Heat' mode and the fan is set to 'Auto.' Confirm the desired setpoint temperature (71°F in this case) and note the current room temperature display (70°F), indicating the system is actively heating to reach the setpoint. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OaN2oeofdlw 16 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11379-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/peymGz_8BkA/hqdefault.jpg Clear Condensate Drain Line — Heat Pump Repair The condensate drain line, including the P-trap, can become clogged with algae and sludge. First, inspect the P-trap by removing its cap (if present). If it's dirty, manually clear it using a zip tie or a small brush to push out any buildup. Pour some water down the line to ensure it flows freely. Alternatively, if your drain line has a flush valve, attach a nitrogen tank (with regulator and hoses) or an air compressor to it. Turn the valve so the arrow points away from the system, attach the hose, and push pressurized air to clear the line. If a union is present, disconnect it, direct the pressure into the pipe, and cap the vertical pipe to prevent water from coming back at you. Recharge the P-trap with water after flushing by pouring water into the cleanout. https://www.youtube.com/embed/peymGz_8BkA 183 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11379-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3wSdKcuUcbI/hqdefault.jpg Clear Outdoor Condensate Drain with Vacuum — Heat Pump Repair Locate the outdoor exit point of your HVAC condensate drain line. This is typically a PVC pipe ending near the outdoor condenser unit, often with an elbow joint. Inspect the end of the pipe for visible clogs or debris. Carefully remove the elbow fitting if present, to ensure a direct and strong suction. Attach the hose of your wet/dry vacuum tightly to the end of the condensate drain pipe. Turn on the vacuum and allow it to suction for several minutes. This powerful suction will pull out any sludge, algae, or debris that has accumulated in the line, helping to clear the blockage. Observe the debris collected in the vacuum container to gauge the severity of the clog. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3wSdKcuUcbI 3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11379-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8UvT6v-Tq6E/hqdefault.jpg Clear the Condensate Drain Line — Heat Pump Repair With the problem confirmed, you can attempt to clear the clog. Start by carefully using your finger to feel for and remove any visible debris or sludge from the drain opening located in the condensate pan. Next, locate the condensate drain line, which is typically a white PVC pipe. The video suggests gently pushing downward on the drain line, especially at the P-trap (a U-shaped bend in the pipe), to dislodge any internal blockages. This manual intervention can often resolve minor clogs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8UvT6v-Tq6E 10 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11380-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IVPpbp4G_6o/hqdefault.jpg Inspect & Tighten Electrical Connections — Heat Pump Repair With the unit de-energized, perform a thorough inspection of the electrical compartment. Use a screwdriver to check and tighten all electrical wire connections to ensure they are secure and won't vibrate loose during operation. Inspect the connections on the capacitors to ensure they are snug. Also, inspect the contactors for any signs of pitting or excessive wear, which could indicate they need replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IVPpbp4G_6o 103 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11380-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7umFh6jur3g/hqdefault.jpg Access Electrical Panel & Check Power — Heat Pump Repair Using an impact driver or screwdriver, carefully remove the electrical access panel on the outdoor condensing unit. This will expose the internal wiring, capacitor, and contactor. Visually inspect these components for any obvious signs of damage or wear. Use a multimeter or clamp meter to check for 24V AC control voltage between the 'R' and 'C' (or 'Y' and 'C') terminals at the contactor to determine if the indoor unit is successfully calling for cooling. Also, check the unit's service label for any historical data, such as previous refrigerant charges, as seen with the '6 LBS R22 6/20/24' notation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7umFh6jur3g 80 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11380-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lXZ9bnVwY0c/hqdefault.jpg Conduct Visual Inspection of Electrical Components — Heat Pump Repair Before any electrical work, ensure the power to the HVAC unit is completely off at the circuit breaker and the external disconnect switch. Perform a thorough visual inspection of all high-voltage electrical components within the unit. Carefully check all high-voltage wires for any signs of fraying, burns, or damage. Inspect all terminals to ensure they are tight and free from corrosion or discoloration, as loose connections can cause intermittent operation or complete component failure. Examine the contactor for signs of pitting or damage on its contacts. Verify that the disconnect switch and circuit breaker are in good working order and haven't tripped due to a fault. Pay special attention to the capacitors for any bulging, leaks, or rust, which are indicators of failure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lXZ9bnVwY0c 43 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11381-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VOnuOTgEfro/hqdefault.jpg Discharge and Test Capacitor with Multimeter — Heat Pump Repair Locate the run capacitor, which is typically a cylindrical component. Even with the power disconnected, capacitors can store a dangerous electrical charge. Safely discharge the capacitor by shorting its terminals. A common method is to use an insulated screwdriver with a metal shaft, touching the metal shaft across the capacitor terminals simultaneously. You may see a spark. For a more controlled and safer discharge, use a capacitor discharge tool. After discharging, use a multimeter set to measure capacitance (μF or microfarads) to test the old capacitor. Connect the multimeter leads to the capacitor terminals. A reading significantly lower than the specified value on the capacitor label (or an open circuit/zero reading) indicates a faulty capacitor, confirming the need for replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VOnuOTgEfro 25 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11381-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NkgxNLCrmr0/hqdefault.jpg Test Capacitor Capacitance — Heat Pump Repair To test the capacitance, set your multimeter to the capacitance testing function (usually denoted by a 'µF' symbol). Once set, touch the multimeter probes to each terminal of the capacitor. If the capacitor is functioning correctly, the multimeter display should show a reading that is very close to the rated microfarad (MFD) value printed on the capacitor. Keep in mind that capacitors can lose capacitance over time, and a deviation exceeding a 5% tolerance from the rated value indicates that the capacitor has degraded and should be replaced, as this will negatively impact motor performance. For dual run capacitors, you will need to perform two separate capacitance tests: first, from the HERM terminal to the Common terminal, and then from the Fan terminal to the Common terminal. Both readings should closely match the two rated MFD values specified on the dual run capacitor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NkgxNLCrmr0 47 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11381-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3zVyW4_FwBc/hqdefault.jpg Safely Inspect and Test the Capacitor — Heat Pump Repair Before handling any capacitor, it is crucial to ensure power is cut from the circuit and then safely discharge the capacitor. Capacitors can retain a dangerous charge even after power is off. To discharge, carefully place a screwdriver across the two terminals. Then, perform a visual inspection for any obvious signs of failure such as leakage, cracks, bulges, or a displaced membrane on the top. If no visual indicators are present, use a multimeter set to capacitance mode to test the component. Remove the capacitor from the circuit, connect the multimeter leads to its terminals, wait a few seconds, and note the microfarad (mfd) reading. This reading should fall within the range specified on the capacitor's label. If it's outside this range, the capacitor has failed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3zVyW4_FwBc 50 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11373-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uiLicM3N4fQ/hqdefault.jpg Power Down the Unit Safely — Heat Pump Repair Before beginning any work on your air conditioner or heat pump, it is crucial to cut off all power to prevent electrical shock or damage. First, pull out the disconnect located on the outdoor unit. Next, go to your main electrical panel box and locate the breakers for both the outdoor unit (condenser) and the indoor air handler. Turn both of these breakers to the 'off' position. Turning off the air handler is important because it supplies 24 volts to the contactor's relay; accidentally shorting these wires could blow out the 24-volt transformer inside the air handler, leading to further repair needs. If your panel box labels are unclear or missing, use a multimeter to double-check and verify that power is completely off at the unit before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uiLicM3N4fQ 37 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11373-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8fFQXpmjtRE/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power Safely — Heat Pump Repair Before any electrical work, prioritize safety by disconnecting all power to the HVAC unit. First, locate the outdoor service disconnect switch, typically mounted on the wall near the unit, and switch it to the 'OFF' position. Next, proceed to the main electrical panel (shown as an old Federal Pacific panel) inside the house or main service area. Identify the circuit breaker that controls the outdoor unit (the video indicates a 50-amp breaker was previously in use for the upstairs unit) and switch it off. Use a voltage tester to confirm that no power is present at the unit's control board or any exposed wiring before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8fFQXpmjtRE 11 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11373-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rpANlj_leho/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Heat Pump Repair Before performing any maintenance on your heat pump system, always prioritize safety by switching off the power. Locate the electrical panel for your home and identify the circuit breaker specifically for your heat pump. Flip the switch to the 'off' position to disconnect the power supply to both the indoor and outdoor units. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rpANlj_leho 4 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11374-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IVPpbp4G_6o/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Compressor, Condenser, and Refrigerant Lines — Heat Pump Repair Inspect the compressor and condenser compartment. Check all electrical connections to the compressor and condenser fan motor, ensuring they are snug and won't vibrate loose. If it's a heat pump, inspect the connections to the reversing valve as well. Visually inspect the condenser coils and refrigerant lines for any signs of oil or corrosion, which could indicate a refrigerant leak. Also, ensure all fittings on the compressor and refrigerant lines are tight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IVPpbp4G_6o 45 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11374-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nOkMMpt4Ei0/hqdefault.jpg Check AC Coils and Blades for Cleanliness — Heat Pump Repair Inspect your outdoor AC unit's condenser coils and fan blades. Make sure they are clean of any dirt, leaves, grass clippings, or other debris. Accumulated debris can restrict airflow and hinder heat exchange, significantly reducing cooling efficiency and potentially causing the unit to overwork. The video suggests doing this every spring to prevent future issues. *In the context of electrical troubleshooting, if the AC unit's fan is not spinning or the compressor is not engaging, after verifying power at the electrical panel, a multimeter can be used to check for line voltage (240V AC) at the contactor, voltage across the run capacitor terminals (after discharging it safely), and continuity of the fan motor windings. This helps diagnose if the electrical fault lies in the power supply to the unit, the capacitor, or the motor itself.* https://www.youtube.com/embed/nOkMMpt4Ei0 6 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11374-3 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nOkMMpt4Ei0/hqdefault.jpg Check AC Coils and Blades for Cleanliness — Heat Pump Repair Inspect your outdoor AC unit's condenser coils and fan blades. Make sure they are clean of any dirt, leaves, grass clippings, or other debris. Accumulated debris can restrict airflow and hinder heat exchange, significantly reducing cooling efficiency and potentially causing the unit to overwork. The video suggests doing this every spring to prevent future issues. *In the context of electrical troubleshooting, if the AC unit's fan is not spinning or the compressor is not engaging, after verifying power at the electrical panel, a multimeter can be used to check for line voltage (240V AC) at the contactor, voltage across the run capacitor terminals (after discharging it safely), and continuity of the fan motor windings. This helps diagnose if the electrical fault lies in the power supply to the unit, the capacitor, or the motor itself.* https://www.youtube.com/embed/nOkMMpt4Ei0 6 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11382-1 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LmGmHYKj6GE/hqdefault.jpg Observe Outdoor Condensing Unit Operation — Heat Pump Repair Proceed to the outdoor condensing unit on the roof. Observe the unit's operation. The fan is running, but the compressor is not. A distinct humming or buzzing sound indicates that the compressor is attempting to start but failing, suggesting a problem with the start circuit, often the run capacitor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LmGmHYKj6GE 21 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11382-2 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaTbpQd7OxE/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Underlying Cause — Heat Pump Repair After powering down the unit, you need to diagnose the underlying cause of the frozen suction line. The video identifies two main issues: either a low refrigerant charge in your system or a dirty (filthy) air filter that is preventing adequate airflow. Observe your indoor air filter to check if it's visibly clogged. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaTbpQd7OxE 10 2026-10-17T14:22:58.596Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11371-1 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Tread Measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11371-2 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Stair Tread Measurement To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11371-3 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Stair Tread Measurement Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11372-1 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11372-2 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11372-3 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Tread Measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-17T04:07:38.319Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11366-1 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11366-2 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Before installing the stair treads, ensure the stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris from the surface of each stair. A clean surface is crucial for the adhesive on the treads to bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 6 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11366-3 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rON0c9UvU2E/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Clean Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Begin by thoroughly cleaning the stair treads. You can use a microfiber cloth or any suitable cloth, optionally combined with a handheld vacuum, to remove all dust and loose dirt. The goal is to ensure the entire stair surface is clean and completely dry. This is crucial for the adhesive on the back of the carpet treads to stick properly. Avoid using any cleaning products that might leave a greasy residue, such as Pledge or Pine-Sol, as this can compromise the adhesive bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rON0c9UvU2E 36 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11369-1 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N5xVJ2fg2YQ/hqdefault.jpg Allow for Curing and Final Cleanup — Stair Tread Installation Allow the construction adhesive to cure completely. The video mentions a cure time of 2 to 7 days, so avoid stepping on the newly repaired steps during this period to allow the adhesive to fully bond and strengthen. The man places a traffic cone as a visual reminder to prevent anyone from walking on the step prematurely. After the curing time, blow away any residual dirt or debris from the area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/N5xVJ2fg2YQ 35 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11369-2 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GVgCcuwyOEE/hqdefault.jpg Final Curing and Caulking — Stair Tread Installation Once the entire staircase installation is complete, it's important to allow the adhesive to fully set. Try to limit the use of the stairs for several hours (the video animation suggests around 4-8 hours) to ensure the vinyl bonds securely to the stairs. Depending on the accuracy of your cuts and the desired final aesthetic, you may choose to apply caulking, such as DAP Alex Plus acrylic latex caulk plus silicone, along the sides where the vinyl meets the stringers or walls. This will cover any minor imperfections or gaps, providing a clean and finished look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GVgCcuwyOEE 42 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11369-3 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Complete Installation and Caulk Gaps — Stair Tread Installation Continue installing the remaining risers and treads by repeating the process outlined in the previous two steps, working your way up the staircase. Ensure each riser is adhered with polyurethane adhesive and secured with finish nails. Similarly, each tread should be dry-fitted, coated with adhesive (perimeter and zigzag), placed with expansion gaps, and nailed at the back edge. Once all risers and treads are installed, clean the stairs thoroughly. Then, use caulk or clear silicone with a caulking gun to fill in all the 1/16 inch expansion gaps for a seamless and finished look. After completion, it's crucial to stay off the stairs for 24 to 48 hours to allow sufficient time for the construction adhesive to fully dry and cure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 16 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11368-1 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Stair Tread Installation With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11368-2 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11368-3 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11367-1 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11367-2 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11367-3 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Stair Tread Installation With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-10-16T20:58:15.754Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11359-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jqLGwe_0AfA/hqdefault.jpg Understand the Importance of Soil Testing — Lawn Fertilization Before you begin any fertilization or lawn care regimen, it is crucial to understand your soil's current condition. The presenter explains that blindly applying fertilizers without a soil test can be ineffective or even harmful, as different fertilizers have varying nutrient compositions (e.g., 10-20-5 for high phosphorus needs). A soil test will reveal the 'hidden story' of your lawn, including its pH, nutrient levels (like phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium, zinc, manganese, boron, copper, sodium, and sulfur), and Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC). This information is vital for selecting the correct products and application rates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jqLGwe_0AfA 85 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11359-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DfB7juOfopA/hqdefault.jpg Soil Testing — Lawn Fertilization After identifying your grass type, the next step is to conduct a soil test. This simple process involves collecting soil samples from your lawn and sending them to a lab for analysis. The test results will reveal your soil's pH, nutrient levels (like phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium, sulfur, boron, iron, manganese, zinc, and sodium), and organic matter content. This information is crucial for selecting the correct fertilizers and products, ensuring you apply what your lawn actually needs rather than guessing. The video shows taking soil samples with a tool and placing them into a bucket. It also displays a sample soil analysis report from RxSoil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DfB7juOfopA 74 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11359-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J92XCpiva24/hqdefault.jpg Understand Your Lawn's Needs (Soil & Grass Type) — Lawn Fertilization Before applying any synthetic fertilizer, it is crucial to understand your lawn's specific needs. This involves performing a soil test to determine nutrient deficiencies (such as phosphorus or nitrogen levels) and identifying your specific grass type (e.g., St. Augustine, Bermuda). Knowing your soil composition and grass variety will guide the selection of the correct fertilizer or soil improver, ensuring you provide exactly what your lawn requires for optimal health. If you are unsure about your soil type or grass species, you can collect soil samples and a few blades of grass and consult with local gardening experts, such as those at Ace Hardware. They can analyze your samples or test results and recommend the most appropriate products. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J92XCpiva24 15 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11360-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hXfvF2eymUs/hqdefault.jpg Select and Understand Your Fertilizer — Lawn Fertilization Choose a fertilizer that matches your lawn's needs, guided by your soil test results and the N-P-K ratio displayed on the fertilizer bag (e.g., 18-24-12). N-P-K stands for Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus (P), and Potassium (K), representing their percentage by weight in the product. Nitrogen promotes leafy growth and green color, phosphorus aids strong root development, and potassium enhances overall plant health and regulates growth. For warm-season grasses like Bermuda, a starter fertilizer (higher phosphorus) is beneficial in late spring/early summer to help with emergence from dormancy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hXfvF2eymUs 122 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11360-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4vKNnIZWtwM/hqdefault.jpg Selecting the Correct Fertilizer — Lawn Fertilization When choosing a fertilizer, look for the N-P-K ratio, typically displayed as three large numbers on the front of the bag (e.g., 15-5-10). These numbers represent the percentage by weight of Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus (P), and Potassium (K) in the fertilizer. For example, a 50-pound bag of 15-5-10 fertilizer contains 7.5 pounds of Nitrogen, 2.5 pounds of Phosphorus, and 5.0 pounds of Potassium. To determine your lawn's specific nutrient needs, conduct a soil test. Soil tests measure the current NPK content and pH levels of your soil, providing valuable information to select the appropriate fertilizer. If your soil has excessive nitrogen, consider using a slow-release fertilizer to temper the amount of nitrogen your lawn receives, as too much can encourage weeds, diseases, or burn the grass roots. Soil test kits can be purchased at big box stores or samples can be submitted to local agricultural extensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4vKNnIZWtwM 84 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11360-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VugMC4buOdU/hqdefault.jpg Select Appropriate Fall Fertilizer — Lawn Fertilization When selecting a fall fertilizer, the most important factor is the NPK (Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium) analysis, which is typically displayed as three numbers on the bag. The presenter advises ignoring marketing terms like 'fall lawn food' or 'winterizer' and instead focusing on these numbers in relation to your lawn's specific needs. He highlights the importance of a soil test to determine nutrient deficiencies. For example, he opted for a 'Scotts Turf Builder Starter Food for New Grass' fertilizer with higher phosphorus (which is usually the second number in the NPK ratio, e.g., 24-0-6 or 32-0-10 for nitrogen-rich options like 'Yard Mastery Flagship'), because his soil test indicated a deficiency in phosphorus. Generally, a higher nitrogen content is recommended for fall fertilization, unless your soil test dictates otherwise. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VugMC4buOdU 113 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11361-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/myGqz0DD66g/hqdefault.jpg Time Your Fertilization Correctly — Lawn Fertilization To maximize the benefits of your fertilizer, apply it at the correct time of year, aligning with your grass's active growing season. * **Warm-Season Grasses (Buffalo, Couch, Kikuyu, Zoysia):** Fertilize during their active growth period, typically from spring to early autumn. * **Cold-Season Grasses (Fescue, Ryegrass, Kentucky Bluegrass):** Fertilize during their active growth period, usually during autumn and spring. https://www.youtube.com/embed/myGqz0DD66g 72 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11361-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DfB7juOfopA/hqdefault.jpg Fertilizer Timing — Lawn Fertilization Properly timing your fertilizer applications is essential for maximizing grass health and growth. For cool-season grasses (up north), the best times to fertilize are in late spring (around late May/Memorial Day timeframe) and especially in the fall, as soon as summer heat breaks (around Labor Day) with additional applications in mid-September and mid-October, depending on your climate. During peak summer heat, cool-season grasses may go dormant, and heavy fertilization is not recommended; instead, use liquid or soluble products with smaller amounts of nitrogen or iron for a 'boost of green'. For warm-season grasses (down south), summer is their peak growing season, so focus your fertilization efforts during this time. The video shows a broadcast spreader being used for granular fertilizer and a hose-end sprayer for liquid products. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DfB7juOfopA 79 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11361-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ewJxxuTTL60/hqdefault.jpg Timing Your Fertilization Schedule — Lawn Fertilization Timing is crucial for effective fertilization. Nutrients are best absorbed after early spring root growth occurs. Therefore, the first feeding should happen around the time the lawn first shows signs of needing to be mowed in spring. Continue with additional feedings every 4 to 6 weeks throughout the summer to help the lawn withstand heat and drought. The fall feeding is considered the most important as a winterizing fertilizer helps protect the grass roots against cold temperatures, leading to a quicker green-up the following spring. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ewJxxuTTL60 36 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11362-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nzVOnf2O1Zw/hqdefault.jpg Mow the Lawn — Lawn Fertilization Prior to applying granular fertilizer, it is recommended to mow the lawn. This ensures the grass blades are at an optimal height, allowing the fertilizer granules to reach the soil surface more effectively and preventing them from getting caught on long blades. The presenter uses a specialized Reelmaster 3100 D mower to achieve a golf-course like cut. He performs a few passes, ensuring the mower settings are correct and the cut is even, before proceeding with fertilization. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nzVOnf2O1Zw 79 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11362-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/femcTi-8gDM/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Lawn by Mowing Short and Clearing Debris — Lawn Fertilization Begin by mowing the lawn to a very short height using a lawnmower. This prepares the lawn for subsequent treatments by removing excess grass and allowing better access to the soil surface. After mowing, remove all grass clippings and any other debris from the lawn, potentially using a leaf blower or raking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/femcTi-8gDM 23 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11362-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kMyiaEqnp8o/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Lawn for Application — Lawn Fertilization Before applying liquid fertilizer, consider the lawn's condition. For liquid fertilizers, which offer some foliar intake, it's generally best not to cut the day before. The presenter cut his lawn three days prior, allowing the blades to stand tall and be ready for absorption. Ensure the lawn is well-irrigated and not heat-stressed, as applying fertilizer to a stressed lawn can cause damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kMyiaEqnp8o 65 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11363-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ne1aPu2Ic0Q/hqdefault.jpg Spread Fertilizer — Lawn Fertilization With the spreader filled, proceed to apply the fertilizer to the lawn. Walk at a consistent pace, either pushing the wheeled spreader or cranking the handheld spreader, to ensure an even distribution of the granules. Make sure to overlap slightly on each pass to avoid striping or missed areas, covering the entire desired lawn area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ne1aPu2Ic0Q 9 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11363-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hXfvF2eymUs/hqdefault.jpg Calibrate Spreader and Apply Fertilizer — Lawn Fertilization Always check the fertilizer product label for the recommended spreader settings and ensure your broadcast spreader, such as the Chapin All Season Spreader 82099, is calibrated correctly. Before applying to the entire lawn, perform a 'trim pass' or perimeter pass. This involves closing the edge control on your spreader (if available) and walking around the perimeter of your lawn to create a clear border, preventing fertilizer from spreading onto sidewalks or driveways. After the trim pass, open the edge control and apply fertilizer by walking back and forth across the main area of the lawn, ensuring even coverage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hXfvF2eymUs 113 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11363-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U4oSWX8sKX4/hqdefault.jpg Calibrate the Fertilizer Spreader — Lawn Fertilization Before applying any fertilizer, it is crucial to calibrate your spreader. Locate the different setting options on your fertilizer spreader. The speaker recommends setting it to the biggest opening. The actual application rate (e.g., 2 kilograms or 3 kilograms per 100 square meters) will be specified on the fertilizer bag. You will then need to adjust your walking speed to ensure that you are spreading the correct amount of fertilizer as you move across the lawn. This process prevents over or under-fertilization. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U4oSWX8sKX4 49 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11364-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nHbUEqUE7kw/hqdefault.jpg Water the Lawn — Lawn Fertilization Once the entire lawn has been fertilized, lightly water the area using a sprinkler or a garden hose. This crucial step helps the fertilizer granules dissolve and begin to absorb into the soil, which not only promotes faster results but also helps prevent potential grass burn, especially if the weather is warm. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nHbUEqUE7kw 3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11364-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bePkzv0wU5c/hqdefault.jpg Water the Lawn After Fertilizing — Lawn Fertilization Immediately after applying the fertilizer, thoroughly water the lawn. The water helps dissolve the fertilizer pellets, acting as carriers, and transports the nutrients into the soil where they can be absorbed by the grass roots. Water for at least 10 minutes to ensure deep penetration. Watering is crucial to prevent the fertilizer from burning the grass, especially on warm days. While watering manually with a hose and sprayer works, using a sprinkler system is more efficient for large areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bePkzv0wU5c 49 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11364-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7Z26u0bEfTo/hqdefault.jpg Water the Lawn Thoroughly — Lawn Fertilization After spreading all the granular fertilizer, use a sprinkler to thoroughly water the entire lawn. Watering helps wash the fertilizer granules into the soil, where they can begin to release nutrients to the grass roots. Once the lawn has been watered in and the surface has dried, it will be safe for people and pets to walk on the grass again. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7Z26u0bEfTo 12 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11365-1 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4vKNnIZWtwM/hqdefault.jpg Post-Application Observation and Follow-Up — Lawn Fertilization After applying fertilizer, observe your lawn over the next few weeks. You should begin to see visible results, such as a greener and healthier lawn, within approximately one week. Most standard fertilizers are designed to release nutrients over a period of 4 to 6 weeks. Slow-release fertilizers, however, typically provide nutrients for a longer duration, lasting 6 to 8 weeks. If you believe a follow-up application is necessary, always consult your fertilizer's label for specific instructions and recommended intervals. For example, Solutions 15-5-10 fertilizer allows for follow-up applications 30 days after the initial treatment. Generally, the best times to fertilize are in early spring and early fall. Some homeowners choose to fertilize their lawns up to four times during each growing season, depending on their turf type, soil conditions, and the specific fertilizers they are using. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4vKNnIZWtwM 49 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11365-2 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4MxtBR4dJy4/hqdefault.jpg Post-Application Watering and Progress Check — Lawn Fertilization After applying all the products, continue deep watering the lawn as previously determined by the soil probe tests. Within two days of application and consistent deep watering, observe the lawn's progress. Areas previously affected by tip burn or drought stress should show significant improvement, with noticeable regrowth and a deeper green color. Pay particular attention to areas that naturally retain more moisture, like shaded spots, as these often show the fastest recovery and deepest green. Continue monitoring and adjusting watering schedules to maintain soil moisture and encourage deep root establishment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4MxtBR4dJy4 108 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11365-3 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7Z26u0bEfTo/hqdefault.jpg Observe Results and Plan Future Applications — Lawn Fertilization The video concludes by showing the positive results of the fertilization. You should begin to see noticeable improvements in your lawn, such as greener grass and reduced weeds, in as little as two weeks. After approximately eight weeks, it will be time to repeat the feeding process, this time using Scotts Turf Builder UltraFeed, to continue nourishing your lawn throughout the season. This two-part approach helps maintain a healthy and vibrant lawn long-term. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7Z26u0bEfTo 10 2026-10-16T14:23:44.038Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11357-1 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — L-shaped stair tread installation Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11357-2 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — L-shaped stair tread installation Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11357-3 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — L-shaped stair tread installation After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11356-1 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tABaf-op5a4/hqdefault.jpg Review Staircase Dimensions — L-shaped stair tread installation The video displays the specific dimensions for each segment of the staircase. It shows that the straight sections of stairs are 4'2" deep. The intermediate flat landing sections are 3'8" deep, and the top straight section connecting the two angled segments is 4'8" deep. The overall outer dimensions of the layout are provided as 5'9 7/8" for the side straight runs and 6'11 3/4" for the outer angled sections, with a total top width of 7'11 3/4". These measurements are crucial for precise planning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tABaf-op5a4 31 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11356-2 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tABaf-op5a4/hqdefault.jpg Layout First Straight and Angled Sections — L-shaped stair tread installation To begin the layout, start with the bottom straight section. Measure and mark the full depth of the straight tread section, which is 11 inches, and then add the 6 inches required for the narrowest part of the first winder tread. This defines the initial straight run. Next, draw a line at a 45-degree angle from the outer edge of this first winder tread measurement. This line will define the outer boundary of the first angled section of the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tABaf-op5a4 80 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11356-3 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Test-fit — L-shaped stair tread installation With the skirting boards removed, carefully measure the exact dimensions required for your winder step and winder step extensions. Place the winder step and extension pieces onto the landing area and mark any areas that need to be cut to achieve a precise fit, especially around corners or existing newel posts. The video shows using a measuring tape to determine the length needed and marking the pieces with a pencil. Make sure to test-fit each piece multiple times, adjusting cuts as needed, to ensure a snug and accurate placement around any obstacles, such as the newel post or wall edges, before proceeding to permanent installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 36 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11358-1 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Order Winder Steps and Extensions — L-shaped stair tread installation Begin by determining the necessary number of winder steps and winder step extensions for your landing area. To do this, measure the depth of your landing area from the back wall to the front edge. To this measurement, add 30 millimeters (approximately 1.2 inches) to account for the nosing, which is the slightly projecting edge of the new winder step. The front portion of the landing area will be covered by the winder step itself, while any remaining deeper sections behind it will require winder step extensions. For instance, in the video, a 600mm (approx. 23.6 inches) winder step and two winder step extensions are used for the staircase shown. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 30 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11358-2 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Test-fit — L-shaped stair tread installation With the skirting boards removed, carefully measure the exact dimensions required for your winder step and winder step extensions. Place the winder step and extension pieces onto the landing area and mark any areas that need to be cut to achieve a precise fit, especially around corners or existing newel posts. The video shows using a measuring tape to determine the length needed and marking the pieces with a pencil. Make sure to test-fit each piece multiple times, adjusting cuts as needed, to ensure a snug and accurate placement around any obstacles, such as the newel post or wall edges, before proceeding to permanent installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 36 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11358-3 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tABaf-op5a4/hqdefault.jpg Layout First Straight and Angled Sections — L-shaped stair tread installation To begin the layout, start with the bottom straight section. Measure and mark the full depth of the straight tread section, which is 11 inches, and then add the 6 inches required for the narrowest part of the first winder tread. This defines the initial straight run. Next, draw a line at a 45-degree angle from the outer edge of this first winder tread measurement. This line will define the outer boundary of the first angled section of the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tABaf-op5a4 80 2026-10-16T03:03:53.177Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11354-1 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Surface — Removable Stair Treads Although not explicitly demonstrated in the video, it is crucial to ensure the staircase is clean before installing the treads. Thoroughly clean each wooden stair surface to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris. This preparation ensures optimal adhesion of the non-slip backing, preventing the treads from shifting and maintaining a neat appearance. Use a vacuum cleaner for loose particles, followed by a damp cloth and a mild cleaner if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 2 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11354-2 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wSsFb5YVHag/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stair Surface — Removable Stair Treads Before applying the anti-slip strip, it is crucial to ensure the stair surface is clean, dry, and free of any dust, dirt, or grease. Use a cleaning cloth and a mild cleaner to thoroughly wipe down the area where the strip will be applied. Allow the surface to dry completely to ensure optimal adhesion of the self-adhesive strip. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wSsFb5YVHag 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11354-3 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Removable Stair Treads Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11352-1 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Removable Stair Treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11352-2 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Removable Stair Treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11352-3 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — Removable Stair Treads Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11355-1 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9OF3FBDsqcs/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads to Steps — Removable Stair Treads With the treads unpacked, carefully position one stair tread onto the surface of a stair. Ensure it is centered and aligned properly. Once placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive backing and secure it to the stair. Repeat this process for each step, ensuring consistent placement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9OF3FBDsqcs 1 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11355-2 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Removable Stair Treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11355-3 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Removable Stair Treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11353-1 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Dry the Stairs — Removable Stair Treads After cleaning, it is essential that your stairs are completely dry before proceeding with the installation of the anti-slip treads. This will prevent moisture from compromising the adhesive's bond. Allow ample time for air drying, or use a dry cloth to speed up the process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 6 2026-10-15T18:37:24.370Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11339-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GH6Kz2HaF6E/hqdefault.jpg Chemical Rust Dissolver Application — Rust Removal When working with chemical rust removers, always prioritize safety. These products often contain intense fumes, so ensure you suit up with rubber gloves, goggles, and a respirator to protect yourself. Alternatively, for a safer and gentler approach, you can use chemicals that dissolve rust more slowly. Products like Evapo-Rust are designed for soaking items to gradually dissolve rust. While they require more patience, they are effective. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GH6Kz2HaF6E 15 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11339-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DzXfT-J4cL8/hqdefault.jpg Chemical Rust Removal (Vinegar & Salt Soak) — Rust Removal For larger areas of rust, a vinegar and salt mixture can be an effective chemical method. First, clean and dry the tool. Then, place the tool in a container large enough to completely submerge the rusted metal parts. Pour in enough distilled white vinegar to cover the rusted areas, and sprinkle Morton coarse kosher salt over the surface. The recommended ratio is 1/4 cup of salt per 1 liter (approximately 4.2 cups) of vinegar. Allow the tool to soak for 1 to 3 days, checking periodically. Once the rust begins to soften, use sandpaper, steel wool, or a wire brush to scrub it off. Finally, wipe the tool clean and dry it thoroughly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DzXfT-J4cL8 46 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11339-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6NHznQzuJqA/hqdefault.jpg Remove Rust — Rust Removal The most critical step is to thoroughly remove all rust. The presenter strongly recommends using Evapo-Rust Super Safe Rust Remover. This product is water-soluble, pH-neutral, reusable, biodegradable, non-toxic, non-corrosive, free of acids, VOCs, or fumes, and safe on skin and eyes. It effectively removes rust down to bare metal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6NHznQzuJqA 27 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11340-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nODqdL5uk2k/hqdefault.jpg Thorough Cleaning and Degreasing — Rust Removal After all mechanical rust removal and sanding, thoroughly wipe down the entire metal block with a clean cloth to remove all dust, metal filings, and loose particles. This ensures a perfectly clean surface, free of contaminants, which is essential before applying any chemical treatments or protective coatings. A degreaser can be used to ensure the surface is free of oils and greases. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nODqdL5uk2k 8 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11340-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/iS8Cke3CLC4/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Coat of Rust Remover to Saw Blade — Rust Removal Don safety glasses and protective gloves. Pour a small amount of the phosphoric acid-based rust remover (like SKJ Ospho) into a plastic container. Using a paint brush, apply an even coat of the rust remover to the heavily rusted surface of the metal item, ensuring good coverage. The product is thin, like water, and begins to loosen the rust upon application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/iS8Cke3CLC4 37 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11340-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VXv-HYJTqEg/hqdefault.jpg Wipe and Dry Tools — Rust Removal Once all the rust has been removed, use a clean cloth to thoroughly wipe down the entire surface of the tool. Ensure all residues from the rust remover and any lingering rust particles are completely removed. Dry the tool completely, as any moisture can lead to rapid re-rusting. A completely clean and dry surface will help maintain the tool's improved condition. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VXv-HYJTqEg 7 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11341-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DzXfT-J4cL8/hqdefault.jpg Mechanical Rust Removal — Rust Removal For minor rust removal, mechanical methods are suitable. Begin by using coarse-grit sandpaper to abrade the rusty areas on your tools, such as pruning shears. Follow up with finer-grit sandpaper for a smoother finish. If rust persists, use steel wool or a stiff wire brush to scrub the affected areas. For heavier rust, a hand drill with a steel brush attachment can be used. Secure the tool, don safety glasses and gloves, and apply the spinning brush to the rust until it's removed. Afterward, wipe the tool clean with a paper towel or rag. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DzXfT-J4cL8 43 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11341-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GH6Kz2HaF6E/hqdefault.jpg Mechanical Rust and Paint Removal — Rust Removal If you prefer not to use chemicals or need to remove old paint along with the rust, use power tools for mechanical abrasion. For large, flat areas, employ a grinder with flap discs, fiber discs, or sanders. For seams, corners, and rounded areas, switch to a drill with wire wheels. For rusted metal corners, tight spots, and small details, a detail sander is recommended. Drill-mounted wire wheels and stripping discs can also be used as rust removers instead of grinders. Finishing and random-orbit sanders are useful for rust removal on flatter surfaces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GH6Kz2HaF6E 35 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11341-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nODqdL5uk2k/hqdefault.jpg Aggressive Rust Removal with Wire Wheel — Rust Removal Utilize an angle grinder fitted with a coarse wire wheel attachment to aggressively strip away the remaining heavy rust from the broad, flat surfaces and accessible edges of the metal block. Apply moderate pressure, allowing the wire wheel to abrade the rust effectively, revealing the underlying metal. Ensure consistent movement to avoid gouging the surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nODqdL5uk2k 25 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11342-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VXv-HYJTqEg/hqdefault.jpg Soak Tools in Rust Remover — Rust Removal Begin by pouring WD-40 Specialist Rust Remover Soak into a tray. Place the rusted metal tool, such as an adjustable wrench, into the tray, ensuring it is completely covered and submerged by the rust remover solution. Allow the tool to soak for a minimum of one hour. For tools with heavy or stubborn rust, extend the soaking time as needed to allow the solution to effectively dissolve the rust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VXv-HYJTqEg 4 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11342-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GH6Kz2HaF6E/hqdefault.jpg Chemical Rust Dissolver Application — Rust Removal When working with chemical rust removers, always prioritize safety. These products often contain intense fumes, so ensure you suit up with rubber gloves, goggles, and a respirator to protect yourself. Alternatively, for a safer and gentler approach, you can use chemicals that dissolve rust more slowly. Products like Evapo-Rust are designed for soaking items to gradually dissolve rust. While they require more patience, they are effective. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GH6Kz2HaF6E 15 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11342-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/iS8Cke3CLC4/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Coat of Rust Remover to Saw Blade — Rust Removal Don safety glasses and protective gloves. Pour a small amount of the phosphoric acid-based rust remover (like SKJ Ospho) into a plastic container. Using a paint brush, apply an even coat of the rust remover to the heavily rusted surface of the metal item, ensuring good coverage. The product is thin, like water, and begins to loosen the rust upon application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/iS8Cke3CLC4 37 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11343-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KuR98efywqQ/hqdefault.jpg Perform Electrolytic Rust Removal — Rust Removal The disassembled large metal components are prepared for electrolytic rust removal. This involves setting up a glass tank, filling it with water, and adding washing soda to create an electrolyte solution. A sacrificial anode (a separate piece of iron/steel or rebar) is suspended in the solution, connected to the positive terminal of a DC power supply. The rusted parts are then submerged in the solution, connected to the negative terminal. The electrolysis process runs for approximately 6 hours, converting the rust into a black, easily removable residue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KuR98efywqQ 57 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11343-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TE9XiVbWumQ/hqdefault.jpg Electrolysis Rust Removal Setup — Rust Removal Create an electrolysis solution by mixing Arm & Hammer Super Washing Soda with water in a jar and stirring. Insert a sacrificial steel rod (anode) and connect the positive (red) lead of a battery charger to it. Suspend the rusty spring (cathode) in the solution using a popsicle stick and connect the negative (black) lead to the spring. Ensure the anode and cathode do not touch. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TE9XiVbWumQ 40 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11343-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oZOQgAS0cbc/hqdefault.jpg Perform Electrolysis — Rust Removal Once the circuit is correctly set up, plug in and turn on the DC power supply. You should observe bubbles forming on both the rusty object (cathode) and the sacrificial anode, indicating the start of the electrochemical reaction. Over time, the electrolyte solution will likely become discolored, turning murky yellow or brown, as rust is removed from the object and either dissolves or forms sludge, and particles may accumulate on the anode. The process can take anywhere from a few hours to a day or more, depending on the size of the object and the severity of the rust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oZOQgAS0cbc 3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11344-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WGnI09nbSMA/hqdefault.jpg Rinse, Dry, and Apply Protection — Rust Removal Upon completing the scrubbing, thoroughly rinse the tool with clean, fresh water to remove all traces of oxalic acid and any remaining loosened rust particles. It is highly recommended to neutralize any residual acid by briefly dipping the tool in a mild solution of baking soda and water (approximately 1 tablespoon of baking soda per liter of water), followed by a final rinse with clean water. This step helps prevent any lingering acid from continuing to react with the metal. Immediately and completely dry the tool using clean, lint-free cloths, paper towels, or compressed air to prevent 'flash rust' from forming almost instantly on the freshly exposed metal. Finally, apply a protective coating such as mineral oil, camellia oil, or a specialized rust-inhibiting wax to shield the cleaned metal from moisture and oxygen, which are the primary causes of re-rusting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WGnI09nbSMA 1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11344-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m8_STIIF_x0/hqdefault.jpg Dry the Metal Surfaces — Rust Removal Once the rinsing is complete, it's essential to dry the metal surfaces completely. The narrator advises using common household paper towels, folded to act as rags, to wipe away all the water from the treated areas. This prevents new rust from forming due to moisture and prepares the surface for subsequent steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m8_STIIF_x0 29 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11344-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oZOQgAS0cbc/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Derusted Object — Rust Removal Immediately after removal, spray the derusted metal object with clean water to rinse off the dark residue. While spraying, use a stiff brush to scrub away any remaining black film or loose particles from the surface. The action of the water and brushing will reveal the clean, bare metal underneath. Continue rinsing and scrubbing until the object is visibly clean and free of any residue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oZOQgAS0cbc 3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11345-1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GH6Kz2HaF6E/hqdefault.jpg Apply Rust-Inhibiting Paint and Topcoat — Rust Removal To further prevent rust and ensure durability, apply a rust-inhibiting paint followed by a clear topcoat. After applying your desired color coat, allow it to dry completely according to manufacturer instructions. Once dry, spray on a clear topcoat. This final layer will protect the color coat, enhance its longevity, and provide an additional barrier against moisture and rust formation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GH6Kz2HaF6E 18 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11345-2 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vX9ioSDESzA/hqdefault.jpg Apply Protective Clear Coat — Rust Removal Once the tools are completely dry after 24 hours, arrange them in a cardboard box, ensuring they are not touching each other, to prepare for spray painting. Apply a Rust-Oleum Ultra Cover Satin Clear Spray over all the tools. Apply in light, even coats to avoid drips and ensure complete coverage. This clear coat will provide a protective barrier against future rust and maintain the etched appearance of the metal. Allow sufficient drying time between coats and for the final coat to cure according to the product instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vX9ioSDESzA 23 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11345-3 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FpzNXcoAv9Q/hqdefault.jpg Apply Protective Coating/Paint — Rust Removal After the anti-rust agent has been properly applied and allowed to cure (as per manufacturer's instructions, though not explicitly shown in the video), a new white protective coating or paint is applied. This is demonstrated on a larger, flat metallic bar using a small paint roller. The roller ensures efficient and smooth coverage, transforming the previously rusted brown surface into a uniform, clean, and new-looking white finish. This step is highlighted as a way to avoid the expense of professional polishing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FpzNXcoAv9Q 1 2026-10-15T14:30:14.173Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11332-1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Stair Tread Installation Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11332-2 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — Stair Tread Installation After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11332-3 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11337-1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11337-2 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Stair Tread Installation Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11337-3 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Install the First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Carefully peel off the protective backing from the adhesive side of the first stair tread. Align the tread precisely with the marks or template created in the previous step. Once aligned, firmly press the tread onto the stair surface, starting from one edge and working your way across, to ensure the adhesive makes full contact and eliminate any air bubbles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 8 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11335-1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Cut Treads to Size — Stair Tread Installation Once measurements are taken and marked on the stair treads, use a miter saw to precisely cut them to the required width and depth. Ensure that the cuts are straight and clean for a professional finish. If the treads have a carpeted or fabric surface, you may need a sharp utility knife to score or cut through that material first, or ensure your saw blade is specifically designed for such materials to cut cleanly without fraying. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11335-2 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Each stair in a staircase is often slightly different in length, so it's crucial to measure and cut each new tread individually. Place an old, removed stair tread side-by-side with a new, uncut tread. Use the old tread as a template to mark the exact length needed on the new tread with a pencil. The presenter uses a circular saw for cutting; a table saw is another suitable option. When operating the circular saw, ensure both hands are firmly on the tool and your feet are well out of the way to prevent accidents, as this is a common point of injury. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 57 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11335-3 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11336-1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Dry-Fit Laminate Pieces to Each Tread — Stair Tread Installation Prior to applying any adhesive, carefully place all the freshly cut laminate pieces, including both the nosing and the main tread pieces, onto their respective stair tread. This 'dry-fit' allows you to ensure that all pieces fit perfectly. Visually inspect for tight seams, check for flush edges against the wall, and confirm proper alignment with the nosing. Make any necessary minor adjustments to the cuts at this stage before final installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 12 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11336-2 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — Stair Tread Installation Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11336-3 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11334-1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Stair Tread Installation To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11334-2 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Cut Your Treads — Stair Tread Installation With the nosing removed, prepare the replacement treads for installation. Begin by measuring each tread individually using a tape measure, as stairway widths can vary from one step to the next. Mark the length that needs to be cut off using a sharpie or pencil. If the tread is a double return tread, you will not need to make any further cuts as it has been manufactured to your provided dimensions. As a pro tip, use a piece of scrap wood to push the tread out at the return area. This allows you to properly scribe the skirt before cutting, which will help give you an exact fit and cut for your tread. Use a miter saw to make the necessary cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 35 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11334-3 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Installation Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11333-1 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZrWNkbh5j4M/hqdefault.jpg Position Carpet Treads — Stair Tread Installation It is crucial to properly position each carpet tread on the hardwood stair for both safety and aesthetics. Ensure a gap of approximately 0.5 to 1 inch is left between the front edge of the carpet tread and the bullnose (the protruding front edge) of the stair. This gap is vital to prevent any tripping hazards when ascending or descending the stairs. For consistent alignment and ease of installation, butt the back edge of the carpet tread flush against the riser (the vertical part of the stair). https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZrWNkbh5j4M 37 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11333-2 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Stair Tread Installation To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11333-3 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Tread Installation Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-15T13:04:51.847Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11325-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xz34cA5dUeQ/hqdefault.jpg Ground-Level Visual Inspection for Obvious Damage — Roof Inspection From a safe ground-level position, conduct a visual scan of the entire roof surface. Look for any areas that appear distinctly different in color or texture. Pay close attention to inconsistencies across the shingle layout. The video specifically points out lighter-colored areas on the roof, which are often indicators of significant wear or missing material. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xz34cA5dUeQ 10 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11325-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nt39D3c2-p4/hqdefault.jpg Initial Visual Roof Inspection — Roof Inspection Begin by assessing the general condition of the roof from your safe vantage point. Look for missing or broken shingles and tiles, and check for excessive wear at the corners and peaks of the roof. Pay close attention to the flashing around chimneys and roof vents, ensuring they are intact and properly sealed, typically with roofing tar. Rotting fascia board on the exterior of the house can indicate water damage from improper roof drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nt39D3c2-p4 41 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11325-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJRMVIDNJGE/hqdefault.jpg Perform Initial Visual Inspection for Shingle and Granule Damage — Roof Inspection After a severe storm, conduct a visual inspection of your home's exterior from the ground. Walk around your home and carefully look for any shingles that are missing, lifted, or appear out of place. Also, check your splash blocks (the plastic or concrete pieces that divert water from downspouts) for an accumulation of granules, which are small, abrasive particles that protect asphalt shingles from the elements. A significant amount of granules can indicate shingle damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJRMVIDNJGE 33 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11326-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uhaO2uyVWdU/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Gutters and Downspouts — Roof Inspection From the ladder or a safe, clear portion of the roof, inspect the gutters and downspouts. Look for indications of leaf material, debris, or other blockages. The presence of sticks or leaves sticking out is a clear sign that the gutters need to be cleaned. Also, observe any ice formation, especially large ice dams or icicles coming from behind the gutters, which can indicate poor drainage or insulation issues. Document these observations with photos. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uhaO2uyVWdU 28 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11326-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kB-Z2_GuM7k/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Gutter Outlets and Downspouts — Roof Inspection Proceed to inspect the gutter outlets and the attached downspouts for additional signs of wear and damage. Look specifically for rust at the gutter outlets, as these areas are prone to corrosion due to constant water exposure. Extend the inspection to the square downspouts, checking for any leaks. The video highlights how all outlets are rusted out and that the square downspouts are actively leaking, with visible water streaming down the side of the house. Identify any water streaks or discoloration on the siding below the downspouts, which could indicate past or ongoing leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kB-Z2_GuM7k 15 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11326-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_Ug575_4riU/hqdefault.jpg Clean Gutters and Downspouts — Roof Inspection Ensure your gutters and downspouts are clear of leaves, toys, or any other debris. Clogged gutters can cause water to overflow and damage your home's foundation, siding, or roof. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_Ug575_4riU 19 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11327-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wgkEFfuPoIw/hqdefault.jpg Perform a Thorough Roof Inspection — Roof Inspection Once safely on the roof, conduct a thorough visual and tactile inspection to identify any existing or potential damage. This involves checking for 'nail pops' where nails have lifted through the shingles, signs of previous or current wind damage such as missing or uplifted shingles, and the condition of the gutters (looking for fullness or sagging). Critically, inspect the chimney for any structural issues like loose or crumbling bricks and mortar, as these can be significant sources of leaks even if unrelated to the roofing material itself. Document all findings to clearly communicate issues to the homeowner. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wgkEFfuPoIw 71 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11327-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HrdVa12EHas/hqdefault.jpg Overall Roof Condition Assessment — Roof Inspection Walk along the roof ridges and visually scan the entire roof surface to get an overall sense of its condition. Look for obvious signs of aging, such as widespread granule loss, curled or cracked shingles, and any missing shingles. This initial scan helps prioritize areas for closer inspection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HrdVa12EHas 20 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11327-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0TTkxuloZWY/hqdefault.jpg Assess Asphalt Shingle Condition — Roof Inspection Walk across the roof, carefully inspecting the asphalt shingles. Look for signs of wear, such as shingles that appear 'shiny' indicating exposed fiberglass where granules have worn off. Note any areas with excessive granule loss, which often accumulates in gutters. Check for cracked, curled, buckled, or missing shingles. Pay particular attention to the north-facing side of the roof, as it tends to show wear (and hail damage, if any) more prominently due to less sun exposure and slower drying. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0TTkxuloZWY 35 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11328-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0TTkxuloZWY/hqdefault.jpg Assess Asphalt Shingle Condition — Roof Inspection Walk across the roof, carefully inspecting the asphalt shingles. Look for signs of wear, such as shingles that appear 'shiny' indicating exposed fiberglass where granules have worn off. Note any areas with excessive granule loss, which often accumulates in gutters. Check for cracked, curled, buckled, or missing shingles. Pay particular attention to the north-facing side of the roof, as it tends to show wear (and hail damage, if any) more prominently due to less sun exposure and slower drying. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0TTkxuloZWY 35 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11328-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I-sLCkrgSfY/hqdefault.jpg Detailed Shingle and Flashing Inspection — Roof Inspection Perform a detailed inspection of the roof shingles for any signs of wear, such as granule loss. Examine the flashings at the ridge line for exposed nails, ensuring they are properly set and sealed. Continue to inspect other roof penetrations, including HVAC vents and skylights, checking their flashings for exposed nails, gaps, and cracks. For any issues identified, such as popping nails or large gaps in flashing, recommend evaluation and repair by a qualified roofer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I-sLCkrgSfY 99 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11328-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xz34cA5dUeQ/hqdefault.jpg Examine for Missing Shingle Tabs and Granular Loss — Roof Inspection Focus on the light-colored areas identified during the initial scan. These typically indicate where the protective granular surface of the asphalt shingles has worn away or where entire shingle tabs have detached. The video shows several such areas, highlighting the exposure of the underlying felt or asphalt, which compromises the roof's waterproofing capabilities. Also, look for actual pieces of shingles or granules that have fallen off and are visible on the ground, in gutters, or on nearby branches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xz34cA5dUeQ 10 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11329-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I5nOQEX2xrM/hqdefault.jpg Check for Ridge Vents — Roof Inspection Now, shift your focus to the ridge lines of your roof, especially on smaller, isolated roof sections that might cover small attic areas. The video highlights a critical issue: the absence of an upper ridge vent on such a section. Ridge vents are the exhaust component of an attic ventilation system, allowing hot, moist air to escape. Without them, even with functional soffit vents (intake), air circulation is severely restricted, trapping heat and moisture in the attic. Look for continuous ridge vents along the highest points of the roof; if absent on a sloped roof section, it's a significant concern. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I5nOQEX2xrM 12 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11329-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qpV_S00zIFk/hqdefault.jpg Assess Ridge Vent and Prepare for Repair — Roof Inspection Begin by assessing the ridge vent to identify the problem. The presenter notes a visible gap caused by a backward-installed Owens Corning Deckow Ridge vent. The correct installation requires the 'factory edge' (a solid, sealed side) to face downwards to prevent insects from entering. This method can also be applied for replacing missing ridge cap shingles. Before starting work, ensure all necessary tools and safety equipment are gathered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qpV_S00zIFk 38 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11329-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I-sLCkrgSfY/hqdefault.jpg Detailed Shingle and Flashing Inspection — Roof Inspection Perform a detailed inspection of the roof shingles for any signs of wear, such as granule loss. Examine the flashings at the ridge line for exposed nails, ensuring they are properly set and sealed. Continue to inspect other roof penetrations, including HVAC vents and skylights, checking their flashings for exposed nails, gaps, and cracks. For any issues identified, such as popping nails or large gaps in flashing, recommend evaluation and repair by a qualified roofer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I-sLCkrgSfY 99 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11330-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jtbCZcmhajw/hqdefault.jpg Evaluate Flashing Condition — Roof Inspection Carefully check the condition of the flashing around key roof penetrations, such as chimneys and roof vents (leading out of the attic). The video shows various examples of flashing around chimneys and green/brown vent pipes. Ensure that these flashing components appear to be in good condition, without cracks, tears, or signs of deterioration. In most cases, these areas should be adequately sealed with roofing tar. However, some metal flashing designs are sufficient on their own and may not require additional tar, as shown with a perfectly sealed brown metal flashing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jtbCZcmhajw 16 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11330-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Qw-qIFfLKEg/hqdefault.jpg Examine Roof Flashing and Penetrations — Roof Inspection Inspect all flashing points on the roof, as these are critical areas for preventing leaks. Examine the flashing around the chimney, pipe vents, and in roof valleys. Look for signs of inadequate or old flashing, such as thin, mill-finished flashing that has been improperly bent or installed. Ensure the flashing is correctly integrated behind siding or under shingles, rather than just being face-nailed. For pipe boots, check for cheap plastic materials and that shingles are properly cut and extend around the boot, with no nails placed in areas where water will run off. Confirm that the flashing is not just shingle pieces thrown in without proper sealing, which allows water to penetrate underneath. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Qw-qIFfLKEg 198 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11330-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NB45alz-QMw/hqdefault.jpg Chimney & Wall Flashing Inspection — Roof Inspection Focus on the intersection where the roof meets any vertical walls, such as siding or a chimney. Inspect the existing counter flashing and step flashing for proper integration with both the roof shingles and the vertical surface. Look for any visible gaps, unsealed channels, or areas where the flashing is not adequately directing water away from the wall. Pay close attention to the base of the chimney where it meets the roofline, as this is a common area for leaks. The inspector notes gaps in the counter flashing where water could run directly into the structure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NB45alz-QMw 80 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11331-1 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wgkEFfuPoIw/hqdefault.jpg Document Findings with Photos and Videos — Roof Inspection Capture comprehensive photographic and video evidence of all identified damage and critical areas observed during the roof inspection, including the overall roof condition, gutters, and chimney. It is highly recommended to record a video while verbally stating the property address, town, and the current date and time. This timestamped documentation serves as a robust record, ensuring transparency with the client and protecting the contractor from potential disputes or claims of fabricated damage, which can sometimes be encountered with less reputable roofers. This detailed visual evidence is also invaluable for internal production planning and job scheduling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wgkEFfuPoIw 29 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11331-2 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9YDrWHJbhO4/hqdefault.jpg Document Findings and Seek Professional Advice — Roof Inspection Once you have identified and marked all potential hail damage spots, take clear and well-lit photographs of each marked area. These photographs will be crucial for documenting the damage. If you have found significant damage or if an insurance company previously denied your claim despite evidence, consider contacting a professional roofing contractor. They can provide a second, expert opinion, confirm the extent of the damage, and assist with the insurance claim process, including sending documented photos to your insurance company. This is especially important if neighboring roofs were approved for damage, as it suggests your area was impacted. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9YDrWHJbhO4 120 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11331-3 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HrdVa12EHas/hqdefault.jpg Document Damage and Accessories — Roof Inspection After identifying all areas of damage and noting all roof accessories, systematically document the findings. Use chalk to clearly label each side of the roof (East, North, South, West). For each side, count and write down the number of wind-damaged shingles. Additionally, count and list all accessories, such as plumbing boots (PB), HVAC stacks (HVAC), satellite dishes (DISH), and power vents (PV). This detailed marking and counting provide a clear visual record and accurate numbers for an estimate. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HrdVa12EHas 138 2026-10-14T14:21:42.424Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11317-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Installation Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11317-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Installation With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11317-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Stair Tread Installation Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11321-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Dry Fit Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Installation Once the stair tread and nosing pieces are cut, bring them back to the stairs for a dry fit. Place them into their final positions without adhesive to ensure all cuts are perfect and the pieces fit snugly against the riser and along the stair's edges. Make any necessary micro-adjustments at this stage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 6 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11321-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Dry-Fit Laminate Pieces to Each Tread — Stair Tread Installation Prior to applying any adhesive, carefully place all the freshly cut laminate pieces, including both the nosing and the main tread pieces, onto their respective stair tread. This 'dry-fit' allows you to ensure that all pieces fit perfectly. Visually inspect for tight seams, check for flush edges against the wall, and confirm proper alignment with the nosing. Make any necessary minor adjustments to the cuts at this stage before final installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 12 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11321-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit and Adjust Treads — Stair Tread Installation Once a new stair tread has been cut, take it inside and test its fit on the corresponding stair. Place it gently into position to check for proper length and alignment. The presenter found that some of her cuts, made conservatively, were still slightly too long. If a tread doesn't fit perfectly, take it back to your cutting area and trim off just a tiny bit more to achieve a snug fit, then re-test. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 21 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11324-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ztC3KfZEjO0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Construction Adhesive — Stair Tread Installation Before installing the newly cut tread, a generous bead of construction adhesive is applied to the horizontal wood supports (ledgers) within the stair frame where the tread will rest. This adhesive (a caulk gun loaded with a tube of adhesive is shown) serves two primary purposes: to firmly bond the tread to the frame and to prevent future squeaks that can arise from wood-on-wood friction as the stairs are used. The adhesive is applied to all contact points, including the vertical stringer/riser faces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ztC3KfZEjO0 14 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11324-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4fML3-Qwo_c/hqdefault.jpg Apply Wood Flooring Adhesive — Stair Tread Installation Before installing each piece, generously apply a specialized wood flooring adhesive, such as Bostik's Best, to the clean stair subfloor. Use a notched trowel to spread the adhesive evenly across the surface. The notched trowel creates ridges that ensure adequate adhesive transfer and proper bonding when the wood is laid. Apply enough adhesive to cover the entire area where the new wood tread or riser will sit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4fML3-Qwo_c 3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11324-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Apply Construction Adhesive to Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Once you have confirmed that all laminate pieces fit perfectly during the dry-fit, remove them from the stair tread. Then, using a caulk gun, apply a generous amount of construction adhesive to the entire surface of the existing stair tread. Distribute the adhesive in a wavy or serpentine pattern to ensure good coverage. Pay particular attention to the edges and the area where the nosing will sit, as these areas require a strong bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 10 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11323-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Test Fit and Adjust Treads — Stair Tread Installation Once a new stair tread has been cut, take it inside and test its fit on the corresponding stair. Place it gently into position to check for proper length and alignment. The presenter found that some of her cuts, made conservatively, were still slightly too long. If a tread doesn't fit perfectly, take it back to your cutting area and trim off just a tiny bit more to achieve a snug fit, then re-test. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 21 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11323-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — Stair Tread Installation Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11323-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Dry Fit Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Installation Once the stair tread and nosing pieces are cut, bring them back to the stairs for a dry fit. Place them into their final positions without adhesive to ensure all cuts are perfect and the pieces fit snugly against the riser and along the stair's edges. Make any necessary micro-adjustments at this stage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 6 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11319-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Treads with Screws — Stair Tread Installation Once the adhesive is applied, place the new tread onto the stringers, pushing it down firmly into the bead of adhesive. Ensure there is a small 1/8-inch gap between the new tread and any adjacent boards for proper expansion and drainage. For fasteners, always use screws rather than nails, as they provide a much tighter and more durable hold. Specifically, use 2.5-inch exterior-grade screws. Using a Hitachi drill, pre-drill pilot holes with an 1/8-inch bit, carefully lining them up with the center of the stringer to prevent splitting the wood. Then, use a DeWalt impact driver to drive the screws in, countersinking the head slightly so it's flush or just below the surface of the tread. For the front edge of the board, where the stringer's wood grain might be weak or 'sketchy,' it is often better to put a screw down into the riser below instead of directly into the stringer end. Line it up by eye, pre-drill with the 1/8-inch bit, and then drive the screw in with the impact driver, countersinking it as before. Repeat this fastening process for each stringer contact point and for the front edge of each new tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 51 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11319-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ztC3KfZEjO0/hqdefault.jpg Secure Tread with Fasteners — Stair Tread Installation With the tread firmly seated on the adhesive, a pneumatic nail gun (Paslode brand is shown) is used to fasten the tread permanently. Nails are driven through the front edge of the tread into the underlying ledger/riser structure. Additionally, nails (or screws, as mentioned by the presenter) are installed from the back of the riser into the back edge of the tread to create a robust and squeak-free connection. This dual fastening method ensures maximum stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ztC3KfZEjO0 14 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11319-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation To permanently secure the new stair treads, first apply an adhesive like liquid nails to the stair stringers (the support beams) where the tread will rest. Use a caulk gun to apply an even bead of the adhesive. Then, carefully place the new tread onto the stringers, ensuring it is flush and properly aligned. Finally, use a nail gun to fasten the tread securely by driving nails into the sides of the stair structure, typically into the stringers and risers, creating a strong bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 109 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11322-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Create Custom Tread Templates — Stair Tread Installation New stair treads typically come as 1x12 red oak boards, ¾ inch thick and 11 ½ inches wide. Since these might be too wide, they need to be cut down from the back to maintain the pre-formed nosing on the front. Because the space between the skirt boards may not be perfectly square or parallel, a custom template is required for each tread. Begin by taking an old, cut-down tread that fits loosely in the opening and placing a piece of paper (or cardboard) on top. Mark a reference line on the riser. Then, use a small combination square or a piece of straight metal/wood as a guide to trace the contours of the skirt board onto the paper, keeping the guide tight against the skirt board. Slide the guide along the length of the paper, making continuous pencil lines at each end and several points in between, ensuring the lines are not bridged by any dips in the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 194 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11322-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for Second Winder Step — Stair Tread Installation Repeat the templating process for the next winder step using a fresh piece of kraft paper. This involves aligning the paper, securing it with staples, folding it around the nosing and side edges, and cutting it to the exact shape of the step. As with the previous template, mark the runner's width, center line, and straight edges. Crucially, ensure that the measurements (e.g., 28 inches wide) for the runner remain consistent across all winder steps to maintain a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 64 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11322-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hwZQcHGafM0/hqdefault.jpg Mark Tread Dimensions for Curved Sections — Stair Tread Installation After placing the pre-cut nosing in position, the installer makes new marks along the edges where the tread will meet the wall and the nosing. He uses a measuring tape to measure the dimensions, such as 5 inches on one side and 10 and 5/8 inches on the other, for the long board. To ensure a straight cut line between these two points, he applies diagonal tape and then marks the line with a pencil using a beam level as a guide. This method helps account for any irregularities in the wall or the staircase itself. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hwZQcHGafM0 269 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11320-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mjZqhxztKJ8/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Cleanup — Stair Tread Installation After the adhesive has fully cured and all wooden coverings are securely in place, carefully remove all temporary weights from the stair treads and landing panels. Inspect the entire staircase for any loose areas, gaps, or imperfections. Clean up any sawdust, adhesive residue, or debris, using a broom or vacuum cleaner, to reveal the finished wooden staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mjZqhxztKJ8 5 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11320-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Repair and Clean Up — Stair Tread Installation After all the new treads are installed, inspect the surrounding painted surfaces (like stringers and risers) for any scrapes or damage that occurred during the installation. Use spackle, such as DAP Fast Dry Premium Spackling, to fill any small holes or imperfections. Once dry, sand smooth, re-paint the repaired areas, and thoroughly clean the newly installed treads to remove any dust or debris. This completes the renovation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 17 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11320-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2rkFnsTztog/hqdefault.jpg Caulk and Finish Seams — Stair Tread Installation Once the adhesive has fully cured, remove all blue painter's tape. Apply a small bead of caulk to any visible seams between the riser and the tread, and along the side stringers if needed. Spray the freshly applied caulk lightly with a mixture of water and denatured alcohol (or soapy water). This prevents the caulk from sticking to surfaces you don't want it to. Smooth the caulk with your finger, then immediately wipe away any excess with a damp rag for a clean finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2rkFnsTztog 54 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11318-1 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Stair Tread Installation Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11318-2 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11318-3 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Starting from the top of the staircase, the homeowner carefully installs each stair tread. She begins by peeling off the protective plastic film from the adhesive backing. The tread is then aligned precisely with the previously marked tape lines, ensuring the back edge is flush with the riser. Once aligned, she firmly presses the tread onto the step, making sure it adheres well, especially over the bullnose (the rounded edge of the step). This process is repeated for each individual stair tread and for the larger custom pieces on the landings. The homeowner notes that the adhesive is designed not to damage the existing hardwood stairs, making it a suitable option for temporary or non-permanent installations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 17 2026-10-13T22:49:10.005Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11311-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ALmNoUoPh1I/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Safety Gear and Chainsaw — Tree Removal Before any cutting begins, put on all necessary personal protective equipment (PPE). This includes a hard hat with integrated ear protection and a face shield, an orange high-visibility jacket with reflective strips (Husqvarna brand visible), chainsaw protective pants (chaps), and sturdy boots. Once geared up, start the chainsaw (Stihl brand) and allow it to warm up. This ensures the chainsaw is operating correctly and safely before making any cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ALmNoUoPh1I 14 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11311-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rEgqBClTotQ/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Start Chainsaw — Tree Removal Begin by ensuring you are wearing all necessary personal protective equipment (PPE), which includes a hard hat with integrated ear protection and a face shield, safety glasses, a high-visibility shirt for visibility, chainsaw protective pants (chaps) to protect your legs, and heavy-duty gloves for hand protection and grip. Once fully geared up, start your chainsaw and perform a quick check to ensure it is in good working order. Crucially, before making any cuts, take time to assess the tree's natural lean, identify any nearby obstacles (like power lines or structures), determine the safest felling direction, and plan and clear a clear escape route away from the tree's anticipated fall path. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rEgqBClTotQ 5 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11311-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aiICx5ecVKw/hqdefault.jpg Wear Essential Safety Gear — Tree Removal Before beginning any chainsaw work, ensure you are wearing absolutely essential safety gear. This includes a safety helmet with a face shield, hearing protection, safety gloves, chainsaw chaps (or protective trousers), and sturdy work boots. This gear protects against flying debris, noise damage, cuts, and falling objects, which are common hazards in tree cutting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aiICx5ecVKw 7 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11312-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/USDA_7uLocs/hqdefault.jpg Create the Directional Notch — Tree Removal Determine the desired direction of fall for the tree. On that side, create a directional notch (also known as a felling notch or face cut). This involves two cuts: an angled top cut extending about 1/3 to 1/4 of the way into the tree's diameter, followed by a horizontal bottom cut that meets the end of the top cut precisely. This removes a wedge of wood. The video shows the operator using a chainsaw (Stihl) to make these precise cuts, ensuring the notch faces the intended direction of fall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/USDA_7uLocs 69 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11312-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6ZlEA7JyD7E/hqdefault.jpg Execute Directional Notch Cut — Tree Removal Using a chainsaw, create the directional notch (also known as a face cut or hinge cut) on the side of the tree that faces the intended felling direction, as indicated by the red target and green line in the video. This notch typically consists of two cuts: a horizontal cut made first, followed by an angled cut that meets the horizontal cut, removing a wedge of wood. The depth of this notch should be approximately one-fifth to one-third of the tree's diameter. The integrity and precision of this notch are crucial for controlling the tree's fall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6ZlEA7JyD7E 2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11312-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U7VNizokMew/hqdefault.jpg Create Directional Notch — Tree Removal The first step is to create a directional notch on the side of the tree where you want it to fall. Using a chainsaw, make a horizontal cut roughly one-third to one-half of the way into the tree trunk. Then, make a second angled cut from above, meeting the horizontal cut to remove a wedge-shaped piece of wood. This notch acts as a hinge and dictates the tree's fall direction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U7VNizokMew 14 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11313-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QEQaVSFdSzY/hqdefault.jpg Perform the Back Cut — Tree Removal After completing the directional notch, the operator begins the back cut on the opposite side of the tree trunk. This cut is made horizontally, slightly above the level of the notch's base, and is typically not cut completely through the tree. The intention is to leave a 'hinge' of wood between the back cut and the notch, which acts as a pivot point for the tree's fall. The operator makes several passes, checking the stability of the tree. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QEQaVSFdSzY 55 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11313-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ALmNoUoPh1I/hqdefault.jpg Perform the Back Cut and Create the Hinge — Tree Removal Move to the opposite side of the tree from the felling notch. Make a back cut, starting slightly higher than the horizontal cut of the felling notch, and cutting towards the notch. Do not cut completely through the tree. Leave a 'hinge' of uncut wood between the back cut and the felling notch. This hinge is crucial; it acts as a pivot, guiding the tree's fall and preventing it from kicking back or splitting. The width and integrity of this hinge are vital for controlled felling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ALmNoUoPh1I 57 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11313-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QIK6s92KKUw/hqdefault.jpg Make the Back Cut — Tree Removal Move to the opposite side of the tree from the directional notch. Make a horizontal back cut (also known as the felling cut) about 1 to 2 inches above the horizontal cut of the directional notch. This offset helps create a stronger hinge. Cut towards the notch, but do not cut all the way through; stop about 10% of the tree's diameter before reaching the notch. Leave a hinge of wood between the back cut and the notch. This hinge is crucial for controlling the tree's fall and preventing it from splitting prematurely or falling backward. The video shows the operator performing this cut carefully. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QIK6s92KKUw 6 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11314-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JycC5cMvgu8/hqdefault.jpg Monitor Tree Fall and Clear — Tree Removal Once the back cut is complete and the tree begins to fall, immediately step back along your planned escape route. Observe the tree's path until it safely reaches the ground. After the tree has fallen, ensure the area is clear and safe before approaching the downed tree. The video shows the tree successfully on the ground, away from any immediate obstructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JycC5cMvgu8 5 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11314-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eH0yf7Q59p0/hqdefault.jpg Retreat and Observe Tree Fall — Tree Removal As the tree begins to fall, immediately remove the chainsaw from the cut, engage the chain brake, and retreat along your pre-planned escape path. Do not take your eyes off the falling tree. Observe its trajectory and ensure it falls safely in the intended direction. Wait until the tree has fully settled on the ground before approaching it. The video shows the tree falling cleanly in the direction the feller was facing, away from the path the feller was standing on. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eH0yf7Q59p0 15 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11314-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nw0xjvFrMp4/hqdefault.jpg Felling the Tree and Retreating — Tree Removal Once the back cut is almost complete, the tree will begin to move. As it starts to fall, immediately remove the chainsaw and retreat along one of your predetermined escape routes. Keep your eyes on the tree and its surroundings as it falls to ensure no unexpected branches break or other hazards arise. Wait until the tree has settled completely on the ground before approaching. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nw0xjvFrMp4 11 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11315-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9PLgdKWSh-U/hqdefault.jpg Delimb and Buck the Fallen Tree — Tree Removal Once the tree has fallen, begin the process of limbing, which involves removing all the branches from the main trunk. Always position yourself on the 'uphill' side of the tree trunk if working on uneven ground. This prevents the trunk from rolling towards you unexpectedly. Use the chainsaw to cut branches, being mindful of any tension that might cause them to spring back. After limbing, cut the main trunk into smaller, manageable sections, a process known as bucking. These sections can then be used for firewood or loaded onto a trailer for disposal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9PLgdKWSh-U 16 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11315-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AlQh-IUhvwE/hqdefault.jpg Limb and Buck the Fallen Tree — Tree Removal After the tree has fallen safely, the next steps are 'limbing' and 'bucking.' Limbing involves removing all the branches from the main trunk. Work methodically from the base of the trunk towards the top, being cautious of branches under tension that might spring back ('springpoles'). Once limbed, 'buck' the main trunk by cutting it into smaller, manageable sections or logs. Determine the desired length for these logs based on your needs (e.g., firewood, milling). Ensure the trunk is stable and supported to prevent the chainsaw bar from pinching during cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AlQh-IUhvwE 83 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11315-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NXMmm77kkVE/hqdefault.jpg Limb and Buck Fallen Trees — Tree Removal When a tree is already on the ground, the process involves two main techniques: 'limbing' and 'bucking'. Limbing means removing the smaller branches or limbs from the base of the tree trunk. Work carefully from the base, cutting the limbs. You can use a 'pulling chain' technique (cutting downward) or a 'pushing chain' technique (cutting upward). After limbing, 'bucking' involves cutting the main trunk into manageable sections. Utilize offsetting cuts to prevent the chainsaw chain from binding in the wood. Limbs on the underside can be cut if you have a good working height and adequate support for the log. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NXMmm77kkVE 40 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11316-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hWpcc1lHAyA/hqdefault.jpg Final Site Cleanup and Wood Storage — Tree Removal After the entire tree has been removed and the stump ground, the site is completely cleared of all wood chips, small branches, and debris. The larger trunk sections, cut into manageable lengths, are left on-site to be split into firewood. This provides a clean, safe, and open area where the hazardous tree once stood, with a new supply of wood for heating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hWpcc1lHAyA 56 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11316-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ymQGyC60vr4/hqdefault.jpg Process Remaining Debris and Clean Up — Tree Removal The remaining smaller branches and debris that were not burned are further processed. Some thicker branches are chopped into smaller pieces with an axe, while others are collected into a wheelbarrow to be transported. Sawdust and small wood chips scattered on the ground are then cleared using a Stihl backpack leaf blower to clean up the work area. The processed logs are neatly stacked near the fire. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ymQGyC60vr4 22 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11316-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dTCVAohf61U/hqdefault.jpg Final Cleanup and Demobilization — Tree Removal After all tree sections are removed and processed, the crew begins the cleanup phase. This involves raking remaining small debris, ensuring all wood chips are contained, and preparing the equipment for transport. The ground mats are carefully removed and stacked onto the crane truck. All tools are accounted for and secured. The job concludes with a final inspection of the work area to ensure it is clean and safe. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dTCVAohf61U 58 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11309-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yqxK5AdXw_0/hqdefault.jpg Assess Felling Zone and Hazards — Tree Removal Before making any cuts on the main tree, conduct a thorough assessment of the felling zone. This involves identifying potential hazards such as nearby buildings, fences, or other valuable objects that could be damaged. Use an aerial perspective (as shown in the video's drone footage) if possible, or carefully walk around the tree to determine the safest and most optimal felling direction. The video highlights a situation with 'no room for error' due to surrounding structures. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yqxK5AdXw_0 27 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11309-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/L6g_KpERgQg/hqdefault.jpg Tree Assessment and Safety Preparation — Tree Removal Before beginning any cutting, thoroughly inspect the dead tree. Observe its height, diameter, and the extent of decay, as indicated by the peeling bark and hollowed-out sections. Identify the direction of the lean, if any, and plan the safest felling direction, considering potential hazards like nearby buildings or other trees. Assess the surrounding terrain and clear any obstacles that might impede the fall or the arborist's movement. Ensure all necessary personal protective equipment (PPE) is worn, including a safety helmet with ear protection and face shield, safety glasses, high-visibility clothing, and chainsaw protective chaps/trousers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/L6g_KpERgQg 33 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11309-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qSNp_GBGK8A/hqdefault.jpg Assess Tree and Plan Fall Direction — Tree Removal Before beginning any cutting, thoroughly assess the tree's natural lean, the surrounding area, and potential obstacles. Identify the safest and most efficient direction for the tree to fall. This involves observing other trees, power lines, structures, and potential escape routes. The felling lever can be used to help determine the natural lean and desired fall direction. Mark the intended felling direction on the tree's trunk using an easily visible marker, such as marking paint or flagging tape, to ensure both operators are clear on the target. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qSNp_GBGK8A 23 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11310-1 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c4A3gSWyoNM/hqdefault.jpg Assess Tree and Plan Felling Direction — Tree Removal Begin by thoroughly assessing the spruce tree to be felled. Observe its natural lean and determine the safest and most efficient felling direction, taking into account any nearby structures, roads, or obstacles. In this video, the tree has a natural curve, which necessitates careful planning and the use of a tree jack. The desired felling direction is towards the road, which will need to be cleared post-felling. Identify the height at which the directional notch will be cut on the trunk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c4A3gSWyoNM 69 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11310-2 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DBYxe1xzmV4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Face Cut — Tree Removal Begin by assessing the tree and the desired direction of fall. Make a large, deep notch (approximately a quarter of the tree's diameter) on the side of the tree facing the intended direction of fall. This is the 'face cut' or 'directional notch' and consists of two cuts: a horizontal cut and a diagonal cut, meeting to remove a wedge of wood. Ensure the area around the tree is clear of people and obstacles before starting any cuts. The initial cut shown is deep, aiming to create a substantial hinge for controlled felling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DBYxe1xzmV4 32 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11310-3 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c4A3gSWyoNM/hqdefault.jpg Perform Back Cut and Initiate Felling — Tree Removal After creating the directional notch, move to the opposite side of the tree trunk. Begin making the back cut (felling cut) horizontally, slightly above the bottom cut of the directional notch. As the back cut progresses, activate the mechanical tree jack to apply controlled pressure, pushing the tree in the planned direction. Continue cutting and applying pressure with the jack until the tree starts to lean and then falls in the desired direction. Ensure the hinge created by the notch guides the fall and prevents uncontrolled movement. The tree should fall cleanly and safely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c4A3gSWyoNM 14 2026-10-13T14:34:49.962Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11307-1 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Order Winder Steps and Extensions — Winder Step Measurement Begin by determining the necessary number of winder steps and winder step extensions for your landing area. To do this, measure the depth of your landing area from the back wall to the front edge. To this measurement, add 30 millimeters (approximately 1.2 inches) to account for the nosing, which is the slightly projecting edge of the new winder step. The front portion of the landing area will be covered by the winder step itself, while any remaining deeper sections behind it will require winder step extensions. For instance, in the video, a 600mm (approx. 23.6 inches) winder step and two winder step extensions are used for the staircase shown. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 30 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11307-2 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Test-fit — Winder Step Measurement With the skirting boards removed, carefully measure the exact dimensions required for your winder step and winder step extensions. Place the winder step and extension pieces onto the landing area and mark any areas that need to be cut to achieve a precise fit, especially around corners or existing newel posts. The video shows using a measuring tape to determine the length needed and marking the pieces with a pencil. Make sure to test-fit each piece multiple times, adjusting cuts as needed, to ensure a snug and accurate placement around any obstacles, such as the newel post or wall edges, before proceeding to permanent installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 36 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11307-3 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Winder Step Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11306-1 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Order Winder Steps and Extensions — Winder Step Measurement Begin by determining the necessary number of winder steps and winder step extensions for your landing area. To do this, measure the depth of your landing area from the back wall to the front edge. To this measurement, add 30 millimeters (approximately 1.2 inches) to account for the nosing, which is the slightly projecting edge of the new winder step. The front portion of the landing area will be covered by the winder step itself, while any remaining deeper sections behind it will require winder step extensions. For instance, in the video, a 600mm (approx. 23.6 inches) winder step and two winder step extensions are used for the staircase shown. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 30 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11306-2 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Test-fit — Winder Step Measurement With the skirting boards removed, carefully measure the exact dimensions required for your winder step and winder step extensions. Place the winder step and extension pieces onto the landing area and mark any areas that need to be cut to achieve a precise fit, especially around corners or existing newel posts. The video shows using a measuring tape to determine the length needed and marking the pieces with a pencil. Make sure to test-fit each piece multiple times, adjusting cuts as needed, to ensure a snug and accurate placement around any obstacles, such as the newel post or wall edges, before proceeding to permanent installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 36 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11306-3 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Cut Your Treads — Winder Step Measurement With the nosing removed, prepare the replacement treads for installation. Begin by measuring each tread individually using a tape measure, as stairway widths can vary from one step to the next. Mark the length that needs to be cut off using a sharpie or pencil. If the tread is a double return tread, you will not need to make any further cuts as it has been manufactured to your provided dimensions. As a pro tip, use a piece of scrap wood to push the tread out at the return area. This allows you to properly scribe the skirt before cutting, which will help give you an exact fit and cut for your tread. Use a miter saw to make the necessary cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 35 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11308-1 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HEeE2yFkMeY/hqdefault.jpg Walkline Tread Depth Requirements — Winder Step Measurement Following the minimum narrow-point requirement, the video discusses the second critical code: a minimum tread depth of 10 inches at the walkline. The walkline for winder steps is typically located 12 inches from the smallest side of the stairway. The narrator uses examples to show how a winder step's depth, even if meeting the 6-inch minimum at the narrowest point, must also satisfy the 10-inch minimum along the walkline. Diagrams illustrate how certain designs might fail this walkline requirement if not adequately planned, emphasizing that the tread depth at the walkline can be longer but not shorter than 10 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HEeE2yFkMeY 36 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11308-2 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HEeE2yFkMeY/hqdefault.jpg Understanding Winder Tread Minimums — Winder Step Measurement The video begins by introducing the importance of updated stair building codes, specifically referencing the 2024 International Residential Code for winder steps. It highlights the primary requirement: a minimum of 6 inches for the tread depth at any point within the clear width of the stair, usually at the narrowest point of the winder. Several diagrammatic examples of winder steps are shown, illustrating both compliant and non-compliant designs based on this 6-inch minimum. The narrator points out that a simple square-cut winder may not meet this requirement if the narrowest point falls below 6 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HEeE2yFkMeY 11 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11308-3 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gnQtWlRdZWk/hqdefault.jpg Verify Riser Height and Tread Depth — Winder Step Measurement This step covers the code requirements for individual riser height and tread depth. For individual risers, the vertical rise cannot exceed 7.75 inches. This ensures a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. For tread depth, the minimum requirement is 10 inches. The video highlights that older codes had different specifications (e.g., 9-inch treads and 8-inch risers), underscoring the importance of referencing current building codes, such as the 2021 International Residential Code, as local regulations may vary. A graphic illustrates how a small object can pass through an open riser if it exceeds the maximum opening size allowed by code. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gnQtWlRdZWk 37 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11305-1 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Winder Step Measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11305-2 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Test-fit — Winder Step Measurement With the skirting boards removed, carefully measure the exact dimensions required for your winder step and winder step extensions. Place the winder step and extension pieces onto the landing area and mark any areas that need to be cut to achieve a precise fit, especially around corners or existing newel posts. The video shows using a measuring tape to determine the length needed and marking the pieces with a pencil. Make sure to test-fit each piece multiple times, adjusting cuts as needed, to ensure a snug and accurate placement around any obstacles, such as the newel post or wall edges, before proceeding to permanent installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 36 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11305-3 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Order Winder Steps and Extensions — Winder Step Measurement Begin by determining the necessary number of winder steps and winder step extensions for your landing area. To do this, measure the depth of your landing area from the back wall to the front edge. To this measurement, add 30 millimeters (approximately 1.2 inches) to account for the nosing, which is the slightly projecting edge of the new winder step. The front portion of the landing area will be covered by the winder step itself, while any remaining deeper sections behind it will require winder step extensions. For instance, in the video, a 600mm (approx. 23.6 inches) winder step and two winder step extensions are used for the staircase shown. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 30 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11304-1 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Order Winder Steps and Extensions — Winder Step Measurement Begin by determining the necessary number of winder steps and winder step extensions for your landing area. To do this, measure the depth of your landing area from the back wall to the front edge. To this measurement, add 30 millimeters (approximately 1.2 inches) to account for the nosing, which is the slightly projecting edge of the new winder step. The front portion of the landing area will be covered by the winder step itself, while any remaining deeper sections behind it will require winder step extensions. For instance, in the video, a 600mm (approx. 23.6 inches) winder step and two winder step extensions are used for the staircase shown. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 30 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11304-2 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Gx2iPksm2Qs/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Test-fit — Winder Step Measurement With the skirting boards removed, carefully measure the exact dimensions required for your winder step and winder step extensions. Place the winder step and extension pieces onto the landing area and mark any areas that need to be cut to achieve a precise fit, especially around corners or existing newel posts. The video shows using a measuring tape to determine the length needed and marking the pieces with a pencil. Make sure to test-fit each piece multiple times, adjusting cuts as needed, to ensure a snug and accurate placement around any obstacles, such as the newel post or wall edges, before proceeding to permanent installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Gx2iPksm2Qs 36 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11304-3 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WDHMS0XrVxo/hqdefault.jpg Identify Inconsistent Tread Depths in Irregular Winders — Winder Step Measurement This step explores the challenges of irregular winder layouts, such as L-shaped or U-shaped stairs, where treads might not conform to a single concentric circle. It demonstrates how designing these steps by radiating lines from a corner point, without a consistent curved walk line, leads to significantly different tread depths along the 12-inch walk line. These inconsistencies are shown with varying measurements (e.g., 1' 6 1/2", 11 3/4", 1' 1 9/16"), indicating non-compliance with codes that require uniform tread depths along the walk line. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WDHMS0XrVxo 104 2026-10-12T17:50:10.375Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11296-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lLqEJyZFv_A/hqdefault.jpg Select Optimal Garden Site for Sun — Flower Planting Begin by selecting the most suitable location for your raised garden beds, as sun exposure is the single most critical factor for successful vegetable cultivation. Most vegetables require 'full sun,' meaning at least 6-8 hours of direct sunlight per day. Avoid areas with deep or even moderate shade, as this will significantly hinder plant growth and reduce yields. To accurately assess the amount of sunlight a potential site receives, utilize a dedicated sun calculator tool, such as the 'Suncalc' meter by Rapidtest. Place this device in the ground and leave it for a full sunny day (avoiding cloudy days for accurate readings). After 24 hours, the meter will indicate the sun exposure level (full sun, partial sun, partial shade, or full shade). This information will help you align the site's light conditions with the specific sun requirements of your chosen vegetables, typically listed on seed packets or plant labels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lLqEJyZFv_A 136 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11296-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bZt1LiXJLm0/hqdefault.jpg Select Planting Location — Flower Planting The presenter advises on selecting a planting location, stressing the importance of full sun exposure for sunflowers to thrive. He also suggests considering the orientation of the plants so that the mature sunflower heads, which typically face east, can be enjoyed from the preferred viewing angle. He notes that sunflowers are fast-growing, so planting can occur even late in the season, provided there are 7-9 weeks before the first frost. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bZt1LiXJLm0 132 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11296-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QPfjvVC-PiE/hqdefault.jpg Choose the Site — Flower Planting Begin by selecting the ideal location for your wildflowers. For the best results and 90% success, choose a spot that receives full sun, meaning at least six hours of direct sunlight per day. These are typically open and sunny areas. If a full sun spot is not available, you can consider a partial shade mixture, which requires a minimum of three hours of sun. Such locations might be along a wood line or near a building that provides shade for part of the day. Prioritizing full sun will yield the most vibrant and abundant blooms. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QPfjvVC-PiE 25 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11297-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-k6j8lqQgTk/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil — Flower Planting Begin by digging a square hole, approximately 45 centimeters (18 inches) by 45 centimeters (18 inches), and about the depth of your spade. After removing the initial soil, use a spade to break up the soil at the bottom of the hole for a bit more depth, without actually removing it. Then, switch to a garden fork to thoroughly mix and aerate the loosened soil, which helps roots grow more easily. Add a generous amount of compost, roughly a third of a wheelbarrow or half a dozen shovelfuls, to the loosened soil, mixing it well. The compost can be normal garden compost, well-rotted manure, or a bagged product from a garden center, as long as it's organic. It keeps the soil open and airy. Finally, sprinkle mycorrhizal fungi (such as Rootgrow) into the hole and mix it with the soil. This fungi greatly enhances the root system's ability to absorb nutrients from the soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-k6j8lqQgTk 109 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11297-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/grVQARsNRdE/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Garden Bed Soil Structure — Flower Planting Flowers require good soil to bloom vigorously. To prepare the garden bed, first, ensure the existing soil is well-worked. This usually involves digging and breaking up compacted soil. Next, incorporate soil amendments to improve both drainage and the richness of the soil. Good drainage is essential to prevent waterlogging, while rich soil provides the necessary nutrients for plant growth. Additionally, make sure the soil is adequately moist before planting; dry soil can shock new plants, leading to poor establishment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/grVQARsNRdE 26 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11297-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LvlwfYa9WlQ/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Planting Site — Flower Planting Before planting, prepare the chosen area by clearing it of all existing weeds, grass, and debris. Use a garden fork or shovel to loosen the soil to a depth of 6-8 inches. If your soil is heavy clay, incorporate organic matter like compost or grit to improve drainage, as Sedum thrives in well-draining conditions. Level the area with a rake. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LvlwfYa9WlQ 1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11298-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BCYBzmO5xxw/hqdefault.jpg Choose Plants for Your Region, Climate, and Growing Conditions — Flower Planting After determining location, shape, and color, this step focuses on selecting the actual plants. The primary consideration is to choose plants with similar basic needs for sunlight, water, and soil (e.g., drought-tolerant sun lovers for a Mediterranean-inspired garden). Additionally, incorporating plants native to your area is highly beneficial, as they are easier to care for and attract pollinators and other beneficial insects. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BCYBzmO5xxw 36 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11298-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YwGrNJkfkS8/hqdefault.jpg Select Plants by Conditions & Color Theme — Flower Planting The presenter advises selecting plants based on fundamental criteria to ensure their success and align with the garden's overall aesthetic. Key considerations include the amount of sunlight an area receives (sunny or shady spots), desired thematic elements such as fragrance, and specific color palettes (e.g., a monochromatic garden featuring all white or all yellow flowers). Other potential themes mentioned include focusing on ornamental grasses, exotic flowers, or creating a rock garden, which all contribute to the overall perennial bed layout using specific color theory applications (like monochromatic schemes). https://www.youtube.com/embed/YwGrNJkfkS8 21 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11298-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0Jf_yvf3kk0/hqdefault.jpg Plan Plant Beds and Selection — Flower Planting Now, focus on the plant beds. Decide on the shape of your beds: straight lines offer defined points of interest, while curves tend to create a more natural look. When selecting plants, aim for a cohesive look by picking a few colors that work well together and avoiding too much variation in small areas. Layer plants by height, placing taller ones in the back of the bed and shorter ones in the front. Ensure chosen plants complement any existing landscaping. Remember that plants will grow, so allow enough space for them to reach their full maturity. Consider using perennials, which return every season, for long-term structure, and annuals for seasonal bursts of color. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Jf_yvf3kk0 46 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11299-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YOfsUwzgv_g/hqdefault.jpg Layout Plants for Design and Spacing — Flower Planting Prior to planting, lay out all your plants on the prepared soil in their pots or trays. This allows you to visualize the arrangement and make adjustments. It's important to consider how large each plant will grow in future years and ensure they have ample space to expand without overcrowding. To create a more natural and fuller appearance, position plants in groups of three of the same kind. If you have many of one variety, repeating these groups can add a sense of balance and symmetry to your border design, making it more visually appealing than haphazard placement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YOfsUwzgv_g 24 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11299-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hHX2-qBmCCo/hqdefault.jpg Lay Out Plants — Flower Planting The gardeners begin by arranging all the potted plants onto the garden bed. This crucial step allows them to visualize the final layout, ensuring proper spacing and aesthetic balance before any digging begins. They adjust the positions of the white petunias, yellow Gaillardia, lavender, clematis, boxwood, goldmound spirea, and white yarrow until a pleasing arrangement is achieved along the curved bed and near the picket fence. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hHX2-qBmCCo 9 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11299-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hbov3lC2Tsc/hqdefault.jpg Arrange Plants and Flowers — Flower Planting Now for the most creative part: arranging your plants and flowers. Carefully remove each plant from its nursery pot, gently teasing apart any tightly bound roots at the bottom to encourage outward growth. Position the plants in the potting mix according to your desired aesthetic, considering factors such as plant height, texture, color, and light requirements. Place taller plants in the center or back, mounding plants as 'fillers', and trailing plants as 'spillers' over the edges. Fill any gaps with additional potting mix and gently pat around the base of each plant to secure it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hbov3lC2Tsc 8 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11300-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hHX2-qBmCCo/hqdefault.jpg Plant Annuals and Perennials — Flower Planting Carefully remove each plant from its nursery pot. If the roots are circling tightly, gently loosen them with your fingers to encourage outward growth. Place the plant into the prepared hole, ensuring the top of the root ball is level with the surrounding soil. Backfill the hole with soil, gently firming it around the plant to remove air pockets. Repeat this process for all plants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hHX2-qBmCCo 14 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11300-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VYD_nd9IEgQ/hqdefault.jpg Plant New Plants — Flower Planting Once the plant arrangement is finalized, begin planting. Dig holes for each plant, ensuring they are wide and deep enough to accommodate the root ball. Carefully remove each plant from its nursery pot, loosen any circling roots, and place the plant in the hole so that the top of the root ball is level with the surrounding soil. Backfill the hole with soil, gently firming it around the base of the plant. Consider adding soil amendments like compost or fertilizer if needed to enrich the soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VYD_nd9IEgQ 17 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11300-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ndPHL9A0--c/hqdefault.jpg Plant New Flowers — Flower Planting Carefully remove each flower from its nursery pot and place it into a prepared hole. Ensure the top of the root ball is level with the surrounding soil. Gently backfill the hole with soil, pressing firmly around the base of the plant to remove air pockets. The creator plants red begonias in the front row, yellow coleus in the second row, and white begonias in the corner, with hostas and liriope interspersed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ndPHL9A0--c 23 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11301-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SCdWi8eAR5U/hqdefault.jpg Water the Plants — Flower Planting After all the flowers have been planted and the mulch is in place, it is essential to give the entire flower bed a thorough watering. This initial watering serves several critical purposes: it helps settle the soil around the newly planted roots, eliminates any air pockets that could dry out the roots, and provides much-needed moisture to help the plants establish themselves in their new environment. Use a gentle stream of water to avoid displacing soil or damaging delicate young plants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SCdWi8eAR5U 2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11301-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hHX2-qBmCCo/hqdefault.jpg Water Newly Planted Bed — Flower Planting After all plants are in the ground, thoroughly water the entire garden bed. This helps settle the soil around the roots and provides essential moisture for the plants to establish themselves in their new environment. A garden hose with a gentle shower setting is ideal for this task. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hHX2-qBmCCo 9 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11301-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YOfsUwzgv_g/hqdefault.jpg Water and Establish Plants — Flower Planting Immediately after planting all the perennials, water them in thoroughly using a watering can. This helps settle the soil around the roots and provides initial hydration. You will need to continue watering them regularly until their roots have fully established themselves in the garden bed and are capable of finding their own water. With proper care and establishment, these hardy herbaceous perennials will mature and fill your border with beautiful summer color year after year, providing great value for money as they grow bigger and better with each passing season. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YOfsUwzgv_g 11 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11302-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VYD_nd9IEgQ/hqdefault.jpg Apply Mulch — Flower Planting Once all the plants are in the ground, spread a layer of mulch over the entire garden bed. Mulch helps retain soil moisture, suppress weeds, and regulate soil temperature. Spread an even layer, ensuring it doesn't pile up against the plant stems, which can lead to rot. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VYD_nd9IEgQ 77 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11302-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nVW2EB-UlMk/hqdefault.jpg Mulch and Water — Flower Planting After planting, create a small, circular well around the base of the plant using soil to help retain water. Then, give the newly planted specimen a thorough initial watering. Once the water has soaked in, apply a layer of mulch, typically 3 to 4 inches thick for the first application. Distribute the mulch evenly over the bed, ensuring it does not touch the plant's stem, which can lead to rot. Finally, water the mulched area again. Mulch is highly beneficial for weed prevention and water retention, helping to keep the soil cool and reducing evaporation, which is especially important for new plants establishing their root systems. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nVW2EB-UlMk 71 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11302-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tim4LEo6l10/hqdefault.jpg Apply Mulch — Flower Planting Once the plant is backfilled, add a layer of natural mulch around its base. The video suggests using 'ground pine bark mulch' and applying a 1- to 2-inch layer. Extend the mulch out to the plant's dripline or even beyond for optimal coverage. A crucial detail is to keep the mulch away from the base of the plant by about 1-2 inches. This small gap prevents direct contact between the mulch and the plant's stem or trunk, which can create a pathway for pests or diseases to potentially infect the plant. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tim4LEo6l10 63 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11303-1 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zPnhP1o0GD0/hqdefault.jpg Post-Planting Watering and Ongoing Maintenance — Flower Planting After planting, the new native garden requires consistent care to ensure plant establishment. During the rainy season, hand-water frequently as needed. For the first summer, water every 6 to 8 weeks, adjusting based on plant needs and local climate. The goal is to establish the plants so they become self-sufficient and require minimal watering later. This ongoing care ensures the garden thrives and evolves over time, creating a beautiful and sustainable ecosystem. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zPnhP1o0GD0 94 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11303-2 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YOfsUwzgv_g/hqdefault.jpg Water and Establish Plants — Flower Planting Immediately after planting all the perennials, water them in thoroughly using a watering can. This helps settle the soil around the roots and provides initial hydration. You will need to continue watering them regularly until their roots have fully established themselves in the garden bed and are capable of finding their own water. With proper care and establishment, these hardy herbaceous perennials will mature and fill your border with beautiful summer color year after year, providing great value for money as they grow bigger and better with each passing season. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YOfsUwzgv_g 11 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11303-3 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-_lhvN_wN8s/hqdefault.jpg Water and Ongoing Care — Flower Planting After planting and setting up the protective covers, water the plants thoroughly. Consistent watering is crucial, especially in windy conditions, as wind can quickly dry out the soil. Regular monitoring of soil moisture is recommended. The protective hoops with fabric will also help retain heat, promoting faster growth. The speaker emphasizes the low maintenance of ranunculus and anemones, noting that minimal fertilization beyond the initial soil amendment is often sufficient. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-_lhvN_wN8s 14 2026-10-12T14:49:38.580Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11295-1 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for First Winder Step — curved-stair-measurement Begin by taking a roll of kraft paper and unrolling it onto the second winder step (the first winder step to be templated). Line up one straight edge of the paper along the back edge of the tread, against the riser of the next step. Use an electric stapler to secure the paper in the middle of the riser, making sure the paper is flat and conforms to the step's shape. Fold the paper neatly around the nosing (the front edge of the step) and along the side edge of the winder. Secure it again with staples in the middle, ensuring staples are placed where they will be covered by the finished carpet runner and do not damage the visible part of the stairs if they were real finished stairs. Use a utility knife to carefully cut along the edges of the step, forming the exact shape of the winder tread and riser. This creates the first paper template. The presenter mentions that on actual stairs, the nosing would be thicker than the demo stairs, and emphasizes care when using the knife to avoid damaging the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 108 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11295-2 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Create Template for Second Winder Step — curved-stair-measurement Repeat the templating process for the next winder step using a fresh piece of kraft paper. This involves aligning the paper, securing it with staples, folding it around the nosing and side edges, and cutting it to the exact shape of the step. As with the previous template, mark the runner's width, center line, and straight edges. Crucially, ensure that the measurements (e.g., 28 inches wide) for the runner remain consistent across all winder steps to maintain a uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 64 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11295-3 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m0TM4PCC8Tw/hqdefault.jpg Creating Custom Templates for Each Step — curved-stair-measurement First, use painter's tape to mark the desired outline of the carpet runner on the stair treads, particularly around the quarter round and edges. Then, unroll the brown paper over the first tread and secure it temporarily with painter's tape. Use a pencil or marker to meticulously trace the exact shape of the stair tread onto the paper. Once traced, cut out the paper template with scissors or a utility knife. Repeat this process for all six pie-shaped steps, carefully numbering each template to maintain order. Secure the templates in place with a hammer stapler to prevent movement while tracing and cutting. Remember to account for the orientation of each step when numbering and preparing the templates, as they will be flipped for cutting the carpet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m0TM4PCC8Tw 37 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11294-1 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — curved-stair-measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11294-2 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — curved-stair-measurement Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11294-3 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — curved-stair-measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11293-1 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — curved-stair-measurement Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11293-2 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hz7gIkkZWfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread and Riser — curved-stair-measurement Begin by accurately measuring the overall width of your existing stair tread. For the example, a 10-inch tread is used. Next, measure the distance from the center of the first step to the inside of the riser. This specific measurement will be needed if you intend to use the width of the riser for the strips to be installed later. These measurements are crucial for creating precise templates. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hz7gIkkZWfI 30 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11293-3 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4fML3-Qwo_c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Hardwood Pieces — curved-stair-measurement Accurate measurement is critical for a professional finish. Use a stair tread template tool to precisely measure the length and angle of each stair tread and riser. This tool allows you to transfer the exact dimensions and angles to your hardwood flooring material. Mark the cut lines onto the hardwood pieces using a pencil. Use a miter saw for cross-cutting the wood to the determined lengths and angles. For ripping cuts, such as adjusting the width of a tread or riser, utilize a table saw. Ensure all cuts are clean and precise to minimize gaps during installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4fML3-Qwo_c 29 2026-10-12T13:22:20.639Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11282-1 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nTjC3oWsXz4/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Repair Deck Structure — Deck Staining Inspect the entire deck, including the railing, for any signs of rot, splinters, or raised fasteners (nails or screws). For any raised nails, use a hammer and a nail set to sink them below the surface of the board. Drive in any protruding screws to ensure a flush surface. Use a putty knife to carefully remove any splinters to prevent injury and create a smooth finish. Replace any rotten sections of wood and, if necessary, warped balusters to maintain structural integrity and appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nTjC3oWsXz4 22 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11282-2 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/On6WF-_OjHI/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Repair Damaged Boards — Deck Staining Thoroughly inspect the entire deck for any signs of damage such as loose, cracked, or rotting boards. Use a screwdriver to check for loose screws and a drill to tighten or replace them. If boards are significantly damaged, replace them with new timber of the same type to maintain consistency and structural integrity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/On6WF-_OjHI 9 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11282-3 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QmS9UydYrok/hqdefault.jpg Identify and Address Deck Problems — Deck Staining Before cleaning or sealing, inspect the deck for structural issues or damage. Check the railing posts to ensure they are securely lag-bolted to the deck structure; nails alone are insufficient and can lead to very loose railings. Examine the top railing for sloppy craftsmanship like gaps filled with caulk or glue, as these allow water intrusion, causing wood rot and splitting. Look for cupped deck boards, which can create trip hazards. Boards with the 'cup' installed upwards will warp upwards, increasing the hazard. Ideally, boards should be installed with the 'cup' facing down to mitigate cracking and reduce tripping risks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QmS9UydYrok 145 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11283-1 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Endync6z3XM/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Deck — Deck Staining Begin by assessing the deck's condition. The video demonstrates using a pump sprayer, which is preferred over a power washer to avoid damaging wood fibers. Pour a biodegradable wood cleaner into the pump sprayer, mixing it with water in a one-to-one (1:1) ratio. Before applying the cleaner, thoroughly spray the entire deck with cool, clear water using a garden hose. Then, apply the mixed cleaner evenly across the wet deck using the pump sprayer. Allow the cleaner to sit for about 10 minutes to penetrate the dirt and grime. After letting it sit, use a stiff bristle brush to scrub the deck, working the cleaner into the wood and dislodging any remaining dirt or algae. Finally, rinse the deck thoroughly with the garden hose to remove all cleaner and loosened debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Endync6z3XM 73 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11283-2 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rnepW1qumvg/hqdefault.jpg Clean Your Deck Thoroughly — Deck Staining Thoroughly clean the deck using a deck cleaner. First, wet the deck surface with a hose. Then, apply the deck cleaner according to the product instructions. Use a stiff-bristled scrub brush to scrub the entire deck, paying attention to areas with grime, mildew, or old stain residue. Finally, rinse the deck thoroughly with water, making sure to remove all cleaner residue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rnepW1qumvg 8 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11283-3 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JUqgr7AIcFU/hqdefault.jpg Apply Deck Cleaner — Deck Staining Begin by applying a specialized deck cleaning solution to the entire surface of the deck. The video shows a person using a garden hose attachment bottle to spray the cleaner evenly over the wooden planks. This step is crucial for loosening dirt, grime, mildew, and old stain, preparing the deck for a deeper clean. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JUqgr7AIcFU 1 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11284-1 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KPq_DYxodQs/hqdefault.jpg Sanding the Deck Surface — Deck Staining Using an orbital sander, equipped with appropriate grit sandpaper (e.g., starting with 60-80 grit for removal and finishing with 100-120 grit for smoothness), carefully sand the entire wooden deck surface. This process is crucial for removing any remaining old, peeling stain or paint, smoothing out rough areas, and opening the wood grain to ensure optimal adhesion for the new stain. Pay close attention to areas with significant wear or discoloration. After sanding, use a leaf blower again to remove all sanding dust from the deck. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KPq_DYxodQs 24 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11284-2 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JUqgr7AIcFU/hqdefault.jpg Light Sand Deck — Deck Staining Once the deck is completely dry, perform a light sanding of the entire surface. The video demonstrates using a long-handled random orbital sander, which helps achieve a smooth finish and prepares the wood for staining. This step removes any remaining loose fibers, splintered wood, or minor imperfections from the cleaning process, ensuring better stain adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JUqgr7AIcFU 3 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11284-3 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nTjC3oWsXz4/hqdefault.jpg Sand All Deck Surfaces — Deck Staining Once the deck has dried, use a pole sander with 50-grit sandpaper to sand the deck boards. Always sand in the direction of the wood grain to avoid cross-grain scratches. Make sure to also sand the railings and balusters to create a smooth, consistent surface for the new coating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nTjC3oWsXz4 7 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11285-1 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QmS9UydYrok/hqdefault.jpg Apply Deck Stain — Deck Staining Dip the brush into the deck stain and apply it to the deck surface, focusing on even coverage. For larger, flat areas, use the roller with an extension pole to spread the stain. For spindles, railings, and other intricate parts, use the disposable brush to carefully apply the stain. Work in sections, ensuring the stain is absorbed evenly into the wood. The goal is to apply a consistent, protective layer that brings out the natural beauty of the wood, making the deck look as good as new. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QmS9UydYrok 24 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11285-2 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7w8O-GPx2a8/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stain to Deck Walking Surface — Deck Staining Using a flat pad applicator attached to an extension pole, begin applying the mixed stain to the main walking surface of the deck. Work in small, manageable sections, covering two to three boards at a time. This technique helps maintain a 'wet edge,' meaning you are always blending fresh stain into stain that is still wet, preventing visible lap marks. Immediately after applying with the pad, use a 2-inch natural bristle brush to work the stain into the gaps and spaces between the deck boards. This ensures thorough coverage and prevents pooling in the crevices. Remember, this specific stain is designed as a one-coat application, and applying a second coat is not recommended. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7w8O-GPx2a8 48 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11285-3 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rnepW1qumvg/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stain Into Your Deck — Deck Staining Begin applying the deck stain. It's crucial to stir the stain often during use to ensure the pigments and solids remain evenly distributed. Apply the stain along the full length of one board before moving to the next. This technique prevents lap marks. When staining the main deck surface, work towards your exit point to avoid painting yourself into a corner. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rnepW1qumvg 16 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11286-1 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/F9abqSCsXmE/hqdefault.jpg Allow Adequate Drying Time — Deck Staining After applying the stain, allow the deck to dry overnight before walking on it to prevent smudges and ensure the stain sets properly. For full curing and maximum durability, wait at least three days before placing any furniture, planters, or other items back on the deck. This extended drying time ensures the stain has fully hardened and will withstand regular use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F9abqSCsXmE 9 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11286-2 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rnepW1qumvg/hqdefault.jpg Let It Dry for 24 - 48 Hours — Deck Staining Once the staining is complete, allow the deck to dry for 24 to 48 hours before placing any furniture back or walking on it. The exact drying time will vary based on the specific stain product used, humidity, and temperature, so always consult the manufacturer's instructions on the can. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rnepW1qumvg 6 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11286-3 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jBXnfLe3lzs/hqdefault.jpg Final Dry and Cure — Deck Staining After applying the second coat, allow the deck to dry for several hours until it is completely tack-free. For optimal durability and longevity, let the stain cure for a few days before returning furniture to the deck or subjecting it to heavy foot traffic. Once cured, your deck will be ready to enjoy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jBXnfLe3lzs 15 2026-10-11T14:27:44.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11276-1 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — stair tread installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11276-2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4fML3-Qwo_c/hqdefault.jpg Demolition and Subfloor Preparation — stair tread installation Begin by removing the existing stair components. Use a circular saw to make relief cuts on the old treads and risers. Follow up with an oscillating multi-tool to cut into tighter corners and edges where the circular saw cannot reach. Then, use a prying tool, such as a pry bar, to carefully loosen and remove the old wood pieces from the stair frame. Once the bulk of the material is removed, use an angle grinder fitted with a sanding disc to clean up any remaining adhesive, paint, or uneven spots on the stair subfloor. Finish by thoroughly vacuuming the area with a shop vacuum to remove all dust and debris, creating a clean surface for the new installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4fML3-Qwo_c 10 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11276-3 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — stair tread installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11279-1 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Install Risers (Counter Stairs) — stair tread installation After installing all the treads, proceed to measure, cut, and glue each counter stair (riser). Measure the height and width of the space between each newly installed tread. Cut the new wooden risers to fit these dimensions precisely. Apply construction wood adhesive to the back of each riser and firmly press it into place, ensuring a tight fit between the treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 10 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11279-2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YAi3vAulu7A/hqdefault.jpg Install Riser Boards and Tack in Place — stair tread installation Cut the primed pine riser boards to the appropriate length for each stair. A small notch may be required in the riser board to accommodate existing trim that hangs over the edge; this will later be concealed with caulk and putty. Once cut, position the riser boards with the support blocks behind them to ensure they are tight and flush against the back of the tread. Secure them in place, typically with a brad nailer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YAi3vAulu7A 34 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11279-3 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J4Pg0uZ_9Jw/hqdefault.jpg Install Treads and Risers — stair tread installation Cut the treads (the horizontal walking surface) and risers (the vertical panels) to the exact dimensions required for each step. Precision is key to a snug fit. Apply construction adhesive, commonly referred to as 'glue,' to the top of the stringers and the back of the riser where it meets the stringer. This adhesive helps prevent squeaks and adds significant structural strength. Then, carefully install each riser, followed by its corresponding tread. Secure both with appropriate fasteners, such as finish nails or screws, ensuring they are flush and level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J4Pg0uZ_9Jw 2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11280-1 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fTh9RuhZAtY/hqdefault.jpg Fill and Sand Wood Surfaces — stair tread installation After all treads and risers are installed, use wood filler to fill in any gaps, nail holes, or imperfections. The video creator used a small metal putty knife for precise application in corners and used her finger for nail holes. Allow the wood filler to dry completely according to manufacturer instructions. Once dry, sand all surfaces of the stair treads smooth. Pay particular attention to the areas with wood filler and any rough edges. The creator used a Ryobi multi-oscillating tool with a sanding attachment for tight corners and a standard sander for the main surfaces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fTh9RuhZAtY 75 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11280-2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Sand Filled and Installed Treads — stair tread installation Before applying any primer or stain, it's essential to sand all the filled areas smooth. The presenter uses a Ryobi multi-oscillating tool with a sander feature, which is particularly effective for getting into tight corners and along fine edges where the wood filler was applied. After smoothing these detailed areas, she uses a larger, actual sander to do a general pass over all the surfaces of the stairs, ensuring an overall uniform and smooth finish. This prepares the wood perfectly for the next step, which is staining (to be covered in a separate video). https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 55 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11280-3 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bcNiJWXS-nI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Wood Filler and Sand — stair tread installation After structural repairs, wood filler is applied to all holes, cracks, and imperfections on the treads, risers, and railings. A putty knife or similar tool is used to spread the wood filler smoothly and evenly. Once the filler is dry, a sanding block is used for the banisters and risers, and an orbital palm sander is used for the flat stair treads to achieve a smooth finish, removing any excess filler and preparing the wood for painting and staining. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bcNiJWXS-nI 48 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11281-1 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gtB7f883da0/hqdefault.jpg Stain and Clear Coat Stairs — stair tread installation After all hardwood risers and treads are securely installed, the final step is to stain and clear coat them for lasting appeal and protection. Apply your chosen wood stain evenly to all hardwood surfaces using a brush or rag. Work in small sections, wiping off excess stain according to the manufacturer's instructions. If you have existing hardwood under the carpet that was previously damaged or faded, sand it down thoroughly before applying stain to achieve a uniform finish. Allow the stain to dry completely. Finally, apply multiple coats of a clear coat finish, such as polyurethane, following the product's guidelines for application and drying time between coats, to protect the wood from wear and tear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gtB7f883da0 16 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11281-2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrqO6WsnouE/hqdefault.jpg Seal Stained Treads — stair tread installation After the stain has completely dried, apply four coats of a clear sealant, such as Varathane NanoDefence Premium Clear Floor Finish (Satin), to protect the treads. Apply thin, even coats, allowing each coat to dry for the recommended time (2 hours for re-coat) before applying the next. This step will protect the stained wood from wear and tear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrqO6WsnouE 19 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11281-3 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/isvMQcjoymE/hqdefault.jpg Seal the Stained Stairs — stair tread installation The final step, as mentioned in the video, is to seal the stained wood. This is particularly important for stairs, which experience heavy foot traffic and require durable protection. Apply a high-quality clear protective finish, such as a polyurethane or a floor-grade wood sealer. Apply multiple thin coats, allowing adequate drying time between each coat as specified by the product manufacturer. For best results and enhanced smoothness, lightly sand the stairs with a very fine-grit sandpaper (e.g., 220-320 grit) between coats, then wipe thoroughly with a tack cloth before applying the next coat. This sealing process protects the stain and the wood from wear, moisture, and scratches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/isvMQcjoymE 4 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11277-1 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4fML3-Qwo_c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Hardwood Pieces — stair tread installation Accurate measurement is critical for a professional finish. Use a stair tread template tool to precisely measure the length and angle of each stair tread and riser. This tool allows you to transfer the exact dimensions and angles to your hardwood flooring material. Mark the cut lines onto the hardwood pieces using a pencil. Use a miter saw for cross-cutting the wood to the determined lengths and angles. For ripping cuts, such as adjusting the width of a tread or riser, utilize a table saw. Ensure all cuts are clean and precise to minimize gaps during installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4fML3-Qwo_c 29 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11277-2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — stair tread installation After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11277-3 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — stair tread installation After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11278-1 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — stair tread installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11278-2 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — stair tread installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11278-3 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Install Your Treads — stair tread installation In some cases, you may need to install risers before installing your new treads. If this is the case, use construction adhesive and finish nails to secure them. After this, install the treads by applying construction adhesive on the top and front of the nosing of the sub-treads of the stairs. Then, use 1 1/2-inch finish nails with a finish nailer to attach the replacement treads securely. Repeat this step for each of your treads, working your way up the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 26 2026-10-11T13:51:24.359Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11274-1 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Tread Installation Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11274-2 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11274-3 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11275-1 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Tread Installation With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11275-2 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11275-3 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — Carpet Stair Tread Installation Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-10-10T18:43:40.566Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11264-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4O8Tmz_pCYo/hqdefault.jpg Assess and Plan the Drainage System — French Drain Installation Begin by assessing the driveway and surrounding landscape to identify areas where water accumulates or causes erosion. This often occurs where grass or landscaping is higher than the driveway's edge, trapping water. Plan the route for the open French drain, determining its length and where the collected water will be discharged. Consider the slope and natural contours of the land to ensure effective gravity-fed drainage. Mark the planned trench line using marking paint or stakes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4O8Tmz_pCYo 8 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11264-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hms1xg291T0/hqdefault.jpg Plan the Location — French Drain Installation Begin by observing your yard to identify areas where excess water pools. Once problem areas are identified, decide on a route for your French drain, aiming to direct the water to an existing drainage system, another body of water, or the road. Before you start, check with local authorities for zoning restrictions and ensure that your water issue isn't due to pipes that need repair. Using spray paint, stakes, or flags, clearly mark the direction and length of your planned trench. Crucially, ensure the marked trench starts at a higher elevation and slopes down to a lower elevation, directing water away from your home. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hms1xg291T0 40 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11264-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Dig the Trench with Proper Slope — French Drain Installation Using a sharp digging shovel, begin excavating the trench along the marked path. The trench should be approximately 9 inches wide and 18 to 24 inches deep. As you dig, pay close attention to the slope. For effective drainage, the trench must slope downward 1 inch for every 8 feet of length. Use a measuring tape and a level (or string line with a line level) to continuously check and maintain the correct downward slope, ensuring water will flow away from the problem area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 13 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11265-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Dig the Trench with Proper Slope — French Drain Installation Using a sharp digging shovel, begin excavating the trench along the marked path. The trench should be approximately 9 inches wide and 18 to 24 inches deep. As you dig, pay close attention to the slope. For effective drainage, the trench must slope downward 1 inch for every 8 feet of length. Use a measuring tape and a level (or string line with a line level) to continuously check and maintain the correct downward slope, ensuring water will flow away from the problem area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 13 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11265-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4QCyA6bNbSM/hqdefault.jpg Excavate Drainage Trench — French Drain Installation Excavate the trench using shovels, following the planned route along the driveway and into the grassy area leading to the discharge point. Ensure the trench has a continuous downhill slope for proper water flow. For the long section in the grassy area, a hand shovel is used. Carefully navigate around any tree roots encountered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4QCyA6bNbSM 60 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11265-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m4jfMGxoFM0/hqdefault.jpg Dig Trench and Lay Corrugated Pipe — French Drain Installation The video opens with a view of a trench already dug in the ground, revealing a black, corrugated drain pipe laid within it. This initial step involves digging a trench with a consistent slope (typically 1% or 1/8 inch per foot) away from the area to be drained, ensuring the trench is deep and wide enough to accommodate the corrugated pipe and any surrounding gravel. Once the trench is prepared, the perforated corrugated drain pipe is laid in the bottom. This pipe is often wrapped in a filter sock to prevent soil and debris from clogging the perforations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m4jfMGxoFM0 4 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11266-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Line the Trench with Landscape Fabric — French Drain Installation Line the entire trench, including over the gravel and pipe, with landscape fabric. Overlap the edges of the fabric as you go to ensure full coverage. This fabric acts as a barrier, preventing soil and silt from migrating into the gravel and pipe, which could otherwise lead to clogging and reduce the efficiency of your French drain over time. Make sure there is enough excess fabric on the sides to wrap over the top of the gravel later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 5 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11266-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4O8Tmz_pCYo/hqdefault.jpg Install Landscape Fabric — French Drain Installation Line the excavated trench with permeable landscape fabric, often referred to as 'geotextile fabric'. Ensure the fabric covers the bottom and sides of the trench, with enough overlap at the top to fold over the top layer of stone later. This fabric prevents soil and sediment from mixing with the drainage stone, which would otherwise clog the drain over time and reduce its effectiveness. Secure the fabric temporarily with landscaping pins or rocks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4O8Tmz_pCYo 2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11266-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hms1xg291T0/hqdefault.jpg Line Trench with Landscaping Fabric — French Drain Installation Line the entire trench with landscape fabric. This fabric is crucial for preventing dirt, tree roots, and silt from entering and clogging the drain pipe, ensuring the system's longevity and effectiveness. When laying the fabric, ensure you leave approximately 10 inches of excess fabric on each side of the trench. This extra material will be used later to wrap around the pipe and gravel, creating a protective barrier. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hms1xg291T0 12 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11267-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Add a Base Layer of Gravel — French Drain Installation Once the trench is dug to the correct dimensions and slope, add a 3-inch layer of gravel to the bottom. This base layer provides initial drainage and helps to stabilize the perforated pipe that will be laid on top of it. Spread the gravel evenly using a shovel to ensure a consistent depth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11267-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PcpFixS88Io/hqdefault.jpg Add Initial Gravel Layer — French Drain Installation Using a shovel, load gravel into a wheelbarrow from your gravel pile. Transport the wheelbarrow to the trench and carefully dump a uniform layer of gravel onto the landscape fabric at the bottom of the trench. This initial layer, often referred to as a 'bedding layer', provides a stable and permeable base for the drainage pipe. Aim for a layer approximately 3-6 inches deep. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PcpFixS88Io 75 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11267-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hms1xg291T0/hqdefault.jpg Pour Gravel Bedding — French Drain Installation Pour approximately three inches of gravel into the bottom of the trench, directly over the laid landscape fabric. This layer of gravel will serve as a stable bedding for the perforated drain pipes. Ensure the gravel is evenly distributed and compacted to provide a solid foundation for the pipe system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hms1xg291T0 8 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11268-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_4LtmDRAT34/hqdefault.jpg Install Perforated Drainage Pipes — French Drain Installation Unroll the perforated drainage pipe (4-inch corrugated pipe with sock) and lay it into the fabric-lined trench, connecting it to the T-connector previously installed. Ensure all connections are secure by pushing the new pipe firmly onto the T-connector until it clicks past the internal notches. The video shows using a small amount of electrical tape to temporarily secure the connection points, though the primary stability will come from the backfill materials. Ensure the perforated side of the pipe is facing downwards to effectively collect groundwater. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_4LtmDRAT34 49 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11268-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Place the Perforated Pipe — French Drain Installation Carefully place the perforated drainage pipe directly on top of the 3-inch gravel base in the trench. Ensure that the drain holes on the pipe are facing downward. This orientation allows water to seep into the pipe from the bottom and sides, effectively collecting it from the surrounding soil and directing it away. Adjust the pipe as needed to follow the trench's slope. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11268-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BzXV68UWkKE/hqdefault.jpg Install Perforated Drain Pipe — French Drain Installation A perforated drain pipe, typically a 4-inch diameter corrugated pipe (a yellow pipe is visible in the video), is carefully positioned on top of the gravel base. The pipe features small perforations (holes) along its length, which allow collected water to enter the pipe. It is crucial to lay the pipe with a continuous, slight slope (e.g., 1/8 to 1/4 inch per foot) towards the designated outlet or discharge point, ensuring gravity efficiently moves the water away from the property. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BzXV68UWkKE 4 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11269-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BzXV68UWkKE/hqdefault.jpg Cover Pipe with Gravel — French Drain Installation After the perforated pipe is in place, more clean drainage gravel is added to the trench, completely covering the pipe and filling the trench to an appropriate level. This upper layer of gravel provides additional capacity for water collection and filtration, further protecting the drain pipe from compaction and allowing water to easily reach the perforations. The amount of gravel depends on the trench depth and pipe diameter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BzXV68UWkKE 8 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11269-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Add More Gravel Over the Pipe — French Drain Installation After the perforated pipe is in place, add another 3 to 5 inches of gravel on top of and around the pipe. This layer encases the pipe, providing an excellent filtration medium that allows water to easily reach the pipe while preventing fine soil particles from clogging the drain holes. Evenly distribute the gravel using a shovel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11269-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hdQmzqKgtEc/hqdefault.jpg Fill Trench with Drainage Gravel — French Drain Installation Carefully shovel or, if available, use heavy machinery like a skid steer to dump drainage gravel (e.g., washed stone, clear stone) into the trench. Completely cover the laid drain pipes with the gravel, ensuring the gravel fills the trench up to a few inches below the ground surface. The gravel provides an open void space for water to percolate through and into the perforated pipes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hdQmzqKgtEc 6 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11270-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hdQmzqKgtEc/hqdefault.jpg Wrap Fabric and Backfill Trench — French Drain Installation Once the gravel has been placed, carefully fold the excess geotextile fabric from the sides over the top of the gravel, creating a complete wrap around the drainage material. This prevents soil from mixing with the gravel and clogging the system from above. Finally, backfill the remainder of the trench with the excavated soil and replace any removed sod, restoring the landscape to its original appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hdQmzqKgtEc 5 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11270-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/V17s91XeqvU/hqdefault.jpg Wrap Gravel with Fabric — French Drain Installation To complete the 'gravel burrito', take one side of the geotextile fabric that is extending up from the trench and pull it tightly over the gravel. Then, overlap it with the fabric from the other side, ensuring a secure and substantial overlap. Use landscaping pins to fasten the overlapped fabric firmly in place. The main objective is to create a tight encapsulation around the gravel and pipe, preventing any surrounding soil or dirt from infiltrating the drainage system. Any sod replaced on top will further help in holding the fabric in its position over time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/V17s91XeqvU 53 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11270-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PcpFixS88Io/hqdefault.jpg Line Trench with Landscape Fabric — French Drain Installation Unroll the commercial-grade landscape fabric along the length of the prepared trench. Ensure that there is enough excess fabric on both sides to completely wrap over the drainage pipe and gravel layer. Use a utility knife to cut the fabric to the required length. Carefully lay the fabric into the trench, pressing it against the sides and bottom, making sure there are no large wrinkles that could impede water flow. Temporarily secure the fabric in place with small rocks or bricks to prevent it from shifting while you add other materials. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PcpFixS88Io 32 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11271-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/stdBRIDYmDQ/hqdefault.jpg Cover the Trench — French Drain Installation Once the landscape fabric is securely in place, carefully fold any excess fabric over the top of the gravel to fully enclose the drain system. Then, backfill the trench with the excavated topsoil. Alternatively, you can use decorative stone to cover the trench, which can also serve an aesthetic purpose in your landscape. Compact the soil lightly as you backfill to prevent significant settling later. The finished drain should blend seamlessly with the surrounding landscape. https://www.youtube.com/embed/stdBRIDYmDQ 5 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11271-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QKEenuoYFDQ/hqdefault.jpg Backfill the Trench — French Drain Installation With the drainage system, insulation, and fabric in place, begin backfilling the trench. Use the excavator to carefully dump the excavated soil back into the trench, on top of the landscape fabric. The soil fills the remaining space up to the final grade level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QKEenuoYFDQ 45 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11271-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BzXV68UWkKE/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Final Grade — French Drain Installation The final step involves backfilling the trench with the previously excavated soil. As highlighted by the narrator, this 'repurposed dirt' is often used to 'crown the backyard' by creating a slight mound or positive slope over the drain line. This ensures that surface water naturally flows towards the drain system while also allowing for the restoration of the yard's aesthetics, where grass or other landscaping can be replanted over the covered drain. Proper compaction and grading are essential to prevent settling and ensure effective surface water management. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BzXV68UWkKE 11 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11272-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ggN1xW_3lls/hqdefault.jpg Establish Water Discharge Point — French Drain Installation At the lowest point of the drainage system, ensure the drain pipe exits the trench and discharges water to a safe and suitable area away from the driveway, such as a garden bed, a natural slope, or a storm drain connection. The end of the pipe can be fitted with a simple drain grate or left open, depending on the discharge location. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ggN1xW_3lls 2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11272-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wPkMB7qlUSo/hqdefault.jpg Connect to Storm Drain and Backfill — French Drain Installation Connect the perforated French drain pipes to a solid discharge line, preferably using "high octane solid armor pipe" for its durability. This solid pipe extends to a storm drain catch basin. At the catch basin, perform a "core tap" by drilling a hole through the concrete pipe of the basin and securely connecting the discharge line. Use "QUIKRETE Hydraulic WATER-STOP CEMENT" to seal the connection, as it sets quickly and is code-compliant for waterproof seals in wet conditions. Once the entire system (pipes and rock) is encapsulated by the geotextile fabric, backfill the trench with turf grass or desired landscaping materials. The grass roots will grow through the fabric, and surface water will drain into the French drain via capillary action, ensuring comprehensive drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wPkMB7qlUSo 161 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11272-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EfCKP_NPDGA/hqdefault.jpg Identify and Prepare the Drain Exit Point — French Drain Installation The first critical step for any French drain is to establish a suitable exit point. In this case, the crew identifies an existing storm sewer inlet near the street. A worker climbs into the storm sewer to inspect and confirm the presence of an existing drain pipe that can be utilized. They find a pipe already connected to the storm sewer, which they will tap into. The pipe identified has a small amount of water dripping from it, confirming its function. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EfCKP_NPDGA 101 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11273-1 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EV3Kc_JjZjw/hqdefault.jpg System Testing and Verification — French Drain Installation After the installation is complete, the final and critical step is to test the French drain system to ensure it functions effectively. The video explicitly demonstrates this by using a garden hose to introduce a significant amount of water directly into the gravel trench along the driveway. The purpose of this test is to observe if the water quickly infiltrates the drain, flows through the pipes, and discharges efficiently into the retention pond. This confirms that the system can handle stormwater as intended, despite any previous installation challenges. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EV3Kc_JjZjw 2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11273-2 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LHHohA1digI/hqdefault.jpg Test System — French Drain Installation Test the drainage system by running water through it to ensure proper flow and identify any leaks or blockages. The video shows using a hose to run water into the catch basin and observing its movement through the system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LHHohA1digI 73 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11273-3 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OanjbeWWY5s/hqdefault.jpg Test the French Drain — French Drain Installation After all the construction work is complete, the video shows a test run of the French drain during rainfall. Water from the gutter downspout flows into the newly installed catch basin, which is now surrounded by white rocks for aesthetics. The water then exits the corrugated pipe into a recycled concrete runoff piece, successfully diverting the water. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OanjbeWWY5s 329 2026-10-10T14:26:55.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11259-1 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Rise and Run — Stair Tread Sizing Using the total rise measurement (109 inches), calculate the individual rise and run for each step. Start by dividing the total rise by a standard comfortable riser height (e.g., 7 inches). This gives an approximate number of risers (109 / 7 = 15.5). Since you can't have half a riser, round to the nearest whole number (15 risers). Divide the total rise by the number of risers to get the exact individual riser height (109 / 15 = 7.26 inches, or approximately 7 1/4 inches). Then, determine the run (tread depth). A common rule for comfortable stairs is that the rise plus the run should total between 17 and 18 inches. With a 7 1/4 inch rise, a 10-inch run gives 17 1/4 inches, which is within the comfortable range. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 37 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11259-2 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CArhhrGWBsg/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Stair Dimensions — Stair Tread Sizing Begin by establishing the total height of the staircase. For example, the presenter measures a total height of 1600mm. Then, determine your ideal step height (riser), which is approximately 180mm. Divide the total height by the ideal step height (e.g., 1600mm / 180mm = 8.8). Since you cannot have a fractional step, round up to the nearest whole number (e.g., 9 steps). Finally, divide the total height by the rounded number of steps to get the exact riser height for each step (e.g., 1600mm / 9 = 177.7mm). https://www.youtube.com/embed/CArhhrGWBsg 26 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11259-3 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/n_8nz6fLxS0/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Stair Dimensions — Stair Tread Sizing The first step involves calculating the precise dimensions for your stair stringers. You will need the total height from the subfloor to the finished floor of the upper level. For this project, the height is 110 1/2 inches. The video recommends using a specialized construction calculator, such as the Construction Master Pro, to easily determine the riser height. Input the total floor-to-floor height (110.5 inches) as the 'rise' into the calculator, then press the 'stair' button to automatically calculate the individual riser height. In this case, it's 7 3/8 inches. If you don't have a construction calculator, you can use simple math by dividing the total height by your desired number of treads to find an approximate riser height. Also, consider your desired tread width, usually using a 2x12 for the treads themselves, and plan for a nosing (overhang) of approximately 1 1/4 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/n_8nz6fLxS0 134 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11261-1 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eshpVa6P3mY/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Verify Rise and Run — Stair Tread Sizing According to the Uniform Building Code, the 'rise' (vertical height from the top of one step to the top of the next) should be 8 inches for residential homes. The 'run' (horizontal surface area or tread depth) should be 9 inches. The host uses a tape measure to illustrate these critical dimensions on an unfinished staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eshpVa6P3mY 14 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11261-2 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CqcgKulah_I/hqdefault.jpg Understand Rise and Run Concepts — Stair Tread Sizing The two fundamental components of a stair stringer, 'rise' (vertical distance) and 'run' (horizontal distance of the step), are defined. The video highlights the importance of ensuring all steps have the same rise for safety and code compliance. It briefly touches upon typical code regulations for maximum rise (around 8.5 inches) and minimum run (around 9 inches), advising viewers to check local building codes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CqcgKulah_I 18 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11261-3 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Rise and Run — Stair Tread Sizing Using the total rise measurement (109 inches), calculate the individual rise and run for each step. Start by dividing the total rise by a standard comfortable riser height (e.g., 7 inches). This gives an approximate number of risers (109 / 7 = 15.5). Since you can't have half a riser, round to the nearest whole number (15 risers). Divide the total rise by the number of risers to get the exact individual riser height (109 / 15 = 7.26 inches, or approximately 7 1/4 inches). Then, determine the run (tread depth). A common rule for comfortable stairs is that the rise plus the run should total between 17 and 18 inches. With a 7 1/4 inch rise, a 10-inch run gives 17 1/4 inches, which is within the comfortable range. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 37 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11262-1 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Fa50maWQh_I/hqdefault.jpg Adjusting Stringer Layout for Nosing and Riser Thickness — Stair Tread Sizing In this final instructional segment, the video advises on how to compensate for both the stair nosing and the thickness of the riser when laying out and cutting the stair stringers. For instance, if risers are 3/4 inch thick and there's a 1-inch nosing, these dimensions must be factored into the stringer's starting point and subsequent cuts. The presenter stresses that to achieve the desired 10-inch tread run with a 1-inch nosing, everything (the stringer layout) needs to be shifted back by the combined dimension of the nosing and the riser thickness (e.g., 1 inch + 3/4 inch = 1 and 3/4 inches) to ensure correct overall stair alignment and prevent stair tread run from being too short. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Fa50maWQh_I 24 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11262-2 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Fa50maWQh_I/hqdefault.jpg Defining Tread Run and Introducing Nosing — Stair Tread Sizing This segment explains the critical distinction between the 'tread run' (the horizontal distance between risers, typically 10 inches in the example) and the 'effective tread depth' when nosing is present. The video demonstrates that a 1-inch nosing is added to the front of the tread, causing it to overhang the riser below. This means the actual surface you step on (the effective tread depth) becomes 11 inches, even though the structural 'tread run' dimension (measured from riser face to riser face) remains 10 inches. The presenter highlights this as a common point of confusion that needs careful consideration in stair design. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Fa50maWQh_I 64 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11262-3 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Fa50maWQh_I/hqdefault.jpg Visualizing Tread Run with Nosing Overhang — Stair Tread Sizing The video visually reinforces the concept of nosing by showing the 3D stair model with the 1-inch overhang added to each tread. It reiterates that while the tread run (the space occupied by the stringer's horizontal cut) is 10 inches, the actual walking surface of the tread extends an additional 1 inch due to the nosing, making the total horizontal stepping surface 11 inches. The visual helps solidify the understanding that the stringer's dimensions (the cuts for the treads and risers) are based on the tread run, not the effective tread depth that includes the nosing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Fa50maWQh_I 51 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11260-1 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Tread Sizing Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11260-2 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c7jak2TlfDA/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Bullnose Stair — Stair Tread Sizing Begin by measuring the total length and width of the bullnose stair. First, measure from the inside corner of the wall around the bullnose curve to the outer corner, bending the tape measure around the nose. This measurement is 28 inches. Next, measure the length of the entire stair, wrapping the tape measure along the base where the carpet will be installed. This measurement is 57 inches. Finally, measure the width of the stair tread, which is 29 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c7jak2TlfDA 34 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11260-3 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Sizing Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11258-1 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Sizing Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11258-2 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Sizing With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11258-3 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4fML3-Qwo_c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Hardwood Pieces — Stair Tread Sizing Accurate measurement is critical for a professional finish. Use a stair tread template tool to precisely measure the length and angle of each stair tread and riser. This tool allows you to transfer the exact dimensions and angles to your hardwood flooring material. Mark the cut lines onto the hardwood pieces using a pencil. Use a miter saw for cross-cutting the wood to the determined lengths and angles. For ripping cuts, such as adjusting the width of a tread or riser, utilize a table saw. Ensure all cuts are clean and precise to minimize gaps during installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4fML3-Qwo_c 29 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11263-1 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Stair Tread Sizing The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11263-2 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Staircase Height (Method 1) — Stair Tread Sizing With the laser level providing a horizontal reference on the top landing, the presenter uses a measuring tape to measure the total vertical height from this reference line down to the finished bottom floor level. He notes that the bottom floor already has granite installed, so the measurement is taken directly from its surface. This single measurement gives the total vertical rise of the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 46 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11263-3 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Stair Tread Sizing Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-10-10T14:04:23.407Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11254-1 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Adjust Layout for Riser and Nosing — measure turning treads Recognize that the initial floor marks represent the *face* of the stringer where the riser attaches. However, for a finished staircase, you need to account for the thickness of the riser material and the nosing (overhang) of the tread. Re-adjust your layout by measuring from the initial stringer-face mark. For example, if your riser is 3/4 inch thick and your nosing is 1 inch, you would move your effective plumb line back by 1 and 3/4 inches (3/4" + 1"). This new line will represent the *front edge of the nosing* for each step. Use the level again to verify the stringer against these adjusted marks. This ensures that when the risers and treads are installed, the nosing aligns correctly with the desired tread depth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 90 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11254-2 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hwZQcHGafM0/hqdefault.jpg Mark Tread Dimensions for Curved Sections — measure turning treads After placing the pre-cut nosing in position, the installer makes new marks along the edges where the tread will meet the wall and the nosing. He uses a measuring tape to measure the dimensions, such as 5 inches on one side and 10 and 5/8 inches on the other, for the long board. To ensure a straight cut line between these two points, he applies diagonal tape and then marks the line with a pencil using a beam level as a guide. This method helps account for any irregularities in the wall or the staircase itself. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hwZQcHGafM0 269 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11254-3 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hwZQcHGafM0/hqdefault.jpg Mark Nosing Depth on Tread — measure turning treads Using a small piece of nosing (or a pre-made template), the installer marks a line on the existing stair tread. This line indicates the precise depth where the nosing will sit. This is crucial for establishing the front edge reference point for subsequent measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hwZQcHGafM0 15 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11256-1 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oAUp2WuHH6M/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Total Run — measure turning treads To find the total horizontal length (total run) of the staircase, multiply the individual tread depth by the number of treads. For example, if you have 13 treads, each 10 inches deep, the total run would be 13 * 10 inches = 130 inches (10 feet 10 inches). This measurement is crucial for laying out the full length of the staircase on the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oAUp2WuHH6M 99 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11256-2 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4hPhnwlLmtw/hqdefault.jpg Calculate the Total Horizontal Distance — measure turning treads The final dimension to calculate is the total horizontal distance (run) of the staircase. The formula applied in the video is to multiply the 'Number of Steps' (which was previously established as being equal to the number of risers, 22) by the assumed Tread dimension (12 inches). This yields 22 * 12 inches = 264 inches. To convert this measurement into feet, 264 inches is divided by 12 inches per foot, resulting in a total horizontal distance of 22 feet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4hPhnwlLmtw 38 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11256-3 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zhQpS9I0qy8/hqdefault.jpg Calculate Unit Run and Total Run — measure turning treads Now, determine the 'unit run' (the depth of each step) and the 'total run' (the overall horizontal distance the stairs will cover). A golden rule for comfortable stairs is that the sum of the unit rise and unit run should be between 17 to 18 inches. Given a unit rise of 7.25 inches, a unit run of approximately 10 to 10.5 inches would be suitable (e.g., 10.25 inches). To find the total run, count the number of rises determined in the previous step (e.g., 8 rises). The number of treads (or unit runs) will typically be one less than the number of rises. So, for 8 rises, there will be 7 runs. Multiply the unit run by the number of runs to get the total run. For example, 10.25 inches (unit run) * 7 (runs) = 71.75 inches total run. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zhQpS9I0qy8 86 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11257-1 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — measure turning treads Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11257-2 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — measure turning treads After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11257-3 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2rkFnsTztog/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Risers — measure turning treads Use a stair tread jig to measure the exact dimensions of each riser. Place the jig on the stair, adjust its arms to fit snugly against the side stringers and the top of the current tread, and then lock it in place. Take the jig to your riser material (e.g., plywood), place the jig on it, and mark the cut lines with a pencil. Repeat this process for each riser, as each stair will likely have slightly different dimensions. Cut the marked riser pieces using a miter saw, carefully aligning the blade with your pencil lines. Label the back of each cut riser with its corresponding stair number and its top edge to maintain organization, as each piece is unique. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2rkFnsTztog 131 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11255-1 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U_qBttWNBfI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Staircase Height (Method 1) — measure turning treads With the laser level providing a horizontal reference on the top landing, the presenter uses a measuring tape to measure the total vertical height from this reference line down to the finished bottom floor level. He notes that the bottom floor already has granite installed, so the measurement is taken directly from its surface. This single measurement gives the total vertical rise of the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U_qBttWNBfI 46 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11255-2 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eO6MiVsV_tg/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Total Rise — measure turning treads The first step in calculating stairs is to determine the total rise, which is the vertical distance from finished floor to finished floor. The presenter measures from the top of the main floor's subfloor (rim) to the upstairs subfloor. He gets 118 and 5/8 inches. Since the finished floor on both levels will be 3/4 inch thick (hardwood downstairs, carpet and pad upstairs), he adds 3/4 inch to his measurement using a construction calculator (BuildCalc). The final total rise is 119 and 3/8 inches. This ensures that all individual risers will be equal in height after the finished floor is installed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eO6MiVsV_tg 61 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11255-3 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — measure turning treads The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11253-1 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure turning treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11253-2 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measure turning treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11253-3 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — measure turning treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11252-1 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure turning treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11252-2 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure turning treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11252-3 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — measure turning treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-10T12:44:25.466Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11248-1 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — measurements Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11248-2 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — measurements After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11248-3 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — measurements First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11251-1 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measurements Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11251-2 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — measurements After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11251-3 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RrQRqpVvgBc/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Install New Treads (Standard Steps) — measurements After the risers are in place, the standard rectangular treads are installed. Each tread, the horizontal surface of a step, must be measured accurately for its length and depth, including any overhang over the riser. The video displays wooden treads, likely pre-finished engineered wood or solid wood, chosen for their durability and aesthetic appeal. Using a measuring tape and pencil, mark the dimensions onto the new tread material. A miter saw or circular saw can be used for precise straight cuts. Apply construction adhesive to the top of the existing sub-tread and the top edge of the newly installed riser. Carefully place the new tread, ensuring it is flush against the back wall and has an even overhang. Press firmly and optionally secure with a nail gun and finishing nails for a robust installation. Work from the bottom step upwards to maintain alignment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RrQRqpVvgBc 4 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11249-1 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measurements Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11249-2 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measurements To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11249-3 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measurements Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11250-1 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — measurements Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11250-2 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measurements Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11250-3 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — measurements With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-09T21:55:22.059Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11245-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uML0-cY19Gk/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Water Levels and Baffle Filter — Septic System Inspection Begin by safely locating and accessing the inspection points for your septic tank's drain field, which typically involves uncovering a lid. The video demonstrates two key observations. First, observe the water level at the exit pipe that leads from the septic tank to the drain field. For a drain field to be functioning properly, the water level should visibly remain *below* this exit pipe. This indicates that effluent is successfully being absorbed by the drain field. Second, locate the sanitary tee, also referred to as a baffle filter, on the other side of the tank (this is where effluent enters the drain field system). The water level should be *at* the level of this sanitary tee and should not rise *above* it. Additionally, visually confirm that the baffle filter itself is not clogged with solids or debris. If both conditions are met—the water level is below the exit pipe and at the baffle filter without any signs of clogging—then your septic tank drain field is considered to be working correctly, allowing the treated wastewater to drain out and percolate effectively into the surrounding soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uML0-cY19Gk 38 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11245-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DISVD4qlRWw/hqdefault.jpg Inspecting the Outlet Baffle — Septic System Inspection The presenter lifts a small, broken concrete lid to reveal the septic tank's outlet baffle. He points into the open hole, explaining that the effluent flows under a concrete wall (baffle) and then enters the drain field pipes. He reiterates that during the tank pumping, water was observed flowing back out of the drain field and into the tank, further confirming the drain field's poor absorption or blockage. He also points out that the concrete baffle lid itself was broken. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DISVD4qlRWw 20 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11245-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Perform Function and Flow Test — Septic System Inspection With both septic tank lids open, a function and flow test is performed to assess the condition of the drain field. This test, while not explicitly detailed visually in the video, involves observing the water levels and flow within the tank and into the drain field. The goal is to ensure the drain field is functioning correctly, allowing wastewater to properly disperse into the soil and preventing backups. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11246-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Inspection Begin by inspecting the septic tank lids. Ensure that all lids are accessible, not buried under excessive growth, and securely fastened with bolts. Unbolted lids can be extremely dangerous due to the risk of falling into the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 46 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11246-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Secure and Maintain Access Lids — Septic System Inspection Ensure all septic system access lids are easily accessible for maintenance and inspection, but most importantly, securely fastened to prevent accidental entry. These lids should ideally include a safety screen underneath to prevent small animals or children from falling into the tank. This is a critical safety measure for any household with a septic system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 9 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11246-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bJEm5WGfbYM/hqdefault.jpg Install the New Septic Tank Lid — Septic System Inspection With the concrete lid successfully cast and demolded, it is carefully lowered back into the septic tank opening. The presenter uses lifting straps, connected to the embedded rebar handle, to safely maneuver the heavy concrete lid into its final position. The custom fit ensures a tight seal, which is crucial for preventing odors and maintaining the integrity of the septic system. He notes that while it might not be a 'perfect' fit due to the irregular hole, it's a tight seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bJEm5WGfbYM 46 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11247-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-prDWaoX6Vc/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Landscaping — Septic System Inspection Using the wheelbarrow, backfill the excavated area around the newly installed septic riser with the previously removed soil. Gently compact the soil to remove large air pockets, but avoid excessive force that could damage the riser. Then, apply a layer of fresh topsoil, spread grass seed (such as EZ Seed), or lay sod over the area to blend the riser into the surrounding landscape. Finally, water the newly backfilled and seeded/sodded area thoroughly to promote growth and help the soil settle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-prDWaoX6Vc 16 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11247-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K-5z7D-LDZo/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Restore Site — Septic System Inspection After all septic system and drain field components are installed, carefully backfill the trenches and around the septic tank. Ensure that only the access risers of the septic tank remain visible at ground level. Smooth out the disturbed soil, and if desired, prepare the area for revegetation (e.g., planting grass) to restore the landscape to its original appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K-5z7D-LDZo 14 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11247-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0Z5KAIuMIBQ/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Finish — Septic System Inspection After the risers are installed and the lids are secured, the final step is to backfill the excavated areas with the displaced dirt. The presenter smooths out the soil around the newly installed risers. He suggests that the grass will eventually grow back over the area. Alternatively, grass seed can be applied for faster regrowth. This leaves the septic tank access points level with the ground, making future pumping significantly easier without the need for extensive digging. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Z5KAIuMIBQ 32 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11239-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Locate Septic Tank Access Points — Septic System Inspection The first step involves carefully locating the buried inlet and outlet access lids of the septic tank. This typically requires probing the ground and then digging to expose the lids. The video shows the process of excavating the soil to reveal these access points. Special care must be taken to avoid damaging any existing buried utility lines or irrigation systems during excavation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11239-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KiThznLYJ2U/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Access Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Inspection Begin by locating the septic tank lids. In this case, the customer had already dug up the outlet side lid. If the lids are buried, carefully excavate the soil around the access points until both the inlet and outlet lids are exposed and accessible. The video shows a shovel being used to clear soil around the access point. Note that septic tank lids can be heavy and require care when opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KiThznLYJ2U 11 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11239-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0Z5KAIuMIBQ/hqdefault.jpg Excavate Around Septic Lids — Septic System Inspection Once the outline of the septic tank is marked, use a shovel to carefully dig around the perimeter of the existing concrete lids. The goal is to fully expose the top surface of the lids and ensure enough space around them to comfortably work. The video shows digging a square-shaped hole around each lid. Once uncovered, a tape measure is used to measure the diagonal length of the lid to ensure the correct size riser will fit. The measurement shown is approximately 27-27.5 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Z5KAIuMIBQ 35 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11240-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Open Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Inspection Once the septic tank lids are exposed, carefully remove them to access the tank's chambers. The video demonstrates using a tool, possibly a small pickaxe or lid lifter, to pry open the lids. Special attention is required for the outlet side lid, as irrigation lines may be closely situated. The operator carefully shimmies off the lid to avoid breaking these lines. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 20 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11240-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Inspection Begin by inspecting the septic tank lids. Ensure that all lids are accessible, not buried under excessive growth, and securely fastened with bolts. Unbolted lids can be extremely dangerous due to the risk of falling into the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 46 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11240-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j5ORNB1Yp3g/hqdefault.jpg Remove Septic Lid — Septic System Inspection To access the filter, locate the screws around the perimeter of the middle septic lid. Use an impact driver to efficiently remove these screws. The presenter explicitly mentions using a Makita brand impact driver, but any suitable impact driver or even a hand screwdriver can be used. Once all screws are removed, carefully lift the lid to expose the inside of the septic tank and the filter. Observe the water level; it should be below the filter line. If it's above, do not pull the filter out, as this indicates a potential issue with the leach field that needs to be resolved before cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j5ORNB1Yp3g 73 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11241-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j5ORNB1Yp3g/hqdefault.jpg Remove and Clean the Filter — Septic System Inspection With the lid removed, locate the septic filter. It typically has a T-shaped handle at the top. Grab the handle, give it a slight twist, and then slowly pull the entire filter assembly out of the tank. Carry the filter to an area with a garden hose. Using the hose with a nozzle, thoroughly spray down the filter, removing all accumulated sludge and debris. Continue spraying until the filter is visibly clean. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j5ORNB1Yp3g 69 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11241-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j5ORNB1Yp3g/hqdefault.jpg Introduction and Locate Filter — Septic System Inspection The presenter begins by emphasizing the importance of regularly cleaning the septic filter, ideally every six months, to prevent debris buildup and ensure proper functioning of the septic system's leach field. He then directs the viewer to locate the septic system's access points in their yard, which are typically three lids. The filter is usually found under the middle lid. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j5ORNB1Yp3g 33 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11241-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j5ORNB1Yp3g/hqdefault.jpg Remove Septic Lid — Septic System Inspection To access the filter, locate the screws around the perimeter of the middle septic lid. Use an impact driver to efficiently remove these screws. The presenter explicitly mentions using a Makita brand impact driver, but any suitable impact driver or even a hand screwdriver can be used. Once all screws are removed, carefully lift the lid to expose the inside of the septic tank and the filter. Observe the water level; it should be below the filter line. If it's above, do not pull the filter out, as this indicates a potential issue with the leach field that needs to be resolved before cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j5ORNB1Yp3g 73 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11242-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Pump Septic Tank Regularly and Monitor Sludge — Septic System Inspection Regularly pump out your septic tank to remove accumulated sludge and scum. The frequency of pumping depends on your household's usage, typically ranging from every three to five years. When a professional pumper services your tank, ask them to record the depth of the sludge layer. This information allows you to monitor your system's waste accumulation rate and make informed decisions about future pump-out schedules, promoting proactive maintenance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 14 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11242-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Inlet Sanitary Tee and Scum Layer — Septic System Inspection Inspect the inlet sanitary tee inside the septic tank. Look for any large accumulations of plastics, wipes, or other non-flushable items that could cause blockages or system issues. Also, check the scum layer for any unusual items that indicate improper flushing habits in the household. The presence of a mature scum layer is generally a good sign of proper system function. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 49 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11242-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PUP8_IY-Sgs/hqdefault.jpg Explain Septic Tank Function (First Chamber) — Septic System Inspection Wastewater containing both liquid and solids from all household drains (including toilets, bathtubs, and kitchen sinks) enters the first chamber of the septic tank. A T-shaped baffle at the inlet directs the incoming waste downwards, allowing heavier solids to settle at the bottom, forming a 'sludge layer'. Concurrently, a 'scum layer' of lighter materials (like oils, grease, and non-biodegradables) floats to the top. Crucially, natural biological action, involving anaerobic bacteria and enzymes, occurs in this sealed, oxygen-deprived environment. These microorganisms work to break down the solids, converting them into a more liquid state called effluent. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PUP8_IY-Sgs 52 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11244-1 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DISVD4qlRWw/hqdefault.jpg Inspecting the Outlet Baffle — Septic System Inspection The presenter lifts a small, broken concrete lid to reveal the septic tank's outlet baffle. He points into the open hole, explaining that the effluent flows under a concrete wall (baffle) and then enters the drain field pipes. He reiterates that during the tank pumping, water was observed flowing back out of the drain field and into the tank, further confirming the drain field's poor absorption or blockage. He also points out that the concrete baffle lid itself was broken. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DISVD4qlRWw 20 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11244-2 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TylNB3sm9Zg/hqdefault.jpg Understanding the Baffle (Plastic Tee) Function — Septic System Inspection The host proceeds to open the middle inspection cover, revealing a crucial internal component: a plastic tee, also known as a baffle. This tee is strategically placed to ensure that only clarified liquid effluent can flow from one chamber to the next. It prevents floating solids (scum layer) and heavier settled solids (sludge layer) from exiting the chamber prematurely, protecting the downstream leach field from clogging. The water level typically sits around the middle of this tee. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TylNB3sm9Zg 75 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11244-3 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RBwcWvGoULc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Lids and Inspect Baffles — Septic System Inspection Using a specialized tool like the T&T Top Popper, the heavy concrete septic tank lids are carefully lifted. Below the main lid, internal baffle caps are also removed. This provides clear access to both the outlet and inlet baffles for visual inspection. The inspection reveals significant root intrusion and sludge in the outlet line, indicating a severe blockage, and confirms the presence of an existing inlet baffle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RBwcWvGoULc 63 2026-10-09T14:29:16.002Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11232-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HD6qpg_bk6o/hqdefault.jpg Safety First: Disconnect Power and Water — Ice Maker Repair Before attempting any troubleshooting or repairs on your refrigerator, ensure that the appliance is completely disconnected from its power source by unplugging it from the electrical outlet. Additionally, locate the water shut-off valve, typically found underneath the kitchen sink, and turn it to the 'off' position to stop the water supply to the refrigerator. These steps are crucial to prevent electrical shock and water damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HD6qpg_bk6o 26 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11232-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kZOhPcmUEaI/hqdefault.jpg Prioritize Safety: Disconnect Power and Water — Ice Maker Repair Before attempting any repair on your refrigerator, it is imperative to prioritize safety. Begin by either unplugging the appliance directly from the wall outlet or by turning off the corresponding circuit breakers in your home's electrical panel. This action prevents any risk of electrocution during the repair. Additionally, locate the water supply line connected to your refrigerator (typically found behind or beneath the unit) and turn off the water valve to prevent leaks or water damage during the icemaker repair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kZOhPcmUEaI 18 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11232-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/A3t4euFb7XI/hqdefault.jpg Safety Precautions and Power Disconnection — Ice Maker Repair Before beginning any repair on the ice maker, prioritize safety. First, unplug the appliance's power cord from the electrical outlet. It's also recommended to use an outlet tester to ensure the outlet has proper voltage before reconnecting the appliance later. Additionally, turn off the water supply to the ice maker to prevent leaks or spills during the repair process. This will typically involve turning a shut-off valve on the water line connected to the appliance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/A3t4euFb7XI 13 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11233-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7d-h99qDrsw/hqdefault.jpg Access Ice Maker Unit — Ice Maker Repair After turning off the power, open the freezer door of the refrigerator. Inside, you will find storage trays or shelves, typically holding items like food or the ice bucket itself. Carefully remove these two trays to expose the ice maker unit, which is usually located higher up within the freezer compartment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7d-h99qDrsw 6 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11233-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a0dsFxaDHHw/hqdefault.jpg Access and Remove Ice Maker Unit — Ice Maker Repair Begin by opening the refrigerator's freezer door. Remove any contents that might obstruct access to the ice maker, including the ice storage bin. Locate the ice maker unit, which is typically mounted inside the freezer compartment. Identify the two screws that secure the ice maker to the freezer wall or ceiling. Using a screwdriver, remove these two screws. Carefully pull the ice maker unit forward, then locate the electrical connector at the back. Press the release tab on the connector and gently unplug the ice maker unit from the main power supply. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a0dsFxaDHHw 24 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11233-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jUxfDC9AUzI/hqdefault.jpg Access Ice Maker Compartment — Ice Maker Repair Open the refrigerator's left French door completely. Locate the ice maker compartment door within the freezer section and open it by pulling its handle. This action provides full access to the ice maker and its components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jUxfDC9AUzI 14 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11234-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PHcOXXj-1Dc/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Ice Maker Tray — Ice Maker Repair Next, open the freezer and visually inspect the ice maker tray. Determine if there is any ice currently in the tray or if it's completely dry. The presence or absence of ice helps narrow down the problem: if there's ice but it's not being ejected, the issue is likely with the harvesting mechanism. If the tray is dry, the problem is more likely related to the water supply or fill cycle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PHcOXXj-1Dc 11 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11234-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J82zE-5USw4/hqdefault.jpg Inspect for Ice Buildup — Ice Maker Repair With the ice maker unit removed, the presenter inspects it for any visible ice buildup in the fill cup or other components. He finds no obvious ice. He then points to the fill tube inside the freezer compartment, where water enters the ice maker. He plans to use a hairdryer to blow hot air into this tube to see if any water drips out, which would indicate a frozen blockage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J82zE-5USw4 78 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11234-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4tobtM_Mf2w/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Ice Maker Components and Arm Tension — Ice Maker Repair Open the freezer door and remove the ice bin to gain access to the ice maker. Observe if there are any ice cubes present in the bin, which indicates the ice maker was previously working to some extent. Next, locate the shut-off arm on the ice maker. This arm typically moves up and down to signal whether the ice bin is full. Gently move the shut-off arm to check for proper tension and ensure it moves freely without resistance. The 'out' position of the arm signifies that the ice maker is in the 'on' state. If there's no tension or the arm feels loose, inspect the spring attached to the arm, as it might have come off or become damaged. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4tobtM_Mf2w 23 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11235-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OWgZg8BD21o/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Test Water Inlet Valve — Ice Maker Repair The water inlet valve controls the flow of water into the refrigerator for both the ice maker and dispenser. It is usually located at the back of the machine behind an access panel, though some models may have it in the fresh food section. Locate the ice maker solenoid, which is the component connected to the ice maker's water supply line. Remove the wiring harness connected to the solenoid. Set your digital multimeter to continuity mode. Touch one probe to each terminal of the solenoid. A working solenoid should show continuity. If there is no reading, the solenoid has failed. Failures can also be caused by a jammed plunger or a clog. Additionally, check the ice maker fill tube (a plastic tube on the back of the unit that guides water into the ice mold). If it's frozen, this usually indicates a small leak in the water valve's diaphragm, which can block water flow to the ice maker. If the solenoid fails or the diaphragm leaks, the entire water inlet valve will need to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OWgZg8BD21o 96 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11235-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TXIAwE2uMVE/hqdefault.jpg Check Water Supply and Tubing — Ice Maker Repair To troubleshoot water delivery, first, pull the refrigerator forward to access its back panel. Locate the manual shut-off valve for the water supply and turn it off. Disconnect the water inlet line from the water fill valve. Then, carefully turn the manual shut-off valve back on briefly to verify that there is adequate water pressure from the household supply. Next, inspect the outlet tubing that runs from the water fill valve to the ice maker. Most refrigerator water valves have a 1/4-inch tubing that runs to the ice maker. Disconnect this tubing and attempt to blow air through it to ensure it is not restricted or frozen. If air passes through, the tubing is fine. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TXIAwE2uMVE 55 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11235-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9B8XoBaykhg/hqdefault.jpg Check Water Inlet Line — Ice Maker Repair As a final step, if all other troubleshooting attempts have failed, pull your refrigerator away from the wall to access the back. Inspect the water inlet line (a thin tube) that connects to the refrigerator for any damage, kinks, or blockages. A damaged or kinked line will prevent water from reaching the ice maker. If damage is found, the water line will need to be repaired or replaced to restore water flow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9B8XoBaykhg 50 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11236-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OWgZg8BD21o/hqdefault.jpg Test Ice Maker Components — Ice Maker Repair If the general checks don't resolve the issue, the ice maker unit itself may have failed. There are various styles of ice makers, but two common types are the half-moon style and the flex-tray style. The video demonstrates testing a popular Whirlpool half-moon design. Remove the cover of the ice maker unit to expose the control module. Use a digital multimeter set to ohms to test the following components: 1. **Mold Heater**: Insert probes into the 'L' and 'H' holes. A good reading should be around 72 ohms. 2. **Motor**: Insert probes into the 'L' and 'M' holes. A good reading should be between 4400 and 8800 ohms. 3. **External Water Valve Solenoid**: Insert probes into the 'V' and 'N' holes. A good reading should be around 300 ohms. 4. **Mold Thermostat**: Insert probes into the 'T' and 'H' holes. When the thermostat is cold (below 15°F), it should show continuity (a reading of 0.0 ohms or close to it). After allowing it to warm up (above 15°F), it should no longer show continuity (an 'OL' or open loop reading). If any of these tests yield no reading or a reading significantly different from the expected values, the component has likely failed and the ice maker will need repair or replacement. For newer models, consult your manual for built-in test procedures, often involving a test button or paperclip insertion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OWgZg8BD21o 231 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11236-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HD6qpg_bk6o/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Crescent-Style Ice Maker Components with Multimeter — Ice Maker Repair For crescent-style ice makers, several components can fail. First, remove the ice maker's cover to expose the control module. Set your digital multimeter to ohms (Ω) mode. 1. **Test the Mold Heater**: Place one probe into the 'L' hole and the other into the 'H' hole. A healthy mold heater should read approximately 72 ohms. If the reading is 'OL' (Overload) or significantly different, the heater is faulty and needs replacement. 2. **Test the Motor**: Place one probe into the 'L' hole and the other into the 'M' hole. The motor should register a reading between 4400 and 8800 ohms. An 'OL' reading indicates a failed motor. 3. **Test the External Water Valve Solenoid**: Place one probe into the 'V' hole and the other into the 'N' hole. This test checks the external water valve solenoid, which should show approximately 300 ohms. An 'OL' reading means the solenoid has failed. 4. **Test the Mold Thermostat (Cold)**: Place probes into the 'T' and 'H' holes. When the ice maker is below 15°F, the thermostat should show continuity (a low resistance reading, typically near 0 ohms). If it does not, the thermostat is faulty. 5. **Test the Mold Thermostat (Warm)**: Allow the ice maker to warm up above 15°F. Once warm, retest the 'T' and 'H' holes. The thermostat should now show no continuity ('OL' reading). If it still shows continuity, the thermostat is faulty. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HD6qpg_bk6o 163 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11236-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VCUgA5T5ASw/hqdefault.jpg Perform Electrical Component Testing — Ice Maker Repair The ice maker module contains specific test points that allow you to check various components using a voltmeter. For the Mold Heater, set your multimeter to measure resistance (Ohms). Insert the meter leads into the 'L' and 'H' terminals. A reading of around 72 Ohms indicates a functional mold heater. For the Timer Motor, insert the meter leads into the 'L' and 'M' test points. You should get a reading of approximately 4400 Ohms of resistance. For the Water Valve, it can be tested from the 'N' and 'V' test points. A reading between 150-350 Ohms of resistance typically means the water valve is operational. This is a useful test as it can be performed without removing the refrigerator. For the Thermostat, it can be tested from test points 'T' to 'L'. Remember that ice must be present in the ice maker's mold for the thermostat to close; merely being cold is not sufficient. If ice is present, you should get a reading of no resistance (a closed circuit). https://www.youtube.com/embed/VCUgA5T5ASw 94 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11237-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uBOp6oe4O78/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Clean Ice Maker Tray — Ice Maker Repair If the ice maker is frozen, it must be completely thawed before inspection. First, remove the ice bucket assembly if it's present. Next, disconnect the wire harness that supplies power to the ice maker by carefully pulling it apart. Loosen or completely remove the mounting screws that secure the ice maker to the freezer wall. Gently lift the ice maker to detach it from its mounting brackets. Once removed, you can let it sit at room temperature for a period to allow any remaining ice to melt naturally, or use hot water for faster melting. After all ice has melted, wipe the entire ice maker unit thoroughly dry with a cleaning cloth. Carefully inspect the ice maker tray for any visible cracks or holes that could be causing leaks. Also, check the Teflon finish inside the ice molds for signs of wear, as a degraded finish can cause ice cubes to stick and lead to spillage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uBOp6oe4O78 64 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11237-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yAVPsjrIAOY/hqdefault.jpg Clean Water Inlet — Ice Maker Repair Locate the water inlet and its associated sensor, which often become clogged with mineral deposits and gunk. This buildup prevents the machine from accurately detecting water levels, leading to improper filling and poor ice production. Use a small brush, such as a toothbrush or a straw brush, to thoroughly scrub away all visible gunk from the water inlet channel and the sensor. Once thoroughly scrubbed, rinse the area completely using clean water, possibly from a spray bottle, to ensure all debris is flushed away. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yAVPsjrIAOY 15 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11237-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/W1asrLiN9-k/hqdefault.jpg Check Drain Cap and Cleaning Status — Ice Maker Repair Open the door of the ice maker. Inside, locate the drain cap, typically at the bottom of the reservoir. Check if the drain cap is securely tightened. A loose drain cap can lead to improper drainage and affect ice production. Also, observe the 'Clean' light on the control panel. If this light is illuminated, it indicates that the unit requires cleaning. Ice makers should be cleaned every nine months to maintain optimal performance and prevent mineral buildup that can hinder ice production. https://www.youtube.com/embed/W1asrLiN9-k 23 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11238-1 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uBOp6oe4O78/hqdefault.jpg Final Reconnection and Test — Ice Maker Repair Once all adjustments and components have been reinstalled, open the water shut-off valve to restore the water supply to the refrigerator. Plug the power cord back into the wall outlet to reconnect electricity. Carefully slide the refrigerator back into its original position, ensuring there are a couple of inches of space between the back of the refrigerator and the wall. This space is essential for proper airflow around the condenser coils. Finally, test the ice maker and refrigerator for proper operation. Allow the ice maker to cycle a few times and produce several batches of ice to confirm that the leak has been resolved and that ice is being produced correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uBOp6oe4O78 29 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11238-2 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8pT5YOurG8w/hqdefault.jpg Reconnect and Test Refrigerator Functionality — Ice Maker Repair With the new ice maker securely installed, push the refrigerator back into its original position against the wall. Reconnect the water supply line that was previously turned off, ensuring all connections are tight to prevent leaks. Finally, plug the refrigerator back into the electrical outlet. Close the freezer door and allow the refrigerator to operate for a few hours. Periodically check the ice bucket to confirm that the new ice maker is filling with water, freezing, and automatically dropping ice cubes. A successful installation will result in a full ice bucket and the normal operational sounds of the ice maker. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8pT5YOurG8w 102 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11238-3 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j8K9_d4qazw/hqdefault.jpg Final Checks and Test — Ice Maker Repair After all components have been reinstalled, close the ice maker door. Reconnect the power cord to the electrical outlet and turn on the water supply. Allow the ice maker to cycle and begin producing ice. Monitor the unit to ensure it is functioning correctly and producing ice as expected. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j8K9_d4qazw 5 2026-10-08T14:27:37.771Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11225-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HeIT8gTwAP8/hqdefault.jpg Remove and Organize Cabinet Components — Cabinet Painting Begin by emptying all contents from your cabinets. Systematically remove all cabinet doors, drawers, and any associated hardware, such as hinges and pulls. To keep track of these components for reassembly, place all removed hardware (like screws, hinges, and pulls) into small, individually labeled plastic bags. Concurrently, use blue painter's tape and a marker to label each detached door and drawer with a unique identifier (e.g., 'A', 'B', 'C') and place a corresponding label inside the cabinet frame where it belongs. This meticulous labeling prevents confusion during reinstallation. Once disassembled and labeled, transport all doors and drawers to a dedicated workspace, such as a garage or basement, as the entire project is expected to span several days. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HeIT8gTwAP8 33 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11225-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i-eDlk2rlN4/hqdefault.jpg Remove and Label Cabinet Doors & Hardware — Cabinet Painting Begin the project by removing all cabinet doors and any existing hardware, such as hinges and doorknobs. It is crucial to label each door and piece of hardware with a numbering system (e.g., 'door 1', 'door 2') using a marker and painter's tape. This meticulous labeling ensures that each component can be reinstalled in its original position later, preventing confusion, especially when working on an entire kitchen with multiple doors and drawer faces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i-eDlk2rlN4 66 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11225-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xkzx-2MSJDk/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Cabinets for Painting — Cabinet Painting First, completely empty all contents from your kitchen cabinets. Next, use a screwdriver to remove all cabinet doors and drawers. Once removed, use the screwdriver to take off all hinges, knobs, pulls, and any other hardware from the doors and drawers. As you remove each piece, use painter's tape to label it with its original location (e.g., 'upper left', 'bottom right drawer') so it can be reattached to the exact same spot later. Place all hardware into storage bags, labeling the bags to correspond with the cabinet pieces. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xkzx-2MSJDk 24 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11226-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xkzx-2MSJDk/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Protect Surfaces — Cabinet Painting Before cleaning, use painter's tape to protect all wall edges, countertops, and adjacent surfaces from paint. Spread plastic sheeting over your countertops, floor, and any appliances near the cabinets. Next, prepare your cleaning solution by mixing TSP (Trisodium Phosphate) with water in a spray bottle according to product instructions. Wearing safety glasses and rubber gloves, spray down all cabinet frames, doors, and drawers. Wipe down all surfaces thoroughly with a painter's rag to remove any grease, grime, or kitchen stains. Allow the surfaces to dry completely before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xkzx-2MSJDk 14 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11226-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WtYrlVnVRVw/hqdefault.jpg Clean Cabinet Surfaces — Cabinet Painting Thoroughly clean all surfaces of the cabinet doors, drawers, and boxes to be painted. Kitchen cabinets are prone to grease, food residue, and other grime, which must be completely removed for proper paint adhesion. Use a cleaner like Trisodium Phosphate (TSP) mixed with water, or a phosphate-free premixed cleaner. Apply the solution, let it sit for a few minutes, then wipe it off with a clean towel. Ensure no residue is left behind. For stubborn grime in corners, a 6-in-1 paint tool can be used gently to scrape it off. Protect countertops, backsplashes, and appliances with drop cloths or plastic sheeting before cleaning. Remember to wear safety gloves and glasses during this step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WtYrlVnVRVw 109 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11226-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/goT49x5bkR0/hqdefault.jpg Clean All Cabinet Surfaces with TSP — Cabinet Painting Prepare a cleaning solution using TSP (Trisodium Phosphate) cleaner concentrate mixed with water in a spray bottle. Thoroughly spray and wipe down all cabinet frames, doors, and drawer fronts to remove any grease, dirt, and grime. This is a crucial step to ensure proper paint adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/goT49x5bkR0 17 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11227-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xkzx-2MSJDk/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Clean Surfaces — Cabinet Painting After cleaning, thoroughly sand all cabinet surfaces. For flat areas of doors and drawers, use a sheet sander with 150-grit sandpaper to remove any existing finish and create a profile for primer adhesion. For more intricate areas and inside corners, use a 150-grit sanding sponge. Once all surfaces have been sanded, use a clean, damp painter's rag to wipe away all grit and dust. This ensures a clean surface for primer application and a smooth final finish. Wear a dust mask and safety glasses during sanding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xkzx-2MSJDk 10 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11227-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HeIT8gTwAP8/hqdefault.jpg Protect Work Area and Sand Surfaces — Cabinet Painting Before sanding, meticulously protect your work area. Lay down a drop cloth over all countertops and floor areas to shield them from dust and paint. Use blue painter's tape to carefully mask off any adjacent walls, soffits, electrical outlets, and areas that you do not wish to paint. Once the area is protected, proceed to sand all cabinet frames, doors, and drawers. Use either medium-to-fine grit sandpaper folded in half or a sanding sponge for better grip and access to corners. Always sand with the grain of the wood, aiming to scuff the first layer of finish rather than removing it entirely. This creates a good 'tooth' for the primer to adhere to. When sanding laminate sides of cabinet frames, ensure you apply light pressure to avoid damaging the edges. After all surfaces have been sanded, thoroughly clean up the resulting dust using a vacuum cleaner, followed by a tack cloth to pick up any remaining fine particles, ensuring a perfectly smooth and dust-free surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HeIT8gTwAP8 49 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11227-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LvaMmBCJz8s/hqdefault.jpg Sand Cabinet Surfaces — Cabinet Painting Once the cabinets are clean and dry, sand all surfaces that will be painted. Use either 220-grit or 150-grit sandpaper to lightly scuff the surface. This process creates a slightly rough texture that allows the primer to adhere better, ensuring a durable and long-lasting finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LvaMmBCJz8s 4 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11228-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HeIT8gTwAP8/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Patch Surfaces — Cabinet Painting Thoroughly clean all cabinet frames (and later the detached doors and drawers) using a mixture of water and TSP cleaner. This general-purpose cleaner is highly effective at dissolving grease, grime, and dirt, which are particularly prevalent in kitchen environments. After cleaning, conduct a detailed inspection of all surfaces for any imperfections such as holes, gouges, or dings. Apply wood filler directly into these damaged areas and use a flexible putty knife to smooth the filler flush with the surface. Allow the wood filler to dry completely as per the manufacturer's instructions. Note that it's generally not necessary to fill existing hardware holes if you plan to reuse the same hardware. However, if you're installing new hardware with a different screw pattern, you will need to fill the old holes and drill new ones after the filler has dried and hardened. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HeIT8gTwAP8 50 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11228-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/owxA_6XdzW8/hqdefault.jpg Fill Blemishes on Carcass — Cabinet Painting Inspect the cabinet carcass for any blemishes, such as indents, chips, or holes. Use DAP Premium Wood Filler to fill these imperfections. Apply the wood filler with a putty knife, working it into every divot until the surface is smooth. Allow the filler to dry completely as per product instructions, then lightly sand the filled areas until they are flush with the surrounding surface. This wood filler is water-based, a 3-in-1 filler/sealer, fast-drying, and can also act as a grain filler if you desire to hide the natural wood grain before painting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/owxA_6XdzW8 44 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11228-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tscF34we9QM/hqdefault.jpg Repair Imperfections with Wood Putty — Cabinet Painting Inspect all cabinet surfaces for any scratches, dents, or holes. Use wood putty to fill in these imperfections. Apply the wood putty with a putty knife, ensuring it fills the defect completely. Smooth out the putty with the putty knife. If you plan to change hardware with a different screw pattern, fill in the old screw holes with wood putty; otherwise, you can skip filling existing hardware holes if using the same hardware. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tscF34we9QM 20 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11229-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WtYrlVnVRVw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Primer-Sealer — Cabinet Painting Apply a coat of primer-sealer to all cabinet surfaces. The primer plays a crucial role by enhancing paint adhesion, ensuring a smoother finish with fewer topcoats, preventing wood grain from showing through the paint, and increasing the overall durability of the new paint job. A water-based primer is recommended for water-based latex paint. Use a foam roller for flat surfaces and a foam brush for edges and corners. If you are changing the cabinet color drastically (e.g., from red to white) or painting bare natural wood, priming is essential. If the cabinets are already painted and you're not changing the color significantly, you might be able to skip priming. If painting with a specific color, ask to have your primer tinted to a similar shade to improve coverage. Always check the drying time specified on the primer can before proceeding to the next step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WtYrlVnVRVw 84 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11229-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i-eDlk2rlN4/hqdefault.jpg Apply Primer Coat — Cabinet Painting Now that the surfaces are clean and prepped, it's time to apply a water-based interior primer. Pour the primer into a paint tray. Use a mini roller to cover large, flat areas of the cabinet doors and frame efficiently. For smaller details, edges, and areas that the roller cannot reach, switch to a paintbrush. Apply a thin, even coat of primer. A slight 'see-through' effect is acceptable after the first coat, as subsequent finish coats will provide full opacity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i-eDlk2rlN4 65 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11229-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eZrvtm49fEo/hqdefault.jpg Apply Primer — Cabinet Painting Apply at least one coat of high-quality primer, such as Zinsser BIN Ultimate Stain Blocker, to all cabinet surfaces. Use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a small foam roller for larger flat surfaces. Primer ensures better paint adhesion, provides a uniform base, and helps block wood grain and stains from bleeding through the topcoat. Allow adequate drying time between coats as per product instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eZrvtm49fEo 15 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11230-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HeIT8gTwAP8/hqdefault.jpg Paint Cabinet Doors and Drawers — Cabinet Painting Apply the final paint coats to the cabinet doors and drawer fronts, following the same methodology used for the cabinet frames and primer application. Begin by using an angled paintbrush to carefully cover all detailed areas, edges, and any recessed panels or routed designs. It's crucial to feather out the paint thinly to prevent drips or thick spots. Once the intricate areas are painted, switch to a mini foam roller to apply paint to the larger, flat surface areas. Always work with the grain of the wood for a smoother appearance. As with previous steps, remember to 'lay off' the paint with a final, light pass of a dry roller to remove any tool marks and achieve a uniform finish. Allow one side of the door or drawer to dry completely according to the paint manufacturer's instructions before flipping it over and painting the other side. Some individuals may opt to apply an additional coat of water-based polyurethane over the acrylic latex paint for enhanced durability and even easier cleaning. If doing so, ensure the polyurethane is also allowed to cure fully as directed by its manufacturer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HeIT8gTwAP8 38 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11230-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nHMFNj3i5j0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Paint to Cabinets — Cabinet Painting Now, apply the selected paint to your primed cabinet surfaces. The technique for painting is similar to priming: use even strokes with either a paintbrush for detailed areas or a roller for larger flat surfaces. When applying paint, finish each stroke by feathering it back into the wet paint to avoid harsh lines. It's crucial not to rush this process. Allow the paint to completely cure according to the specific dry times recommended by the paint manufacturer. As a 'pro tip,' between coats, lightly go over the surface with a dry roller or brush to remove any paint buildup or imperfections, which helps achieve a smoother finish. After the first coat has dried completely, apply a second coat of paint for full coverage and durability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nHMFNj3i5j0 52 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11230-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xkzx-2MSJDk/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Coat of Paint — Cabinet Painting After the primer has fully dried, begin applying the first thin coat of your chosen semi-gloss paint. Use a foam roller for the main flat surfaces of the cabinet doors and drawers, and a chip brush for any difficult-to-reach areas on the doors and the cabinet frames. Apply the paint in light, even strokes to avoid drips and achieve a smooth finish. Once the first coat is complete, allow it to dry for at least 3 hours, or as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Applying less paint in each coat will result in a faster and more even drying time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xkzx-2MSJDk 6 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11231-1 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/S9_dMKJTFxQ/hqdefault.jpg Re-attach Hardware — Cabinet Painting Once all painted and clear-coated surfaces are thoroughly dry and cured, it's time to re-attach the hardware. Using your labeled plastic bags, identify the correct hinges and handles for each cabinet door and drawer. Screw the hinges back onto the cabinet doors and the handles onto both the doors and drawers using a cordless drill. If you filled existing holes and are installing new handles, you may need to mark and pre-drill new pilot holes for precise placement before securing them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/S9_dMKJTFxQ 6 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11231-2 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xkzx-2MSJDk/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Cabinets — Cabinet Painting Once the final coat of paint has dried completely, carefully remove all painter's tape and plastic sheeting. Retrieve your labeled hardware and storage bags. Using your screwdriver, reattach all knobs, pulls, and hinges to their corresponding cabinet doors and drawers. Finally, mount the cabinet doors and drawers back onto the cabinet frames in their original positions, referring to your labels from Step 2. Take care not to scratch the newly painted surfaces during reassembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xkzx-2MSJDk 13 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11231-3 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i-eDlk2rlN4/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Hardware and Doors — Cabinet Painting Once all paint coats are completely dry and cured, reassemble the cabinet. Begin by reattaching the hinges to the cabinet doors and then to the cabinet frame. Next, reinstall the doorknobs or pulls. Refer to the numbering system you created in the first step to ensure each door and piece of hardware is returned to its precise original location for a perfect fit and alignment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i-eDlk2rlN4 14 2026-10-07T14:28:07.700Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11214-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5lkKN3wjnug/hqdefault.jpg Protect Surfaces from Dust — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After removing the baseboards, protect all surrounding surfaces from dust. Use blue painter's tape to tape off all doors, windows, cabinets, vents, stairwells, and fireplaces. Cover larger surfaces like cabinets, windows, and firepaces with plastic sheeting, securing the edges with blue tape. This will prevent sanding dust from infiltrating other areas and significantly reduce cleanup time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5lkKN3wjnug 47 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11214-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q00T2eZDc5g/hqdefault.jpg Remove Trim and Isolate Room — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Before any sanding begins, perform essential prep work. First, remove the quarter round (also known as shoe molding) from around the baseboards. This allows sanding equipment to get as close as possible to the walls. Next, clear the room of all furniture and other items. Finally, seal off the room from the rest of the house using plastic sheeting and painter's tape to contain dust, and set up a fan in a window to exhaust dust to the outside. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q00T2eZDc5g 28 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11214-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7cgemtIMM1k/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Room for Sanding and Ensure Safety — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Before beginning any sanding, prepare the room to mitigate dust. Apply painter's tape over all outlets, light switches, door handles, and any other surfaces you want to protect from sawdust. Consider placing a box fan in a window to create negative pressure and help exhaust dust from the room. Crucially, wear a high-quality dust mask (like an N95 respirator) to protect your lungs from inhaling fine wood dust, which can be present in very high quantities during the sanding process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7cgemtIMM1k 17 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11215-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_ds2ZtA_jXY/hqdefault.jpg Drum Sander Test Run and Operation — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Attach a 100-grit sandpaper belt to the drum sander. This is the least abrasive grit and is ideal for a test run to get a feel for the machine's power and handling. When turning on the drum sander, ensure the drum is raised off the floor. Once it's turned on, move it forward before slowly lowering the drum onto the floor. When reaching the end of a pass or the far wall, raise the drum off the floor before stopping the machine. Failure to follow this sequence can lead to gouges and damage to the floor. The drum sander is powerful and pulls forward due to the spinning drum, so be prepared to pull back slightly as you operate it. Overlap each pass by a couple of inches to ensure even sanding; use a metal rod on the machine as a visual guide for consistent overlap. For more challenging areas or those with significant damage, you may need to start with a coarser grit, such as 36-grit, as observed during the project. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_ds2ZtA_jXY 245 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11215-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q00T2eZDc5g/hqdefault.jpg Aggressive Sanding with Drum Sander (Coarse Grits) — Hardwood Floor Refinishing For floors with significant wear or deep scratches that require complete finish removal, switch to a drum sander (like the American Sanders EZ-8). Begin with a very coarse 36-grit sandpaper. The key to operating a drum sander is constant motion to prevent gouging. Lower and raise the drum onto the floor gently as you move, similar to an airplane landing and taking off. Sand from the center of the room, working outwards. Overlap each pass by 30-50% to ensure thorough and even sanding. Always sand with the direction of the floorboards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q00T2eZDc5g 82 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11215-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/72OCeMLjp08/hqdefault.jpg Rough-sand the Floor — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Choose the appropriate sander based on the condition of your floor. If the floor is badly worn, start with a drum sander (like the American Sanders EZ-8 shown in the video). Use a coarse sandpaper grit, such as 36 or 40. Practice on a sheet of plywood first to get accustomed to the machine. Move the drum sander with the grain of the floorboards, covering three to four-foot strokes at a time. Overlap each stroke by at least one-third of the belt width. After the initial coarse sanding, switch to a finer grit, like 60, and repeat the process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/72OCeMLjp08 39 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11216-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q00T2eZDc5g/hqdefault.jpg Sand Edges with Edging Sander — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After sanding the main floor with the drum sander, use an edging sander to reach the areas close to the baseboards that the larger machine couldn't access. The edging sander is designed with a disc that protrudes from the housing and features swivel wheels for control, allowing you to sand precisely along the perimeter of the room. Just like with the drum sander, progress through the same series of grits (36, 60, and 100) to match the smoothness of the rest of the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q00T2eZDc5g 28 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11216-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sMPgJnfcC8I/hqdefault.jpg Edge and Corner Sanding — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After completing the main floor area with the drum sander, it's time to tackle the edges and corners. Use the edging sander for the perimeter of the room. Hold the edging sander firmly with both hands and work your way around the edge of the room, ensuring consistent pressure and movement. For the areas that the edging sander cannot reach, such as tight corners and detailed spots, use the corner sander to achieve a uniform finish across the entire floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sMPgJnfcC8I 18 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11216-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i3r7pQBnbhE/hqdefault.jpg Edge and Detail Sanding — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Once the main floor areas have been sanded with the drum sander, switch to an edge sander (such as an American Sanders machine shown in the video). Attach a coarse-grit sanding disc to the edge sander. Carefully maneuver the edge sander along the perimeter of the room, up to walls, around door frames, and near stair railings. This ensures that all areas missed by the larger drum sander are thoroughly sanded. For very tight corners or detailed areas, you may need to use a detail sander or perform hand sanding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i3r7pQBnbhE 2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11217-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mg9Di-jLiFU/hqdefault.jpg Buffing with Orbital Sander — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After the completion of the belt sanding stages, the floor is further refined using a rotary or orbital floor sander, commonly referred to as a buffer. This machine is equipped with a combination of 60, 80, and 100-grit buffing pads. The buffing process is essential for eliminating any subtle swirl marks or minor imperfections that may have been left by the belt sander, polishing the wood to an exceptionally smooth and even surface. This meticulous step ensures the floor is perfectly prepared and optimized for the final application of the protective finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mg9Di-jLiFU 2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11217-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bWVZUD2O9Xo/hqdefault.jpg Medium Sanding (80 Grit, With Grain) — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Transition to a finer grit of sandpaper by replacing the 40-grit paper on the drum sander with 80-grit sandpaper. Perform another full sanding pass over the entire floor, moving with the grain. This step is essential for removing the deeper scratches left by the 40-grit paper and beginning to smooth the floor to a more refined finish, preparing it for the final buffing stages. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bWVZUD2O9Xo 11 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11217-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9BT9L-B8_g8/hqdefault.jpg Fine Sanding/Buffing — Hardwood Floor Refinishing A different type of floor machine, appearing to be a lighter-duty orbital sander or buffer, is used for a finer sanding pass. This step is crucial for smoothing out any remaining imperfections from the coarse sanding and preparing the wood for stain and finish application. The floor, now free of old finish, gets a final refinement to ensure a perfectly smooth surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9BT9L-B8_g8 4 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11218-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fjCG4CMGYGk/hqdefault.jpg Fine Grit Sanding and Smoothing — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After filling the gaps and any necessary re-sanding, continue to sand the floor using progressively finer grits. The goal is to achieve a very smooth surface, ultimately finishing with a 150-grit sandpaper. This multi-stage sanding ensures all previous scratches and imperfections are removed, leaving the wood perfectly prepared for staining and lacquering. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fjCG4CMGYGk 17 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11218-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9BT9L-B8_g8/hqdefault.jpg Fine Sanding/Buffing — Hardwood Floor Refinishing A different type of floor machine, appearing to be a lighter-duty orbital sander or buffer, is used for a finer sanding pass. This step is crucial for smoothing out any remaining imperfections from the coarse sanding and preparing the wood for stain and finish application. The floor, now free of old finish, gets a final refinement to ensure a perfectly smooth surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9BT9L-B8_g8 4 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11218-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/75Ul_SQEwSg/hqdefault.jpg Final Floor Sanding with Orbital Sander (100-Grit then 120-Grit) — Hardwood Floor Refinishing For the final sanding stage, use a Power Drive orbital sander (sometimes referred to as a multi-disc sander or floor buffer with sanding pads). Start with 100-grit sandpaper to achieve a uniform scratch pattern across the entire floor, blending the drum-sanded and edge-sanded areas. Then, switch to an even finer 120-grit sandpaper for the final pass, leaving the red oak floor exceptionally smooth and ready for staining. Ensure thorough vacuuming after this step to remove all dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/75Ul_SQEwSg 3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11219-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pdxx7k7PRcs/hqdefault.jpg Thorough Dust Removal — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After all sanding stages are complete and the wood filler is dry, it is absolutely critical to remove every trace of dust and debris from the floor. Use a powerful vacuum cleaner to thoroughly vacuum the entire floor, ensuring you reach into corners, along edges, and even vacuum baseboards and windowsills where dust may have settled. Follow this with a dry mop or tack cloth to meticulously pick up any remaining fine dust particles that the vacuum might have missed. This meticulous cleaning ensures a pristine surface, preventing any dust from getting trapped in the stain or finish, which could result in a rough, uneven, or cloudy appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pdxx7k7PRcs 13 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11219-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TZm6ryVDlNY/hqdefault.jpg Clean Dust — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Thoroughly vacuum the entire floor to remove all sanding dust. Pay special attention to corners, edges, and any crevices. A shop vacuum with a brush attachment is ideal for this. After vacuuming, use a tack cloth or a slightly damp microfiber cloth to pick up any remaining fine dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TZm6ryVDlNY 14 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11219-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YxU886QDUek/hqdefault.jpg Thoroughly Clean and Remove All Dust — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Before applying any finish, it is absolutely critical to remove every speck of dust from the room. Begin by opening all windows and doors to create maximum ventilation and allow dust to escape the area. Then, use an electric leaf blower (a cordless, battery-operated one like the Makita BL 36V is highly recommended to avoid fumes and oil film) to blow dust off ceilings, walls, and all surfaces, directing it towards the open windows and doors. After this initial heavy dusting, use Clorox Triple Action Floor Dusters (or similar sticky dust cloths) attached to a flat head floor mop. These dusters are very sticky and effectively trap dust without leaving behind any chemical residue. Go over the entire floor surface at least twice with these dusters to pick up 100% of the remaining fine dust. Do NOT use a broom, as it will only push dust around and create airborne particles that can settle back on the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YxU886QDUek 83 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11220-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SoLn1vXY9AI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stain to Main Floor Area — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Begin applying the stain in a systematic manner, starting from a corner or edge of the room and working your way towards the exit. Dip the applicator pad into the stain, load it sufficiently, and then apply it to the floor. Use consistent pressure to push the stain into the wood grain. Immediately after applying the stain to a section, use a clean rag or towel to wipe off any excess. This ensures even penetration and prevents a sticky, grimy finish. Repeat this process for the entire floor area, moving methodically to avoid stepping on stained sections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SoLn1vXY9AI 53 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11220-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/72OCeMLjp08/hqdefault.jpg Clean Area then Apply Stain — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After all sanding is complete, thoroughly vacuum the entire floor to remove any remaining dust. Then, wipe the floor with a tack cloth to pick up any fine particles that the vacuum might have missed. Once clean, apply your chosen wood stain using a foam applicator pad, working with the grain of the wood. As you go, remove any excess stain with a clean cotton cloth or paper towels to prevent blotching and ensure an even color. https://www.youtube.com/embed/72OCeMLjp08 15 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11220-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m7Max2xBe80/hqdefault.jpg Apply Wood Stain — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Once the floors are completely clean and dry from the stripping process, apply your chosen General stain. Pour the stain onto an applicator cloth and rub it onto the wood. Immediately after application, use a separate, clean cloth to rub off any excess stain. This 'wax on, wax off' technique helps to ensure an even coat and proper absorption. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m7Max2xBe80 15 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11221-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcMm7Zw1P_0/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Finish Coat — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Apply the first coat of your chosen finish. The video uses a clear, matte acrylic polyurethane (Benjamin Moore Benwood 'Stays Clear' Flat W425 00). Use a foam brush for precise application in corners and along edges, and a 3/16-inch nap roller attached to an extension pole for the main floor areas. Work in small sections, typically one to two feet at a time, because water-based finishes dry very quickly. The first coat will often appear splotchy and uneven, and the wood fibers will swell, making the surface feel rough once dry. This is normal, so 'trust the process' and do not try to re-work areas once they start to dry. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcMm7Zw1P_0 69 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11221-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Vw8W-ZyE7Ak/hqdefault.jpg Apply Main Finish Coat — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After brushing the edges, use a T-bar applicator or a dedicated floor finish roller to apply the wood finish or sealant to the main body of the floor. Pour the finish directly onto the floor in a manageable line and spread it evenly using long, consistent strokes. Work across the room in sections, always maintaining a 'wet edge' to prevent lap lines. Apply according to the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and allow sufficient drying time between coats (typically 2-3 coats are applied). https://www.youtube.com/embed/Vw8W-ZyE7Ak 5 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11221-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/72OCeMLjp08/hqdefault.jpg Apply Finish — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After the stain has thoroughly dried (check product instructions for drying times), apply three to four coats of your chosen finish. Use a lamb's wool applicator for smooth, even application. Between each coat of finish, sand lightly with 220-grit sandpaper to eliminate heavy applications and imperfections, ensuring a perfectly smooth and durable surface. Clean any dust before applying the next coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/72OCeMLjp08 11 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11222-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WbKgxJDVeYo/hqdefault.jpg Sanding the First Coat — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After the first coat of finish has dried, the surface will likely feel rough due to dust settling on the wet finish and wood fibers swelling (raised grain) from absorbing the finish. To address this, gently hand sand the entire surface with 320-grit sandpaper. Apply light pressure to avoid sanding through the finish completely. The goal is to smooth out the surface and remove any raised fibers or dust nibs, creating a perfect base for subsequent coats. If the sandpaper 'gums up,' the finish isn't dry enough and needs more time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WbKgxJDVeYo 63 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11222-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/77nsY4EbVpg/hqdefault.jpg Sand Between Coats with Sanding Sponge — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Once the first coat of finish (either Polycrylic or Enduro-Var) is completely dry, lightly sand the surface using a P320-grade sanding sponge. The goal is not to remove the finish but to gently knock down any raised grain or dust nibs, creating a perfectly smooth surface for the next coat. Sand until the surface feels smooth to the touch, ensuring an even, dull appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/77nsY4EbVpg 33 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11222-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b5INnRBV_dY/hqdefault.jpg Sand Between Coats — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After the previous coat has dried, lightly sand the entire surface using 600 grit sandpaper wrapped around a sponge. The goal is to knock off any high spots or imperfections to ensure a perfectly smooth final finish. If the surface is particularly rough after the previous coat, you may opt to use a coarser grit like 320 or 400 sandpaper, but 600 grit is typically sufficient for intermediate sanding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b5INnRBV_dY 24 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11213-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2OrT2llvTTc/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Floor — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After sanding, the floor needs to be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dust particles. This is often done with a powerful shop vacuum and potentially followed by a damp mop (using only water, no cleaning solutions) to ensure a clean surface for the new finish. This step is crucial for the final appearance and adhesion of the finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2OrT2llvTTc 6 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11213-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dR8E5wUTaWw/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Floors by Removing Obstacles — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Before beginning any sanding, thoroughly inspect the entire hardwood floor area for any obstacles that might damage the sanding equipment or obstruct the process. This includes staples, nails, or any other protruding objects. For staples, use a flathead screwdriver to gently pry them up, then pliers to pull them out. For nails, either remove them or use a nail punch to drive their heads below the surface of the wood. Ensure the floor is completely clear to avoid costly damage to your sander and to achieve an even finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dR8E5wUTaWw 82 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11213-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fjCG4CMGYGk/hqdefault.jpg Thoroughly Clean the Floor — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Before applying any finishes, it is critical to thoroughly clean the floor to remove all traces of sanding dust and debris. Use a powerful industrial vacuum cleaner (such as a Festool Cleantec) to vacuum the entire floor surface. Pay close attention to corners, edges, and crevices between the floorboards to ensure no dust remains, as this could compromise the finish. Perform a final inspection to confirm the floor is pristine. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fjCG4CMGYGk 10 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11223-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_NU5cwh7UKE/hqdefault.jpg Allowing to Dry and Applying Subsequent Coats — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After the first coat of finish is applied, it must be allowed to dry completely according to the manufacturer's instructions. Drying times vary based on the type of finish, humidity, and temperature. Once dry, it's often recommended to lightly abrade (screen or buff) the floor with a fine-grit screen or sandpaper to ensure proper adhesion between coats and to smooth out any imperfections. After abrading, the floor should be thoroughly cleaned again with a vacuum and tack cloth before applying subsequent coats. Most hardwood floors benefit from at least two, often three, coats of finish for optimal durability and appearance. The video concludes with the first coat applied, indicating the start of the drying process and the need for subsequent steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_NU5cwh7UKE 1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11223-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7kJI8gMo7Io/hqdefault.jpg Light Sanding and Apply Subsequent Varnish Coats — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After the first coat has dried, a very light sanding with a fine-grit sanding screen or sandpaper (e.g., 150-220 grit) is often recommended to 'de-nib' the surface, removing any raised grain or small imperfections. The floor is then thoroughly vacuumed and wiped again to remove all sanding dust. This is followed by applying the second coat of varnish in the same manner as the first. Most projects require 2-3 coats for optimal durability and a deep, rich finish, with similar light sanding and cleaning between each coat. The video shows the continuous application process, implying multiple coats are being applied. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7kJI8gMo7Io 5 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11223-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AcMm7Zw1P_0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second and Third Finish Coats — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After buffing and thoroughly vacuuming, apply the second coat of finish using the same techniques as the first (foam brush for corners, roller for main areas, working in small sections). Allow this coat to dry completely. For enhanced durability and protection, it is highly recommended to apply a third coat. If applying a third coat, repeat the intermediate buffing and vacuuming steps before applying the final layer of finish. Ensure sufficient drying time between all coats and after the final coat before allowing foot traffic. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AcMm7Zw1P_0 11 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11224-1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p7Q8mc6P7YU/hqdefault.jpg Allow Finish to Cure — Hardwood Floor Refinishing After applying the final coat of protective finish, allow the floor to cure completely. While the surface may feel dry to the touch within hours, full cure time can range from 24 hours to several days or even weeks, depending on the product and environmental conditions (humidity, temperature). Avoid heavy foot traffic, furniture placement, or rug laying until the finish has fully hardened to prevent impressions or damage. Consult the finish manufacturer's instructions for specific cure times. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p7Q8mc6P7YU 3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11224-2 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pfjsI8HPKbE/hqdefault.jpg Final Curing and Room Reset — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Once the final coat of wood floor finish has been applied, it's crucial to allow the floor sufficient time to fully cure. While the floor may be dry to the touch within a few hours (as shown by the glossy, dry appearance at the end of the video), it typically takes several days, often 24 to 72 hours, for the finish to achieve its full hardness and chemical resistance. During this curing period, avoid placing heavy furniture, rugs, or walking on the floor with shoes. The final appearance should be a uniform, glossy, and protective surface, as demonstrated at the end of the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pfjsI8HPKbE 1 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11224-3 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kBdYPg_Tj68/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Cure — Hardwood Floor Refinishing Once the final coat of finish has been applied and is dry to the touch, conduct a final inspection of the floor to admire its restored beauty and protective sheen. While the floor may be dry to the touch, it is crucial to allow the finish to fully cure according to the manufacturer's recommendations (often several days to weeks) before placing furniture back or resuming heavy foot traffic to ensure maximum durability and prevent damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kBdYPg_Tj68 6 2026-10-06T14:31:14.036Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11205-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6UgLy-sBr1o/hqdefault.jpg Optimize Light Placement and Avoid Shadows — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Position the chosen vanity light fixture to provide effective, shadow-free illumination for grooming. A common rule of thumb for mounting is to place the light fixture between 36 and 48 inches off the top of the vanity countertop. This height range generally ensures the light hits the face directly and evenly, minimizing shadows. It is important to have the light source either directly on the mirror itself (if it's an integrated mirror light) or on the wall adjacent to the mirror. This 'front' lighting strategy is crucial because relying solely on overhead lighting or lights placed behind the user can cast undesirable shadows on the face, making tasks like shaving or applying makeup difficult and less precise. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6UgLy-sBr1o 24 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11205-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6UgLy-sBr1o/hqdefault.jpg Determine Optimal Light Height — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Before selecting a vanity light fixture, it is crucial to consider the height of the primary users. The ideal height for a vanity light ensures that it effectively illuminates the user's face without creating harsh shadows, accommodating both taller and shorter individuals. The goal is to choose a fixture or a mounting height that can be adjusted or is appropriate for the user's eye level to ensure it works well for them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6UgLy-sBr1o 10 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11205-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6UgLy-sBr1o/hqdefault.jpg Select Fixture Type Based on Vanity Size — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Select the type of vanity light fixture that best suits the size and style of your bathroom vanity. For smaller vanities, sconce lights, which are individual fixtures typically mounted on either side of the mirror, are often a better choice as they can provide focused illumination without overwhelming the space. For larger vanities, a bar light, which is a single fixture featuring multiple bulbs that spans a wider area, is generally more appropriate. This type of light ensures a more even and comprehensive illumination across the broader surface of a large vanity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6UgLy-sBr1o 8 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11206-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JshQHe5f3UM/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Power at Breaker — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Before any work begins on the electrical fixture, locate the main electrical panel for the house. Identify the circuit breaker that controls the power to the bathroom vanity light. Flip the breaker to the 'off' position to completely cut off electrical power to the fixture, ensuring safety during the removal and installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JshQHe5f3UM 12 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11206-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6drj3i4TvkU/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Power at Circuit Breaker — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Locate your home's main circuit breaker panel. Find the breaker labeled for the bathroom lighting or the specific circuit you are working on. In the video, the label says "Bathroom Lighting." Flip the identified circuit breaker to the 'OFF' position to completely cut power to the switch box. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6drj3i4TvkU 24 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11206-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Kfnb6BaFksM/hqdefault.jpg Disable Power and Remove Old Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Locate the circuit breaker panel and identify the breaker controlling the bathroom light fixture. Flip the breaker to the 'off' position. Return to the bathroom and use the light switch to confirm that the power to the fixture is indeed off. With the power confirmed off, proceed to unscrew and remove the old light fixture from the wall. The existing fixture is secured by Phillips head screws hidden behind decorative wooden buttons. Once the screws are removed, carefully detach the fixture, revealing the electrical box and wires behind it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Kfnb6BaFksM 77 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11207-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GSZX8lSlwOs/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Light Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Begin by removing the light bulbs from the existing fixture. If the bulbs are hot, wear gloves for protection. Next, unscrew the retaining screws that hold the shades in place and carefully remove them. Then, remove the suspending screws or nuts from the outer portion of the fixture to detach it from the wall, exposing the electrical wiring inside the junction box. Use your voltage tester (Volt pin) to double-check that the power is indeed off before touching any wires. Carefully untwist and remove the wire nuts connecting the fixture's wires to the house wiring. Finally, use a screwdriver to remove the screws holding the wall bracket to the electrical box, and remove the bracket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GSZX8lSlwOs 34 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11207-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jLhA6ntQC84/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Light Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting To remove the old light fixture, first carefully detach any decorative chrome pieces or rings that might be covering the bulb sockets. These usually twist or snap off. Once removed, locate and unscrew the Phillips head screws that secure the fixture's front casing. After the casing is removed, you will expose the electrical wiring. Disconnect the live (black), neutral (white), and ground (bare copper) wires by untwisting the wire nuts or unscrewing terminal connections. Finally, unscrew any remaining screws that hold the fixture's backplate directly to the wall to completely remove the old unit. Note that significant drywall damage behind the fixture may be revealed at this point, as was the case in the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jLhA6ntQC84 45 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11207-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SPC-6rxcPdo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Fixture Baseplate from Wall — Bathroom Vanity Lighting With all electrical connections disconnected, locate and unscrew the remaining screws that hold the old fixture's baseplate directly to the wall. As you remove the final screws, carefully support the fixture and pull it away from the wall, being mindful of the existing wiring bundle to avoid damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SPC-6rxcPdo 48 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11208-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GSZX8lSlwOs/hqdefault.jpg Install New Mounting Bracket — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Take the new wall bracket provided with your light fixture. Carefully slip the electrical wires from the wall's electrical box through the center opening of the new wall bracket. Position the bracket against the electrical box and secure it firmly using the supplied screws. Once the bracket is attached, use a level to ensure it is perfectly horizontal before fully tightening the screws. This ensures your new fixture will hang straight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GSZX8lSlwOs 11 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11208-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aBE32U08k-o/hqdefault.jpg Install New Mounting Plate — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Take the new light fixture's mounting plate (the silver part shown in the video) and align it with the electrical box on the wall. The presenter used a pencil to mark the screw holes, though they note it might not always be necessary if the holes align perfectly. Using a power drill, secure the mounting plate to the wall, starting with a middle screw and then adding the screws on each side. Ensure the plate is firmly attached and level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aBE32U08k-o 47 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11208-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XF4NdfyiDSc/hqdefault.jpg Replace Mounting Bracket — Bathroom Vanity Lighting After removing the old fixture, use a screwdriver to detach the old mounting bracket from the ceiling junction box. Take the new mounting bracket and thread the house wires through its center opening. Secure the new mounting bracket tightly to the junction box using the provided screws. Ensure it is firmly in place as it will support the new light fixture. A helpful tip is to check the weight capacity of your existing junction box; most can hold up to 50 pounds, but heavier fixtures may require replacing the box with a sturdier one. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XF4NdfyiDSc 13 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11209-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0XF1eb5Bnzg/hqdefault.jpg Wire the New Light Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting With the mounting bracket securely installed, you can now connect the new light fixture's electrical wires to the house wiring. Using your wire strippers, ensure that both the fixture's wires and the house's wires have about 1/4 to 1/2 inch of exposed metal at their ends. Twist the corresponding wires together: white to white (neutral), black to black (hot), and the bare copper (ground) wire from the fixture to the green ground screw on the mounting bracket (or directly to the house ground wire if available). Secure each twisted pair with a wire cap by twisting it clockwise until tight. For added security, you can optionally wrap each wire cap and connection with electrical tape, as demonstrated in the video. Ensure all connections are firm and no bare wire is exposed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0XF1eb5Bnzg 14 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11209-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3rvoMOYlYdY/hqdefault.jpg Wire Connections and Bracket Installation — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Match the wires from the new fixture to the corresponding house wires by color: white to white (neutral), black to black (hot), and the bare copper wire to the ground wire. Twist the matching wires together securely. If your old wire caps are damaged or you don't have enough, ensure you acquire new ones. Twist a wire cap onto each set of twisted wires, making sure it's tight and secure. Once all connections are made, carefully push the connected wires and wire caps neatly into the electrical box in the wall. Then, securely fasten the new mounting bracket to the electrical box using two screws, tightening them with a drill or screwdriver. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3rvoMOYlYdY 31 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11209-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/iiT8U30GhKw/hqdefault.jpg Wire the Light Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Before making any connections, ensure the power to the circuit is off at the breaker. Take the bare copper ground wire from the wall, the bare copper ground wire from the light fixture, and a short pigtail bare copper wire (if one is provided or if you cut one from scrap). Twist these three together, secure them with a wire nut, and then connect the remaining end of the pigtail to the green ground screw on the mounting bracket. This ensures the entire fixture is properly grounded. Next, connect the white (neutral) wire from the wall to the white (neutral) wire from the light fixture, twisting them together and securing them with a wire nut. Finally, connect the black (hot) wire from the wall to the black (hot) wire from the light fixture, twisting and securing with a wire nut. Neatly tuck all connected wires into the electrical box, ensuring they are not pinched or exposed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/iiT8U30GhKw 64 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11210-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0XF1eb5Bnzg/hqdefault.jpg Mount and Secure New Light Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Once the wiring is complete and neatly tucked into the wall box, align the new light fixture's base with the mounting bolts extending from the circular mounting bracket. Slide the fixture onto these bolts. The circular bracket allows for slight rotation, so you can twist the fixture to ensure it's perfectly level or in your desired orientation. Once aligned, tighten the decorative nuts onto the mounting bolts to secure the light fixture firmly against the wall. Double-check that it is snug and stable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0XF1eb5Bnzg 17 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11210-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3rvoMOYlYdY/hqdefault.jpg Mount New Fixture and Level — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Take the new light fixture and align its mounting holes with the threaded posts on the installed bracket. Carefully push the fixture onto these posts. Secure the fixture by screwing and tightening the finishing nuts (often decorative bolts or caps) onto the threaded posts. As you tighten these nuts, continuously use a level to ensure the entire light fixture is perfectly horizontal. Adjust as needed until the fixture is level and securely fastened to the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3rvoMOYlYdY 15 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11210-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/D9CrDsPcSjU/hqdefault.jpg Mount New Light Fixture — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Carefully tuck all connected wires into the electrical box in the wall, ensuring no wires are bunched up behind the fixture's backplate, as this will prevent it from sitting flush. Align the new light fixture with the mounting block and secure it using the thumb screws that came with the new fixture. Test if the light fixture is tight. If the thumb screws bottom out before the fixture is tight, adjustments to the mounting block may be necessary. The presenter finds that no adjustments are needed in this case, indicating a good flush fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/D9CrDsPcSjU 44 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11211-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fNpW_B5vde8/hqdefault.jpg Install Light Bulbs and Test — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Install the appropriate light bulbs into the fixture's sockets. Turn the power back on at the circuit breaker. Test the light fixture to ensure it functions correctly by flipping the light switch. The fixture should illuminate as expected. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fNpW_B5vde8 40 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11211-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pE8f6Hj8s6o/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Test the New Fixtures — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Once the new lighting fixture is fully installed and secured, return to the circuit breaker panel. Flip the circuit breaker back to the 'on' position to restore power. Activate the light switch for the fixture to confirm it is working correctly. Enjoy your new lighting! https://www.youtube.com/embed/pE8f6Hj8s6o 4 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11211-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XN_7LC8j2-s/hqdefault.jpg Install New Bulbs and Restore Power — Bathroom Vanity Lighting With the new fixture securely mounted, screw in the new light bulbs into the sockets. Depending on your fixture, you may also need to attach the light bulb cover. Once the fixture is fully assembled, return to your electrical panel and flip the circuit breaker back to the 'ON' position to restore power. Test your new light fixture to ensure it works correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XN_7LC8j2-s 5 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11212-1 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0XF1eb5Bnzg/hqdefault.jpg Final Assembly and Testing — Bathroom Vanity Lighting For this particular light fixture, first ensure the light sockets are screwed down tightly into their base. Next, remove the outer retaining rings from each socket (these typically screw off counter-clockwise). Slide the glass flanges or shades over each socket. Screw the retaining rings back on clockwise to secure the glass shades. Finally, screw in the new LED light bulbs (like the Ecosmart brand shown) into each socket. Once all components are assembled, return to your main electrical breaker panel and flip the breaker back on. Test the light fixture by turning on the wall switch to ensure everything is working correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0XF1eb5Bnzg 27 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11212-2 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SPC-6rxcPdo/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Fixture and Install Bulbs/Shades — Bathroom Vanity Lighting Once all electrical connections are secure, carefully push the connected wires back into the electrical box in the wall, making sure they are not pinched or damaged. Align the new fixture's faceplate with the mounted baseplate and secure it using the decorative nuts that were set aside earlier. Finally, install the light bulbs into their sockets and attach any glass shades or covers to complete the assembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SPC-6rxcPdo 22 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11212-3 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xz_LFKGCayM/hqdefault.jpg Attach Shades and Install Bulbs — Bathroom Vanity Lighting For the final assembly, attach the glass shades onto the fixture by screwing on the socket rings. Ensure the shades are snug but not overtightened to prevent cracking. Afterward, screw the light bulbs into the sockets. The bulbs are typically not included with the fixture and must be purchased separately. Once the bulbs are in place, the installation is complete, and you can restore power to the circuit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xz_LFKGCayM 6 2026-10-05T14:29:36.949Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11203-1 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9iOsbprpe5g/hqdefault.jpg Install Cove Molding — Stair Tread Installation To add a final decorative touch and conceal any minor gaps between the tread and riser, cove molding is installed along the underside of the new nosing. Begin by measuring the exact length required for each section of cove molding. Cut the cove molding to these measured lengths using a miter saw, ensuring precise cuts for a tight fit. Before permanent attachment, dry fit each piece of molding to confirm it flexes and fits well against any irregularities of the old riser. This separate installation of cove molding is advantageous as its inherent flexibility allows it to conform to slight imperfections along the old riser, achieving a seamless and polished look. Once satisfied with the fit, secure the cove molding in place using an 18-gauge finish nail gun. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9iOsbprpe5g 24 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11203-2 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/npflGAuaSzQ/hqdefault.jpg Glue and Nail Cove Molding — Stair Tread Installation Attach the cove molding to the bottom base of the newel post. This section is often easier to attach as the base itself provides a natural shelf for the molding to rest on. Apply a continuous bead of wood glue to the back of the cove molding. Carefully align the molding piece, ensuring it sits flush and creates a clean, finished transition. Secure the cove molding in place using a brad nailer. Look at the joints from above to make sure they are perfectly lined up, as this is the perspective from which they will be most visible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/npflGAuaSzQ 3092 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11203-3 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KuQy46qkETQ/hqdefault.jpg Install the Wainscoting Cove Molding — Stair Tread Installation The final piece of trim for this section of the wainscoting is the cove molding, which is installed directly beneath the 1x2 cap. The installer measures the required length for the cove molding, accounting for the mitered corner from the previous installation. He then cuts the cove molding to the precise length using a miter saw. The cove molding is carefully placed beneath the cap and secured with an 18-gauge brad nailer, creating a decorative and finished look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KuQy46qkETQ 45 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11202-1 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11202-2 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11202-3 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11204-1 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Stair Tread Installation Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11204-2 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11204-3 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — Stair Tread Installation Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-10-05T03:20:56.695Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11197-1 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — Stair Tread Installation Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11197-2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Installation Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11197-3 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Stair Tread Installation Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11199-1 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Cut Treads to Size — Stair Tread Installation Once measurements are taken and marked on the stair treads, use a miter saw to precisely cut them to the required width and depth. Ensure that the cuts are straight and clean for a professional finish. If the treads have a carpeted or fabric surface, you may need a sharp utility knife to score or cut through that material first, or ensure your saw blade is specifically designed for such materials to cut cleanly without fraying. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11199-2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11199-3 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dLwqNHREkrQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — Stair Tread Installation A large piece of carpet is rolled out on the floor. The width of each stair step is carefully measured using a tape measure. A straight edge is then aligned with the measurement, and a utility knife is used to precisely cut the carpet to the required size for each step. This ensures that each carpet piece fits snugly across the width of its respective stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dLwqNHREkrQ 21 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11198-1 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CtnOYw-UEDw/hqdefault.jpg Select, Order, and Unpack Custom Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Recognizing the limitation of traditional stair runners for a floating staircase, the homeowner identifies "Oak Valley Designs" as a specialist in custom stair treads. They review various fabric options, including different patterns and textures, as shown through samples. Once selected, the custom treads are received and unboxed, revealing the chosen design (a dark pattern with white and brown accents) and individual protective plastic wrapping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CtnOYw-UEDw 12 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11198-2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8QEPVE5-M8c/hqdefault.jpg Key Material Selection Factors — Stair Tread Installation Beyond initial preferences, material selection must consider several critical factors: aesthetics (how it looks), durability (how long it lasts), maintenance (how easy it is to care for), and the specific use or functionality of that material within the space. These factors are crucial for making informed decisions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8QEPVE5-M8c 21 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11198-3 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/20jjtuvaY6M/hqdefault.jpg Acquire and Prepare Carpet Treads — Stair Tread Installation Select pre-made carpet stair treads that fit your measurements, or choose a carpet remnant and cut it to the desired dimensions. If cutting, use a sharp utility knife and a straight edge to ensure clean, precise cuts. If your chosen treads do not have an integrated non-slip backing, you may need to apply a non-slip rug pad or spray-on rubberized coating to the back of each tread. For permanent installation, prepare your chosen adhesive: either heavy-duty double-sided carpet tape or a strong construction adhesive (e.g., liquid nails). If using tape, apply strips to the backing of the treads or directly to the stairs. If using construction adhesive, apply a thin bead along the perimeter and center of the underside of each tread. The video shows gray carpet treads, likely pre-made or custom-cut, already prepared and installed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/20jjtuvaY6M 2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11200-1 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Smooth Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Before starting the installation, ensure that the existing stairs are thoroughly cleaned and smoothed. Use a broom to remove any dust, debris, or loose particles from the risers and treads. A clean and smooth surface is essential for proper adhesion and a professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 4 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11200-2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Surface — Stair Tread Installation Although not explicitly demonstrated in the video, it is crucial to ensure the staircase is clean before installing the treads. Thoroughly clean each wooden stair surface to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris. This preparation ensures optimal adhesion of the non-slip backing, preventing the treads from shifting and maintaining a neat appearance. Use a vacuum cleaner for loose particles, followed by a damp cloth and a mild cleaner if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11200-3 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11201-1 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11201-2 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11201-3 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Starting from the bottom step of the staircase, carefully align the first prepared stair tread onto the wooden step. Ensure the tread is centered, positioned straight, and covers the desired area of the step. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down across its entire surface, paying close attention to the edges and corners, to securely bond the adhesive to the wood. The installer in the video kneels and crawls up the stairs, applying significant body weight to ensure good contact. Repeat this alignment and pressing process for all remaining stairs, working your way up the staircase one tread at a time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 6 2026-10-05T01:21:19.369Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11187-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ij8dmeG-l2U/hqdefault.jpg Plan the Deck Layout and Consult Building Codes — Decking and Railing Installation Begin the deck planning process by drawing the desired shape and proportion of the deck. Crucially, determine the orientation of the decking, as this will influence joist placement. Always refer to relevant building codes and guides, such as the 'Prescriptive Residential Wood Deck Construction Guide' (DCA 6), to ensure compliance and structural soundness. This initial planning helps to accurately determine material needs and proper spacing for all structural components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ij8dmeG-l2U 21 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11187-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4W7PpUYPT0s/hqdefault.jpg Research and Plan the Deck — Decking and Railing Installation Begin by conducting thorough research and planning for your deck project. Consult resources such as the "Ultimate Guide to Decks: Plan / Design / Build" book for general knowledge and specialized websites like decks.com for free design plans, design tools, and material cost calculators. The presenter also highly recommends watching instructional videos on YouTube to gather practical tips and skills. Once sufficient information is gathered, sketch out your deck plan on quad-ruled notebook paper, detailing the placement of every board, beam, and connection. This detailed drawing will help in creating a comprehensive materials list. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4W7PpUYPT0s 55 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11187-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Sw6YJOcVWk/hqdefault.jpg Design and Planning — Decking and Railing Installation Before starting any physical work, it is crucial to design your deck. This design must comply with the NZS 3604 building code. You'll need to create a detailed plan, which can be done by yourself (referencing guides if needed) or by hiring a licensed building practitioner or an engineer. Additionally, check council plans for the location of pipes and contact your local electricity provider to identify any underground wires that might not be on the plans, to avoid hitting them during construction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Sw6YJOcVWk 34 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11188-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jk8Tt_Eyumk/hqdefault.jpg Dig Footing Holes and Set Forms — Decking and Railing Installation Using a Ryobi post-hole auger, dig multiple holes in the designated locations for the deck footings. The creator faces initial difficulties due to tree roots in the ground, requiring persistence. After successfully digging the holes, yellow Sonotube concrete forms are placed into each hole, ensuring they extend above ground level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jk8Tt_Eyumk 165 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11188-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wTrFpW7onJY/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Dig Footing Holes — Decking and Railing Installation After clearing the area, the crew marks the locations for the new deck footings. They use spray paint to outline circular areas for the footings, measuring with a tape measure. Post hole diggers and a digging bar are used to excavate deep holes. The video emphasizes that the footings must be at least 3 feet deep and 12 inches wide, requiring digging through existing shale. Sonotubes (cardboard concrete forms) are then placed into these excavated holes, ensuring they are level with a spirit level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wTrFpW7onJY 30 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11188-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XtRdyoX-cqQ/hqdefault.jpg Layout and Digging Footings — Decking and Railing Installation Using a tape measure, accurately mark out the perimeter of the planned deck and the locations for the footings. Drive stakes into the ground at these marked points to create a visual guide. Then, use a compact excavator (mini excavator) with a 25-inch bucket to dig the footing holes. The holes should be 36 inches deep and 25 inches wide to accommodate the Sonotube concrete forms. Clean up the edges of the holes with a shovel to ensure a comfortable fit for the Sonotubes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XtRdyoX-cqQ 193 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11189-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jk8Tt_Eyumk/hqdefault.jpg Pour Concrete Footings and Install Anchors — Decking and Railing Installation After placing the Sonotube forms, rocks are added to the bottom of each hole to ensure proper drainage and prevent water buildup. Next, bags of Quikrete 5000 concrete mix are prepared. The dry mix is poured into a large tub, followed by the addition of water. The concrete is thoroughly mixed with a shovel until a consistent, workable consistency is achieved. The mixed concrete is then shoveled into each Sonotube form, ensuring it fills the form completely. Finally, a post base anchor is inserted into the wet concrete at the top of each footing, carefully leveled using a spirit level, and secured in place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jk8Tt_Eyumk 166 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11189-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XIrHlJltt4M/hqdefault.jpg Pour and Finish Concrete Footings — Decking and Railing Installation Mix concrete according to manufacturer instructions, if not using pre-mixed concrete. Carefully pour the concrete into each Sonotube, filling it to the desired level, which is typically flush with the top of the Sonotube. As you pour, gently agitate the concrete with a shovel or piece of rebar to release any trapped air bubbles, ensuring a dense, strong footing. Once filled, use a straight edge or trowel to level and smooth the top surface of the concrete, ensuring it's flat and ready for post bases. Allow the concrete to cure fully according to the manufacturer's instructions, typically several days to a week, before placing any load on it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XIrHlJltt4M 9 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11189-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SUxS4QJpeiU/hqdefault.jpg Pour Concrete Footings — Decking and Railing Installation Mix concrete according to the manufacturer's directions, typically in a wheelbarrow. Fill each form tube approximately halfway with the mixed concrete. Use a shovel or a 2x4 to 'vibrate' the concrete and remove any trapped air pockets, which helps prevent voids and ensures strength. Then, fill the remainder of the tube with concrete, leaving the top surface smooth. Carefully embed an anchor bolt into the wet concrete, ensuring it's plumb and no more than an inch of its thread is showing. Backfill around the form tubes with gravel to provide stability and keep them in place while the concrete cures. Allow the concrete to cure fully according to the manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SUxS4QJpeiU 22 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11190-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SUxS4QJpeiU/hqdefault.jpg Set and Cut Posts to Height — Decking and Railing Installation Carefully place the wooden posts onto the installed post brackets. Use a level (like a post level) to ensure each post is perfectly plumb (vertical). Secure the posts to the brackets using 10-penny nails or structural screws, driving them through the pre-drilled holes in the brackets and into the posts. Next, mark the top of each post by first holding a chalk line at the desired deck height mark on the house. Extend this chalk line to each post, using a string level (like a SWANSON level) to ensure it's perfectly level, then snap the line onto each post. Finally, cut the posts along the snapped line using a reciprocating saw or circular saw to achieve uniform height. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SUxS4QJpeiU 36 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11190-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eiZoCH5SMPI/hqdefault.jpg Install Deck Posts — Decking and Railing Installation Once the concrete footings are cured, measure and cut 6x6 pressure-treated posts to the exact height required to meet the deck frame at the desired level, with a slight pitch away from the house for drainage. Place the cut posts into the post bases and use a level to ensure they are plumb. Fasten the posts to the post bases according to the manufacturer's instructions, typically using specialized fasteners or nails. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eiZoCH5SMPI 26 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11190-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Cut and Set Deck Posts — Decking and Railing Installation Attach the metal post anchors to the bolts embedded in the concrete footings. Once the post anchors are securely in place, you need to determine the precise height of each wooden post. First, make a mark on the house wall indicating the desired finished height of the deck. From this mark, subtract the combined thickness of the deck board, the beam, and the joist (e.g., for 2x8 beams and joists, this might be 15.5 inches). Transfer this calculated height to a stake next to the house footing. Then, run a level string line from this stake across the deck area to the outer footings. Adjust the outer string to be 0.5 inches lower than the string at the house, creating a slight slope for rain runoff. Now, measure the distance from the bottom of each post anchor to the level string line. This measurement will give you the exact height for each individual post. Cut your 6x6 posts to these exact lengths. If using a 10-inch miter saw for 6x6 posts, you'll need to rotate the post to cut all the way through. Finally, set each cut post into its corresponding metal post anchor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 71 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11191-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Assemble and Secure Beams — Decking and Railing Installation Construct the main support beams for the deck. The video demonstrates creating beams by nailing two 2x8 pieces of lumber together. Use four 10-penny galvanized nails every 16 inches, staggering them, to firmly join the two boards. Once the beams are assembled, place them on top of the installed posts. Use metal brackets (such as post-to-beam connectors) to secure the beams to the posts. Before fully securing, use a tape measure to double-check the diagonal measurements of the beam layout. This ensures that your beams are perfectly square. Once confirmed, nail the metal brackets to both the posts and the beams, ensuring every pre-drilled hole in the brackets is filled with a nail for maximum stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 45 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11191-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J2qGcDc9f_s/hqdefault.jpg Install Double-Ply Beams — Decking and Railing Installation Position the second plank of the double-ply beam onto the notched posts, carefully aligning it with the first installed plank and the marked beam line. Once aligned, secure the two planks together and to the posts using 0.5-inch structural bolts. Drive the bolts through the beam and post, and then secure them with washers and nuts. While securing, use a level to ensure that the beam remains perfectly level and the post remains plumb (vertically straight) to maintain the structural integrity and aesthetic of the deck frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J2qGcDc9f_s 16 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11191-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ij8dmeG-l2U/hqdefault.jpg Build Beams and Secure Post Connections — Decking and Railing Installation Construct the deck beams by laminating multiple pieces of 2x dimensional lumber together. Apply construction adhesive in a zigzag pattern between each layer of lumber. Use clamps, such as DeWalt clamps, to securely hold the boards together while you fasten them. Nail the boards together from both sides using a pneumatic nailer with appropriate fasteners. Ensure all seams are staggered and supported by a post. For the post-to-beam connection, instead of simply bolting the beam to the side of the post, create a notch in the post to provide direct support for the beam. Secure the beam to the notched post using specialized screw bolts designed for this connection. For posts embedded in concrete footings, attach a post base to the concrete, then secure the post to the base using a pneumatic nailer with the manufacturer's specified fasteners. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ij8dmeG-l2U 50 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11192-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SUxS4QJpeiU/hqdefault.jpg Install Joists, Bracing, and Hangers — Decking and Railing Installation After installing the initial rim joists, attach reinforcing brackets (joist hangers) where the joists connect to the beams. Use deck nails or screws to secure these brackets firmly. If your deck requires it, add bracing in the middle of the frame to support parting deck boards or for additional rigidity. These can be short pieces of joist material nailed in between the main joists. Position the entire floor frame onto the support beams, ensuring it is square with the house and level. Secure the frame to the beams using rafter ties for robust connection. If you have two-piece rim joists, you can assemble the frame in halves and then join them. Then, hold each floor joist along the 16-inch on-center lines, flush with the top of the rim joists, and drive in screws to secure them. Attach joist hangers against each joist, tapping in the prongs to seat them, wrapping them tightly underneath and against the other side of the beam, and then securing them with joist hanger nails or structural screws. Install the remaining joists following the same method. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SUxS4QJpeiU 45 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11192-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XtRdyoX-cqQ/hqdefault.jpg Installing Floor Joists and Blocking — Decking and Railing Installation Position the 2x10 pressure-treated floor joists into the installed joist hangers on the ledger board, running perpendicular to the house and resting on the main support beam. Secure the joists to the hangers using 3-inch exterior-grade nails. At the main beam, back-nail the joists by driving nails or screws through the side of the joist into the beam for added lateral stability. The main beam is designed to handle the vertical load, so no hangers are needed on this side. Once joists are installed, cut and fit blocking between them along the perimeter of the deck. This blocking provides a solid attachment point for the perimeter decking boards and prevents lateral movement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XtRdyoX-cqQ 72 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11192-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Install Joists and Blocking — Decking and Railing Installation Begin installing the deck joists by marking their positions on the beams, typically every 16 inches on center. Place the first joist flush against the house. Secure joists to the beams using toe-nailing (driving nails at an angle) for initial placement. Install metal hurricane brackets (joist hangers) for structural support, ensuring all available holes in the brackets are filled with nails. For decks wider than the available lumber lengths (e.g., a 20-foot deck with 16-foot joists), you will need to support two separate joists on the center beam. Next, improve the rigidity of the joist system by adding blocking between joists along the center beam. Cut pieces of lumber to fit snugly between the joists and nail them in place. Finally, use a circular saw to trim the ends of the joists to a straight, square line. This prepares the frame for the rim joists and ensures a clean edge for the decking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 85 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11193-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nRBgIe-ApTU/hqdefault.jpg Install Decking Boards — Decking and Railing Installation Start installing the decking boards beginning with the board closest to the house. Position the straightest decking board flush with the rim joist. Drill pilot holes approximately 1 inch from the edge into the rim joist, then drive decking screws to secure it. For subsequent boards, pull each board tight against the previously installed board before securing it with two screws into each joist. If your deck is wide, install parting deck boards in the middle, ensuring you add extra bracing underneath to support them. As you progress, notch the decking around posts or other obstructions using a jigsaw. Periodically check for squareness every few boards to maintain alignment. When nearing the end, dry-lay the remaining boards to determine the width of the last board. If the last board would be too skinny, you can rip a small amount off the last few boards to evenly adjust the width. Use a router to round over the edges of any ripped boards for a finished look, including the edges of decking boards around the parting boards. Once all decking is secured, snap a chalk line allowing a 1-1/4 inch overhang along the perimeter, and use a circular saw to cut off any excess decking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nRBgIe-ApTU 71 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11193-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Install Decking Boards — Decking and Railing Installation Install the decking boards, starting from the house and working your way outward. Before fastening, pre-drill and countersink all holes near the edges of the boards to prevent the wood from splitting. Then, secure the deck boards by driving two exterior-grade screws into each joist they cross, typically every 16 inches. As you lay the boards, periodically stop (e.g., every fourth board) and measure the width of the installed decking near the house and at the far end of the deck. This helps ensure that your deck boards are remaining square and parallel as you progress. If working with wet, pressure-treated lumber, push the boards snugly against each other. They will shrink slightly as they dry, naturally forming small gaps for drainage. If using dry boards, you'll need to intentionally add an 1/8-inch gap between each board as you install them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 110 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11193-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Sw6YJOcVWk/hqdefault.jpg Lay Decking Boards — Decking and Railing Installation Begin laying the decking boards. Start at one end, ensuring the first board is positioned correctly (e.g., half on the joist) and its end is cut square. Use a chalk line as a guide to ensure subsequent boards are laid straight. Before driving screws, always pre-drill the decking boards to prevent splitting, especially near the ends. Use stainless steel decking screws (e.g., 75mm screws for 32mm thick decking, or 65mm for 20mm thick decking), driving two screws per joist. Leave the ends of the decking boards long for now; they will be trimmed later. To maintain consistent spacing between boards, insert a nail (e.g., a 3mm nail) between each board as you lay them, then remove it once the board is screwed down. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Sw6YJOcVWk 59 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11194-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PkvKO8GchyE/hqdefault.jpg Build and Install Railing Posts — Decking and Railing Installation Begin by preparing the posts for the railings. Railing construction is subject to strict building codes, particularly concerning height, attachment methods, and baluster spacing. Always confirm these requirements with your local inspector. To create a clean look, cut a decorative notch into the railing posts where the horizontal rails will sit. Use a circular saw with the blade set to 1.5 inches deep to make several parallel relief cuts within the notch area. Break out the waste wood with a hammer, then clean and refine the notch using a chisel and a block plane for a smooth finish. Once notches are complete and posts are cut to the required height (with a 45-degree bevel on top for aesthetics), lay out their positions along the deck perimeter, ensuring they meet minimum spacing codes. Drill pilot holes for carriage bolts, checking that each post is plumb and square before drilling the second hole. Insert carriage bolts, with washers and nuts, and tighten them down with a wrench to secure the posts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PkvKO8GchyE 74 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11194-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JPd3veDYbiY/hqdefault.jpg Install Railing Posts — Decking and Railing Installation Railing installation is a critical safety component. Most building codes require railings for decks over 24 inches in height, and these railings typically need to be at least 42 inches high. For railing posts, use 4x4 lumber, centering them on six-foot spans or less, depending on the length of the deck. Position posts between the joists. Box in the posts within the deck framing, using the rim joist as the front support and adding blocking to support the back and sides if required. Ensure blocking dimensions match the joists for structural integrity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JPd3veDYbiY 35 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11194-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H_4BLKcum0Y/hqdefault.jpg Install Deck Railing Support Posts — Decking and Railing Installation Begin by installing the 4x4 posts that will support the railings. These posts should extend 36 inches above the finished deck surface to meet typical local building codes; always verify your specific local requirements. Position each post against the rim joist. Drill pilot holes through the rim joist and the 4x4 post, then secure them with 1/2-inch through-bolts, hammering them in from the outside for a clean appearance. On the inside of the deck, tighten the nuts onto the through-bolts using an impact driver. For additional strength, especially for posts running parallel to the joists, use two deck tension ties (such as Simpson Strong-Tie brand) to connect the post to the deck joists, securing them with screws using an impact driver. This ensures the posts are as strong as the rest of the deck structure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H_4BLKcum0Y 31 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11195-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wF9tnCypflY/hqdefault.jpg Install Top and Bottom Rails — Decking and Railing Installation Now, prepare and install the top and bottom rails that will run horizontally between the posts. First, measure the distance between the installed posts to determine the length needed for these rails. Use a miter saw to cut the rail pieces to size. To ensure even installation, use small wood blocks as spacers to set the desired height for the bottom rail. Nail the bottom rail in place first, then attach the top rail, making sure it is flush with the top of the posts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wF9tnCypflY 17 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11195-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c84wb8Z660c/hqdefault.jpg Install Top and Bottom Rails — Decking and Railing Installation Measure the exact distance between each installed rail post. Cut 2x4 lumber to create your top and bottom rails, ensuring they fit snugly between the posts. When installing the bottom rail, allow for a 3 1/2-inch sweep space between the bottom edge of the rail and the deck surface. Attach each end of the rails to the posts using four 3 1/2-inch trim screws, driven in diagonally for enhanced strength and stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c84wb8Z660c 12 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11195-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SjlGzmhPWtw/hqdefault.jpg Install Horizontal Rails for Spindles — Decking and Railing Installation Install the horizontal 2x4 rails that will hold the vertical spindles. These rails should be placed flush with the inside of the deck posts, both at the top and the bottom. To maintain a consistent height of 3.5 inches between the deck surface and the bottom rail, use a scrap piece of 4x4 lumber as a temporary spacer during installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SjlGzmhPWtw 19 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11196-1 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Hh74rKgJS0w/hqdefault.jpg Install Bottom Rail and Balusters — Decking and Railing Installation Next, secure the prepared bottom wooden rail to the deck posts. Use a cordless drill/driver to fasten the rail to the posts using exterior-grade screws. Make sure the rail is level and positioned at the desired height from the deck surface, typically allowing for proper baluster length and code compliance. Once the bottom rail is firmly in place, begin inserting the pre-cut metal balusters into the drilled holes in the bottom rail. Ensure they are seated properly and spaced correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Hh74rKgJS0w 3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11196-2 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wF9tnCypflY/hqdefault.jpg Install Balusters — Decking and Railing Installation Next, you'll install the balusters, which are the vertical pieces between the top and bottom rails. These are typically made from 2x2 lumber and can be bought pre-cut. The number of balusters and their spacing depend on the size of the balusters and the distance between your posts. Code generally requires a gap of no more than 4 inches for safety. Once you've determined your spacing, mark the locations on the rails, and then nail the balusters to both the top and bottom railings. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wF9tnCypflY 25 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11196-3 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kQAAPKwzPl8/hqdefault.jpg Assemble Balusters and Rails — Decking and Railing Installation The balusters are assembled into sections with the top and bottom rails. Nathan explains that code recommends a maximum spacing of 4 inches between balusters. They lay out the balusters and rails on a workbench, ensuring correct spacing (4 inches, with 3 3/4 inches at each end for even distribution). They pre-drill holes through the rails and into the balusters, then secure them with stainless steel screws using a cordless drill. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kQAAPKwzPl8 19 2026-10-07T14:17:18.328Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11180-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5Xzd0BanudA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Create Blueprint — Bathroom Storage Solutions Before starting any demolition, accurately measure and plan your kitchen layout. Use a tape measure to record the dimensions of all walls, noting the placement and size of doors and windows, measuring to the outside of any molding. Also, measure from the floor to the bottom of windows, the height of windows, and from the top of windows to the ceiling. Make sure to sketch these measurements and also indicate the locations of plumbing, gas lines, and electrical outlets on your blueprint. This detailed plan will guide your cabinet selection and installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5Xzd0BanudA 31 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11180-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8NkMuycFsGg/hqdefault.jpg Layout Fixtures and Clearances — Bathroom Storage Solutions To effectively plan the layout, use a 4x8 foot foam board (or similar material representing your floor plan) to draw out the bathroom's dimensions and the placement of fixtures. For this project, a 4x8 foot space is used. Begin by marking the shower area, making it a 3-foot width from the existing wall. Then, mark the center of the toilet's rough-in, typically 12 inches from the back wall and 15 inches from the edge of the adjacent fixture (or 18 inches for more comfortable elbow room, especially for accessibility). The toilet will protrude approximately 26 inches from the wall, requiring a minimum of 21 inches of clear space in front. Next, mark the vanity area, which for this layout will be a free-standing unit with its center aligned with necessary plumbing. The vanity should extend about 24 inches from the wall. Ensure all clearances comply with NKBA (National Kitchen + Bath Association) standards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8NkMuycFsGg 6691 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11180-3 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ErqVNRLOoZE/hqdefault.jpg Mark Cabinet Layout — Bathroom Storage Solutions The first step involves accurately measuring the desired location for the cabinets on the wall. Use a tape measure to determine the height and width of the cabinet area. Then, use a level and a pencil to mark horizontal and vertical lines on the wall, establishing the boundaries and guides for the initial wooden frame that will support the cabinets. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ErqVNRLOoZE 10 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11181-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YmLE81WsfeQ/hqdefault.jpg DIY Enclosed Storage Unit — Bathroom Storage Solutions If you possess DIY skills and seek a stylish storage solution, construct and affix a DIY enclosed storage unit to the wall. This unit typically features multiple shelves enclosed by a door, allowing you to store a variety of items out of sight, maintaining a clean and uncluttered look. It is crucial to be mindful of the unit's depth during construction to ensure it does not protrude excessively into the bathroom, which could reduce available space or create an obstruction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YmLE81WsfeQ 23 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11181-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YmLE81WsfeQ/hqdefault.jpg Tall, Narrow Cabinets — Bathroom Storage Solutions To address limited floor space in a small bathroom, select tall and narrow cabinets or shelving units. These types of units are specifically designed to fit into tight spaces, such as alongside a bathtub or underneath a bathroom sink, and can be used to store a variety of items. They offer vertical storage, making them an efficient choice when horizontal space is at a premium. These can be purchased ready-made from stores like IKEA, as shown in the video, or custom-built to perfectly fit your space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YmLE81WsfeQ 20 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11181-3 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YmLE81WsfeQ/hqdefault.jpg Narrow Wooden Shelving Units — Bathroom Storage Solutions Acquire several narrow wooden shelving units, which are available in various sizes. These units provide an excellent storage solution that helps keep everything neatly organized in a small bathroom. To maximize vertical space, you can stack smaller units on top of larger ones, creating a custom tall-and-narrow storage tower rather than a wide one that would consume more floor space. This arrangement allows for efficient categorization of items on different levels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YmLE81WsfeQ 19 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11182-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8Gw9AtbcMzg/hqdefault.jpg Mark Stud Positions — Bathroom Storage Solutions Before beginning cabinet installation, it is crucial to prepare the wall by marking the locations of the wall studs. Use a stud finder to locate these positions along the wall and mark them clearly with a pencil. This step ensures that you can easily find secure fixing locations for the cabinets later in the process, providing stability and compliance with building codes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8Gw9AtbcMzg 10 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11182-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/F1CFsVa0zG8/hqdefault.jpg Locate Wall Studs and Plan Cabinet Placement — Bathroom Storage Solutions Begin by locating the wall studs using a stud finder to ensure secure cabinet mounting. Once studs are identified, refer to your kitchen's floor plan to determine the exact placement of each wall cabinet and how it aligns with the discovered wall studs. The goal is to attach each cabinet to at least one wall stud for maximum stability. When measuring for cabinet width, always use the front face frame width of the cabinet, not the back, to account for the frame's reveal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F1CFsVa0zG8 23 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11182-3 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vFkWoIQ72c4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Wall and Cabinet Backs — Bathroom Storage Solutions On the wall where the cabinets will be installed, locate the studs using a stud finder and mark their positions. Install a level wooden strip (ledge) below where the cabinets will hang; this strip will support the cabinets during installation. Measure the distance from the wall edge to the center of each stud. Transfer these measurements to the back of the cabinets. At these marked locations, run 2 1/2-inch cabinet screws through the back of the cabinet so they just emerge from the front, then partially screw them back in from the front. This prepares the screws for quick fastening once the cabinet is on the wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vFkWoIQ72c4 56 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11183-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ISgEXkedYjM/hqdefault.jpg Secure Wall Mount Board — Bathroom Storage Solutions Carefully align the prepared wall mount board with the wall anchors (for cement walls) or stud locations (for wooden walls). Use your leveler to ensure the board is perfectly horizontal. Once aligned and leveled, use your drill to drive the provided screws through the holes in the wall mount board and into the wall. For cement walls, the screws will engage with the wall anchors. For wooden walls, the screws should be driven directly into the wall studs for maximum support. Ensure the board is firmly secured and does not wobble. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ISgEXkedYjM 7 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11183-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pGHulqd7GIs/hqdefault.jpg Install Wall Mount Brackets — Bathroom Storage Solutions To mount the shelves, the creator first locates the wall studs using a stud finder. He marks the center of the studs with a pencil. Holding the wall-mount bracket in place, he uses a level to ensure it's straight, then pre-drills and screws the bracket into the studs using an impact driver and deck screws. He ensures at least two screws go into solid studs for each bracket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pGHulqd7GIs 55 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11183-3 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7BT7P01oaEA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Walls and Install Horizontal Ledgers — Bathroom Storage Solutions Begin by preparing the walls. Use a drill with a suitable drill bit (e.g., masonry bit for concrete block walls) to create pilot holes at the desired heights for your shelves. Insert wall plugs or anchors into these holes to ensure a secure fastening point. Then, align horizontal wooden ledgers (timber planks) with the pilot holes and use a drill/driver to screw them securely into the wall, utilizing the wall plugs. Employ a spirit level to ensure that all ledgers are perfectly horizontal for stable shelving. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7BT7P01oaEA 11 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11184-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B2fft07wPI0/hqdefault.jpg Mounting the First Cabinet — Bathroom Storage Solutions Carefully lift the first cabinet onto the installed ledger board. Ensure it is snug against the wall and properly aligned with your marked layout. Using a cordless drill or driver, anchor the cabinet to the wall studs by driving #8 x 3 inch black head cabinet installation screws through the pre-drilled pilot holes. After initial fastening, use a level to double-check that the cabinet is both level and plumb. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B2fft07wPI0 26 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11184-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mJKZg4UISvM/hqdefault.jpg Level, Secure, and Finish Wall Cabinets — Bathroom Storage Solutions After securing the top of the cabinet, use a level to check if the cabinet is perfectly plumb (vertically straight) and level (horizontally flat). If it's not plumb, use shims to fill any gaps between the back of the cabinet and the wall or between the bottom of the cabinet and the wall until the cabinet is perfectly vertical. Once plumb and level, secure the cabinet fully by driving screws through the remaining pilot holes at the bottom of the cabinet into the studs. Repeat this process for all remaining wall cabinets. Once all wall cabinets are installed, reinstall any shelves that were removed for installation and attach the cabinet doors. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mJKZg4UISvM 19 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11184-3 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5xN9kPD7ddU/hqdefault.jpg Install the First Upper Cabinet — Bathroom Storage Solutions Carefully lift the first upper cabinet, typically starting with a corner cabinet, into its designated position. Align the bottom edge of the cabinet precisely with the previously marked level line on the wall. Once the cabinet is aligned, secure it to the wall studs using 3-inch screws driven through the pre-drilled holes in the cabinet's back panel. As you secure it, continuously check for levelness and plumb in both directions (side-to-side and front-to-back) using a 4-foot level. Use shims as needed, inserting them between the cabinet and the wall, to correct any discrepancies and ensure the cabinet is perfectly level and plumb before fully tightening the screws. This process prevents warping and creates a stable installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5xN9kPD7ddU 75 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11185-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5xN9kPD7ddU/hqdefault.jpg Install Drawers and Doors — Bathroom Storage Solutions With the base cabinet boxes securely installed and joined, the next step is to install the drawers and doors. For the drawers, carefully slide them into the pre-installed runners within the cabinet box, ensuring they move smoothly and without obstruction. For the cabinet doors, attach them to their hinges according to the manufacturer's instructions. Once installed, take the time to adjust the hinges as necessary. This ensures that the doors hang perfectly straight, close properly, and maintain consistent, even gaps (reveals) between them and adjacent doors or drawer fronts. This fine-tuning is crucial for both the functionality and aesthetic appeal of the cabinetry. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5xN9kPD7ddU 5 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11185-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wO2sFsBjElY/hqdefault.jpg Install Cabinet Components — Bathroom Storage Solutions With all the cabinet boxes securely installed, the final step is to add the cabinet doors, drawers, and interior shelving. This typically involves attaching hinges to the doors and then to the cabinet frames, installing drawer slides and then the drawers, and placing adjustable shelves inside the cabinets. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wO2sFsBjElY 1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11185-3 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SiUIMJ4a4C8/hqdefault.jpg Install Dresser Drawers and Fronts — Bathroom Storage Solutions Install the completed drawer boxes into the dresser cabinet and attach the drawer fronts. Slide each drawer box onto its corresponding drawer slide assembly. Use spacer blocks to accurately position the drawer fronts, ensuring even gaps. Clamp the drawer front to the drawer box and then screw it in place from the inside of the drawer box. Repeat this for all four drawers, working from top to bottom. Once installed, the drawers should slide smoothly. Note that a 1/4 inch plywood back panel can be added to the dresser cabinet for additional stability, although this is done later off-camera. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SiUIMJ4a4C8 78 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11186-1 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/f5R-XY8keMg/hqdefault.jpg Final Leveling and Adjustments — Bathroom Storage Solutions The final step involves a thorough check of the entire installation. The installer uses a spirit level to verify that all cabinets are plumb and level and that the countertop is perfectly horizontal. Any minor adjustments are made to ensure a professional finish and long-term stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/f5R-XY8keMg 22 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11186-2 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B2fft07wPI0/hqdefault.jpg Final Review and Considerations — Bathroom Storage Solutions With the cabinets and doors installed, perform a final visual inspection. Note any minor imperfections, but appreciate the cost savings achieved through DIY. Consider leaving the protective plastic film on the cabinet doors and delaying the installation of hardware (handles/knobs) until other messy renovation tasks, such as drywall finishing and painting, are complete. This helps protect the finished surfaces from scratches and dirt. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B2fft07wPI0 54 2026-10-03T15:09:57.481Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11175-1 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Complete Installation and Final Inspection — Stair Tread Installation Repeat the placement and pressing process for all remaining carpet stair treads, moving systematically up or down the staircase. Ensure each tread is aligned consistently with the previous one, maintaining even spacing and straightness. After all treads are installed, perform a final inspection. Visually check for any misalignments or loose edges. Walk up and down the stairs to confirm that each tread feels firmly secured and does not shift underfoot, ensuring both safety and a polished aesthetic for your newly enhanced staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 4 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11175-2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Tape and Review Installation — Stair Tread Installation Once all stair treads are securely installed on both the steps and the landings, the homeowner carefully removes all the blue painter's tape that was used for marking. She then steps back to inspect the completed transformation, highlighting the improved aesthetic and the significantly enhanced safety provided by the non-slip surface, which is particularly beneficial for her toddler who can now navigate the stairs without slipping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 16 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11175-3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11174-1 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Surface — Stair Tread Installation Although not explicitly demonstrated in the video, it is crucial to ensure the staircase is clean before installing the treads. Thoroughly clean each wooden stair surface to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris. This preparation ensures optimal adhesion of the non-slip backing, preventing the treads from shifting and maintaining a neat appearance. Use a vacuum cleaner for loose particles, followed by a damp cloth and a mild cleaner if necessary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11174-2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11174-3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wSsFb5YVHag/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stair Surface — Stair Tread Installation Before applying the anti-slip strip, it is crucial to ensure the stair surface is clean, dry, and free of any dust, dirt, or grease. Use a cleaning cloth and a mild cleaner to thoroughly wipe down the area where the strip will be applied. Allow the surface to dry completely to ensure optimal adhesion of the self-adhesive strip. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wSsFb5YVHag 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11176-1 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Mark Stair Centerline — Stair Tread Installation To ensure accurate and straight placement of the anti-slip treads, use masking tape to create a guideline. Place a strip of masking tape along the front edge of the stair tread. Next, measure the total width of the stair using a measuring tape. Divide this measurement in half to find the center point. Use a pencil to mark this center point directly onto the masking tape. Repeat for each stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 14 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11176-2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread Placement — Stair Tread Installation To ensure accurate and consistent placement of each stair tread, the homeowner uses blue painter's tape to mark the desired position on the hardwood steps. A measuring tape is used to confirm precise spacing and alignment, ensuring a symmetrical reveal of the wood on both sides of each tread. This meticulous marking helps maintain a uniform and professional look across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 5 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11176-3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WjkM8ou_xoI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Stair Tread Placement — Stair Tread Installation To ensure consistent and straight placement of the carpet treads, measure the desired distance from the edge of the stairs. Then, use blue painter's tape to create parallel guide lines up the entire staircase. This helps in visually aligning each tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WjkM8ou_xoI 6 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11177-1 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Dry-Fit Laminate Pieces to Each Tread — Stair Tread Installation Prior to applying any adhesive, carefully place all the freshly cut laminate pieces, including both the nosing and the main tread pieces, onto their respective stair tread. This 'dry-fit' allows you to ensure that all pieces fit perfectly. Visually inspect for tight seams, check for flush edges against the wall, and confirm proper alignment with the nosing. Make any necessary minor adjustments to the cuts at this stage before final installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 12 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11177-2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Dry Fit Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Installation Once the stair tread and nosing pieces are cut, bring them back to the stairs for a dry fit. Place them into their final positions without adhesive to ensure all cuts are perfect and the pieces fit snugly against the riser and along the stair's edges. Make any necessary micro-adjustments at this stage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 6 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11177-3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Stair Tread Installation Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11178-1 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Stair Tread Installation With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11178-2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — Stair Tread Installation Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11178-3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Complete Tread Application — Stair Tread Installation Continue the application process by slowly and steadily peeling back the remaining backing paper from the anti-slip tread while simultaneously pressing down with the roller. Work your way along the length of the tread, ensuring consistent pressure to eliminate air bubbles and create a strong bond. Once all the treads are in place, give each one a final firm press with the roller, starting from the center and working outwards. This ensures they are perfectly secure and free of any trapped air, making your stairs safe and ready for use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 16 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11179-1 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11179-2 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zb2dGhifZhE/hqdefault.jpg Install New Self-Adhesive Carpet Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Begin by peeling off the clear protective film from the self-adhesive backing of a new light-colored, textured carpet stair tread. Carefully position the tread onto a clean wooden stair, aligning its back edge precisely with the riser. Use a long strip of green painter's tape, applied vertically along the wall side of the stairs, as a guide to ensure consistent placement and a straight line. Once positioned, press down firmly across the entire surface of the tread, working from back to front, to ensure good adhesion and minimize air bubbles. Repeat this process for all remaining stairs, working your way down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zb2dGhifZhE 13 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11179-3 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-03T14:27:21.750Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11169-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N5xVJ2fg2YQ/hqdefault.jpg Allow for Curing and Final Cleanup — outdoor stair treads for dogs Allow the construction adhesive to cure completely. The video mentions a cure time of 2 to 7 days, so avoid stepping on the newly repaired steps during this period to allow the adhesive to fully bond and strengthen. The man places a traffic cone as a visual reminder to prevent anyone from walking on the step prematurely. After the curing time, blow away any residual dirt or debris from the area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/N5xVJ2fg2YQ 35 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11169-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ojh8LPXJ2Zw/hqdefault.jpg Allow for Curing Time — outdoor stair treads for dogs Once all the stones are reattached and excess adhesive is cleaned, cover the repaired area with a wooden board. Create and place a visible sign that reads 'Glue Drying! Please Step Over' to alert others and prevent accidental disturbance of the newly set stones. Allow the adhesive to cure completely for at least a few days to ensure maximum bond strength and durability. The presenter notes that 24 hours was not sufficient, so a longer curing time is recommended. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ojh8LPXJ2Zw 40 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11169-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gfYhkz9IG7s/hqdefault.jpg Allow Final Cure Time — outdoor stair treads for dogs After successfully reattaching the sole and applying pressure, the shoe should be left undisturbed for a minimum of a few hours, ideally overnight, to allow the adhesive to fully cure. This extended curing time ensures maximum bond strength and durability. For the purpose of the video, the presenter showed results after one hour, demonstrating good initial adhesion, but emphasizes that full curing takes longer. Always refer to the specific manual or instructions provided with your brand of contact adhesive for precise curing times, as they can vary. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gfYhkz9IG7s 40 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11170-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — outdoor stair treads for dogs Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11170-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — outdoor stair treads for dogs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11170-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — outdoor stair treads for dogs Before installing the stair treads, ensure the stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris from the surface of each stair. A clean surface is crucial for the adhesive on the treads to bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 6 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11171-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Cut Your Treads — outdoor stair treads for dogs With the nosing removed, prepare the replacement treads for installation. Begin by measuring each tread individually using a tape measure, as stairway widths can vary from one step to the next. Mark the length that needs to be cut off using a sharpie or pencil. If the tread is a double return tread, you will not need to make any further cuts as it has been manufactured to your provided dimensions. As a pro tip, use a piece of scrap wood to push the tread out at the return area. This allows you to properly scribe the skirt before cutting, which will help give you an exact fit and cut for your tread. Use a miter saw to make the necessary cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 35 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11171-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Stair Treads — outdoor stair treads for dogs Each stair in a staircase is often slightly different in length, so it's crucial to measure and cut each new tread individually. Place an old, removed stair tread side-by-side with a new, uncut tread. Use the old tread as a template to mark the exact length needed on the new tread with a pencil. The presenter uses a circular saw for cutting; a table saw is another suitable option. When operating the circular saw, ensure both hands are firmly on the tool and your feet are well out of the way to prevent accidents, as this is a common point of injury. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 57 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11171-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Cut Treads to Size — outdoor stair treads for dogs Once measurements are taken and marked on the stair treads, use a miter saw to precisely cut them to the required width and depth. Ensure that the cuts are straight and clean for a professional finish. If the treads have a carpeted or fabric surface, you may need a sharp utility knife to score or cut through that material first, or ensure your saw blade is specifically designed for such materials to cut cleanly without fraying. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11167-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6RyKuAZtIzA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Plan Tread Placement — outdoor stair treads for dogs Begin by preparing your wooden staircase, ensuring it is clean and free of any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Take a pre-made stair tread and place it on each step to determine the proper fit and alignment. Use a measuring tape to note any necessary cuts for width or depth, accounting for the nose of the stair. It's often beneficial to dry-fit all treads before applying any adhesive to ensure a good layout, identify any custom cuts needed for irregular steps, and confirm the aesthetic arrangement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6RyKuAZtIzA 1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11167-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — outdoor stair treads for dogs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11167-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hqxHbk64z8U/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — outdoor stair treads for dogs After the stringer is in place, measure the width of each individual step to ensure accuracy, as concrete steps can vary slightly. Once measured, solid oak boards are cut to the precise width using a miter saw. It's crucial to number each cut piece to match its corresponding step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hqxHbk64z8U 25 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11172-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1550uOmpgi0/hqdefault.jpg Install a Single Stair Tread — outdoor stair treads for dogs Take one carpet stair tread and carefully peel off the protective plastic backing from its underside, exposing the self-adhesive layer. Using the previously set marking guide or a measuring tape, align the tread precisely on the stair. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down onto the stair surface. Use your hands to smooth out the entire surface of the tread, ensuring complete contact with the stair and removing any trapped air bubbles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1550uOmpgi0 9 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11172-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Treads — outdoor stair treads for dogs Starting from the bottom step of the staircase, carefully align the first prepared stair tread onto the wooden step. Ensure the tread is centered, positioned straight, and covers the desired area of the step. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down across its entire surface, paying close attention to the edges and corners, to securely bond the adhesive to the wood. The installer in the video kneels and crawls up the stairs, applying significant body weight to ensure good contact. Repeat this alignment and pressing process for all remaining stairs, working your way up the staircase one tread at a time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 6 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11172-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — outdoor stair treads for dogs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11168-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Treads with Screws — outdoor stair treads for dogs Once the adhesive is applied, place the new tread onto the stringers, pushing it down firmly into the bead of adhesive. Ensure there is a small 1/8-inch gap between the new tread and any adjacent boards for proper expansion and drainage. For fasteners, always use screws rather than nails, as they provide a much tighter and more durable hold. Specifically, use 2.5-inch exterior-grade screws. Using a Hitachi drill, pre-drill pilot holes with an 1/8-inch bit, carefully lining them up with the center of the stringer to prevent splitting the wood. Then, use a DeWalt impact driver to drive the screws in, countersinking the head slightly so it's flush or just below the surface of the tread. For the front edge of the board, where the stringer's wood grain might be weak or 'sketchy,' it is often better to put a screw down into the riser below instead of directly into the stringer end. Line it up by eye, pre-drill with the 1/8-inch bit, and then drive the screw in with the impact driver, countersinking it as before. Repeat this fastening process for each stringer contact point and for the front edge of each new tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 51 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11168-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ztC3KfZEjO0/hqdefault.jpg Secure Tread with Fasteners — outdoor stair treads for dogs With the tread firmly seated on the adhesive, a pneumatic nail gun (Paslode brand is shown) is used to fasten the tread permanently. Nails are driven through the front edge of the tread into the underlying ledger/riser structure. Additionally, nails (or screws, as mentioned by the presenter) are installed from the back of the riser into the back edge of the tread to create a robust and squeak-free connection. This dual fastening method ensures maximum stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ztC3KfZEjO0 14 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11168-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Stair Treads — outdoor stair treads for dogs To permanently secure the new stair treads, first apply an adhesive like liquid nails to the stair stringers (the support beams) where the tread will rest. Use a caulk gun to apply an even bead of the adhesive. Then, carefully place the new tread onto the stringers, ensuring it is flush and properly aligned. Finally, use a nail gun to fasten the tread securely by driving nails into the sides of the stair structure, typically into the stringers and risers, creating a strong bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 109 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11173-1 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — outdoor stair treads for dogs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11173-2 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — outdoor stair treads for dogs Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11173-3 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — outdoor stair treads for dogs Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-10-02T19:37:34.365Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11160-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7sCBgYaJ1fg/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Iron and Fabric — Fabric Painting Project Preheat your dry iron to its maximum temperature for at least 5 minutes. Do not use a smart iron or a steam iron, as they may not provide the consistent high temperature and dry heat required for successful transfer. Place an old cotton t-shirt or another suitable fabric on your hard, heat-resistant surface (avoiding an ironing board). This provides a slight cushion and helps distribute heat evenly. Pre-iron the fabric where the transfer will be applied to remove any wrinkles and to preheat the fabric itself. If you are applying to a t-shirt, you can use the included PPD Shirt Alignment Tool to help center your image, following its instructions or a separate video guide if available. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7sCBgYaJ1fg 32 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11160-2 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2hZN9teXhTM/hqdefault.jpg Gather Materials and Prepare Fabric — Fabric Painting Project Collect all necessary materials including your prepared stencil, a stencil brush or foam dauber, fabric paint, and the fabric item (e.g., a hoodie) you intend to paint. Lay the fabric item flat on a clean, stable surface, smoothing out any wrinkles in the area where the stencil will be applied. This ensures a smooth surface for painting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2hZN9teXhTM 6 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11161-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2hZN9teXhTM/hqdefault.jpg Position Stencil and Insert Cardboard — Fabric Painting Project Carefully place the prepared stencil onto the desired area of your fabric. Press down firmly across the entire stencil, especially around the edges of the design, ensuring good, close contact with the fabric. Next, insert a piece of cardboard or similar rigid material inside the hoodie, directly under the area you will be painting. This acts as a protective barrier to prevent the fabric paint from bleeding through to the back side of the garment, keeping the inside clean. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2hZN9teXhTM 14 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11162-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-vfViHNKY-g/hqdefault.jpg Direct Trace Method — Fabric Painting Project For light-colored fabrics, this method involves placing the fabric directly over a printed design and tracing the pattern onto the fabric using a pencil or pen. This is the simplest transfer method. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-vfViHNKY-g 24 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11162-2 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qqjQHMJifH8/hqdefault.jpg Iron the Design onto Fabric — Fabric Painting Project Once the design is traced onto the tracing paper, turn the paper over so the traced design faces down onto your chosen fabric. Position the design precisely where you want it on the fabric. Using a hot iron (such as a Morphy Richards Comfigrip), iron over the back of the tracing paper for approximately 5 to 10 seconds. This heat application will transfer the permanent lines of the design from the paper onto the fabric. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qqjQHMJifH8 12 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11162-3 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/99V-KhXShWg/hqdefault.jpg Tracing Designs Using a Light Table — Fabric Painting Project For designs that aren't on Peel & Stitch sheets, you can trace them directly onto fabric. Turn on a light table and place your design template on it. Lay your chosen fabric over the design. The light from the table will allow you to see the design through the fabric. If you plan to add a separate stabilizer to the back of your fabric, trace the design first before applying the stabilizer, as the additional layer can make the design harder to see through the fabric. https://www.youtube.com/embed/99V-KhXShWg 65 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11163-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2hZN9teXhTM/hqdefault.jpg Apply Fabric Paint with Stippling Technique — Fabric Painting Project Pour a small amount of fabric paint into your paint tray. Dip your stencil brush into the paint, loading it with just a small amount. This is a crucial step: brush off any excess paint onto a paper towel or an unused section of the paint tray until the brush is almost dry to the touch. This technique, known as 'dry brushing' or 'stippling,' is essential for achieving clean, crisp stencil lines. Begin applying the paint to the stencil using a stippling motion, dabbing the brush straight up and down over the stencil cutouts. Work your way across the design, reloading the brush with a small amount of paint and brushing off excess as needed to maintain a consistent dry brush. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2hZN9teXhTM 31 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11163-2 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NMuQVK5fOJM/hqdefault.jpg Apply Fabric Paint — Fabric Painting Project Dispense a small, manageable amount of fabric paint onto a disposable plate or a suitable palette. Pick up the paint using a round sponge brush, gently dabbing off any excess paint on the side of the plate. This prevents oversaturation, which can cause paint to bleed under the stencil. Carefully and lightly dab the paint-loaded sponge brush over all the open areas of the stencil pattern, applying thin, even layers. Build up the color gradually until you achieve the desired opacity and coverage for your design. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NMuQVK5fOJM 4 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11163-3 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/immo_S3_l7k/hqdefault.jpg Apply Fabric Paint to Stencil — Fabric Painting Project Using the loaded stencil brush, begin applying the fabric paint to the open areas of the stencil. For intricate designs, use a swirling motion to push the paint into the fabric fibers, ensuring even coverage and preventing harsh lines. For larger, more open areas within the design, you can also use a brushing motion to fill them in. Continue this process until the entire design is filled with paint, then check to make sure you haven't missed any spots. https://www.youtube.com/embed/immo_S3_l7k 37 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11164-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_lR4gFcDsg4/hqdefault.jpg Paint Your Design — Fabric Painting Project Once your base coat is dry, you can begin adding your detailed design. Lightly trace your desired pattern or image onto the painted surface using a pencil. This allows for precise placement and easy correction if needed. After tracing, use a suitable paintbrush to carefully fill in your design with paint. Work in sections and allow colors to dry slightly before applying adjacent colors to prevent bleeding. Add additional layers if necessary to achieve desired opacity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_lR4gFcDsg4 7 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11164-2 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RuBI_KQNqak/hqdefault.jpg Apply Final Black Outlines — Fabric Painting Project After all the colors have been filled in and dried, use a fine-tipped paintbrush and a 'Golden Black high flow paint' to apply the final, crisp outlines. This specific paint is praised for its smooth application, which is essential for achieving clean and sharp defining lines around all elements of your design. Take your time to ensure precision for a polished look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RuBI_KQNqak 6 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11164-3 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pfdO5K43NQg/hqdefault.jpg Add Intricate Detail Lines — Fabric Painting Project Add intricate details by selecting the 'Detail Brush' from your brush set. Choose a dark color, such as a deep blue, and draw thin, squiggly, organic lines that weave through the existing paint layers. Introduce another dark color, like dark red, to add more dynamic lines, creating a sense of movement and complexity within the abstract piece. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pfdO5K43NQg 83 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11165-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OsN2hp-SbN4/hqdefault.jpg Heat Set the Paint — Fabric Painting Project After the fabric paint has completely dried (refer to your specific paint's instructions for drying times), cover the stenciled area with a thin towel. Set your iron to the appropriate heat setting for your fabric and fabric paint (usually medium to high, without steam). Press the iron over the towel, covering the design, to heat set the paint. This step is crucial as it permanently bonds the paint to the fabric, making it washable and durable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OsN2hp-SbN4 9 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11165-2 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2hZN9teXhTM/hqdefault.jpg Reveal and Heat Set the Design — Fabric Painting Project Once the entire design has been painted and the paint is slightly dry to the touch, carefully and slowly peel off the stencil from the fabric. Remove the cardboard from inside the garment. Allow the fabric paint to fully dry according to the manufacturer's instructions, which typically takes 24-72 hours. After the paint is completely dry, heat set the design with an iron to make it permanent and washable. Place a pressing cloth or parchment paper over the painted area and iron on a medium-high setting for several minutes, continuously moving the iron to ensure even heat distribution. This step is crucial for the longevity of your design. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2hZN9teXhTM 23 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11165-3 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/immo_S3_l7k/hqdefault.jpg Air Dry and Heat Seal the Design — Fabric Painting Project Allow the stenciled t-shirt to air dry completely. This might take several hours, depending on the paint and humidity. Once the paint is fully dry to the touch, you need to heat-seal the design to make it permanent and washable. Place a piece of scrap fabric (like a plain cotton cloth) between the stenciled design and the ironing board, and another between the design and the iron. Then, iron the design, applying heat to cure the fabric paint. After this step, the design is sealed, and the t-shirt can be washed and worn without the design fading or washing off. https://www.youtube.com/embed/immo_S3_l7k 15 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11166-1 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7sCBgYaJ1fg/hqdefault.jpg Wash and Care for Garment — Fabric Painting Project To care for your newly decorated garment and ensure the longevity of the transfer, wash it inside out in a washing machine with a spin cycle. Use the normal wash setting at approximately 104°F (40°C); do not use a delicate wash cycle. Avoid harsh detergents or bleach. Hang dry or tumble dry on a low setting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7sCBgYaJ1fg 13 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11166-2 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QJ1tiRkvgIg/hqdefault.jpg Finishing and Curing — Fabric Painting Project After completing all desired stencil sections and carefully removing the final stencil and masking tape, the video demonstrates a gentle pressing action with a cloth over the painted areas. This step might be performed to gently press the paint into the fabric for better adhesion or to ensure evenness. Finally, allow the paint to fully dry and cure according to the specific instructions provided by the chalk paint manufacturer. Proper curing time is essential for the durability and washability of the decorated curtain. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QJ1tiRkvgIg 3 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11166-3 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/immo_S3_l7k/hqdefault.jpg Air Dry and Heat Seal the Design — Fabric Painting Project Allow the stenciled t-shirt to air dry completely. This might take several hours, depending on the paint and humidity. Once the paint is fully dry to the touch, you need to heat-seal the design to make it permanent and washable. Place a piece of scrap fabric (like a plain cotton cloth) between the stenciled design and the ironing board, and another between the design and the iron. Then, iron the design, applying heat to cure the fabric paint. After this step, the design is sealed, and the t-shirt can be washed and worn without the design fading or washing off. https://www.youtube.com/embed/immo_S3_l7k 15 2026-10-07T14:17:16.248Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11158-1 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/F8eLXPuMBiw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Polyurethane Sealer — Stair Tread Replacement Once the stain has completely dried (refer to product instructions for recommended drying times, usually a few hours), it's time to apply the polyurethane sealer. Sealer is extremely important for high-traffic areas like stair treads as it provides durability and protection against wear and tear. Using a clean paintbrush, apply the polyurethane in the direction of the wood grain. Similar to staining, use cardboard to protect the adjacent white risers and walls, ensuring a clean application line. The biggest tip when working with sealer is to make sure to brush out any drip marks or excess product immediately to avoid visible streaks and uneven finish. Apply multiple thin coats, allowing adequate drying time between each coat, according to the manufacturer's instructions, for maximum durability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F8eLXPuMBiw 43 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11158-2 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fTh9RuhZAtY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Protective Wood Top Coat — Stair Tread Replacement After the stain has completely dried, apply a durable wood top coat (sealer) designed for floors or stairs. This will protect the stained wood from wear and tear. The video creator used a regular brush for application. Ensure to follow the manufacturer's instructions for application and drying times. This step is critical for the longevity of your stained stairs. The creator notes that stairs in high-traffic areas will need to be unused for approximately two days after the top coat is applied to ensure proper curing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fTh9RuhZAtY 25 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11158-3 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrqO6WsnouE/hqdefault.jpg Seal Stained Treads — Stair Tread Replacement After the stain has completely dried, apply four coats of a clear sealant, such as Varathane NanoDefence Premium Clear Floor Finish (Satin), to protect the treads. Apply thin, even coats, allowing each coat to dry for the recommended time (2 hours for re-coat) before applying the next. This step will protect the stained wood from wear and tear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrqO6WsnouE 19 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11157-1 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Secure New Treads with Screws — Stair Tread Replacement Once the adhesive is applied, place the new tread onto the stringers, pushing it down firmly into the bead of adhesive. Ensure there is a small 1/8-inch gap between the new tread and any adjacent boards for proper expansion and drainage. For fasteners, always use screws rather than nails, as they provide a much tighter and more durable hold. Specifically, use 2.5-inch exterior-grade screws. Using a Hitachi drill, pre-drill pilot holes with an 1/8-inch bit, carefully lining them up with the center of the stringer to prevent splitting the wood. Then, use a DeWalt impact driver to drive the screws in, countersinking the head slightly so it's flush or just below the surface of the tread. For the front edge of the board, where the stringer's wood grain might be weak or 'sketchy,' it is often better to put a screw down into the riser below instead of directly into the stringer end. Line it up by eye, pre-drill with the 1/8-inch bit, and then drive the screw in with the impact driver, countersinking it as before. Repeat this fastening process for each stringer contact point and for the front edge of each new tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 51 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11157-2 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Replacement Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11157-3 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Replacement Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11155-1 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Carefully Remove Old Treads — Stair Tread Replacement Carefully remove the old, damaged deck treads. For boards that are already loose, gently pry them up with a large screwdriver, avoiding excessive force. If a board is tightly secured, do not immediately reach for a pry bar, as this can damage the fragile stair stringers underneath. Instead, use a large screwdriver and a hammer to split the board into pieces by driving the screwdriver beside the nail heads. This action forces the wood grain around the nails to split, allowing the pieces to be removed easily without stressing the stringers. For very stubborn boards that require more force, use a pry bar, but apply leverage as slowly and carefully as possible. It is crucial to prevent damage to the stair stringers, which are the structural pieces below the treads. These stringers are shaped like a sawtooth, with diagonal grain lines that make them very weak and prone to fracturing. Avoid hitting them sideways or applying excessive leverage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 82 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11155-2 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hOcPPO4LRfI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Stair Treads — Stair Tread Replacement After removing the scotia molding, access the space between the top of the stringer and the underside of the tread. Insert a long metal cutting blade, typically from a reciprocating saw, into this gap. The goal is to cut the nails securing the tread to the stringer without damaging the stringer itself. Once the nails are cut, use a pry bar to lift the tread up and remove it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hOcPPO4LRfI 89 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11155-3 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/diTxF53fdrA/hqdefault.jpg Physically Remove Old Stair Treads — Stair Tread Replacement For the initial removal of the old stair treads, which were extensively glued and nailed, the video suggests using robust tools. Insert a crowbar underneath the edge of an old tread, and then use a sledgehammer to drive the crowbar deeper, creating leverage. Pry the tread upwards forcefully. It's important to note that the treads, often made of composite wood, are likely to break into multiple pieces during this process due to the strong adhesive. The video shows broken pieces with nails still attached, indicating the force needed and the integrity of the original installation. After the main pieces are detached, extract any exposed, large nails from the underlying wooden structure using the claw of a hammer or the crowbar. https://www.youtube.com/embed/diTxF53fdrA 38 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11156-1 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Remove Nails and Clean Stringers — Stair Tread Replacement After removing the old treads, address any remaining nails. Carefully pry out any exposed nails using a nail puller. Some nails may be brittle or rusted and break off; if they don't pry out, you can usually drive them all the way into the wood with a hammer. Once nails are dealt with, clean out any accumulated dirt, debris, or gunk that has collected around the stringers and in the spaces where the boards were. A 5-in-1 painter's tool is effective for carving out this buildup. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 41 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11156-2 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fgKYII9TM7E/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stair Structure — Stair Tread Replacement After removing the old stair tread, thoroughly clean the exposed stair stringers and riser. Use a hammer and a pry bar or pliers to remove any remaining nails, staples, or debris from the wood surfaces. This ensures a clean and flat surface for the new stair tread to sit flush and bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fgKYII9TM7E 8 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11156-3 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KMoh0dp78ek/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Wooden Treads — Stair Tread Replacement With the new treads prepared, it's time to remove the old wooden treads that were beneath the carpet. Use a pry bar and hammer to carefully pry up each old tread from the stair stringers. The video shows the treads being removed one by one, exposing the framework beneath. Collect the removed treads and any remaining nails for disposal. After removing all old treads, clean up any debris, dust, or old adhesive from the stringers and risers, possibly using a vacuum or shop vac, to ensure a clean surface for the new tread installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KMoh0dp78ek 49 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11159-1 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Stair Treads — Stair Tread Replacement Each stair in a staircase is often slightly different in length, so it's crucial to measure and cut each new tread individually. Place an old, removed stair tread side-by-side with a new, uncut tread. Use the old tread as a template to mark the exact length needed on the new tread with a pencil. The presenter uses a circular saw for cutting; a table saw is another suitable option. When operating the circular saw, ensure both hands are firmly on the tool and your feet are well out of the way to prevent accidents, as this is a common point of injury. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 57 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11159-2 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Stair Tread Replacement Measure and cut new treads from standard 5/4 decking lumber, which is typically 1 inch thick and 5.5 inches wide. First, use a circular saw to square up one end of a new board, ensuring a clean and straight edge. A speed square can be clamped in place with your hand to act as a guide for the saw's sole plate, taking off approximately 3/4 of an inch. Next, pull a measurement from this squared end to determine the required length for the tread. Mark this measurement with a crow's foot and draw a straight line using a speed square and pencil. To make the cut safely and effectively, place the lumber on a scrap 2x4 as a prop block. This elevates the board off the ground and creates leverage, allowing the cut-off piece to fall away, which prevents blade binding. Use the speed square again as a guide for the circular saw, aligning the outside of the blade's tooth with the marked cut line, and then make the cut. Cut all replacement pieces to the required dimensions at once. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 71 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11159-3 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wOGeyg9Vqm8/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Lumber — Stair Tread Replacement After removing the old treads, measure their exact length to ensure the new ones are cut to fit perfectly. The narrator measures his old steps to be 57 inches long. Transfer this measurement to the new pressure-treated lumber. Use a square and a pencil to draw a straight, accurate cut line across the board. Then, use a circular saw to cut the new boards to the marked length. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wOGeyg9Vqm8 63 2026-09-29T21:30:19.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11151-1 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11151-2 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Depth Measurement With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11151-3 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11152-1 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11152-2 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11152-3 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Tread Depth Measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11153-1 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11153-2 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Stair Tread Depth Measurement To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11153-3 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11154-1 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XB1xjbB3nkg/hqdefault.jpg Analyzing Stairway Without Step Nosings (Deck Nosing Present) — Stair Tread Depth Measurement This step analyzes a stairway design where the individual steps lack a nosing (overhang), but the upper deck, to which the top step connects, has a 1-inch overhang. The presenter clarifies that, according to building codes, the tread measurement for the top step is taken from the farthest protruding section of the deck (including its 1-inch overhang) to the farthest projecting point of the step below. This means that despite the physical step being 11 inches deep, the code-compliant measurement becomes 10 inches for that top step. This creates an inconsistency with the other steps, which have a full 11-inch tread. The presenter notes that this specific scenario (deck having a nosing but steps not) is rare and that most building inspectors might not even catch this subtle discrepancy. He suggests a simple fix for this specific problem: remove the deck board, rip (cut) off the 1-inch overhang, and reinstall it to eliminate the nosing on the deck. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XB1xjbB3nkg 81 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11154-2 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XB1xjbB3nkg/hqdefault.jpg Analyzing Stairway with Consistent Nosings (Correct Design) — Stair Tread Depth Measurement This step demonstrates a correctly designed stairway where all steps, including the connection to the upper deck, uniformly feature a 1-inch nosing. Each tread depth is consistently 11 inches, measured from the front of the nosing on one step to the front of the nosing on the step below. This design adheres to building codes for consistent tread depth, ensuring safety and compliance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XB1xjbB3nkg 24 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11154-3 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hUqpsFBDynA/hqdefault.jpg Identifying Unacceptable Riser and Tread Variations — Stair Tread Depth Measurement The video then illustrates an unacceptable scenario where a riser is raised to 7 3/8 inches. This creates a 1/2-inch difference from the smallest 6 7/8-inch riser, which exceeds the 3/8-inch maximum allowed by code. The same principle applies to tread depths, with a half-inch difference between the smallest (10 3/4") and largest (11 1/4") tread being unacceptable if the maximum variation is 3/8 inch. It then shows a scenario where treads vary from 10 7/8 inches to 11 1/16 inches, which would be acceptable as the difference is less than 3/8 inch. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hUqpsFBDynA 80 2026-10-20T14:17:06.473Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11149-1 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FKo3v7gnv5U/hqdefault.jpg Measure First Step (10mm) — Stair Tread Depth Measurement After zeroing, carefully place the dial depth gauge onto the first step of the quick check block, which in this case is a 10mm step. Lower the probe until it rests on the step and note the reading displayed on the dial. This reading should ideally be 10mm, or very close to it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FKo3v7gnv5U 7 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11149-2 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FKo3v7gnv5U/hqdefault.jpg Measure Second Step (25mm) — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Next, move the dial depth gauge to the second step of the quick check block, which corresponds to a 25mm depth. Again, lower the probe gently onto the step and record the reading shown on the dial. Compare this reading to the expected 25mm value. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FKo3v7gnv5U 4 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11149-3 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RhaTIbcKKqc/hqdefault.jpg Perform Depth Measurement — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Once the dial indicator is properly zeroed, it is ready to measure depths. Place the base of the instrument firmly and squarely across the opening of the cavity or feature you wish to measure. For example, the presenter places it over the bolt face of a Remington rifle. Gently lower the indicator stem into the cavity until its tip makes contact with the bottom surface. The dial will then display a direct reading of the depth. In the demonstration, the measurement shown is approximately 0.142 inches. The stability provided by the base eliminates concerns about tipping or misalignment that often occur with standard calipers, ensuring a more accurate and repeatable measurement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RhaTIbcKKqc 32 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11146-1 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11146-2 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11146-3 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Stairs — Stair Tread Depth Measurement To ensure the carpet runner is long and wide enough, accurate measurements are essential. First, select one stair tread (the horizontal top surface of a step) and measure its depth. Next, measure the height of the riser (the vertical part of the step). Multiply the height by the number of risers and the depth by the number of treads on your staircase. Add these two sums together, then add an additional 6 to 8 inches to account for waste. This total will be the required length of the runner. If using more than one runner, add an additional 12 inches to the total length to account for seams where the two carpet pieces will join. If your staircase includes a landing and you plan to install the runner there, ensure you include the landing area in your measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11147-1 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11147-2 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11147-3 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — Stair Tread Depth Measurement With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11148-1 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11148-2 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11148-3 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11150-1 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Depth Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11150-2 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XB1xjbB3nkg/hqdefault.jpg Analyzing Stairway with Consistent Nosings (Correct Design) — Stair Tread Depth Measurement This step demonstrates a correctly designed stairway where all steps, including the connection to the upper deck, uniformly feature a 1-inch nosing. Each tread depth is consistently 11 inches, measured from the front of the nosing on one step to the front of the nosing on the step below. This design adheres to building codes for consistent tread depth, ensuring safety and compliance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XB1xjbB3nkg 24 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11150-3 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Tread Depth Measurement After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-09-29T20:12:46.546Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11142-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pudV-S1Od54/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Screen Material — Window Screen Repair Begin by removing the window screen from its frame in the window. Once removed, place the screen frame on a flat, stable surface, such as a garage floor or workbench. Using a small prying tool, carefully remove the old spline from the grooves around the edge of the screen frame. Once the spline is removed, you can then peel away and discard the old screen mesh material. It is important not to reuse the old spline, as it can become dried out and brittle over time, losing its ability to properly secure the new screen. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pudV-S1Od54 14 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11142-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VNCaulQVLeU/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Screen and Clean Frame — Window Screen Repair Begin by removing the old window screen frame from the window. Once removed, place the screen frame on a flat, stable surface with the spline channel facing upwards. Use a flat blade screwdriver to carefully pry up one end of the existing spline, typically starting from a corner. Once an end is lifted, pull the entire spline out of the channel. It is recommended to replace the spline with a new one during this process, as old splines can become compressed or brittle over time, compromising the screen's tension and stability. After the spline is removed, lift and discard the old screen mesh from the frame. Finally, use a cloth or paper towel to thoroughly clean the screen channel, removing any dirt, debris, or old spline residue to ensure a clean surface for the new installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VNCaulQVLeU 34 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11142-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BaC2t0eAbig/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Screen and Spline — Window Screen Repair Begin by removing the old, damaged screen from the window frame. Use a screwdriver or an awl to pry up one end of the old spline, which is the rubber or vinyl cord holding the screen in place within the frame's groove. Once an end is lifted, pull the spline out of the groove. After the spline is removed, you can easily pull the entire old screen out of the frame and discard it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BaC2t0eAbig 17 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11143-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kioMwDmiO70/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Screen Material — Window Screen Repair Lay the old, removed screen material flat on top of the new screen mesh. Use the old screen as a template to cut the new screen, ensuring to add an extra 2 inches of material around all sides. This extra material provides enough slack for proper tensioning during installation. Once cut, set the old screen aside and bring the clean screen frame back to the workspace. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kioMwDmiO70 22 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11143-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pudV-S1Od54/hqdefault.jpg Cut New Screen Material to Fit — Window Screen Repair Unroll the new screen mesh material and carefully lay it over the prepared screen frame. Ensure there is an overhang of approximately one inch beyond all edges of the frame. Use a pair of scissors to cut the new screen material to this approximate size, making sure to keep the excess material for later trimming. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pudV-S1Od54 5 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11143-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zlKLpse5JIk/hqdefault.jpg Cut New Screen to Size — Window Screen Repair Unroll the new screen material and lay it flat over the prepared screen frame. Ensure there is an overhang of at least 1 to 2 inches (approximately 2.5 to 5 cm) on all sides of the frame. Use the scissors to cut the new screen material to this approximate size. This initial rough cut provides enough material to work with during installation without being too large or cumbersome. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zlKLpse5JIk 6 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11144-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UMDuYmHTabU/hqdefault.jpg Insert Spline into Grooved Screen and Channel — Window Screen Repair Once the screen is pushed into the channel on one side, take the spline material and begin inserting it into the same groove, over the screen material. Use the concave wheel (the one with the groove in the middle) of your spline rolling tool to roll the spline into the channel. Start from one corner and work your way to the next, locking the screen into place. As you move to the next sides of the frame, gently pull the screen taut before inserting the spline to ensure a wrinkle-free and tight fit. You may use clamps or weights on the previously splined sides to maintain tension while working on subsequent sides, especially with fiberglass screen. Continue this process for all four sides of the frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UMDuYmHTabU 36 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11144-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zlKLpse5JIk/hqdefault.jpg Install New Screen and Spline — Window Screen Repair Place the newly cut screen material flat and centered over the screen frame. Take a new length of spline, ensuring it's slightly longer than the perimeter of the frame. Begin at one corner and use the convex wheel of the screen roller tool to gently press the spline and the screen material into the groove of the screen frame. Work your way around the perimeter, applying steady, even pressure. As you progress, ensure the screen remains taut and free of wrinkles. For the final seating of the spline, use the concave wheel of the screen roller tool, pressing firmly to secure the screen. Once the spline has been installed around the entire perimeter, cut the excess spline with scissors to fit perfectly, creating a clean seam. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zlKLpse5JIk 16 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11144-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pudV-S1Od54/hqdefault.jpg Install New Spline and Screen — Window Screen Repair Begin by hand-pressing the new spline into one corner of the screen frame's groove, making sure it holds the new screen material in place. Once started, use a spline roller to firmly press the spline and the underlying screen material into the grooves around the entire perimeter of the frame. Apply gentle, consistent pressure. As you reach corners, do not cut the spline; instead, carefully round the corner with the spline and continue pressing it into the groove. Throughout this process, continuously pull the screen material taut with one hand while using the spline roller with the other, ensuring a tight, wrinkle-free screen. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pudV-S1Od54 31 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11145-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BaC2t0eAbig/hqdefault.jpg Trim Excess Screen — Window Screen Repair Once the spline is fully installed around the entire perimeter, use a utility knife, or a sharp pair of scissors, to carefully trim the excess screen material that extends beyond the spline. Hold the knife at an angle against the outside edge of the spline and cut along the groove, ensuring a clean, flush finish. This step removes any loose screen material and gives the window screen a professional appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BaC2t0eAbig 12 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11145-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/n2Zc1dM9sP0/hqdefault.jpg Trim Excess Screen — Window Screen Repair After the spline is completely installed and the screen is taut, use a utility knife or box cutter to trim the excess screen material. Carefully run the knife along the outer edge of the spline, pressing firmly to cut away the extra screen. This provides a clean, professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/n2Zc1dM9sP0 10 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11145-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t8vEnet3V14/hqdefault.jpg Trim Excess Screen — Window Screen Repair Once the spline is fully installed around the perimeter of the frame and the screen is secure, the next step is to cut off the excess screen material. Use a utility knife and place the blade into one corner of the frame, ensuring the knife is held at a 45-degree angle above the spline. Carefully cut away the excess screen material, moving along the spline. Be very careful not to accidentally cut the spline itself, as this would compromise the screen's tension and require reinstallation of that section of spline. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t8vEnet3V14 32 2026-10-07T14:17:13.902Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11140-1 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Dry-Fit Laminate Pieces to Each Tread — Install LVP stair treads Prior to applying any adhesive, carefully place all the freshly cut laminate pieces, including both the nosing and the main tread pieces, onto their respective stair tread. This 'dry-fit' allows you to ensure that all pieces fit perfectly. Visually inspect for tight seams, check for flush edges against the wall, and confirm proper alignment with the nosing. Make any necessary minor adjustments to the cuts at this stage before final installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 12 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11140-2 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install LVP stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11140-3 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Install LVP stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11136-1 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Smooth Stairs — Install LVP stair treads Before starting the installation, ensure that the existing stairs are thoroughly cleaned and smoothed. Use a broom to remove any dust, debris, or loose particles from the risers and treads. A clean and smooth surface is essential for proper adhesion and a professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 4 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11136-2 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BFub6qhxbLg/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Stairs and Gather Materials — Install LVP stair treads Before beginning any installation, thoroughly clean the entire staircase. Ensure all dust, dirt, and debris are removed to allow for proper adhesion of the vinyl. Additionally, gather all necessary tools and materials, including an industrial-grade glue or adhesive, which is crucial for secure installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BFub6qhxbLg 16 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11136-3 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Install LVP stair treads Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11137-1 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install LVP stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11137-2 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Install LVP stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11137-3 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Install Remaining Treads — Install LVP stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, moving up the staircase. For each subsequent tread, use the same centering and spacing measurements established with the first tread to ensure uniformity. Peel the backing (if self-adhesive) or apply tape, and press each tread firmly into place. The video shows the installer placing the treads one by one, working their way up the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 8 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11138-1 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Mark Stair Centerline — Install LVP stair treads To ensure accurate and straight placement of the anti-slip treads, use masking tape to create a guideline. Place a strip of masking tape along the front edge of the stair tread. Next, measure the total width of the stair using a measuring tape. Divide this measurement in half to find the center point. Use a pencil to mark this center point directly onto the masking tape. Repeat for each stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 14 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11138-2 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Anti-Slip Tread — Install LVP stair treads Before applying the anti-slip stair tread, you need to prepare it for proper alignment. On the backing side of the anti-slip tread, either measure halfway across its width and place a mark using your pencil, or simply fold the tread in half temporarily to create a slight crease in the backing paper. This mark or crease will serve as the center guide for aligning the tread with the marked centerline on your stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 12 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11138-3 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WjkM8ou_xoI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Stair Tread Placement — Install LVP stair treads To ensure consistent and straight placement of the carpet treads, measure the desired distance from the edge of the stairs. Then, use blue painter's tape to create parallel guide lines up the entire staircase. This helps in visually aligning each tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WjkM8ou_xoI 6 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11139-1 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install LVP stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11139-2 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Install LVP stair treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11139-3 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Install LVP stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11141-1 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Install LVP stair treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11141-2 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — Install LVP stair treads Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11141-3 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install LVP stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-28T00:52:40.666Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11129-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J8sSWX0FblQ/hqdefault.jpg Prep the Garage Floor: Clean and Degrease — Garage Floor Painting Begin by emptying the entire garage, moving all items off the floor. Then, use a push broom to sweep away any loose dust, dirt, or debris. For tougher grime, such as grease stains or stubborn residue, use a wire brush to scrub the affected areas. Next, put on protective eyewear and gloves. Prepare the Rust-Oleum Cleaner and Degreaser by adding it to a bucket. For general cleaning, dilute the cleaner with water at a 1:1 ratio. For very stubborn stains, the product can be used at full strength, poured directly from the bottle onto the floor. Working in sections, pour the diluted or undiluted cleaner directly onto the floor. Allow the cleaner to sit on the surface for approximately 20 minutes for optimal results. Use a stiff bristled broom or scrub brush to thoroughly work the cleaner into the concrete surface. After washing, rinse the entire floor with a hose to remove all cleaning solution and foam. Ensure all suds are removed. Use a long handle squeegee to push out any remaining water, ensuring the floor is as dry as possible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J8sSWX0FblQ 58 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11129-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OZtbMa9VUt0/hqdefault.jpg Prep the Garage Floor (Clean) — Garage Floor Painting Before you begin cleaning, move all items out of your garage to ensure you have a clear workspace. Start by thoroughly sweeping away any dust or debris from the entire floor using a push broom. For stubborn or heavy stains, use protective eyewear and gloves, and spot treat them with full-strength Rust-Oleum Cleaner & Degreaser, scrubbing with a stiff-bristled broom. Next, dilute the cleaner and degreaser by mixing it in a 1:1 ratio with water in a bucket. Working in 10 ft by 10 ft sections, pour the diluted solution directly onto the floor and use the stiff-bristled broom to work it into the surface, ensuring the product does not dry. After thoroughly washing each section, rinse away all the cleaning solution with a water hose, making sure to remove all remaining suds. The solution will not harm grass if rinsed well. Finally, use a long-handle squeegee to remove any leftover water from the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OZtbMa9VUt0 52 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11129-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GvKKqeUFJsI/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Degrease the Concrete — Garage Floor Painting After removing everything from the garage, thoroughly clean and degrease the floor. First, use a leaf blower to clear any large debris, then sweep the entire floor with a floor broom to remove remaining dust and loose particles. It is extremely important to start with a clean floor to ensure the epoxy adheres properly. Next, prepare a degreaser solution by diluting a garage cleaner/degreaser in a bucket with water, following the product's instructions. Wet the concrete floor with a pressure washer or a garden hose. Pour the diluted degreaser onto the areas needing cleaning, especially stained spots, and scrub vigorously with a stiff brush. Rinse the scrubbed area with clean water, then use a floor squeegee to push the water out of the garage. For stubborn or heavy stains, repeat the scrubbing and rinsing process until the floor is visibly clean. This prep work is crucial as epoxy will not adhere to grease, oil, or any other residue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GvKKqeUFJsI 52 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11130-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J8sSWX0FblQ/hqdefault.jpg Patch and Repair Concrete Cracks — Garage Floor Painting With the floor completely dry after etching, prepare to repair any cracks or holes using Rust-Oleum Concrete Patch and Repair. First, use a wire brush to remove any remaining dirt, dust, or debris from the cracks to ensure proper adhesion of the patch. Lay a clean piece of cardboard scrap on the floor for mixing. Put on protective gloves. This product is a two-part epoxy system, consisting of Part A (activator) and Part B (base). Mix a small amount of the two parts together on the cardboard using a putty knife, ensuring a 2:1 ratio (two parts of Part B to one part of Part A). Only mix what you anticipate using within 20 to 30 minutes, as the epoxy will harden quickly. Mix until the mixture achieves a uniform gray color and a putty-like consistency. Avoid mixing the components within their original containers. Use the putty knife to spread the mixed epoxy evenly onto any areas that require repair, pressing it into cracks and divots. Level and smooth the patched areas using the putty knife. Once all problem areas are patched, allow the repair to cure for 8 hours. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J8sSWX0FblQ 58 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11130-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UdolrDw4GUs/hqdefault.jpg Repair Damaged Concrete — Garage Floor Painting After degreasing and rinsing, check the floor for any damaged areas, such as cracks or holes. Use Rust-Oleum EpoxyShield Concrete Patch & Repair to fill and smooth these imperfections. Ensure the patched areas are fully cured according to the product's instructions before proceeding to the next step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UdolrDw4GUs 7 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11130-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OZtbMa9VUt0/hqdefault.jpg Patch and Repair the Concrete — Garage Floor Painting After the floor has completely dried from etching, it's time to repair any cracks or holes. Using a wire brush, ensure all remaining dirt and debris are removed from the cracks. For mixing the two-part Rust-Oleum Concrete Patch & Repair epoxy, you will need a clean piece of cardboard and a putty knife. Mix the epoxy according to the package directions, ensuring you only mix what you'll use within 20 to 30 minutes, as the epoxy will harden quickly. Use the putty knife to spread and level the mixed epoxy evenly over all damaged areas. Once applied, allow the epoxy to dry completely according to the package directions. Once the patched spots are totally dry, your floor is ready for the next step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OZtbMa9VUt0 64 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11131-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CBh0fP__ve0/hqdefault.jpg Etch the Concrete Surface — Garage Floor Painting Concrete etching is a critical step, especially for smooth, troweled concrete surfaces like garage floors, as it creates a textured profile that allows paint to adhere properly. It is also recommended for rough finishes. Use Seal-Krete Clean-N-Etch for this process; a half-gallon typically covers about 400 square feet. Work in manageable 10-foot by 10-foot sections. First, dampen the surface with water. Then, apply the Clean-N-Etch solution using a pump sprayer or a watering can. Immediately scrub the solution into the surface with a stiff-bristled broom until the foaming action stops, which indicates the etching process is complete. Thoroughly rinse the surface with a strong stream of water, continuing to scrub to ensure all material is removed. After drying, the surface should feel rough, similar to 150-grit sandpaper. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CBh0fP__ve0 47 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11131-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TablS2U_Vqs/hqdefault.jpg Apply Concrete Etcher — Garage Floor Painting After cleaning, etch the concrete surface to create a rough texture, which significantly improves paint adhesion. Mix 1 kilogram of White Knight Ultra Pave Concrete Etcher granules with 10 liters of clean water in a 5-gallon bucket. Use a stirring stick to mix until the granules are completely dissolved. Carefully pour the mixed etcher into a watering can for uniform application across the floor. This environmentally friendly etcher is a safer alternative to traditional hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TablS2U_Vqs 158 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11131-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/35tjXNu2hjc/hqdefault.jpg Concrete Etching — Garage Floor Painting Mix the provided etch powder from the kit into water in a bucket. Pour the etch solution into a watering can for even distribution. Pre-wet the floor with water, then apply the etch solution evenly over the entire floor using the watering can. Work the etch solution into the concrete surface with a stiff-bristle broom. The solution may fizz, indicating it's reacting with the concrete. Once the fizzing stops, hose off the solution and rinse thoroughly. Use a rubber floor squeegee or a wet/dry vacuum to remove any excess water from the surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/35tjXNu2hjc 25 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11132-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-kJPJJO7KSE/hqdefault.jpg Apply Concrete Primer — Garage Floor Painting Once the primer is mixed, begin by 'cutting in' the edges of the floor where it meets the taped walls and garage door using a paintbrush. After the edges are painted, pour the remaining primer directly onto the concrete floor and use a roller with an extension pole to spread it evenly across the entire surface. Ensure thorough and uniform coverage. Only one coat of primer is typically needed, and it should dry within a couple of hours. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-kJPJJO7KSE 18 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11132-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OZtbMa9VUt0/hqdefault.jpg Prime the Floor — Garage Floor Painting If your garage floor was previously sealed, you will need to apply Rust-Oleum Concrete & Garage Recoat Primer. If you have bare concrete, priming is not needed. First, mask off the baseboards and any other areas you don't want painted with painter's tape. Begin priming by trimming the edges of the floor with a small paint brush, working in 4 ft by 4 ft sections. Always start at the back of the garage and work your way out to avoid painting yourself into a corner. Before using the roller, de-lint your high-quality 3/8-inch nap roller by passing it back and forth over a wide piece of painter's tape to remove any loose particles. Then, use the roller to apply the primer to the main floor area in a 'W' and 'M' pattern to ensure even coverage and avoid lap lines. Do not allow the product to puddle, and maintain a wet edge as you work. If your concrete is really worn or porous, ensure the paint is applied into all the crevices of the surface. Continue until the entire floor is completely primed. Only one coat is needed for the garage coating to adhere effectively. Allow the primer to dry for a minimum of 6 hours, but no more than 48 hours, before applying the topcoat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OZtbMa9VUt0 74 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11132-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mYepHEhFVI0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Primer Coat — Garage Floor Painting Begin by cutting in along the edges of the garage walls using the Anvil cut-in blade or cardboard guard to create a clean line. Once the edges are done, start applying the diluted primer coat to the rest of the floor, working your way out of the garage. Ensure even coverage with the 1/4" nap roller. This first coat will provide a good base for the final topcoat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mYepHEhFVI0 68 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11133-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OZtbMa9VUt0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Rust-Oleum Concrete & Garage Floor Paint — Garage Floor Painting Once the primer has completely dried, you are ready to apply the main garage coating. Use protective gloves. Open the can of Rust-Oleum Concrete & Garage Floor Paint + Primer with a paint can opener. Stir the paint thoroughly with a stir stick. If you are using more than one gallon of paint, mix all cans together in a bucket to ensure color uniformity across your entire floor. Pour the stirred paint into a paint tray. Starting from the back of the garage, use a good paint brush to cut in the edges of a 4 ft by 4 ft section, allowing you to avoid getting paint on your walls. Then, use a good quality 3/8-inch nap roller to roll the paint onto the floor in the same 4 ft by 4 ft section. If you like the look of decorative color chips, add them as you paint each section by tossing them into the air and letting them fall evenly onto the wet coating. Leave a 6- to 12-inch section of wet film without chips; this area will get covered when the next section is coated. Continue cutting in and applying the paint across the back wall and working your way forward, maintaining a wet edge to prevent any gloss differences. Let the floor dry for 24 hours. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OZtbMa9VUt0 114 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11133-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UCk8hiatWh4/hqdefault.jpg Paint the Main Garage Floor Area — Garage Floor Painting After painting the edges, Pirulo loads the roller with the 'Slate Gray' epoxy paint from the paint tray. He uses an extendable pole attached to the roller to reach across the floor comfortably. He advises starting from the back of the garage and working towards the garage door to avoid painting oneself into a corner. Pirulo systematically rolls the paint across the entire floor, ensuring even coverage and a smooth finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UCk8hiatWh4 84 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11133-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DRzQsSTe-p8/hqdefault.jpg Apply Epoxy Base Coat and Optional Deco-Flakes — Garage Floor Painting Start the application by using a mini roller and a brush (like the Purdy 2.5" XL Glide) to 'cut in' the edges, corners, and baseboards of your garage floor. This creates a clean border. For the larger areas of the floor, use a 3/8" nap roller (e.g., Purdy Marathon or White Dove) attached to a heavy-duty 9-inch roller frame with a sturdy extension pole. Work in small sections, approximately 4 feet by 4 feet at a time, to ensure even coverage and to keep a wet edge. If you plan to use H&C Deco-Flakes, broadcast them onto the wet epoxy immediately after coating each 4'x4' section by tossing them upward into the air to achieve even distribution. H&C offers flakes in four unique color blends for customization. Always leave a wet edge on each section so you can continually roll without disturbing the already applied deco-flakes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DRzQsSTe-p8 43 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11134-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6xhG-SKRR5A/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Coat of Paint — Garage Floor Painting After the first coat of paint has thoroughly dried according to the manufacturer's instructions, apply a second coat. Again, use a paint roller with an extension pole for the main areas and a paintbrush for the edges and hard-to-reach spots. This second coat provides enhanced durability, color consistency, and a more uniform appearance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6xhG-SKRR5A 23 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11134-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/y4-TCtppbxE/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Coat of Paint (If Needed) — Garage Floor Painting After the first coat of paint has thoroughly dried (check manufacturer's recommendations, usually 2-4 hours), apply a second coat if desired or necessary. A second coat enhances durability, provides better color uniformity, and often achieves the desired protective qualities. Use the same application techniques with the stiff-bristled brush and thick-nap roller as for the first coat, ensuring all textured areas are fully covered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/y4-TCtppbxE 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11134-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4THNUTAiFMI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Coat (with Drying Time) — Garage Floor Painting After the first coat has been applied, you will need to apply a second thin coat to build up the protective layer and enhance the gloss. It is critical to allow a minimum of a 6-hour drying period between the first and second applications. Ensure the first coat is dry to the touch before proceeding with the next application. If the instructions suggest more than two coats, follow the same procedure, allowing 6 hours of drying time between each subsequent coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4THNUTAiFMI 2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11135-1 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CgbDEQ7U8wM/hqdefault.jpg Drying and Curing — Garage Floor Painting After applying the paint and decorative flakes, it's crucial to allow adequate drying and curing time before subjecting the floor to traffic or weight. Allow at least 24 hours for light foot traffic. For heavy foot traffic or repositioning furniture, wait 72 hours. The paint requires a full 7 days to dry and cure sufficiently before it can be subjected to automotive tires. For optimal durability and to prevent damage, wait 30 days before washing the newly coated floor with a mild detergent. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CgbDEQ7U8wM 25 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11135-2 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UdolrDw4GUs/hqdefault.jpg Allow Epoxy to Cure — Garage Floor Painting After the epoxy coating and decorative chips have been applied, allow sufficient time for the floor to cure before resuming normal use. The surface should be ready for light foot traffic in approximately 12 to 16 hours. For heavy item placement, such as storage shelves or tools, wait 24 to 48 hours. Most importantly, allow the floor to cure for a full three days before parking vehicles on the surface. This ensures maximum durability and prevents hot tire pickup or damage to the coating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UdolrDw4GUs 21 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11135-3 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DRzQsSTe-p8/hqdefault.jpg Allow Epoxy to Dry and Cure — Garage Floor Painting After applying the clear top coat, allow the epoxy coating to dry for a minimum of 18 hours before walking on the surface. For full curing and maximum durability, you must allow 72 hours before parking vehicles on the coated floor. Adhering to these drying times is crucial to ensure the longevity and performance of your new garage floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DRzQsSTe-p8 10 2026-09-27T14:25:27.853Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11125-1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11125-2 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Install stair treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11125-3 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9OF3FBDsqcs/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads to Steps — Install stair treads With the treads unpacked, carefully position one stair tread onto the surface of a stair. Ensure it is centered and aligned properly. Once placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive backing and secure it to the stair. Repeat this process for each step, ensuring consistent placement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9OF3FBDsqcs 1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11127-1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11127-2 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/znk19ZAzezA/hqdefault.jpg Press and Secure Tiles — Install stair treads After placing each carpet tile onto the adhesive, firmly press down on its entire surface. This ensures maximum contact with the adhesive and helps to 'seat' the tile properly, preventing air pockets and ensuring a strong bond. The worker in the video consistently presses down on the tiles with their hands or knees after placing them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/znk19ZAzezA 5 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11127-3 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/V87S2MZ4sXw/hqdefault.jpg Firmly Secure Carpet to Wall — Install stair treads Once the carpet piece is positioned, the worker uses both hands to firmly press the carpet against the wall. He starts from the center of the carpet and systematically works his way outwards, applying even pressure across the entire surface. This action ensures maximum contact between the carpet backing and the adhesive, eliminating any trapped air bubbles and creating a strong, secure bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/V87S2MZ4sXw 22 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11124-1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Mark Stair Centerline — Install stair treads To ensure accurate and straight placement of the anti-slip treads, use masking tape to create a guideline. Place a strip of masking tape along the front edge of the stair tread. Next, measure the total width of the stair using a measuring tape. Divide this measurement in half to find the center point. Use a pencil to mark this center point directly onto the masking tape. Repeat for each stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 14 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11124-2 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread Placement — Install stair treads To ensure accurate and consistent placement of each stair tread, the homeowner uses blue painter's tape to mark the desired position on the hardwood steps. A measuring tape is used to confirm precise spacing and alignment, ensuring a symmetrical reveal of the wood on both sides of each tread. This meticulous marking helps maintain a uniform and professional look across the entire staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 5 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11124-3 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WjkM8ou_xoI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Stair Tread Placement — Install stair treads To ensure consistent and straight placement of the carpet treads, measure the desired distance from the edge of the stairs. Then, use blue painter's tape to create parallel guide lines up the entire staircase. This helps in visually aligning each tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WjkM8ou_xoI 6 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11123-1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Install stair treads Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11123-2 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11123-3 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Install stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11126-1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Install stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11126-2 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — Install stair treads Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11126-3 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-H6_Llb_tnc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stair Treads — Install stair treads Starting from the top of the staircase, the homeowner carefully installs each stair tread. She begins by peeling off the protective plastic film from the adhesive backing. The tread is then aligned precisely with the previously marked tape lines, ensuring the back edge is flush with the riser. Once aligned, she firmly presses the tread onto the step, making sure it adheres well, especially over the bullnose (the rounded edge of the step). This process is repeated for each individual stair tread and for the larger custom pieces on the landings. The homeowner notes that the adhesive is designed not to damage the existing hardwood stairs, making it a suitable option for temporary or non-permanent installations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-H6_Llb_tnc 17 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11128-1 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sfgZWTtWnVc/hqdefault.jpg Project Completion and Review — Install stair treads Once all stair treads are installed, take a step back and admire your work. The staircase should now have a consistent, aesthetically pleasing, and safer appearance. The video shows a person walking down the newly treaded stairs, demonstrating the finished look and feel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sfgZWTtWnVc 13 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11128-2 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Final Review and Enjoyment — Install stair treads Once all stair treads are installed, step back and visually inspect the entire staircase. Check for uniform spacing, straight alignment, and secure adhesion of all treads. Walk up and down the stairs to ensure they feel stable and comfortable. The video showcases the completed staircase with all treads installed, demonstrating the aesthetic and functional improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 11 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11128-3 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Install stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-26T21:24:48.120Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11121-1 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — install carpet stair treads Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11121-2 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11121-3 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — install carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11122-1 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — install carpet stair treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11122-2 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — install carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11122-3 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — install carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-26T14:45:12.212Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11117-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z6IFlBoSwjU/hqdefault.jpg Wire Opener Motor, Control Panel, and Safety Photo Eyes — Garage Door Installation Proceed with wiring the motor unit of the garage door opener. This includes connecting wires for the wall-mounted control panel and the safety photo eyes. Safety photo eyes are critical safety features that have been standard for a long time; if a pet or child obstructs the beam while the door is closing, it will automatically reverse, preventing injury. Ensure all wiring connections are secure and follow the manufacturer's instructions for proper functionality. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z6IFlBoSwjU 15 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11117-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qba1pX9oWcc/hqdefault.jpg Install Automatic Opener — Garage Door Installation To automate the newly installed garage door, connect the remote-control operator (e.g., Glidermatic GTS+ Optima Premium Tilt & Sectional Door Operator). This typically involves mounting the operator unit to the ceiling or bulkhead above the door, connecting it to the torsion spring shaft or the door panels with an arm, and then plugging the unit into a nearby electrical outlet. Once powered, program the remote controls according to the manufacturer's instructions. Test the door's operation, ensuring it opens and closes smoothly and completely. The automatic opener allows for convenient remote operation of the garage door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qba1pX9oWcc 4 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11117-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1tgdSgtZWEY/hqdefault.jpg Install Light Bulbs, Test, and Adjust Opener — Garage Door Installation Install the appropriate wattage light bulbs into the sockets on the motor unit and attach the light covers securely. Plug the garage door opener's power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. Once powered on, program the travel limits of the garage door (how far it opens and closes) and set the force limits (how much force the opener exerts). Use the wall control button and/or the remote control to test the opener's functionality. Finally, perform a safety reversal test by placing an object (like a 2x4 board) on the floor in the door's path. When the door closes and contacts the object, it should immediately reverse direction and open fully. This confirms the safety features are working correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1tgdSgtZWEY 35 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11118-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ogJ3rOa1Xd4/hqdefault.jpg Program Door Travel Limits — Garage Door Installation Program the garage door opener's travel limits (how far up and down the door should go). This is typically done by pressing specific buttons on the opener unit itself. The opener will then perform a cycle, moving the door up and down, automatically setting or allowing manual adjustment of its open and close positions. The video shows the door operating very quietly during this process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ogJ3rOa1Xd4 30 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11118-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2IYIo8ZDU_Q/hqdefault.jpg Set Travel Limits and Test Operation — Garage Door Installation After installation and programming, set the garage door's travel limits. This defines how far the door opens and closes. Locate the up, down, and set buttons on the motor unit. To set the down travel, press and hold the 'down' arrow button until its indicator light blinks blue, then release. Allow the door to travel down, and once it reaches the desired closed position, press the 'set' button. Repeat a similar process for the 'up' travel limit. The presenter demonstrates how to move the trolley down the track using the motor buttons (press and hold the 'minus' button until the blue light blinks, then release) to connect the garage door arm to the trolley. Perform several test cycles to ensure the door opens and closes smoothly, fully, and without obstruction. The presenter noted an issue with his door's original bracket placement which he corrected, leading to smoother operation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2IYIo8ZDU_Q 56 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11118-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rM12f0ZF7A0/hqdefault.jpg Program Travel Limits and Force — Garage Door Installation Plug the garage door opener into a power outlet. Press and hold the 'Set' button on the opener's control panel until the LED display shows '1'. This indicates you are in closing limit adjustment mode. Use the 'Down' button to slowly move the garage door down to your desired closed position. Press the 'Set' button again; the display will now show '2', indicating opening limit adjustment mode. Use the 'Up' button to move the door to your desired open position. Press the 'Set' button once more; the display will show '3'. Now, press the 'Wall Button' or your remote control to initiate a full closing cycle. The opener will learn the closing force. Once the door is fully closed, the display will show '4'. Press the 'Wall Button' or remote again to open the door, allowing the opener to learn the opening force. The opener will emit a beep sound when the programming is complete. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rM12f0ZF7A0 84 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11119-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aOp5jmDBwSI/hqdefault.jpg Activate Opener's Learn Button — Garage Door Installation Immediately go to your garage door opener unit and quickly press and release its 'learn' button once. The light on the opener unit should illuminate, indicating it is now in 'learning mode' and waiting for a signal from the keypad. You typically have about 30 seconds to send this signal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aOp5jmDBwSI 6 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11119-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0QKJkgTGCj4/hqdefault.jpg Program the New Keypad to the Opener — Garage Door Installation The first step in making your keypad operational is to program it to your garage door opener. Begin by locating the 'programming' or 'learn code' button on your garage door opener. These buttons are typically found on the bottom of the opener unit, facing the floor (often under the light bulb cover), or on the rear of the unit, facing away from the garage door. The video illustrates different types of programming buttons: some are square, others are labeled 'learn code'. Once you activate the learn mode on your opener, you will have a 30-second window to complete the next steps. For openers with a square programming button (Type 1 or Type 4), press and hold it until the round LED turns blue; then release it, and a long LED will begin to flash purple. For openers with a 'learn code' button (Type 2 or Type 3), simply press and release it once, and the red LED will begin to flash. Once your opener is in learn mode, immediately return to the wireless keypad. The existing factory default PIN for this keypad is '3-5-7'. Enter '3-5-7' on the keypad, then press the 'UP/DOWN' key slowly, three to four times, until your garage door begins to move. This indicates that the keypad has successfully learned the opener's code. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0QKJkgTGCj4 65 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11119-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hTRXgOQS7A8/hqdefault.jpg Access Garage Door Opener — Garage Door Installation To proceed with programming the keypad, you will need to access the garage door opener unit itself. Set up a ladder to safely reach the opener, which is typically mounted on the ceiling of the garage, so you can locate and press its 'learn button'. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hTRXgOQS7A8 6 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11120-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p3nKa3jRkgY/hqdefault.jpg Test Door for Smooth Operation — Garage Door Installation Once the door sections, tracks, and springs are installed, manually test the door for smooth operation. Slowly open and close the door by hand, checking for any binding, sticking, or uneven movement. The door should move freely and balance properly when stopped at various points. Make any necessary adjustments to the track alignment or spring tension to ensure optimal performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p3nKa3jRkgY 3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11120-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H57kKA89LUM/hqdefault.jpg Final Adjustments, Testing, and Cleanup — Garage Door Installation After all components are installed, the installers proceed with final adjustments and testing. The garage door opener is plugged in, and the door's operation is tested repeatedly to ensure smooth, quiet, and balanced movement. Any necessary adjustments to the opener's limits, force, or spring tension are made. The safety sensors are also tested to confirm they prevent the door from closing when an obstruction is detected. Once the door is fully functional, the installers clean both the interior and exterior surfaces of the garage door, removing any dust, fingerprints, or debris accumulated during installation. This final cleaning step ensures the door is ready for immediate use and presents a polished, professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H57kKA89LUM 80 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11120-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3GI2uS7Di6k/hqdefault.jpg Final Test — Garage Door Installation With all installation and trim complete, perform a final test of the new garage door. Use the remote opener (like the Chamberlain brand remote shown) to activate the door. Observe carefully to ensure that the door opens and closes smoothly, travels fully and evenly along the tracks without any hitches or obstructions, and that the automatic opener motor functions correctly and quietly with the newly installed door. Confirm that the springs provide the appropriate balance and that all components work in harmony. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3GI2uS7Di6k 33 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11106-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GP-P16Fth40/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Rough Opening — Garage Door Installation Before installing the new door, it's critical to ensure the rough opening is properly prepared. Use a level to check that the subfloor is perfectly level. Then, check both side studs of the rough opening to ensure they are plumb (vertically straight). Finally, use a large framing square to verify that all four corners of the opening are square (90-degree angles). If any of these are not true, you will need to add wood shims or additional wood pieces to correct the rough opening to achieve a level, plumb, and square state. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GP-P16Fth40 24 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11106-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rxn0O4If7CI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Door Opening — Garage Door Installation Begin by thoroughly cleaning the floor area surrounding the door opening to ensure a clear workspace. Double-check the rough opening dimensions to confirm they are suitable for the new door. The rough opening should typically be approximately 1/2 inch taller and 3/4 inch wider than the overall outside dimensions of the new door frame. Use a level to ensure the floor is perfectly level and also check the rough opening itself for plumb (vertically straight) and square (all corners at 90 degrees). https://www.youtube.com/embed/rxn0O4If7CI 25 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11106-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IPrsoL_4apM/hqdefault.jpg Analyze Rough Opening & Floor Level — Garage Door Installation Before attempting to install the door, it's crucial to analyze the rough opening to ensure it's suitable. First, measure the width of the existing door at the header and the height of the frame. Then, measure the rough opening itself. Ideally, you want to have a 1/2 inch space for width to allow for adjustments to achieve perfect plumb, and a 1-inch space for height to accommodate future flooring and allow the door to be lifted. Next, use a 6-foot level (or a 4-foot level if a 6-foot is unavailable) to check the plumb of both sides of the rough opening in both directions. If the framing is perfectly plumb, you can maintain tighter tolerances. If it's significantly out of plumb, you may need to adjust the framing using tools like a sledgehammer or sawzall, adding shims or cutting plates to achieve the desired space and plumbness. Finally, check how level the floor is across the opening using a 2-foot level or a laser level. If new flooring is being installed, shim the door up with temporary shims to the exact thickness of the new flooring on the low side, then cut the jamb with an undercut saw once the new flooring is in. If installing over existing flooring, you might need to cut down the door frame accordingly based on how off-level the floor is. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IPrsoL_4apM 89 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11107-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qba1pX9oWcc/hqdefault.jpg Assemble and Install Garage Door Tracks — Garage Door Installation Upon receiving the custom garage door and its components, begin by assembling the side tracks. These tracks are typically made of galvanized steel and come in sections that need to be bolted together. Attach the horizontal arms to the assembled side tracks. This pre-assembly allows for easier installation when lifting the entire track system into place. Once assembled, lift the tracks and mount them securely to the vertical timber posts installed in Step 1. Use an impact driver to fasten the tracks firmly to the packers on the wall, ensuring they are level and properly aligned. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qba1pX9oWcc 18 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11107-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zuhbxSpQO_8/hqdefault.jpg Install Rollers and Vertical Tracks — Garage Door Installation Insert the rollers into the top and bottom brackets and also into the tubes on each hinge. If a roller has two tubes, always place it in the tube farthest from the door. Next, assemble the jam brackets and flag brackets to the vertical track according to the instructions in your manual. With a helper supporting the door panels in place, carefully remove the temporary nails you toenailed in place on one side. Slide the vertical track over the rollers, ensuring all rollers are fully seated in the hinges, leaving approximately a half-inch gap between the edge of the door and the track. Do not force the track, as this could cause the door to bind. Pre-drill at each lag screw position and loosely attach the flag bracket and track brackets. The tops of both vertical tracks must be level with each other; verify this by measuring from the top of the door to the top of the bracket on both sides. Check that the tracks are plumb, then fully tighten the lag screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zuhbxSpQO_8 55 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11107-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p3nKa3jRkgY/hqdefault.jpg Assemble and Install Rollers and Track — Garage Door Installation Proceed to assemble and install the rollers into the hinges on the door sections, and then install the new track system. The track consists of vertical and horizontal sections that guide the rollers and allow the door to move smoothly. Carefully align the track sections and secure them to the garage framing using the appropriate hangers and fasteners. Ensure the track is plumb and level, and that the rollers move freely within them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p3nKa3jRkgY 4 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11108-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p3nKa3jRkgY/hqdefault.jpg Stack Door Sections and Attach Hinges — Garage Door Installation With the bottom section prepared, begin stacking the door sections into the opening, starting from the bottom and working your way up. As each section is placed, secure it by attaching the hinges. These hinges will connect the individual door panels, allowing them to articulate as the door opens and closes. Carefully align each section and fasten the hinges using a drill and appropriate screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p3nKa3jRkgY 7 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11108-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xZwHOdI0QLc/hqdefault.jpg Install Middle Panels and Hinges — Garage Door Installation Install the remaining middle garage door panels one by one. For each middle panel, use self-tapping machine-thread lag screws to secure the center hinges. These screws are designed to bite into the metal backer within these panels, providing a strong attachment. With your helper, carefully lift and position each subsequent panel so its bottom edge rests on the top edge of the panel below it. The rollers on the ends of the newly installed panel will slide into the vertical tracks. Secure any remaining end hinges or brackets, sliding their rollers into the tracks. Ensure all panels are flush and properly aligned before tightening the screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xZwHOdI0QLc 116 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11108-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H57kKA89LUM/hqdefault.jpg Assembling Door Panels and Hardware — Garage Door Installation The installers lay out the individual garage door panels on sawhorses. They then systematically attach hinges, rollers, and other essential hardware to each panel. This process involves using an impact driver to secure metal brackets at the section joints and for the rollers. One of the panels includes pre-installed windows. The bottom weather seal is also attached to the lowest panel, and a warning sticker is applied to a visible section of the door. The individual components are carefully unpacked and organized prior to assembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H57kKA89LUM 115 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11109-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xZwHOdI0QLc/hqdefault.jpg Position Bottom Panel and Install Vertical Tracks — Garage Door Installation With a helper, carefully carry the assembled bottom panel into the garage opening. Place the panel on the garage floor, ensuring it is centered within the door frame. Use a tape measure to verify equal spacing on both sides. Insert the bottom rollers into the pre-installed roller brackets on the panel. Then, position the vertical tracks on both sides of the door, wrapping them around the installed rollers. Loosely secure the vertical tracks to the wooden door frame using lag screws and a cordless drill. Do not overtighten these screws at this stage, as minor adjustments may be needed later. Ensure there's a slight gap between the track and the door panel to prevent friction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xZwHOdI0QLc 35 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11109-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zuhbxSpQO_8/hqdefault.jpg Install Rollers and Vertical Tracks — Garage Door Installation Insert the rollers into the top and bottom brackets and also into the tubes on each hinge. If a roller has two tubes, always place it in the tube farthest from the door. Next, assemble the jam brackets and flag brackets to the vertical track according to the instructions in your manual. With a helper supporting the door panels in place, carefully remove the temporary nails you toenailed in place on one side. Slide the vertical track over the rollers, ensuring all rollers are fully seated in the hinges, leaving approximately a half-inch gap between the edge of the door and the track. Do not force the track, as this could cause the door to bind. Pre-drill at each lag screw position and loosely attach the flag bracket and track brackets. The tops of both vertical tracks must be level with each other; verify this by measuring from the top of the door to the top of the bracket on both sides. Check that the tracks are plumb, then fully tighten the lag screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zuhbxSpQO_8 55 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11109-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p3nKa3jRkgY/hqdefault.jpg Assemble and Install Rollers and Track — Garage Door Installation Proceed to assemble and install the rollers into the hinges on the door sections, and then install the new track system. The track consists of vertical and horizontal sections that guide the rollers and allow the door to move smoothly. Carefully align the track sections and secure them to the garage framing using the appropriate hangers and fasteners. Ensure the track is plumb and level, and that the rollers move freely within them. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p3nKa3jRkgY 4 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11110-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CRkxQFAgUlc/hqdefault.jpg Install Horizontal Tracks and Hangers — Garage Door Installation Install the horizontal track when stacking the top door section. Ensure the track hangers are made of material strong enough to support the entire weight of the door. The hangers must be securely screwed into a solid structural element (like ceiling joists or wall studs) that can adequately bear the door's weight. The presenter notes he had to drill a new hole in his track to accommodate existing hangers, indicating flexibility might be needed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CRkxQFAgUlc 57 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11110-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xZwHOdI0QLc/hqdefault.jpg Install Horizontal Tracks — Garage Door Installation With the vertical tracks and most panels in place, install the horizontal tracks. These are typically curved sections that connect the top of the vertical tracks to horizontal supports extending into the garage. With the help of your partner and using ladders for safe access, lift each horizontal track section. Align the curved end with the top of the vertical track and screw them securely together using the appropriate fasteners. Repeat this process for both sides of the garage door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xZwHOdI0QLc 23 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11110-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zuhbxSpQO_8/hqdefault.jpg Install Horizontal Tracks — Garage Door Installation Now, install the horizontal track. Slide the horizontal track over the roller. Attach the curved end of the track to the flag bracket using the supplied track bolts and flange nuts, ensuring the head of the bolt is on the inside of the track. Secure the end of the horizontal angle to the top of the flag bracket with a carriage bolt. Then, attach the opposite end of the horizontal track to the rear track hanger. In this example, an existing wooden structure was used as a hanger, but if you don't have one, rear track hanger kits are available. To ensure the horizontal track is perfectly square, measure diagonally from one corner of the track to the opposite diagonal side. Both diagonal measurements should be equal. Adjust the track's position if necessary to achieve squareness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zuhbxSpQO_8 31 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11111-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zuhbxSpQO_8/hqdefault.jpg Mount Torsion Spring System — Garage Door Installation Mount the torsion spring system. Begin by reading all safety information in the manual, as improper handling can lead to injuries. Attach the system's bracket to the flag bracket using the supplied carriage bolts. Complete this part of the installation by pre-drilling holes into the wooden jamb and fastening the bracket securely with lag bolts. Next, slide the spring onto the torsion tube and attach the winding unit. Depending on your door, you might have one or two torsion springs; if there are multiple, the ends of the springs and winding units will be color-coded to help match components. After the spring and winding unit, add the drums. Lift the entire assembly (spring, winding unit, drums on the torsion tube) and place it into the brackets. If your system includes a center support bracket (as shown in the video example), attach it now, ensuring it is straight and level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zuhbxSpQO_8 54 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11111-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H57kKA89LUM/hqdefault.jpg Installing and Tensioning Torsion Springs — Garage Door Installation The torsion spring assembly, consisting of a metal shaft, drums, and heavy-duty springs, is mounted horizontally above the garage door opening. Using specialized winding bars, an installer carefully tensions the torsion springs. This is a highly critical and dangerous step, as the springs are placed under immense rotational force to counterbalance the weight of the garage door. The installer meticulously inserts and rotates the winding bars, tightening the springs turn by turn. Safety is paramount here, as improper handling of these high-tension springs can lead to severe injury. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H57kKA89LUM 135 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11111-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BiCU_OoqOxk/hqdefault.jpg Add Tension to First Torsion Spring — Garage Door Installation After releasing some tension, insert a winding bar into a hole in the winding cone and begin adding tension by making three quarter-turns. Rotate the bar in the appropriate direction to wind the spring tighter. Be careful not to over-tighten, as making the door too 'light' can create new balance problems. Once the desired turns are added, use the second winding bar to hold the tension firmly in place while you tighten the set screws on the winding cone with an adjustable wrench or socket. Ensure the set screws are extremely tight to prevent the spring from unwinding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BiCU_OoqOxk 50 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11112-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/h3yZvV7NGHQ/hqdefault.jpg Install New Cables — Garage Door Installation Feed the new lift cable through the pulley fork, ensuring it is properly seated in the pulley's groove. Reattach the S-hook to its original position on the horizontal frame. Then, thread the other end of the cable (with the factory-made loop) down the vertical track and attach its loop around the bottom bracket of the door. Gently tug on the end not connected to the S-hook to ensure the cable is snug in the pulley groove. Repeat this entire process for the cable on the other side of the garage door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/h3yZvV7NGHQ 112 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11112-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fqQ6OT_w4v0/hqdefault.jpg Route and Attach New Cable — Garage Door Installation Take the loop end of the new cable and attach it to the pulley system with the S-hook, ensuring it's securely in place. Then, feed the other end of the cable through the top of the garage door track and down to the bottom. Attach the bracket on the cut end of the cable to the bottom of the garage door, making sure the cable is taut. Repeat this process for the other side of the garage door if both cables are being replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fqQ6OT_w4v0 84 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11112-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/djiGJ7Ks_dQ/hqdefault.jpg Install Cables and Extension Springs — Garage Door Installation Install the garage door cables and extension springs. The cables are attached to the bottom of the door panels, run up along the vertical tracks, over pulleys mounted at the top, and then connect to the extension springs. These springs are stretched when the garage door is in the closed (down) position, providing counter-balance and making the door easier to lift. Due to the barn's structure, one side utilizes a longer cable to position the spring further back, indicating flexibility in spring placement based on available space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/djiGJ7Ks_dQ 33 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11113-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_uQrcy6wFWQ/hqdefault.jpg Wind the Torsion Spring — Garage Door Installation Insert one proper winding bar into a hole on the spring's winding cone. Use the other winding bar to lever the spring upwards, applying tension by rotating the cone one quarter turn at a time. After each quarter turn, insert the first bar into the next available hole to maintain tension and switch the second bar to continue winding. Count each quarter turn carefully until you reach the calculated total (e.g., 34 turns for an 8-foot door). Ensure the winding bars are fully seated in the winding cone holes during this process to prevent slippage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_uQrcy6wFWQ 93 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11113-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vy7oLhlHnKo/hqdefault.jpg Wind First Torsion Spring — Garage Door Installation Using both winding bars, proceed to wind the first torsion spring. Insert one bar into an adjustment hole, apply upward pressure to lift the spring cone slightly, then insert the second bar into the next available adjustment hole. Carefully turn the spring cone a total of three quarter-turns (or 3/4 turn in total) in the direction that increases tension (typically upwards). After each quarter turn, remove the lower winding bar, then re-insert it into the next adjustment hole below the upper winding bar. This 'leapfrogging' technique allows for controlled winding. Remember to maintain a firm grip and keep your body clear of the winding bars at all times. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vy7oLhlHnKo 29 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11113-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EtH5LU2jClI/hqdefault.jpg Wind the New Torsion Springs — Garage Door Installation Now, it's time to wind the new springs. Start by winding each spring one full turn by hand (which equals four quarter turns), ensuring the winding bar is fully inserted into the cone. Then, using two winding bars, continue adding tension to the spring. For a 7-foot door, you typically need to add 29 to 30 quarter turns; for an 8-foot door, it's 33 to 34 quarter turns. Always wind the spring in the UPWARD direction, regardless of whether it's a left or right-wound spring (the direction of the wind matters more than the side). Insert one winding bar completely, turn one quarter turn, then insert the second bar, remove the first, and repeat until the desired number of turns is achieved. After winding, securely tighten the set screws on the winding cone using the 7/16-inch 12-point socket and ratchet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EtH5LU2jClI 106 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11114-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JZHY11xw_xc/hqdefault.jpg Install Front Bracket — Garage Door Installation Mount the front bracket (header bracket) to the wall above the garage door. The narrator had to cut out a section of pegboard and install a 2x4 stud behind it to provide a solid mounting surface, as the original location for the old opener was not suitable for the new unit. The bracket must be securely fastened to a structural element (like a wooden header or stud) to support the weight and forces of the garage door operation. The specific placement of this bracket will depend on your garage's construction and door height, so refer to your opener's manual for precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JZHY11xw_xc 41 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11114-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1tgdSgtZWEY/hqdefault.jpg Install Door Bracket and Motor Unit Ceiling Mounts — Garage Door Installation Install the emergency release cord and attach the door bracket to the top panel of the garage door. The door bracket connects the door to the opener's trolley. Mount the motor unit to the ceiling using the adjustable hanger brackets, ensuring the entire rail system is level and properly aligned with the garage door tracks. Secure these brackets into ceiling joists or a sturdy mounting board. Use a wrench or socket to tighten all bolts on the hanger brackets securely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1tgdSgtZWEY 54 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11114-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dpyz32i5mQY/hqdefault.jpg Install New Opener Unit and Track — Garage Door Installation Attach the new opener's track to the existing top bracket above the garage door opening, securing it with the provided hardware. Then, lift the main opener unit and align it with the ceiling support brackets, securing it in place with bolts. The existing ceiling support brackets can be reused, reducing installation time and effort. Connect the motor unit to the track. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dpyz32i5mQY 70 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11115-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ogJ3rOa1Xd4/hqdefault.jpg Attach Rail to Motor Unit — Garage Door Installation Attach the assembled rail to the main garage door opener motor unit. This involves aligning the end of the rail with the designated slot on the motor unit and securing it with screws using a power drill. This forms the core assembly of the opener. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ogJ3rOa1Xd4 20 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11115-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tl_sDahKZbg/hqdefault.jpg Install Header Bracket and Connect Rail — Garage Door Installation Align the header bracket with the pre-drilled holes and insert the provided lag bolts. Use a socket wrench to tighten the lag bolts securely, ensuring the bracket is firmly attached to the header board. Once the header bracket is installed, connect the rail of the garage door opener to it using the provided pin and locking mechanism. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tl_sDahKZbg 76 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11115-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Wehde081FFk/hqdefault.jpg Install Header Support and Attach Rail — Garage Door Installation Install the new header bracket for the rail system. This bracket is typically mounted to a sturdy wooden header above the garage door opening. Use a drill to create pilot holes and then securely fasten the bracket. Next, lift the assembled rail system with the motor head attached and connect the front end of the rail to the newly installed header bracket. This is best done with two people for safety and stability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Wehde081FFk 11 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11116-1 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Wehde081FFk/hqdefault.jpg Attach Garage Door Arm to Trolley — Garage Door Installation Attach the garage door arm from the door itself to the trolley mechanism on the opener's rail. This arm connects the door to the opener, allowing it to move up and down. Ensure the arm is properly aligned and securely fastened to both the door bracket and the trolley according to the manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Wehde081FFk 8 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11116-2 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dpyz32i5mQY/hqdefault.jpg Connect Lifting Arm to Door — Garage Door Installation Connect the lifting arm to the trolley, which moves along the track, and then attach the other end of the arm to the top bracket of the garage door itself. Ensure all connections are secure and allow for smooth movement of the door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dpyz32i5mQY 15 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11116-3 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ogJ3rOa1Xd4/hqdefault.jpg Connect Door Arm to Garage Door — Garage Door Installation Connect the curved and straight door arms to the garage door and the carrier. The video shows connecting the curved arm to the carrier with a pin and clip, and then attaching the straight arm to the garage door's top panel using bolts. Ensure the arm forms an appropriate angle for proper door operation, typically between 90 and 120 degrees when the door is closed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ogJ3rOa1Xd4 45 2026-09-26T14:35:28.800Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11102-1 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — measure stairs Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11102-2 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure stairs Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11102-3 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11103-1 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11103-2 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11103-3 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — measure stairs Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11105-1 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure stairs Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11105-2 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — measure stairs With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11105-3 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — measure stairs Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11104-1 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11104-2 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measure stairs To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11104-3 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — measure stairs Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-20T09:29:32.181Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11095-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aEV1OoGKBpE/hqdefault.jpg Mark Gutter Pitch Line — Gutter Installation Establish a reference line on the house to ensure the gutter is installed with the correct pitch. A common mistake is hanging the gutter too high. Position a level against the roofline to represent the imaginary line where water runs off. The front edge of the gutter should be below this line (approximately 1 inch) to prevent ice buildup from damaging it in winter. Mark the high side of the gutter's position, where the water will start its flow, and gently tap a nail into the fascia board. Attach a chalk line to this nail. Then, move to the opposite end (the low side) where the downspout will be, and, by 'eyeballing' the end cap's position approximately 1 inch lower than the high side (or roughly 1/16 inch drop per foot of run), attach the chalk line. Verify the pitch using the level to ensure proper drainage before snapping the chalk line, creating a clear guide for installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aEV1OoGKBpE 95 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11095-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/l-F7XiPqR2E/hqdefault.jpg Determine and Mark Gutter Slope — Gutter Installation To ensure proper drainage, the gutter needs a slight slope. Start by attaching a string line to one end of the fascia board where the gutter will be installed. Run the string line to the other end, allowing for a slight slope, approximately a half-inch drop over the length of the gutter. Once the desired slope is achieved, snap a chalk line along the fascia board to mark the top edge of where the gutter will be mounted. https://www.youtube.com/embed/l-F7XiPqR2E 22 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11095-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Wm5OoWaeLJs/hqdefault.jpg Mark Gutter Slope and Hanger Locations — Gutter Installation Begin by marking the starting and ending points for the gutter run on the building. It's crucial to establish a proper slope for drainage; the recommendation is at least 1/4 inch of drop for every 10 feet of gutter length. After marking the overall gutter line, use a marker and a level to precisely mark the locations where each gutter hanger will be installed along the marked slope. The presenter recommends marking the screw holes for the hangers at the same time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Wm5OoWaeLJs 11 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11096-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/COp2Kh0kp2c/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Gutter Hangers — Gutter Installation After your gutter sections are fully assembled with end caps and downspout connections, it's time to prepare the hangers. These hangers are designed to slip under the front lip of the gutter and then slide over the back, with a screw securing them to the fascia. It's often easier to loosely space out and install the hangers onto the gutter sections while they are still on the ground, before lifting them onto the house. This avoids wrestling with the roof and drip edge later. Aim for hangers every 2-3 feet for adequate support. https://www.youtube.com/embed/COp2Kh0kp2c 13 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11096-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wZ4TSisTxhk/hqdefault.jpg Install Robust Gutter Hangers — Gutter Installation For reinforcement or new installations, use professional-grade gutter hangers that clip onto the front and back of the gutter and secure into the fascia board with a screw. These hangers are significantly more robust than traditional spike and ferrule systems. Position these hangers approximately every 16 inches along the gutter length, or closer for extra strength in areas with heavy loads. This method provides superior holding power, ensuring the gutter remains firmly attached and properly aligned against the fascia board. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wZ4TSisTxhk 58 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11096-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aEV1OoGKBpE/hqdefault.jpg Install Gutter and Hangers — Gutter Installation Lift the gutter into position using two ladders, one for each end, with an assistant. Temporarily secure the gutter about 2 inches lower than the chalk line you marked earlier. This temporary positioning allows you to easily install the gutter hangers. The hangers (Berger brand shown) are designed to hook into the front lip of the gutter and then screw into the back of the fascia board, directly into the rafter tails for maximum strength. Because the gutter is temporarily lowered, you can easily hook the front of the hanger and bend it into place without hitting the roof shingles. Once all hangers are hooked, reposition the gutter upwards so that its top edge aligns with the chalk line. Use a cordless drill and screws to secure each hanger by driving the screw into the rafter tails through the hanger's designated hole. Space the hangers appropriately, typically every 2-3 feet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aEV1OoGKBpE 78 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11097-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aEV1OoGKBpE/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Seal, and Cut Gutter — Gutter Installation Measure the total length required for the gutter section using a measuring tape from the high point nail to the low point where the downspout will be. For example, if the measurement is 25 feet 11 inches, round up to 26 feet for material procurement. Next, take one end cap and apply a bead of gutter sealant (such as a polyurethane or butyl-based caulk designed for gutters) to its inner crack. Press the end cap firmly onto one end of the gutter. To permanently secure the end cap and ensure a watertight seal, use a crimping tool (also known as a gutter crimper or hand seamer) to create small divots along the edges where the end cap meets the gutter. This mechanical connection prevents the end cap from detaching. Finally, cut the gutter to the measured length. Start with a hacksaw for the initial cut and finish with snips for a clean edge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aEV1OoGKBpE 96 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11097-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cJGJOc_AigQ/hqdefault.jpg Cutting and Assembling Gutter Sections — Gutter Installation Before mounting the full gutter sections, cut the guttering pieces to the required lengths using a hand saw. For example, if an end cap is needed, use it to mark the precise cut location. Once cut, attach any necessary end caps, internal corner pieces, or joint pieces. When attaching end caps, ensure they are hooked onto the guttering and then teased into place, finally clipping them securely. Double-check that all rubber seals within connectors are properly seated to prevent future leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cJGJOc_AigQ 75 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11097-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Dbuv4W_EFmU/hqdefault.jpg Cut and Join Additional Gutter Sections — Gutter Installation For longer gutter runs, you may need to connect multiple straight sections. If a section needs to be shorter, use a hacksaw to cut it to the appropriate length. When joining two straight pieces, use a joint connector in the same manner as connecting a corner. It is highly recommended to place an extra hanger directly at or very close to each joint to provide added support and prevent sagging, especially for vinyl gutters which can be more flexible than metal. Once the joint is secure, install hangers as per previous steps, and finally, attach an end cap if it is the end of a gutter run. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Dbuv4W_EFmU 38 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11098-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/COp2Kh0kp2c/hqdefault.jpg Install Gutter on House and Test — Gutter Installation With your guide line established, carefully lift the assembled gutter section into place. Slide the gutter hangers into position, ensuring they line up with the rafter tails of the house for solid support. Secure each hanger by driving a screw through it and into the fascia board, following your marked slope line. Once all hangers are screwed down, test the entire gutter system's function with a garden hose. Run water through the gutter to check for proper drainage towards the downspout and to ensure there are no leaks at any of the joints or end caps. Make any necessary adjustments or apply additional sealant if leaks are found. https://www.youtube.com/embed/COp2Kh0kp2c 13 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11098-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/O1YArrbAkDI/hqdefault.jpg Mount Gutters to Fascia — Gutter Installation Once fabricated, the long sections of seamless gutter are carefully lifted into position along the eaves of the house. This often requires multiple workers and the use of ladders to maneuver the lengthy gutters. The gutters are then mounted to the fascia board using a cordless drill and specialized gutter fasteners (such as hidden hangers or spikes). It is crucial to ensure the gutter has a slight slope (typically 1/4 inch per 10 feet) towards the downspout outlets to facilitate proper drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/O1YArrbAkDI 3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11098-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uw0bJzOzLgs/hqdefault.jpg Fit Guttering Sections — Gutter Installation Now, fit the first section of guttering. Hold the guttering at an angle, tilting it to hook the back edge securely under the back clip of the fascia brackets. Once the back is engaged, rotate the guttering forward and snap the front edge into place, ensuring it is firmly seated in the front clips. Repeat this process for all subsequent guttering sections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uw0bJzOzLgs 6 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11099-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/O1YArrbAkDI/hqdefault.jpg Attach Downspouts — Gutter Installation The final step in the gutter installation process is to attach the downspouts. This involves connecting downspout elbows and straight sections to the outlet holes in the newly installed gutters. The video shows a worker connecting a white downspout elbow piece to the gutter. Downspouts are typically crimped and secured with screws to ensure a tight, leak-free connection, directing rainwater safely away from the building's foundation. Additional sections and extensions may be added as needed to guide water to a proper drainage area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/O1YArrbAkDI 3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11099-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/COp2Kh0kp2c/hqdefault.jpg Install Downspouts and Finalize Drainage — Gutter Installation The final step is to install the downspouts. Use a combination of downspout elbows and straight sections to bring the downspout from the gutter connection back towards the exterior wall of the house and down to the ground. Measure and cut downspout sections as needed using an angle grinder with a metal cut-off wheel. Secure the downspout to the house with downspout straps, typically placed every few feet down the length of the downspout. Consider adding a rain barrel collection system to conserve water by directing the downspout into a rain barrel. Alternatively, ensure the downspout extends far enough from the foundation to prevent water from pooling and causing erosion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/COp2Kh0kp2c 25 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11099-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yHYi-RKHcPY/hqdefault.jpg Install Downspouts and Brackets — Gutter Installation Downspouts are connected to the previously installed downspout outlet. The connection typically involves an elbow piece, then a vertical downspout section, followed by another elbow, and finally a horizontal piece to direct water away from the house. All connections should be made using self-tapping screws with enameled heads, and these screws should be placed on the top side of the downspout connections to prevent leaks. Vertical downspout sections are secured to the house wall using downspout straps/brackets, which are screwed into the siding. The narrator explains that directing water down the roof slope is acceptable as the shingles are designed to handle rainwater. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yHYi-RKHcPY 221 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11100-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gLLEzQ7yerc/hqdefault.jpg Seal Gutter Joints — Gutter Installation The final critical step is to seal all the joints and seams within the gutter system to prevent leaks. Apply a generous amount of gutter sealant along the internal seams where two gutter sections meet, particularly focusing on the bottom and sides of the connection. The sealant, which appears to be a thick, grey, possibly cement-based or silicone product, should create a watertight bond. Allow the sealant to cure according to manufacturer instructions, then perform a water test by pouring water into the gutter to confirm that there are no leaks from the sealed joints. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gLLEzQ7yerc 3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11100-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nkFf5r7dtF8/hqdefault.jpg Seal Leaks and Enhance Gutter Appearance — Gutter Installation After cleaning and ensuring proper pitch, it's time to fix any leaks in your gutters. For the best results, make sure your gutters are completely dry before applying any sealant. Wearing gloves, run a continuous bead of gutter sealant over any seams or suspected leak areas. The video shows a tube of GS121 Gutter Sealant being applied with a caulk gun. While you're up there, it's a good idea to clean the exterior of your gutters with a sponge to improve their appearance. Additionally, you can touch up your gutters and downspouts with a little paint if they have any chips or faded areas, using a small paintbrush for precision. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nkFf5r7dtF8 16 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11100-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e8ZtL7dT_DQ/hqdefault.jpg Seal Gutter Seams and End Caps — Gutter Installation Once the gutters are reinforced and properly aligned, the final step is to seal any potential leak points. This involves applying a high-quality gutter sealant, such as Gutter Seal 2321, to all seams, miters (corner joints), and end caps. The presenter emphasizes using the strongest sealant available to ensure a watertight and long-lasting repair. The company guarantees their work for life, provided the gutters are regularly cleaned and maintained by either the homeowner or a professional service. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e8ZtL7dT_DQ 36 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11101-1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EVUUpLmhWT8/hqdefault.jpg Test Gutter Drainage — Gutter Installation Once all gutter sections and downspout components are installed, perform a water test. Use a garden hose to run water into the gutter. Observe the water flow to ensure it drains effectively towards and down the downspout. Check all sealed joints and end caps for any leaks. Make any necessary adjustments to the gutter slope or add more sealant to leaking areas if detected. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EVUUpLmhWT8 14 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11101-2 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/l-F7XiPqR2E/hqdefault.jpg Test for Leaks and Proper Drainage — Gutter Installation Once all gutter and downspout components are installed, it's crucial to test the system. Use a water source, such as a garden hose, to spray water directly onto the shed's roof. Observe the water flow as it travels down into the gutter and through the downspout. Check for any leaks along the gutter seams, end caps, and downspout connections. Confirm that the water flows efficiently through the downspout and is directed away from the shed's foundation, ensuring there are no blockages or overflows. https://www.youtube.com/embed/l-F7XiPqR2E 14 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11101-3 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FikqUsYSKeM/hqdefault.jpg Test the Rainwater Collection System — Gutter Installation Once the gutter and downspout are fully installed and secured, pour water onto the corrugated roof with a watering can or garden hose. Observe the water flow into the gutter, down the downspout, and into the collection barrel to ensure there are no leaks and that the system functions as intended. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FikqUsYSKeM 1 2026-09-25T14:31:27.206Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11079-1 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xWSd0GfZSEc/hqdefault.jpg Clean Wood Surface — Wood Staining After sanding, thoroughly clean the wood surface to remove all dust and debris. Use a tack cloth to wipe down the entire piece, ensuring it is completely dry and free of any particles that could interfere with stain application. You can also use a vacuum cleaner or a clean rag/paper towel as alternatives to a tack cloth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xWSd0GfZSEc 7 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11079-2 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dlm66l0dxb4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Wood Surface — Wood Staining Before applying any stain, thoroughly prepare the wood surface. Take a tack cloth and rub it over the entire project. This action is crucial for picking up any loose particles, dust, or debris that might be present on the wood. A clean surface ensures that the stain will be absorbed evenly and take to the wood much better, preventing blotches or an uneven finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dlm66l0dxb4 15 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11079-3 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vrx6-j4GAFI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Wood Surface — Wood Staining Before applying the stain, it is crucial to ensure the wood surface has been properly cleaned and prepared. This foundational step removes dirt, grime, mildew, and any previous finishes, creating a clean and porous surface that allows the stain to penetrate evenly and adhere effectively. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vrx6-j4GAFI 5 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11080-1 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ogKRX_MNBxo/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Wood — Wood Staining Begin by thoroughly sanding the wood. The quality of the finish heavily relies on proper preparation, primarily sanding. Start with 80-grit sandpaper to remove rough material and imperfections from the entire project piece. This initial sanding stage typically takes the longest. Once the wood is sufficiently smoothed with 80-grit, move on to 120-grit or 150-grit sandpaper, followed by a final sanding with 220-grit sandpaper to achieve a very smooth finish. As you increase the grit number, the sandpaper becomes finer, resulting in a smoother surface with less material removed. Use an orbital palm sander for most projects. For smaller, lighter projects, a sanding block can be sufficient, while a belt sander is useful for heavy sanding tasks. Always wear goggles to protect your eyes from sawdust, and a face mask is also recommended. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ogKRX_MNBxo 108 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11080-2 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vfeAxUfoEdE/hqdefault.jpg Proper Sanding for Stain Application — Wood Staining Before applying any stain or finish, thoroughly sand the wood surface. Begin with an 80-grit sandpaper to remove any major scratches or imperfections. Progress to 120-grit sandpaper to refine the surface and remove marks left by the coarser grit. Finish sanding with 220-grit sandpaper to achieve a smooth texture. This process not only removes blemishes but also helps to open up the wood's pores, preparing them for better stain absorption. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vfeAxUfoEdE 19 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11080-3 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xWSd0GfZSEc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Wood Surface by Sanding — Wood Staining Begin by sanding the wood surface to create a smooth, even surface, remove any protective coating, and open the wood pores for better stain penetration. If the wood is very rough, start with 80 or 120 grit sandpaper. Always finish with 220 grit sandpaper, as this is the ideal grit before staining. Sand in the direction of the wood grain using an orbital sander for faster, more consistent results. Alternatively, you can sand by hand using sandpaper sheets or sanding blocks. Once sanding is complete, the wood should feel smooth to the touch. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xWSd0GfZSEc 24 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11081-1 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0SZZqg00Zok/hqdefault.jpg Apply Pre-stain Conditioner (for Softwoods) — Wood Staining If you are staining softwood, such as pine, it is highly recommended to apply a pre-stain conditioner first. This product helps to even out the wood's porosity, preventing the stain from absorbing unevenly and causing blotchy results. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0SZZqg00Zok 5 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11081-2 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xWSd0GfZSEc/hqdefault.jpg Apply Pre-Stain Wood Conditioner — Wood Staining Apply pre-stain wood conditioner to the wood. This is a crucial step to prevent blotchiness and ensure that the stain absorbs evenly across the wood surface, especially with softwoods like pine. Before applying, thoroughly stir the wood conditioner with a stir stick to ensure all components are well mixed. Apply the conditioner using a foam pad, wiping it in the direction of the wood grain. Observe as the conditioner soaks into the wood, preparing the fibers to receive the stain uniformly. Allow the conditioner to sit for 5-15 minutes, but not longer than 2 hours, before applying the stain, as per product instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xWSd0GfZSEc 45 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11081-3 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EN8iLDztUmY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Pre-Stain Wood Conditioner — Wood Staining After cleaning, apply a pre-stain wood conditioner to the wood. It is crucial to match the conditioner type to your stain; if you are using an oil-based stain, select an oil-based pre-stain wood conditioner. The video shows Minwax Pre-Stain Wood Conditioner, which is oil-based. This conditioner helps to normalize the wood's absorption rate, which can vary significantly between different wood species or even within the same piece of wood. By doing so, it prevents blotchiness and ensures a more uniform, smooth finish when the stain is applied. This step takes only a few extra minutes but makes a significant difference in the final appearance of your project. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EN8iLDztUmY 26 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11082-1 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TTliO-UC-j0/hqdefault.jpg Apply the Wood Stain — Wood Staining Don protective gloves to protect your hands from the stain. You can apply the wood stain using a shop rag, a bristle brush, or a foam brush. The presenter recommends a shop rag for ease of use. Apply the stain by rubbing it into the wood in a circular motion to ensure proper absorption and penetration into the wood fibers. Immediately after applying, wipe up any excess stain from the surface, always moving in the direction of the wood grain. The particular 'Varathane' brand stain used in the video can achieve the desired color depth and richness in just one coat, unlike many other stains that require multiple layers. This allows for faster and more efficient project completion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TTliO-UC-j0 33 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11082-2 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s88ljYuOetI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Stain — Wood Staining After preparing the wood, thoroughly stir the wood stain. Apply the stain using a slightly wet cloth or rag, ensuring to work it into the wood grain. Apply the stain in thin, even coats, gradually building up to achieve your desired shade. Remember to protect your work surfaces with drop cloths to prevent staining. Once the desired color is achieved and before the stain dries, remove any excess stain by wiping it off in the direction of the grain with a clean, dry cloth. Be careful not to over-apply, as too much stain can leave dark, uneven patches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s88ljYuOetI 15 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11082-3 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0SZZqg00Zok/hqdefault.jpg Apply the First Coat of Stain — Wood Staining Using a lint-free rag or a foam brush, apply the wood stain to your project. Always apply the stain by moving the rag or brush with the wood grain. This ensures the stain penetrates evenly and highlights the natural patterns of the wood. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0SZZqg00Zok 11 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11083-1 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DVOtEbrs4eg/hqdefault.jpg Allow Stain to Dry — Wood Staining After wiping off all excess stain and allowing for any seepage to be removed, the stained cabinet door needs to dry completely. For Minwax stains, the minimum drying time is typically four hours. However, it is always a good idea to allow more time, especially if working in lower temperatures or areas with higher humidity, as these conditions can extend drying times. The presenter often waits until the next day to apply the polyurethane, ensuring the stain is fully cured and ready for the protective finishing coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DVOtEbrs4eg 21 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11083-2 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nNdFG4XrDzs/hqdefault.jpg Allow Stain to Dry and Enjoy — Wood Staining Once the stain has been applied, allow it to dry completely. The video recommends allowing 48 hours for the stain to dry, but always refer to the specific product label for accurate drying and return-to-service instructions, as these can vary based on product type, temperature, and humidity. Once dry, your beautiful deck will be protected from the elements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nNdFG4XrDzs 12 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11083-3 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MayYKLG-qFY/hqdefault.jpg Allow Stain to Dry and Cure — Wood Staining Allow the freshly stained wood to dry for a recommended 2 to 6 hours, with the exact time depending on temperature and humidity. To ensure the stain has fully set up and cured, wait a full 24 hours before placing any patio furniture back onto the deck or allowing heavy traffic. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MayYKLG-qFY 10 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11084-1 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ogKRX_MNBxo/hqdefault.jpg Apply a Top Coat (Optional but Recommended) — Wood Staining After your wood stain has dried for at least 12 hours, you can apply a top coat. This adds extra durability, protects the wood, and enhances its grain. There are various top coats available, such as water-based or oil-based polyurethane (like Minwax Fast-Drying Polyurethane Clear Satin), furniture wax, or shellac. For oil-based polyurethane, thoroughly stir the product (do not shake) before applying. Use a foam brush to apply the polyurethane in very light, long strokes, following the wood grain, to avoid visible brush strokes. Always work in a well-ventilated area, and consider wearing a respirator mask to help avoid inhaling fumes. Allow the first coat of polyurethane to dry completely. If the wood grain has risen and feels rough (test by running your hand over it), lightly hand sand the surface using a 220-grit sanding block. Wipe away any sanding dust with a tack cloth before applying the second coat. Once the final coat of top coat has been applied, let your newly finished piece sit for at least a day, preferably three days, without use. This allows the top coat to fully cure to a hard, durable finish. Avoid working in super humid, very hot, or very cold conditions, as these can negatively affect drying and adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ogKRX_MNBxo 182 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11084-2 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8r7xmuSx6Pg/hqdefault.jpg Apply Oil-Based Topcoat — Wood Staining After the stain has completely dried (typically 24 hours), it's time to apply a protective topcoat. The presenter demonstrates with two common options: General Finishes Arm-R-Seal (an oil-based wipe-on polyurethane) and Minwax Polycrylic (a water-based clear topcoat). For the oil-based poly, apply a thin, even coat using a foam brush over the entire board (Piece C). Avoid going back over areas that have already been coated to prevent streaks. Allow 12 to 24 hours for the first coat to dry. Then, give it a light sanding with 320-grit sandpaper, clean off the dust, and apply a second coat. Repeat this process for a third coat for optimal coverage and protection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8r7xmuSx6Pg 48 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11084-3 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/W77sf0r9AjE/hqdefault.jpg Apply Clear Top Coat — Wood Staining After the stain has completely dried (refer to manufacturer instructions, usually 6-24 hours), it's time to apply a clear top coat for protection and durability. Use a clean brush to apply a thin, even layer of clear top coat over the stained wood. Allow the first coat to dry completely. For the smoothest finish and best adhesion between coats, lightly sand the surface with fine-grit sandpaper (around 220-400 grit) between each application of the top coat. Remove any sanding dust with a tack cloth before applying subsequent coats. Repeat the top coat application and light sanding process for the recommended number of coats (typically 2-3 coats) to achieve maximum protection and a professional-looking finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/W77sf0r9AjE 23 2026-09-24T14:40:57.964Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11077-1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/07tEoVUlAWQ/hqdefault.jpg Dry, Sand, and Clean First Coat — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Allow the first coat of polyurethane to dry for several hours. Drying times vary depending on the type of polyurethane (oil-based typically 4-6 hours, water-based 2-3 hours) and environmental conditions like temperature and humidity. The wood should feel dry to the touch and not sticky. After the first coat dries, the wood grain may have risen, making the surface feel slightly rough. Use a 220-grit sand block or sandpaper to lightly hand-sand the entire surface, following the wood grain. Then, use a tack cloth to thoroughly wipe away all saw dust. The surface should now feel smooth again. https://www.youtube.com/embed/07tEoVUlAWQ 34 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11077-2 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-Oe6jG5VWVw/hqdefault.jpg Dry First Coat — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After applying the first coat, allow ample time for it to dry completely. For fast-drying polyurethane, the instructions typically suggest 3 to 4 hours. However, it is recommended to give it more time, such as 5 or 6 hours, to ensure it is thoroughly cured and ready for the next step. Avoid touching the surface during this period to prevent smudges or transfer of dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-Oe6jG5VWVw 22 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11077-3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hkodyr8YBJk/hqdefault.jpg Allow Drying and Optional Sanding — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After applying each coat of polyurethane, it's essential to allow proper drying time before proceeding. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on the polyurethane can for the recommended drying time, which typically ranges from a few hours to a full day. Once a coat has dried, you can optionally lightly sand the surface with fine-grit sandpaper (e.g., 220-grit). This sanding step is not always necessary but can help ensure a smoother surface and promote better adhesion for subsequent coats. If you do sand, make sure to thoroughly clean off any sanding dust before applying the next coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hkodyr8YBJk 20 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11074-1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p7Q8mc6P7YU/hqdefault.jpg Allow Finish to Cure — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After applying the final coat of protective finish, allow the floor to cure completely. While the surface may feel dry to the touch within hours, full cure time can range from 24 hours to several days or even weeks, depending on the product and environmental conditions (humidity, temperature). Avoid heavy foot traffic, furniture placement, or rug laying until the finish has fully hardened to prevent impressions or damage. Consult the finish manufacturer's instructions for specific cure times. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p7Q8mc6P7YU 3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11074-2 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pfjsI8HPKbE/hqdefault.jpg Final Curing and Room Reset — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Once the final coat of wood floor finish has been applied, it's crucial to allow the floor sufficient time to fully cure. While the floor may be dry to the touch within a few hours (as shown by the glossy, dry appearance at the end of the video), it typically takes several days, often 24 to 72 hours, for the finish to achieve its full hardness and chemical resistance. During this curing period, avoid placing heavy furniture, rugs, or walking on the floor with shoes. The final appearance should be a uniform, glossy, and protective surface, as demonstrated at the end of the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pfjsI8HPKbE 1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11074-3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IBCkJzuf73w/hqdefault.jpg Allow Finish to Dry and Cure — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After applying the final coat, carefully exit the room, ensuring no contact with the freshly applied finish. Allow the finish to dry and cure according to the wood finish manufacturer's specific instructions. Drying times can vary significantly based on the product type (water-based vs. oil-based), humidity, temperature, and ventilation. Avoid walking on the floor, placing furniture, or introducing excessive moisture until the finish is fully cured. Proper curing is essential for the durability and longevity of the floor's protective layer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IBCkJzuf73w 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11073-1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Enb5bQ_uYac/hqdefault.jpg Apply Polyurethane Finish to Treads — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Using a good quality paint brush, apply the polyurethane to the stair treads. Work with the grain of the wood, using nice, even strokes. The goal is to achieve a smooth and consistent coat without drips or brush marks. For the final pass on each tread, make one long, continuous stroke with the grain to even out the finish. The presenter recommends applying three coats of polyurethane for maximum durability. Allow each coat to dry for a couple of hours (refer to product instructions for exact drying times), then lightly sand the surface with a fine-grit sandpaper (e.g., 220-grit) and wipe clean with a tack cloth before applying the next coat. This inter-coat sanding helps to smooth out any imperfections and ensures better adhesion for subsequent layers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Enb5bQ_uYac 28 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11073-2 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrLRY9adkN8/hqdefault.jpg Applying First Coat of Polyurethane — Apply Finish to Stair Treads With the stairs clean and dry, apply a thin, even coat of Minwax Polyurethane to the wooden treads using a paintbrush. For practical access, apply the polyurethane to every other step, allowing the untreated steps to be used for movement. Ensure consistent coverage and avoid drips or puddles. Allow the first coat to dry completely according to the manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrLRY9adkN8 26 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11073-3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/F8eLXPuMBiw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Polyurethane Sealer — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Once the stain has completely dried (refer to product instructions for recommended drying times, usually a few hours), it's time to apply the polyurethane sealer. Sealer is extremely important for high-traffic areas like stair treads as it provides durability and protection against wear and tear. Using a clean paintbrush, apply the polyurethane in the direction of the wood grain. Similar to staining, use cardboard to protect the adjacent white risers and walls, ensuring a clean application line. The biggest tip when working with sealer is to make sure to brush out any drip marks or excess product immediately to avoid visible streaks and uneven finish. Apply multiple thin coats, allowing adequate drying time between each coat, according to the manufacturer's instructions, for maximum durability. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F8eLXPuMBiw 43 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11078-1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrLRY9adkN8/hqdefault.jpg Applying First Coat of Polyurethane — Apply Finish to Stair Treads With the stairs clean and dry, apply a thin, even coat of Minwax Polyurethane to the wooden treads using a paintbrush. For practical access, apply the polyurethane to every other step, allowing the untreated steps to be used for movement. Ensure consistent coverage and avoid drips or puddles. Allow the first coat to dry completely according to the manufacturer's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrLRY9adkN8 26 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11078-2 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wro_ABm9blg/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Coat of Polyurethane — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After the stain has thoroughly dried, the treads are ready for the first coat of polyurethane. Ensure you are wearing a respirator for fume protection. The creator uses ZAR Interior Oil Base Fast Dry Polyurethane in a satin finish, applied with a 2.5-inch Corona Vegas brush. Apply a full and even coat of polyurethane to the entire surface of each tread, moving with the grain of the wood. Pay special attention to covering the bullnose (the rounded front edge of the tread) thoroughly, as this area experiences high traffic. Work from the top of the stairs downwards to avoid stepping on wet surfaces. Allow the first coat to dry for a couple of hours. Fast-drying polyurethanes typically dry to the touch in about two hours, but actual drying time can vary based on environmental conditions like humidity and temperature. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wro_ABm9blg 58 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11078-3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xg3z_zR49VM/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Coat of Oil-Based Polyurethane — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Prepare the oil-based polyurethane by thoroughly stirring it. It is crucial *not to shake* the can, as shaking can introduce air bubbles that will create an uneven finish. Stir slowly and thoroughly to mix the satin pigment with the clear honey gloss, creating a creamy, consistent mixture. Once stirred, apply the first coat of polyurethane using a 10-inch wide synthetic roller on an extension pole. Apply the polyurethane in sections approximately two planks wide, then go back over the previous section halfway to ensure smooth blending and catch any potential drips. Maintain a consistent technique to avoid harsh lines, as the polyurethane is self-leveling. It's helpful to remove baseboards before this step for easier application near walls. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xg3z_zR49VM 151 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11076-1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t3gdJqiFHnM/hqdefault.jpg Apply Third Coat — Apply Finish to Stair Treads For the ultimate protection against fading, moisture, and scratches, apply a third and final coat of polyurethane. After applying the third coat with a bristle brush, carefully inspect the entire surface for any remaining air bubbles or drips and address them immediately. Once satisfied with the application, allow the final coat to dry completely. This step ensures maximum durability and a professional-looking finish for your wood project. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t3gdJqiFHnM 12 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11076-2 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gUw_js-WhxY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Subsequent Coats and Finish — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Apply additional coats of polyurethane using the same technique as the first coat: thin, even layers applied with a foam brush, brushing with the wood grain. The presenter suggests looking at the surface from an angle to easily spot any dry spots or areas you might have missed. For this particular project, he applied a total of six coats to achieve a thick, durable finish. Remember to allow each coat to dry for at least two hours, and repeat the light sanding (Step 2) and tack cloth cleaning (Step 3) processes between each subsequent coat to maintain smoothness and ensure optimal adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gUw_js-WhxY 27 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11076-3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4ajf3GZfMIk/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Apply Additional Polyurethane Coats — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After the first coat has dried for 3 to 4 hours, lightly sand the surface again using 220-grit sandpaper. This step ensures an even finish and helps subsequent coats adhere properly. Remove all sanding dust using a lint-free clean cloth. Once clean and dry, apply a second thin coat of polyurethane following the same application method as the first. If a third coat is desired for enhanced durability, repeat the sanding and dust removal steps before applying the final coat. After the final coat, allow 24 hours for complete drying before light handling. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4ajf3GZfMIk 22 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11075-1 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/whvOypwvybo/hqdefault.jpg Sand Between Coats — Apply Finish to Stair Treads After the first coat has dried (typically 2-4 hours, but can be up to 24-48 hours), use a fine 120-grit sandpaper or sanding block to lightly sand the entire surface. This step helps to smooth out any remaining imperfections from the first coat, such as dried bubbles or minor build-up. Once sanded, wipe off all the resulting sawdust and dust thoroughly using a paper towel to prepare for the next coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/whvOypwvybo 17 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11075-2 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yvl1Foj5564/hqdefault.jpg Prepare for the Third Coat — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Before applying the third coat, the surface needs light preparation. Use 320-grit sandpaper and lightly sand the entire surface. The goal is to knock down any dust nibs or minor imperfections that may have settled in the previous coats. Avoid heavy pressure. After sanding, the surface might have a white, powdery residue. Clean this residue using a slightly damp paper towel, wiping gently across the surface. Alternatively, a tack cloth is the best option for completely removing all dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yvl1Foj5564 82 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11075-3 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/v4NCxzNdNAw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Final Thin Coat and Buff — Apply Finish to Stair Treads Once the third coat has dried, lightly sand the surface again, this time with a finer 600-grit sandpaper to achieve a very smooth feel. After sanding, apply the final coat of finish, making it as thin as possible while still ensuring the entire surface is evenly wet. This super-thin coat dries quickly, which is beneficial for minimizing dust particles settling on the surface in a dusty environment. As an optional step for an even smoother result, perform a final buffing with a brown paper bag, which is roughly equivalent to 1500-grit sandpaper. https://www.youtube.com/embed/v4NCxzNdNAw 66 2026-09-24T04:00:08.342Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11072-1 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — replace stair treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11072-2 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — replace stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11072-3 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — replace stair treads Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11071-1 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — replace stair treads Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11071-2 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — replace stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11071-3 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — replace stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-24T01:03:07.621Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11061-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xaCMaZ15e0w/hqdefault.jpg Clear Pathways of All Vegetation — Ground Cover Planting Before installing any weed barrier, it is crucial to meticulously clear all existing vegetation from the designated garden pathways. This step is best performed at the outset of setting up your garden space. Employ tools like a shovel, a weed eater, or a sod cutter to physically remove grass and ground cover. For areas with persistent weeds that spread through runners, consider more intensive methods such as spraying with a concentrated vinegar solution or using a torch to kill the plants completely from the root up. The goal is to ensure no plant material remains that could potentially regrow beneath the barrier. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xaCMaZ15e0w 100 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11061-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dFMeTWIyxpE/hqdefault.jpg Clear the Surface — Ground Cover Planting Begin by thoroughly clearing the designated area of any existing vegetation, such as grass and roots, as well as any mulch or other debris. Use a shovel or hoe to dig up and scrape away all unwanted materials from the surface of the ground. Collect the removed materials into a wheelbarrow for easy transport and disposal, ensuring the area is clean and level before proceeding to the next step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dFMeTWIyxpE 2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11061-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p8SNTmNL1AQ/hqdefault.jpg Prep the area — Ground Cover Planting Prepare the designated area by raking away any debris, existing weeds, or large rocks. After raking, use a hand grading technique to smooth and level the soil, ensuring a clean and even surface for the landscape fabric. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p8SNTmNL1AQ 3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11062-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0KvUnK1MAUQ/hqdefault.jpg Till and Amend Soil with Compost — Ground Cover Planting After the initial weed removal and optional solarization, the next crucial step is to amend the soil to improve its structure and nutrient content. Begin by tilling the area to loosen the soil, creating a soft and welcoming bed for new roots. Following tilling, generously add good quality compost to the entire area. Thoroughly mix the compost into the tilled soil. Compost is an excellent organic amendment that enhances soil fertility, improves drainage in heavy soils, increases water retention in sandy soils, and provides essential nutrients for robust plant growth. This rich, well-conditioned soil will promote healthy, deep root development, whether you're planting sod or seed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0KvUnK1MAUQ 20 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11062-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xP5SYypfisQ/hqdefault.jpg Amend the Soil — Ground Cover Planting If you have access to organic matter, such as well-rotted horse manure or garden compost, it's beneficial to add it to the trench. Spread the organic matter along the bottom of the trench and use a fork to thoroughly mix it into the existing soil. This improves soil structure, drainage, and nutrient content, providing a better environment for root growth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xP5SYypfisQ 7 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11062-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6ZG7Z8wZHPc/hqdefault.jpg Amend and Prepare the Soil — Ground Cover Planting After cleaning and preparing the bed, use a garden rake to gently level the soil. If your soil quality is poor or you want to give your plants an extra boost, add a layer of garden soil or compost. Spread the soil amendment evenly over the desired planting area. Wet the newly added soil thoroughly to help it settle and to provide moisture for the new plants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6ZG7Z8wZHPc 16 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11063-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/84txoIFS9BQ/hqdefault.jpg Level and Rake Soil — Ground Cover Planting After blending the soil amendments, the area might look a bit messy. Use a soil spreader or the back of a landscape rake to level the ground. It's good practice to mound the soil up slightly, as it tends to bulk up after being turned. As you level, gently rake out any detritus (debris) that has been brought to the surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/84txoIFS9BQ 12 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11063-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RkGiGZV8RMY/hqdefault.jpg Rake to a Fine Tilth — Ground Cover Planting Once the bed is clear, use a bow rake to break down any remaining soil clumps and create a smooth, level surface. This fine texture, known as a 'fine tilth,' is crucial for good seed-to-soil contact and optimal germination. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RkGiGZV8RMY 5 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11063-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ubp0Gll2rnE/hqdefault.jpg Level and Refine Soil Surface — Ground Cover Planting After weeding, use a hard rake to level the entire garden bed. This process not only smooths the surface but also lightly tills the top half-inch of soil, creating a fine, workable texture that is ideal for sowing seeds. Ensure the surface is even and free of large clumps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ubp0Gll2rnE 14 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11064-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bFirKQ25NUE/hqdefault.jpg Choosing Appropriate Ground Cover Plants — Ground Cover Planting When selecting ground cover plants, it's crucial to consider various factors to ensure they thrive and fulfill their purpose. Key considerations include the plant's light requirements (shade versus sun needs), soil conditions (dry versus wet), and overall suitability for the specific garden environment. Making informed choices will help achieve a fresh, new look for the garden. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bFirKQ25NUE 8 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11064-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qDBQrYMitSU/hqdefault.jpg Selecting Ground Covers for Full Sun — Ground Cover Planting Examine various ground cover plants that thrive in full sun. 'Super Star Creeper' (Pratia alba) is a white-flowering ground cover that grows very tightly and requires average watering. 'Blue Star Creeper' (Isotoma) is similar but has blue flowers and grows slightly taller. 'Elfin Thyme' (Thymus praecox 'Elfin') releases a pleasant aroma when walked upon and prefers drier conditions. 'Scotch Moss' (Sagina subulata 'Aurea') and 'Irish Moss' (Sagina subulata) are moss-like plants that also prefer full sun and drier conditions, contrary to typical mosses that like shade and dampness. All these varieties can tolerate moderate foot traffic, which helps them grow tighter to the ground. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qDBQrYMitSU 149 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11064-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qDBQrYMitSU/hqdefault.jpg Selecting Ground Covers for Shade — Ground Cover Planting Explore ground cover varieties that are better suited for shady conditions. 'Miniature Sweet Flag' (Acorus gramineus 'Minimus Aureus') is a grass-like plant that prefers shade and thrives in very wet, even mucky, soil where other plants might fail. 'Baby's Tears' (Soleirolia soleirolii) forms a dense mat of tiny leaves and is suitable for shady areas. 'Black Brass Buttons' (Leptinella squalida 'Platt's Black') and 'Miniature Brass Buttons' (Leptinella gruvelii 'Miniature') are also good options for partial shade, ideally morning sun with afternoon shade, providing a fern-like texture. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qDBQrYMitSU 63 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11065-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hHX2-qBmCCo/hqdefault.jpg Lay Out Plants — Ground Cover Planting The gardeners begin by arranging all the potted plants onto the garden bed. This crucial step allows them to visualize the final layout, ensuring proper spacing and aesthetic balance before any digging begins. They adjust the positions of the white petunias, yellow Gaillardia, lavender, clematis, boxwood, goldmound spirea, and white yarrow until a pleasing arrangement is achieved along the curved bed and near the picket fence. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hHX2-qBmCCo 9 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11065-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YOfsUwzgv_g/hqdefault.jpg Layout Plants for Design and Spacing — Ground Cover Planting Prior to planting, lay out all your plants on the prepared soil in their pots or trays. This allows you to visualize the arrangement and make adjustments. It's important to consider how large each plant will grow in future years and ensure they have ample space to expand without overcrowding. To create a more natural and fuller appearance, position plants in groups of three of the same kind. If you have many of one variety, repeating these groups can add a sense of balance and symmetry to your border design, making it more visually appealing than haphazard placement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YOfsUwzgv_g 24 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11065-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fwzqZDD-U5Q/hqdefault.jpg Pre-Planting Layout — Ground Cover Planting Before digging the final planting holes, the landscaper carefully places all the potted plants (azaleas, arborvitae, and liriope grass) in their intended positions within the newly shaped bed. This crucial step allows for visual adjustment of spacing and arrangement, ensuring the plants will grow without overcrowding and contribute to a balanced aesthetic. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fwzqZDD-U5Q 23 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11066-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VYD_nd9IEgQ/hqdefault.jpg Plant New Plants — Ground Cover Planting Once the plant arrangement is finalized, begin planting. Dig holes for each plant, ensuring they are wide and deep enough to accommodate the root ball. Carefully remove each plant from its nursery pot, loosen any circling roots, and place the plant in the hole so that the top of the root ball is level with the surrounding soil. Backfill the hole with soil, gently firming it around the base of the plant. Consider adding soil amendments like compost or fertilizer if needed to enrich the soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VYD_nd9IEgQ 17 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11066-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fwzqZDD-U5Q/hqdefault.jpg Digging Planting Holes — Ground Cover Planting Once the plant layout is finalized, holes are dug for each plant. The landscaper first uses a pickaxe (mattock) to loosen the soil in the designated spots, making it easier to dig. Then, he uses a shovel to excavate the holes. He advises that each hole should be dug to a size that is 2.5 to 3 times the width of the plant's rootball. This provides ample space for roots to spread and establish quickly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fwzqZDD-U5Q 19 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11066-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nVW2EB-UlMk/hqdefault.jpg Plant and Position — Ground Cover Planting Gently remove each plant from its pot. Inspect the root ball; if the roots are circling tightly or are very dense, gently tease them apart with your fingers or a small hand tool. This action encourages the roots to spread into the new soil rather than continuing to grow in their potted shape. Next, place the plant into the prepared hole. Before backfilling with soil, step back and examine the plant from all angles to ensure it is straight and at the correct height. It's much easier to make adjustments now than after the soil is packed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nVW2EB-UlMk 32 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11067-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BMNkQB_2wOE/hqdefault.jpg Spread Seed and Cover With Soil — Ground Cover Planting Evenly spread the grass seeds over the prepared soil in the desired area. Aim for consistent coverage across every inch. After spreading, lightly cover the grass seeds with a layer of loose soil or dirt, approximately 0.5 inches thick. This layer protects the seeds from birds and helps retain moisture. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BMNkQB_2wOE 12 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11067-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/76ymLL69mfA/hqdefault.jpg Spread Grass Seed — Ground Cover Planting Take the grass seed and, using your hands (or a broadcast spreader for larger areas), evenly scatter it across the entire prepared soil surface. Ensure good coverage without clumping the seeds in one spot. https://www.youtube.com/embed/76ymLL69mfA 21 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11067-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KPNgaHfvIW8/hqdefault.jpg Sow the Grass Seed — Ground Cover Planting Next, sow your grass seed. For small areas, you can broadcast the seed by hand, ensuring even distribution. For larger areas, use a broadcast spreader or a smaller hand spreader for more uniform coverage. Aim to distribute the seeds so they are about 1/4 to 1/2 inch apart, avoiding both overly thick and overly sparse application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KPNgaHfvIW8 18 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11068-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hHX2-qBmCCo/hqdefault.jpg Water Newly Planted Bed — Ground Cover Planting After all plants are in the ground, thoroughly water the entire garden bed. This helps settle the soil around the roots and provides essential moisture for the plants to establish themselves in their new environment. A garden hose with a gentle shower setting is ideal for this task. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hHX2-qBmCCo 9 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11068-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SCdWi8eAR5U/hqdefault.jpg Water the Plants — Ground Cover Planting After all the flowers have been planted and the mulch is in place, it is essential to give the entire flower bed a thorough watering. This initial watering serves several critical purposes: it helps settle the soil around the newly planted roots, eliminates any air pockets that could dry out the roots, and provides much-needed moisture to help the plants establish themselves in their new environment. Use a gentle stream of water to avoid displacing soil or damaging delicate young plants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SCdWi8eAR5U 2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11068-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lsLbE78A0pA/hqdefault.jpg Water Newly Planted Areas — Ground Cover Planting After planting all the new plants, give them a good watering. Use a watering can or hose with a gentle spray to thoroughly moisten the soil around the root balls of each plant. Even if rain is expected, this initial deep watering is crucial to help settle the soil and eliminate air pockets around the roots, ensuring the plants establish well. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lsLbE78A0pA 8 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11069-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tim4LEo6l10/hqdefault.jpg Apply Mulch — Ground Cover Planting Once the plant is backfilled, add a layer of natural mulch around its base. The video suggests using 'ground pine bark mulch' and applying a 1- to 2-inch layer. Extend the mulch out to the plant's dripline or even beyond for optimal coverage. A crucial detail is to keep the mulch away from the base of the plant by about 1-2 inches. This small gap prevents direct contact between the mulch and the plant's stem or trunk, which can create a pathway for pests or diseases to potentially infect the plant. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tim4LEo6l10 63 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11069-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/giXfCHT05wk/hqdefault.jpg Put Mulch Around It — Ground Cover Planting Finally, apply a light layer of mulch around the base of the seedling. The video suggests using wood chips. Mulch serves several beneficial purposes: it helps retain soil moisture, reduces weed growth that competes for nutrients, and insulates the soil from temperature extremes. Ensure the mulch layer is not too thick and is kept a few inches away from the seedling's stem to prevent moisture buildup against the bark, which can lead to rot. https://www.youtube.com/embed/giXfCHT05wk 9 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11069-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VYD_nd9IEgQ/hqdefault.jpg Apply Mulch — Ground Cover Planting Once all the plants are in the ground, spread a layer of mulch over the entire garden bed. Mulch helps retain soil moisture, suppress weeds, and regulate soil temperature. Spread an even layer, ensuring it doesn't pile up against the plant stems, which can lead to rot. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VYD_nd9IEgQ 77 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11070-1 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zPnhP1o0GD0/hqdefault.jpg Post-Planting Watering and Ongoing Maintenance — Ground Cover Planting After planting, the new native garden requires consistent care to ensure plant establishment. During the rainy season, hand-water frequently as needed. For the first summer, water every 6 to 8 weeks, adjusting based on plant needs and local climate. The goal is to establish the plants so they become self-sufficient and require minimal watering later. This ongoing care ensures the garden thrives and evolves over time, creating a beautiful and sustainable ecosystem. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zPnhP1o0GD0 94 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11070-2 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qDBQrYMitSU/hqdefault.jpg Weed Management for Ground Covers — Ground Cover Planting Effective weed management is crucial, especially in the early stages when ground cover plants are establishing. It's a common misconception that ground covers will prevent all weeds; early and consistent hand-pulling of weeds is the most effective method. Once the ground covers mature and fill in densely, weed growth will be significantly reduced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qDBQrYMitSU 75 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11070-3 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hXc63ZWWqOQ/hqdefault.jpg Water and Maintain — Ground Cover Planting The most crucial aspect of this project is consistent watering for 2-3 weeks. The soil must be kept damp at all times, but not flooded. If the weather is windy and hot, you may need to water twice a day. Use a garden hose with a spray nozzle to mist the area gently for a few minutes, avoiding heavy streams that could wash away the seeds. The ideal time for planting and watering is when the temperature consistently stays between 45°F and 75°F, which is typically mid-spring or mid-fall in most regions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hXc63ZWWqOQ 55 2026-09-23T14:27:42.923Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11052-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QPfjvVC-PiE/hqdefault.jpg Choose the Site — Ornamental Grass Planting Begin by selecting the ideal location for your wildflowers. For the best results and 90% success, choose a spot that receives full sun, meaning at least six hours of direct sunlight per day. These are typically open and sunny areas. If a full sun spot is not available, you can consider a partial shade mixture, which requires a minimum of three hours of sun. Such locations might be along a wood line or near a building that provides shade for part of the day. Prioritizing full sun will yield the most vibrant and abundant blooms. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QPfjvVC-PiE 25 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11052-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/O-9eG_KbP4c/hqdefault.jpg Select an Optimal Planting Location — Ornamental Grass Planting Pomegranates are sun-loving plants, requiring at least 6 hours of direct sunlight daily, with 8 hours being ideal. They tolerate full sun well, even intense afternoon sun in hot desert climates. Ensure the planting location has good drainage, as pomegranates are not particular about soil type (even tolerating alkaline soil) but their roots should not sit in water. In cooler climates, consider a western exposure or planting near a block wall to provide additional warmth and protection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/O-9eG_KbP4c 63 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11052-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lLqEJyZFv_A/hqdefault.jpg Select Optimal Garden Site for Sun — Ornamental Grass Planting Begin by selecting the most suitable location for your raised garden beds, as sun exposure is the single most critical factor for successful vegetable cultivation. Most vegetables require 'full sun,' meaning at least 6-8 hours of direct sunlight per day. Avoid areas with deep or even moderate shade, as this will significantly hinder plant growth and reduce yields. To accurately assess the amount of sunlight a potential site receives, utilize a dedicated sun calculator tool, such as the 'Suncalc' meter by Rapidtest. Place this device in the ground and leave it for a full sunny day (avoiding cloudy days for accurate readings). After 24 hours, the meter will indicate the sun exposure level (full sun, partial sun, partial shade, or full shade). This information will help you align the site's light conditions with the specific sun requirements of your chosen vegetables, typically listed on seed packets or plant labels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lLqEJyZFv_A 136 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11053-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YOfsUwzgv_g/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil in the Border — Ornamental Grass Planting Before planting, prepare the soil in the designated border area. This involves digging over the soil to loosen it, which improves aeration and drainage. Once dug, mix in a generous amount of well-rotted manure. This organic matter will significantly enhance the soil's structure and fertility, providing essential nutrients that will give the plants a good start and feed them as they grow, contributing to their overall health and vigor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YOfsUwzgv_g 13 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11053-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9geTqHwopOw/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil Bed — Ornamental Grass Planting Begin by thoroughly forking over the entire area of soil using a garden fork to loosen compacted earth and improve aeration. Next, use a landscape rake to break down any large clods of soil and carefully remove any large stones or debris that could hinder grass growth. Continue raking until the soil is fine and relatively level. Once the surface appears even, firm the ground by walking over it in short, shuffling steps. This removes air pockets and creates a solid foundation. Finally, use the landscape rake again to gently re-rake the entire area, breaking up any footprints and leaving a perfectly fine, smooth seedbed. For an even finer finish and to remove any remaining small stones or weeds, use a metal rake. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9geTqHwopOw 41 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11053-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-k6j8lqQgTk/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Soil — Ornamental Grass Planting Begin by digging a square hole, approximately 45 centimeters (18 inches) by 45 centimeters (18 inches), and about the depth of your spade. After removing the initial soil, use a spade to break up the soil at the bottom of the hole for a bit more depth, without actually removing it. Then, switch to a garden fork to thoroughly mix and aerate the loosened soil, which helps roots grow more easily. Add a generous amount of compost, roughly a third of a wheelbarrow or half a dozen shovelfuls, to the loosened soil, mixing it well. The compost can be normal garden compost, well-rotted manure, or a bagged product from a garden center, as long as it's organic. It keeps the soil open and airy. Finally, sprinkle mycorrhizal fungi (such as Rootgrow) into the hole and mix it with the soil. This fungi greatly enhances the root system's ability to absorb nutrients from the soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-k6j8lqQgTk 109 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11054-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tim4LEo6l10/hqdefault.jpg Dig the Planting Hole — Ornamental Grass Planting Begin by digging a planting hole that is at least two times, and preferably three times, wider than the plant's root ball. The depth of the hole is crucial: it should have a firm foundation but should not be deeper than the soil level the plant was growing in its container. Ideally, the plant should sit slightly higher than the surrounding grade. To gauge the correct depth, place a tool, such as a shovel, across the hole and compare its level to the base of the plant's root ball. You are aiming for the plant's base to be level with or slightly (about 25%) higher than the surrounding soil. This ensures water runs off rather than pooling around the plant, which can lead to drowning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tim4LEo6l10 57 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11054-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TP6NfDAliNo/hqdefault.jpg Dig Planting Holes — Ornamental Grass Planting Begin by digging a hole for each plant. The hole should be the same depth as the plant's root ball but approximately twice its diameter. This wider hole provides ample space for roots to spread out. In this project, the soil had been pre-amended with compost when the lawn was removed; however, if your soil hasn't been pre-amended, you would typically dig the hole wider and amend the backfill soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TP6NfDAliNo 17 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11054-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nVW2EB-UlMk/hqdefault.jpg Dig Planting Holes — Ornamental Grass Planting Once the plant arrangement is finalized, use the shovel to trace a circle around each plant's pot directly on the soil. Then, remove the plants and dig a hole for each, making it two to three times wider than the pot. This wider hole helps loosen the surrounding native soil, encouraging the plant's roots to grow outward and downward more easily, preventing root binding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nVW2EB-UlMk 25 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11055-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ARwB7xb--sQ/hqdefault.jpg Remove Plant from Container — Ornamental Grass Planting To safely remove the plant from its container, gently give the bottom of the pot a little 'rap' or tap. This action helps to loosen the root ball from the container, allowing it to slide out easily without damaging the plant or its root structure. The example shown is a Rudbeckia triloba. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ARwB7xb--sQ 8 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11055-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Fy8kP2EYpcY/hqdefault.jpg Remove Plant from Current Container — Ornamental Grass Planting To remove the plant from its old container, you can water it a few days or hours beforehand, or remove it while the soil is dry—either method works based on preference. Begin by gently massaging the sides of the container to help loosen the soil. If the plant is still stuck, use a thin tool to carefully scrape along the inside edges of the pot. Then, grab the base of the plant while holding the container down, and gently pull the plant out. Turning the plant and pot on its side can often make this step easier. The primary goal is to keep most of the roots intact, though it's perfectly normal if a few roots are severed during the process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Fy8kP2EYpcY 37 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11055-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nUu0BElS0-E/hqdefault.jpg Planting a Tender Herb (Parsley) — Ornamental Grass Planting Fill your chosen container (e.g., a red terracotta pot) about three-quarters of the way with potting mix. Create a shallow indent in the center. To ease the removal of the plant from its nursery pot, ensure the soil is moist. Invert the nursery pot and gently squeeze it until the plant slides out. Carefully loosen the roots at the bottom of the plant. Position the plant in the prepared hole, making sure its original soil level is maintained. Inspect the plant for any damaged or dead leaves and pinch them off. Finally, backfill the pot with additional potting mix and gently press around the base of the plant to secure it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nUu0BElS0-E 60 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11056-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ARwB7xb--sQ/hqdefault.jpg Position Plant in Hole — Ornamental Grass Planting Prepare a hole that is not too deep. Place the prepared plant into the hole. The top of the root ball should be even with the surrounding native soil, or slightly higher. Planting it a little high is generally better than too low, as it prevents the 'bathtub' effect and ensures proper drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ARwB7xb--sQ 16 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11056-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cyMjC6rujtI/hqdefault.jpg Plant Grasses and Install Drip Irrigation — Ornamental Grass Planting Carefully place each prepared grass plant into its amended hole. Backfill around the root ball with a mixture of the excavated soil and additional compost, ensuring the plant is upright and stable. Once planted, install a drip irrigation system around the base of each grass. The presenter uses 1/4-inch brown drip line, forming a ring around each plant, secured with a connector. Each ring is equipped with 8 emitter holes, designed to deliver 0.5 gallons of water per hour, ensuring even and consistent moisture directly to the root zone. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cyMjC6rujtI 105 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11056-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SHBri0t0k2I/hqdefault.jpg Planting Ornamental Grasses — Ornamental Grass Planting After positioning, prepare to plant the grasses. First, use your hands to clear the mulch away from the planting area. Next, carefully remove the grass from its nursery pot. Inspect the root system; if it's root-bound at the bottom, gently tease the roots apart to encourage outward growth. Dig a hole using a shovel, making it roughly the same depth and twice the width of the plant's root ball. Place any excavated soil into the empty nursery pot to keep the area clean. Add 'Espoma Organic Bio-tone Starter Plant Food' into the dug hole, then mix it thoroughly with the native soil at the bottom of the hole. Finally, place the grass into the prepared hole, backfill with the amended soil, and gently firm the soil around the base of the plant. Smooth the displaced mulch back into place around the newly planted grass. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SHBri0t0k2I 94 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11057-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nVW2EB-UlMk/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Check Depth — Ornamental Grass Planting Once the plant is perfectly positioned, begin to backfill the hole with the mixed native soil and amendments. As you backfill, gently pat the soil around the root ball with your foot to provide stability and eliminate large air pockets. Be careful not to step too hard or compact the soil excessively, as this can hinder root growth and ultimately stunt the plant's development. Also, ensure the soil line around the plant is not higher than it was in the original pot to prevent stem rot and allow for proper oxygen exchange. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nVW2EB-UlMk 67 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11057-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tim4LEo6l10/hqdefault.jpg Backfill with Native Soil — Ornamental Grass Planting After preparing the root ball and placing the plant in the hole at the correct depth, it's time to backfill. Use the native soil that was originally removed from the hole to fill around the root ball. Gently firm the soil as you go, but do not compact it excessively, as this can restrict root growth. Ensure the soil level tapers slightly away from the plant's base towards the existing grade. This design helps prevent water from pooling around the plant and encourages proper drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tim4LEo6l10 28 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11057-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FR0kTBpVob8/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Top Dress — Ornamental Grass Planting Backfill the hole around the tree's root ball with the original soil removed earlier, along with the remaining half bag of compost. Gently tamp down the soil with your hands or feet to remove large air pockets without compacting the soil too much. After backfilling, sprinkle the remaining organic granular fertilizer around the base of the tree and lightly mix it into the topsoil. Form a slight berm around the edge of the planting hole to help retain water. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FR0kTBpVob8 6 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11058-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QGAEO-RLD0Q/hqdefault.jpg Water Immediately and Regularly — Ornamental Grass Planting After the perennial has been planted and the soil firmed, immediately water it thoroughly. This helps settle the soil around the roots and provides initial hydration. Continue to water the plant regularly for the next few days to assist in its establishment. Following this initial period, natural rainfall should largely suffice, and the plant will continue to grow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QGAEO-RLD0Q 9 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11058-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6ksghZPj-zg/hqdefault.jpg Initial Watering and Sustenance — Ornamental Grass Planting After planting, it is crucial to mist the newly sown area. Avoid heavy watering, as this can wash away the small seeds and displaced soil, preventing proper germination. The goal is to keep the soil consistently moist without creating runoff. Once the soil is thoroughly moist from consistent misting, you can begin to water a little deeper and stronger to help the roots establish and sustain the growing grass. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6ksghZPj-zg 12 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11058-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xzq5Jp2uxo/hqdefault.jpg Water the Newly Sown Lawn — Ornamental Grass Planting Immediately after sowing and firming, water the area thoroughly to initiate the seed germination process. When watering, use a fine spray watering can or a sprinkler attached to a garden hose. It is crucial to apply water gently to avoid washing the grass seeds away from their settled positions or creating puddles, which can displace seeds and compact the soil. Continue to water daily until the new grass is well established, a period that typically lasts between one to two weeks. If you are experiencing very hot weather conditions, adjust your watering schedule to late in the day, after the sun has set, to minimize evaporation. Remember, it is more effective to water thoroughly in one session rather than applying light amounts of water several times, as deep watering encourages deeper root growth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xzq5Jp2uxo 24 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11059-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Tim4LEo6l10/hqdefault.jpg Apply Mulch — Ornamental Grass Planting Once the plant is backfilled, add a layer of natural mulch around its base. The video suggests using 'ground pine bark mulch' and applying a 1- to 2-inch layer. Extend the mulch out to the plant's dripline or even beyond for optimal coverage. A crucial detail is to keep the mulch away from the base of the plant by about 1-2 inches. This small gap prevents direct contact between the mulch and the plant's stem or trunk, which can create a pathway for pests or diseases to potentially infect the plant. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Tim4LEo6l10 63 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11059-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/XT0-UkEmrRg/hqdefault.jpg Long-Term Care for Ornamental Grasses — Ornamental Grass Planting Once established, ornamental grasses are relatively low-maintenance. They are incredibly drought-tolerant, especially when mulched. You'll primarily need to water them during the hottest summer days. In cooler regions, during winter, the foliage of some grasses may completely die back, turning bronze. The presenter suggests leaving this bronzed foliage through winter as it provides sculptural elements to the garden. In early spring, cut the grasses down to the ground to allow space for fresh new growth. When pruning in subsequent years, make sure to cut slightly higher than the previous year to avoid damaging the plant. These simple care tips will help your ornamental grasses thrive. https://www.youtube.com/embed/XT0-UkEmrRg 37 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11059-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FcmR8KbJzH8/hqdefault.jpg Mulching with Grass Clippings (General Use) — Ornamental Grass Planting Utilize grass clippings as a mulch to suppress weeds and retain soil moisture. Apply a layer of dried grass clippings approximately 1 inch (2-3 cm) thick around your plants. This layer acts as insulation, slowing down evaporation and maintaining consistent soil temperature. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FcmR8KbJzH8 60 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11060-1 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eaYDdjxRjMU/hqdefault.jpg Watering and Establishment — Ornamental Grass Planting During their first year in the ground, ensure ornamental grasses receive 1 inch of water once per week through slow, deep watering. This helps establish strong root systems. After the initial growing season, grasses typically establish quickly and require less intervention. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eaYDdjxRjMU 28 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11060-2 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xzq5Jp2uxo/hqdefault.jpg Water the Newly Sown Lawn — Ornamental Grass Planting Immediately after sowing and firming, water the area thoroughly to initiate the seed germination process. When watering, use a fine spray watering can or a sprinkler attached to a garden hose. It is crucial to apply water gently to avoid washing the grass seeds away from their settled positions or creating puddles, which can displace seeds and compact the soil. Continue to water daily until the new grass is well established, a period that typically lasts between one to two weeks. If you are experiencing very hot weather conditions, adjust your watering schedule to late in the day, after the sun has set, to minimize evaporation. Remember, it is more effective to water thoroughly in one session rather than applying light amounts of water several times, as deep watering encourages deeper root growth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xzq5Jp2uxo 24 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11060-3 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KPNgaHfvIW8/hqdefault.jpg Maintain Watering for Establishment — Ornamental Grass Planting To ensure the successful establishment of your new grass, you will need to make sure that the area stays consistently watered throughout the first year of its growth. Consistent moisture is vital for the grass to develop a strong root system and become fully established. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KPNgaHfvIW8 5 2026-09-22T14:24:52.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11051-1 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — Carpet Stair Treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11051-2 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11051-3 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — Carpet Stair Treads Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11050-1 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — Carpet Stair Treads Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11050-2 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Carpet Stair Treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11050-3 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Carpet Stair Treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-21T17:36:26.776Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11046-1 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Measure Staircase Treads Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11046-2 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Measure Staircase Treads Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11046-3 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Measure Staircase Treads The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11048-1 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Measure Staircase Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11048-2 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Measure Staircase Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11048-3 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Cut Your Treads — Measure Staircase Treads With the nosing removed, prepare the replacement treads for installation. Begin by measuring each tread individually using a tape measure, as stairway widths can vary from one step to the next. Mark the length that needs to be cut off using a sharpie or pencil. If the tread is a double return tread, you will not need to make any further cuts as it has been manufactured to your provided dimensions. As a pro tip, use a piece of scrap wood to push the tread out at the return area. This allows you to properly scribe the skirt before cutting, which will help give you an exact fit and cut for your tread. Use a miter saw to make the necessary cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 35 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11049-1 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Measure Staircase Treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11049-2 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Measure Staircase Treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11049-3 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Measure Staircase Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11047-1 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Measure Staircase Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11047-2 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Measure Staircase Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11047-3 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Treads — Measure Staircase Treads Measure each stair tread individually from front to back and side to side, as stairs are rarely perfectly uniform. Cut the new hardwood treads to the precise dimensions of each step. Double-check all measurements before making cuts to ensure accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 8 2026-09-21T15:21:37.697Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11039-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lC7fUCZ8uOs/hqdefault.jpg Crawl Space Cleanup — Crawl Space Encapsulation Begin by thoroughly cleaning the crawl space. This involves removing all existing debris, such as old, damaged, or wet insulation, construction waste, fallen leaves, and any signs of pest activity. The goal is to create a clear working area and eliminate sources of moisture or contaminants. Personal protective equipment (PPE) is crucial for this step due to the potentially hazardous environment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lC7fUCZ8uOs 3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11039-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vK8k-S_HGzw/hqdefault.jpg Clean Out Crawl Space — Crawl Space Encapsulation The first step in encapsulating a crawl space is to perform a thorough 'Clean Out'. This involves removing all old or damaged insulation, which can often be damp, moldy, or infested with pests, as well as any existing plastic sheeting (vapor barrier) and general debris. This creates a clean and clear working environment, essential for the subsequent installation steps and to prevent trapping existing moisture or contaminants under the new encapsulation system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vK8k-S_HGzw 14 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11039-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/W4sR7KL6ULM/hqdefault.jpg Crawl Space Preparation and Cleanup — Crawl Space Encapsulation Begin by assessing the current state of the crawl space. This typically involves removing any existing, often damaged or damp, insulation such as pink fiberglass insulation. Clear out all debris, trash, and organic matter from the crawl space floor. The video shows the initial dirty condition of the crawl space with loose insulation, highlighting the need for thorough cleanup. Level the ground as much as possible to prepare for the vapor barrier installation. Ensure the area is as clean and free of obstructions as possible before proceeding to the next steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/W4sR7KL6ULM 1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11040-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2g6v90gQPck/hqdefault.jpg Air Seal Sill Plate to Foundation Wall — Crawl Space Encapsulation The most overlooked area for air sealing is the joint between the sill plate (the pressure-treated wood sitting on top of the foundation) and the foundation wall itself. This is a common pathway for air to move from the outside into the crawl space, or vice-versa. To seal this critical joint, apply a bead of caulk or a small bead of spray foam all the way around the inside perimeter where the sill plate meets the concrete block or foundation wall. This ensures a tight seal against air infiltration. A warning is given to consult with a pest control company before sealing this area, as some companies may advise against it due to termite inspection requirements or other concerns. New homes may already have a sealant in this location. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2g6v90gQPck 41 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11040-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VAQYMSUQDSs/hqdefault.jpg Seal Foundation Wall Penetrations — Crawl Space Encapsulation Inspect the inside of the foundation walls for any gaps or holes where plumbing pipes, electrical conduits, HVAC lines, or other utilities penetrate. These openings are significant sources of air leakage. Use appropriate sealant, such as black sealant shown in the video, to thoroughly seal around these penetrations to create an airtight barrier. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VAQYMSUQDSs 41 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11040-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Genu_Plnp2M/hqdefault.jpg Preliminary Air Sealing with Caulk — Crawl Space Encapsulation Apply a high-quality, 40-year caulk around the edges of the rim joist. Focus on running a continuous bead of caulk along the top and bottom edges where the rim joist meets the subfloor and the sill plate, respectively. These areas are the most critical for air leakage. Caulk can also be applied to any other visible cracks or gaps to provide a preliminary air seal before applying foam. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Genu_Plnp2M 58 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11041-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Moe34WaaFSE/hqdefault.jpg Lay Vapor Barrier on Ground and Walls — Crawl Space Encapsulation Roll out a heavy-duty, reinforced vapor barrier (typically 10-20 mil thick polyethylene) over the entire crawl space ground, overlapping seams by at least 6-12 inches. Secure it to the ground using specialized anchors or by temporarily weighing it down. Then, extend the vapor barrier up the foundation walls. It should run from the ground up to the sill plate or at least 6-12 inches (15-30 cm) above grade. Secure the barrier to the foundation walls using masonry fasteners or a robust adhesive specifically designed for concrete. The 'after' shots clearly show a continuous, clean white liner covering both the ground and extending up the foundation walls, indicating this step. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Moe34WaaFSE 12 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11041-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wG2Kd3DgMmc/hqdefault.jpg Install Ground Vapor Barrier — Crawl Space Encapsulation Next, unroll and spread large sheets of heavy-duty white plastic sheeting, which serves as the vapor barrier, over the entire ground surface of the crawl space, covering the previously laid matting. Ensure that the vapor barrier extends up the foundation walls to meet the reflective insulation and overlaps adequately where multiple sheets are used. The goal is to create a continuous and impermeable layer over the ground. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wG2Kd3DgMmc 2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11041-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/euUDSisFgOs/hqdefault.jpg Encapsulate with Vapor Barrier — Crawl Space Encapsulation A heavy-duty, white vapor barrier, specifically referred to as 'CleanSpace,' is unrolled over the TerraBlock rigid insulation panels, covering the entire crawl space floor. Workers then secure this liner to the wooden framing (such as floor joists or rim joists) using a drill and appropriate fasteners. They meticulously apply specialized tape to seal all seams of the vapor barrier, and also tape it to the spray-foamed foundation walls, creating a complete and airtight seal. A worker is also seen carefully cutting the liner to fit around an opening, ensuring all edges are sealed. This process fully isolates the crawl space environment from ground moisture and outside air. https://www.youtube.com/embed/euUDSisFgOs 20 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11042-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Fo9iwsBZWo0/hqdefault.jpg Seal Crawl Space Vents — Crawl Space Encapsulation The first essential step, especially for those on a budget, is to seal off any existing open vents in the crawl space foundation. This is achieved by cutting pieces of rigid foam board to precisely fit each vent opening. Once the foam board is snugly in place, expanding spray foam is applied around all the edges and gaps to create a complete and airtight seal. This method is reversible, allowing for removal if alternative solutions are preferred later. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Fo9iwsBZWo0 27 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11042-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lC7fUCZ8uOs/hqdefault.jpg Sealing Vents and Outside Air Leaks — Crawl Space Encapsulation A critical step in encapsulation is eliminating outside air entry. This means sealing all crawl space vents and any other penetrations or gaps in the foundation walls that connect to the exterior. Use rigid foam board insulation cut to size to seal vents, securing them with caulk or spray foam. For smaller cracks or gaps, use an appropriate sealant to create an airtight seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lC7fUCZ8uOs 3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11042-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9nCGqp63-MI/hqdefault.jpg Seal Crawl Space Vents — Crawl Space Encapsulation It's essential to properly seal all crawl space vents. Simply stuffing fiberglass insulation or using loose foam board is insufficient, as these methods can be dislodged by wind or may not provide an adequate seal. Instead, use a durable material like R10 termite-resistant foam board, applied with spray foam adhesive, to both seal and insulate the vents effectively. This prevents outside humid air from entering the crawl space and negates the effort of dehumidification. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9nCGqp63-MI 42 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11043-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rl5Vxkvne2A/hqdefault.jpg Install Wall Insulation — Crawl Space Encapsulation This step involves installing 2-inch thick SilverGlo foam boards on the interior of the crawl space walls. These boards are made of expanded polystyrene foam infused with graphite, which reportedly boosts their R-value by 24% compared to standard EPS foam. Crucially, they feature a radiant barrier on both sides that also functions as a vapor barrier. This dual-purpose barrier reflects heat back into the house during colder months and prevents moisture from migrating through the walls into the crawl space, thereby enhancing insulation and controlling humidity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rl5Vxkvne2A 40 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11043-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5LKQWCT5p38/hqdefault.jpg Install Rigid Foam Wall Insulation — Crawl Space Encapsulation Begin installing rigid foam insulation panels, such as those visually similar to 'ExtremeBlock Insulation,' along the interior perimeter walls of the crawlspace. Measure each section of the wall carefully and cut the foam panels to fit precisely using a utility knife or saw. Secure the panels to the foundation walls using appropriate fasteners designed for masonry or concrete, such as concrete screws. Ensure a tight fit with minimal gaps between panels and at corners. The video shows a worker using a drill to install these panels. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5LKQWCT5p38 15 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11043-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3YOIzEzEwWo/hqdefault.jpg Strategy 1: Install Taped Rigid Foam Insulation — Crawl Space Encapsulation Implement the first insulation strategy: using taped rigid foam. Install sheets of rigid foam insulation (such as XPS, EPS, GPS, or polyisocyanurate) on the interior side of the concrete stem walls and around the rim joists. Crucially, seal all connections, including joints between foam boards and to the rim joists, using a fluid-applied joint and seam filler compound or expanding foam sealant. This creates both a vapor retarder to prevent condensation on cold concrete surfaces and an air barrier to control air leakage. For an extremely high-performance assembly, consider installing rigid insulation underneath a vapor barrier on the crawl space floor, then pouring a 2-inch 'rat slab' (thin topping slab) over it. This improves durability and provides a smooth, accessible surface for maintenance of mechanical systems. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3YOIzEzEwWo 74 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11044-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qNQafR_5ALk/hqdefault.jpg Install Dehumidifier — Crawl Space Encapsulation Install a high-capacity, robust dehumidifier suitable for a crawlspace environment. Place the unit in a central location for optimal air circulation. Crucially, set up a permanent drainage line from the dehumidifier to the sump pump basin or an exterior drain so it can operate continuously without needing to be manually emptied. This is key to actively managing and maintaining low humidity levels in the now-sealed space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qNQafR_5ALk 3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11044-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c6_2tbCIq2M/hqdefault.jpg Install Dehumidifier — Crawl Space Encapsulation Install a dehumidifier in the crawlspace. Ensure the dehumidifier is perfectly level during installation so that any accumulated moisture can flow correctly to its pump. Drill a small hole in the foundation below the band seal from inside the crawlspace, ensuring it exits outside. Connect the dehumidifier's drain hose to the condensate pump (if external) and route the hose through the drilled hole to drain outside. Finally, if desired, install ducting to distribute the dehumidified air effectively throughout the crawlspace. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c6_2tbCIq2M 36 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11044-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oe6HqPsDDKg/hqdefault.jpg Implement Dehumidification and Monitor — Crawl Space Encapsulation After encapsulating and insulating the crawl space, install a crawl space dehumidifier. Position the dehumidifier in a central location for optimal air circulation. Ensure it is properly drained, either to a condensate pump that discharges outside or directly to a floor drain if available. Set the dehumidifier to maintain a relative humidity level between 50-55%. Regularly monitor the humidity levels with a hygrometer and periodically check the dehumidifier for proper operation and clean its filter as needed to maintain a dry, healthy, and protected crawl space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oe6HqPsDDKg 1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11045-1 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5LKQWCT5p38/hqdefault.jpg Final Sealing and Inspection — Crawl Space Encapsulation After installing the rigid insulation and vapor barrier, conduct a thorough final inspection of the entire crawlspace. Check all seams, corners, and penetrations (like pipes or wiring) to ensure they are completely sealed and airtight. Apply additional vapor barrier tape or sealant as needed to any areas that appear compromised. The goal is to create a fully sealed and encapsulated environment that is dry, clean, and free from external air and moisture intrusion. This completed encapsulation will protect your home's structure and improve indoor air quality and energy efficiency. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5LKQWCT5p38 8 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11045-2 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wG2Kd3DgMmc/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Finalize Encapsulation — Crawl Space Encapsulation Once all insulation and vapor barrier components are installed and sealed, conduct a thorough visual inspection of the entire crawl space. Check for any unsealed seams, loose fasteners, or gaps in the insulation. Ensure the vapor barrier is taut and completely covers the ground. If part of a full encapsulation system, confirm that any additional equipment, such as a dehumidifier, is properly positioned and operational to maintain optimal humidity levels. The end result should be a clean, dry, and energy-efficient crawl space. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wG2Kd3DgMmc 9 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11045-3 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dEHUdACaZmM/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Cleanup — Crawl Space Encapsulation After all cutting, taping, and sealing are complete, conduct a final inspection of the entire vapor barrier installation. Ensure that all seams, edges, and penetrations (such as around electrical boxes and wires) are securely sealed with either blue tape or acoustic sealant, as appropriate. Confirm that there are no visible gaps or tears that could compromise the barrier's effectiveness. Clean up any remaining tools or materials from the work area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dEHUdACaZmM 12 2026-09-21T14:42:19.158Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11026-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p2AXZxU7YPQ/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Power — Garbage Disposal Repair For your safety, if the reset button did not work, you must completely cut power to the unit. First, turn off the wall switch that operates the disposal. Then, go to your home's main electrical panel (circuit breaker box). Locate the breaker that controls the garbage disposal and flip it to the 'OFF' position. This ensures no electricity can reach the unit while you are working on it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p2AXZxU7YPQ 4 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11026-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6OvwfqlJckk/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Garbage Disposal Repair Locate the breaker switch that powers the garbage disposal at the electrical panel and turn it off. Test the outlet to make sure that the power is off. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6OvwfqlJckk 42 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11026-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AgZeozmFqQY/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Garbage Disposal Repair Before working on the disposal, ensure all power is cut off for safety. If the unit is hardwired, go to your home's breaker box, locate the breaker for the garbage disposal, and flip it to the 'off' position. It's a good practice to place a note on the breaker box to prevent someone from accidentally turning it back on. If your disposal plugs into an outlet under the sink, simply unplug the power cord. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AgZeozmFqQY 20 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11027-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OFsohUPFfIU/hqdefault.jpg Manually Free the Jammed Blades — Garbage Disposal Repair Ensure the power switch for the garbage disposal is in the OFF position. Insert an Allen wrench (also known as a jam-buster wrench if it came with the unit) into the hexagonal socket located in the center of the disposal's bottom plate. Firmly work the wrench back and forth to manually turn the motor and the grinding blades. Continue this rocking motion until you can feel the blades moving freely, which indicates the obstruction has been dislodged. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OFsohUPFfIU 40 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11027-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p2AXZxU7YPQ/hqdefault.jpg Manually Free the Jam — Garbage Disposal Repair Locate the hexagonal opening in the very center of the bottom of the disposal unit. Insert a garbage disposal jam buster tool or a 1/4-inch hex wrench into this opening. Apply force to turn the wrench back and forth. This manual rotation will move the internal flywheel and blades, which should dislodge whatever object is causing the jam. Continue rocking it back and forth until it moves freely in a full circle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p2AXZxU7YPQ 8 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11027-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kzTPox1kARo/hqdefault.jpg Clear a Jammed Disposal — Garbage Disposal Repair If the disposal hums but doesn't spin (indicating a jam), ensure the power switch is turned OFF. Use the Jam Buster Wrench (or 1/4-inch hex Allen wrench) by inserting it into the hex receptacle located in the center of the bottom of the disposal unit. Twist the wrench back and forth forcefully to dislodge any jammed debris and free the grinding plates. Continue twisting until the grinding plates turn freely with minimal effort (you should be able to spin the wrench with a finger or two). Once the jam is cleared, remove the wrench from the disposal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kzTPox1kARo 60 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11028-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gQlzLb7en4A/hqdefault.jpg Clear Jam with Allen Key — Garbage Disposal Repair If the reset button was not tripped, or if resetting it did not fix the jam, you will need to manually dislodge the grinding plates. Locate the hexagonal hole in the center of the underside of the garbage disposal unit. Take an appropriate size Allen key (often a 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch, typically included with new disposals, or available in a standard Allen key set) and insert it into this hole. Firmly turn the Allen key clockwise and counter-clockwise repeatedly. This action rotates the motor shaft and the grinding plates, helping to free any objects caught between them. Continue turning until the Allen key can move freely in both directions, indicating the jam has been cleared. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gQlzLb7en4A 20 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11028-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/x0J7oCTVbwM/hqdefault.jpg Clear Internal Jam with Hex Key — Garbage Disposal Repair Next, address the jammed grinding plates. Look for a small hexagonal hole at the very bottom center of the garbage disposal unit. This is a manual override port. Insert a 1/4-inch hex key (also known as an Allen wrench) into this hole. Twist the hex key back and forth vigorously. This action will manually turn the motor shaft and help dislodge whatever is binding the grinding plates. If an installer left a hex key taped to the unit or in a nearby junk drawer, use that. Continue turning until you can freely rotate the grinding plates. Remove the hex key once the plates move freely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/x0J7oCTVbwM 27 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11028-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/if0T2gdMNuA/hqdefault.jpg Clear the Jam Manually — Garbage Disposal Repair With the Allen wrench securely in place, turn it back and forth in both directions. You may need to apply a fair amount of force, as the obstruction can make it stiff. Continue twisting the wrench until you feel the motor shaft loosen and the wrench can turn freely in a full rotation. This action helps to dislodge whatever is jamming the grinding plates inside the disposal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/if0T2gdMNuA 23 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11029-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/q__ZEvGYYAc/hqdefault.jpg Press Reset Button — Garbage Disposal Repair If the disposal is still humming or not operating, locate the reset button, typically a small red button on the bottom of the unit. Press this button firmly to reset the overload protector. Then, attempt to switch the disposal on again. https://www.youtube.com/embed/q__ZEvGYYAc 22 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11029-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7tvi6zoBl-k/hqdefault.jpg Press the Reset Button — Garbage Disposal Repair Locate the small reset button on the bottom of the garbage disposal unit. It is typically a red button. If the disposal's motor has overheated due to a jam or being overloaded, this internal breaker will trip. Firmly press the button to reset it. You may hear a distinct 'click' sound if it was tripped. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7tvi6zoBl-k 30 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11029-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CXKJH4NQDb4/hqdefault.jpg Check Reset Button — Garbage Disposal Repair Locate the small, typically red, reset button on the bottom of the garbage disposal unit. If your disposal was completely silent, this button may have popped out. Press it firmly to reset it. Note that if the disposal was humming, the problem is a jam, and resetting the button will not fix the underlying issue, but it's a good practice to check. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CXKJH4NQDb4 12 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11030-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gQlzLb7en4A/hqdefault.jpg Check for Leaks — Garbage Disposal Repair While under the sink, take a moment to visually inspect the garbage disposal unit and its associated plumbing for any signs of water leaks. Check around the top mounting collar where it connects to the sink, the discharge pipe leading to the drain, and the main body of the disposal. Run a hand along these areas to feel for any dampness. Water leaks can indicate a compromised seal or a crack in the housing, which might necessitate replacement of the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gQlzLb7en4A 6 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11030-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QuJmkG4Nw2M/hqdefault.jpg Initial Leak Inspection — Garbage Disposal Repair If your garbage disposer is leaking water, begin by visually inspecting the unit and its connections to locate the source of the leak. Pay close attention to the area where the disposer meets the sink. Use a flashlight and paper towels to help pinpoint dripping water. The video highlights five common areas where leaks originate. This initial step is about observing and narrowing down the potential problem area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QuJmkG4Nw2M 7 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11030-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ofvv_aDZw1A/hqdefault.jpg Test for Leaks — Garbage Disposal Repair After all connections are made, turn on the water faucet to allow water to run into the sink and through the disposer's drain. Go underneath the sink and carefully inspect all plumbing connections, including the sink flange, the discharge tailpipe, the drain trap, and the dishwasher hose connection, for any signs of leaks. A mirror can be used to check hard-to-reach or obscured areas for drips. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ofvv_aDZw1A 20 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11031-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8iZmZ9jr_pE/hqdefault.jpg Reconnect Plumbing — Garbage Disposal Repair With the disposal securely mounted, reconnect all plumbing lines. First, attach the dishwasher drain hose to the dishwasher inlet port on the side of the disposal. Secure it with a hose clamp, tightening it with a screwdriver. Next, reconnect the main drain pipe (P-trap) to the disposal's bottom outlet. Ensure all washers and nuts are correctly positioned and hand-tighten the nuts, then use a wrench to snug them up, being careful not to overtighten and crack the plastic pipes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8iZmZ9jr_pE 35 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11031-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gIrGYoRivCc/hqdefault.jpg Final Tightening and Leak Check Prep — Garbage Disposal Repair Once all pipes and hoses are loosely connected, it's time for final tightening. First, use the Allen key to tighten the disposal's mounting ring to the sink flange. The presenter warns against overtightening, as it can over-compress the bezel and make future removal difficult. Tighten the mounting ring just enough to be secure, leaving room for the Allen key to be inserted in the future. Next, hand-tighten the nuts on the main drain pipe connections. The presenter advises against using tools on plastic drain pipes, as this can lead to cracking; hand-tightening is sufficient. Finally, tighten the hose clamp on the dishwasher drain hose. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gIrGYoRivCc 112 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11031-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q47HmlojgKE/hqdefault.jpg Final Connection and Tightening — Garbage Disposal Repair Once all glued components are assembled, make the final connections. Attach the assembly to the sink tailpiece and the drain pipe in the wall using the slip-joint nuts and washers. Hand-tighten the nuts as much as possible, then use channel-lock pliers to give them an additional quarter-turn to ensure a snug, leak-proof seal. Do not over-tighten, which could crack the plastic components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q47HmlojgKE 6 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11032-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/19NzYfH2CHM/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Washer/Gasket — Garbage Disposal Repair Identify and remove the old slip joint washer or gasket. This component is crucial for creating a watertight seal and may be compressed or damaged, causing the leak. https://www.youtube.com/embed/19NzYfH2CHM 2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11032-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ok1LgrnmI9c/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Replace Gaskets — Garbage Disposal Repair If a leak originates from between two parts of the head assembly, disassemble those parts and carefully inspect the gasket in the female connection. The gasket is essential for completing the seal in hose-threaded connections. Check if the gasket is missing, damaged, or misaligned. If it's misaligned, simply reposition it correctly at the bottom of the female connection and retest the assembly. If the gasket is missing or damaged, it must be replaced. Replacements are inexpensive and widely available. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ok1LgrnmI9c 28 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11032-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CpgCqpKSQP4/hqdefault.jpg Inspect and Replace the O-Ring — Garbage Disposal Repair If reconnecting doesn't stop the leak, disconnect the fitting again. Visually inspect the internal black rubber O-ring for any signs of damage, such as cracks, tears, or debris. If the O-ring is damaged, it may be possible to replace it. Use a small dental pick to carefully hook and remove the old O-ring and the plastic components behind it. Apply a thin layer of silicone-based plumber's grease to a new O-ring and carefully install it and the other components in the correct order. If a replacement O-ring is not available or if the fitting body is damaged, replace the entire fitting. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CpgCqpKSQP4 96 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11033-1 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RWw-l0cOSY4/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Test Disposal — Garbage Disposal Repair After confirming all plumbing and electrical connections are secure, return to your electrical panel and flip the circuit breaker for the garbage disposal back to the ON position. Go back to the kitchen, turn on the water in the sink, and then flip the disposal switch to test the new unit. Listen for proper operation and check for any leaks around all the newly made connections. If there are no leaks and the disposal functions correctly, your installation is complete! https://www.youtube.com/embed/RWw-l0cOSY4 61 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11033-2 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cdqnb2cuvK0/hqdefault.jpg Test New Disposal Installation — Garbage Disposal Repair Return to your home's main electrical panel and turn the circuit breaker back on for the garbage disposal. Go to the kitchen sink, turn on the water faucet, and visually inspect all plumbing connections (dishwasher hose, main drain pipe, and around the sink flange) for any leaks. Finally, turn on the garbage disposal switch to ensure it operates correctly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cdqnb2cuvK0 37 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11033-3 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/q4n39CiBTPI/hqdefault.jpg Test Installation — Garbage Disposal Repair The final step is to test the installation. Turn the power back on at the circuit breaker. Run cold water into the sink and then turn on the garbage disposal. Let it run for a moment while you thoroughly check all the plumbing connections for any signs of leaks. Check around the sink flange, the dishwasher hose connection, and the main drain pipe connection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4n39CiBTPI 33 2026-09-20T14:20:11.019Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11021-1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/J4Pg0uZ_9Jw/hqdefault.jpg Final Test and Inspection — Stair Tread Installation Once all structural components, treads, and risers are installed, conduct a thorough final inspection. Walk up and down the completed stairs several times, paying close attention to their feel. Check for any wobbling, squeaking, or unevenness. Ensure all connections are tight and secure. This "final test" confirms the stability, safety, and comfort of the newly built staircase. Any minor adjustments or final cosmetic touches, like sanding or preparing for finish coatings, would be addressed after this evaluation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J4Pg0uZ_9Jw 1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11021-2 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mjZqhxztKJ8/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Cleanup — Stair Tread Installation After the adhesive has fully cured and all wooden coverings are securely in place, carefully remove all temporary weights from the stair treads and landing panels. Inspect the entire staircase for any loose areas, gaps, or imperfections. Clean up any sawdust, adhesive residue, or debris, using a broom or vacuum cleaner, to reveal the finished wooden staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mjZqhxztKJ8 5 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11021-3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/D9nun_rx--c/hqdefault.jpg Finalize Tread Installation and Inspect — Stair Tread Installation After all treads are installed, inspect them for any protruding screw heads or uneven spacing. Make any necessary adjustments by tightening screws or repositioning boards. Apply any final finishing touches, such as cleaning the surface and inspecting the overall stability of the stair structure. This ensures safety, durability, and a polished final appearance for the deck stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/D9nun_rx--c 10 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11025-1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Install Risers — Stair Tread Installation Start by installing the new risers. Use a pencil to mark the height of the riser on the inner stringer. If the height of the riser is consistent, multiple pieces can be cut in advance using a table saw set at the appropriate angle (e.g., 5 degrees as shown in the video). Apply a strong construction adhesive, such as PL Premium, to the back of the riser before placing it firmly against the existing stair structure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 90 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11025-2 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Install Risers (Counter Stairs) — Stair Tread Installation After installing all the treads, proceed to measure, cut, and glue each counter stair (riser). Measure the height and width of the space between each newly installed tread. Cut the new wooden risers to fit these dimensions precisely. Apply construction wood adhesive to the back of each riser and firmly press it into place, ensuring a tight fit between the treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 10 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11025-3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4UAv_YIlfiQ/hqdefault.jpg Install New Flooring and Risers — Stair Tread Installation With the structural extensions completed, the next step is to install the new flooring onto the now uniformly 11-inch deep treads. Simultaneously, new risers are installed to cover the vertical face of each step, concealing the added lumber and providing a clean, finished look. Special attention should be given to creating a 'bull nose' return on the front edge of the bottom step where it meets the wall, ensuring a smooth and aesthetically pleasing transition. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4UAv_YIlfiQ 24 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11024-1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Nd870Y14feg/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut New Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Each stair in a staircase is often slightly different in length, so it's crucial to measure and cut each new tread individually. Place an old, removed stair tread side-by-side with a new, uncut tread. Use the old tread as a template to mark the exact length needed on the new tread with a pencil. The presenter uses a circular saw for cutting; a table saw is another suitable option. When operating the circular saw, ensure both hands are firmly on the tool and your feet are well out of the way to prevent accidents, as this is a common point of injury. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Nd870Y14feg 57 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11024-2 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Zs64Ev9D0g/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Treads — Stair Tread Installation After the risers are installed, measure the depth and length of each individual stair tread. According to these measurements, cut your new hardwood treads. It's crucial to be accurate, as even small errors can lead to visible gaps. You may need to make slight adjustments to ensure a gap-free fit. A track saw, set at a 5-degree angle as demonstrated, can be particularly useful for making precise, straight cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Zs64Ev9D0g 81 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11024-3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut First Tread — Stair Tread Installation After preparing the riser, move on to the corresponding stair tread. Measure the depth and length of the tread. Similar to the riser, use your cutting saw to cut the tread material 1/8 inch shorter than the measured depth and 1/8 inch shorter than the measured length. These precise, slightly short cuts allow for the necessary expansion gaps and space for caulking. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 10 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11023-1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9iOsbprpe5g/hqdefault.jpg Remove Carpet & Prepare Subtreads — Stair Tread Installation The project begins by showing existing carpeted stairs, which are then stripped of their old carpet, revealing the wooden subtreads and risers underneath. To enhance stability and prevent future squeaks, 2-inch deck screws are driven into the subtreads using a Milwaukee cordless drill. Subsequently, the installer carefully checks for any exposed staples or nails left over from the carpet installation, removing them with a hammer or pry tool, or hammering them flush with the wood surface. This ensures a perfectly smooth and clean base, essential for the proper installation of the new treads and risers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9iOsbprpe5g 39 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11023-2 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xrqO6WsnouE/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Surface by Filling Holes — Stair Tread Installation After removing all carpet, inspect the stair treads and risers for any cracks, gaps, or holes left by nails and staples. Apply a sandable, water-based wood filler to these imperfections, ensuring a smooth, level surface. The video shows using Varathane Sandable Wood Filler, Natural. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xrqO6WsnouE 64 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11023-3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tep_pcQF4RE/hqdefault.jpg Secure Loose Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Inspect the existing stair structure for any loose or squeaky areas. Use a hammer and nails or a drill and screws to firmly secure any loose treads or risers. This step ensures a stable and noise-free foundation for your new hardwood stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tep_pcQF4RE 3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11022-1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11022-2 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11022-3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Starting from the bottom step of the staircase, carefully align the first prepared stair tread onto the wooden step. Ensure the tread is centered, positioned straight, and covers the desired area of the step. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down across its entire surface, paying close attention to the edges and corners, to securely bond the adhesive to the wood. The installer in the video kneels and crawls up the stairs, applying significant body weight to ensure good contact. Repeat this alignment and pressing process for all remaining stairs, working your way up the staircase one tread at a time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 6 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11020-1 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hVs1YaoZyKA/hqdefault.jpg Carefully Remove Old Treads — Stair Tread Installation Carefully remove the old, damaged deck treads. For boards that are already loose, gently pry them up with a large screwdriver, avoiding excessive force. If a board is tightly secured, do not immediately reach for a pry bar, as this can damage the fragile stair stringers underneath. Instead, use a large screwdriver and a hammer to split the board into pieces by driving the screwdriver beside the nail heads. This action forces the wood grain around the nails to split, allowing the pieces to be removed easily without stressing the stringers. For very stubborn boards that require more force, use a pry bar, but apply leverage as slowly and carefully as possible. It is crucial to prevent damage to the stair stringers, which are the structural pieces below the treads. These stringers are shaped like a sawtooth, with diagonal grain lines that make them very weak and prone to fracturing. Avoid hitting them sideways or applying excessive leverage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVs1YaoZyKA 82 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11020-2 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KMoh0dp78ek/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Wooden Treads — Stair Tread Installation With the new treads prepared, it's time to remove the old wooden treads that were beneath the carpet. Use a pry bar and hammer to carefully pry up each old tread from the stair stringers. The video shows the treads being removed one by one, exposing the framework beneath. Collect the removed treads and any remaining nails for disposal. After removing all old treads, clean up any debris, dust, or old adhesive from the stringers and risers, possibly using a vacuum or shop vac, to ensure a clean surface for the new tread installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KMoh0dp78ek 49 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11020-3 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/diTxF53fdrA/hqdefault.jpg Physically Remove Old Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation For the initial removal of the old stair treads, which were extensively glued and nailed, the video suggests using robust tools. Insert a crowbar underneath the edge of an old tread, and then use a sledgehammer to drive the crowbar deeper, creating leverage. Pry the tread upwards forcefully. It's important to note that the treads, often made of composite wood, are likely to break into multiple pieces during this process due to the strong adhesive. The video shows broken pieces with nails still attached, indicating the force needed and the integrity of the original installation. After the main pieces are detached, extract any exposed, large nails from the underlying wooden structure using the claw of a hammer or the crowbar. https://www.youtube.com/embed/diTxF53fdrA 38 2026-10-01T20:46:14.255Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11013-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wMC6QgySBug/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power Cord — Microwave Repair Before proceeding with any further disassembly, locate and unplug the microwave's power cord. The power cord typically runs through a hole in the upper cabinet directly above the microwave and plugs into an outlet inside the cabinet. Ensure the plug is completely removed from the outlet to disconnect all electrical power from the unit. This is a critical safety step to prevent electrical hazards. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wMC6QgySBug 19 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11013-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MD9UYM3s3fM/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power to the Microwave — Microwave Repair Prior to any electrical work, safety is paramount. Open the cabinet above the microwave to locate and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Alternatively, if the outlet is inaccessible or you prefer, turn off the corresponding circuit breaker at your home's electrical panel to completely cut power to the microwave. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MD9UYM3s3fM 14 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11013-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kkRkviUg4-I/hqdefault.jpg Prioritize Safety: Unplug Appliance — Microwave Repair Before attempting any internal inspection or repair, it is crucial to prioritize safety. Unplug the microwave oven's power cord completely from the wall outlet. Microwaves contain high-voltage components, such as capacitors, that can store a lethal electrical charge even when the appliance is unplugged. This step ensures that no power is flowing to the unit before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kkRkviUg4-I 15 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11014-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kkRkviUg4-I/hqdefault.jpg Remove Outer Casing — Microwave Repair To access the internal components, the microwave's outer casing needs to be removed. Begin by unscrewing the two screws located on each side of the microwave unit. Next, unscrew the two additional screws found at the back of the microwave. Once all four screws are removed, carefully slide the outer casing backward and then lift it off the main unit to expose the internal wiring and components. This requires gently manipulating the casing to clear any interlocking tabs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kkRkviUg4-I 75 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11014-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6ISZrYGn0Xc/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble the Microwave Casing — Microwave Repair Microwaves often use 'anti-tamper' Torx screws to secure the casing. These screws have a small pin in the center of their head, requiring a specialized tamper-proof Torx bit (e.g., TT15, which has a corresponding hole in the center). Locate and remove all such screws from the back and sides of the microwave. Once all screws are removed, carefully slide or lift off the outer metal casing to expose the internal components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6ISZrYGn0Xc 15 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11014-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/f2pIExbxQMI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Outer Casing — Microwave Repair Place the microwave on a clean, stable surface protected by a towel. Identify and remove the four security screws on the back panel of the microwave. The video's presenter previously modified these screws by cutting a slot in their center post with a Dremel tool for easier removal with a flathead screwdriver. Alternatively, a specialized security bit set can be used. Once these screws are removed, the entire outer metal casing (top and sides) can be slid backward and then lifted off the microwave, exposing the internal components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/f2pIExbxQMI 127 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11015-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FHNR6c8GQX8/hqdefault.jpg Remove Outer Casing and Initial Visual Inspection — Microwave Repair Locate and remove approximately half a dozen screws holding the outer casing of the microwave. Carefully slide off the back and top cover. Once the cover is removed, avoid touching any internal components, particularly capacitors, transformers, and the magnetron, as they can retain dangerous electrical charges. Perform a general visual inspection of the internal wiring, circuit boards, and the main fuse (a small tube fuse or push-in ATC fuse) for any signs of burning, loose connections, or other damage. Note that the main fuse typically protects the entire microwave's power input, so it's unlikely to be the sole cause of a non-spinning turntable if other functions work. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FHNR6c8GQX8 65 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11015-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CwG7GFnIrN0/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Magnetron — Microwave Repair After confirming the microwave is unplugged and the high voltage capacitor discharged, focus on the magnetron. The magnetron is the component responsible for generating the microwaves that heat your food. Carefully disconnect all wires attached to the magnetron's terminals. Then, attach the leads of your multimeter to the magnetron's terminals and test for continuity. A functional magnetron should show some continuity between its terminals. If the multimeter shows no continuity, it indicates an open circuit within the magnetron, meaning it is faulty and needs to be replaced. A broken magnetron can also blow a fuse within the microwave, potentially leading to failure of other components. Replacing a magnetron often requires removing mounting screws and carefully handling the fragile internal components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CwG7GFnIrN0 39 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11015-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CwG7GFnIrN0/hqdefault.jpg Preparation and Safety First — Microwave Repair The video begins by stating the common problem: a microwave turning on but not heating food. It introduces three primary components that could be at fault: the high voltage diode, the door switch, and the magnetron. For any internal work on a microwave, it is critical to unplug the appliance from its power source to prevent electrical shock. Next, remove the outer cabinet of the microwave. The specific method for removing the cabinet varies by model, but typically involves unscrewing several screws on the back and sides and then sliding the cover off. Finally, locate and safely discharge the high voltage capacitor using an insulated tool (like a screwdriver with an insulated handle and tip) to short its terminals. This step is extremely important as the capacitor can store a lethal electrical charge even after the microwave is unplugged. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CwG7GFnIrN0 21 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11016-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q9Hy0XCwKww/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Microwave Shuts Off Intermittently (Door Switch) — Microwave Repair If your Bosch microwave powers off unexpectedly after only a few seconds of operation, an intermittently failing door switch could be the cause. Begin by visually checking each of the door switches for any signs of physical damage, such as overheating, arcing (electrical discharge), or burning. If there are no obvious visual indicators of failure, proceed to test each door switch for continuity using a multimeter. If any of the switches are visibly damaged or provide only intermittent continuity readings, it indicates a faulty switch that requires replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q9Hy0XCwKww 22 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11016-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kkRkviUg4-I/hqdefault.jpg Test Door Interlock Switches — Microwave Repair The microwave has multiple door interlock switches designed for safety. The video focuses on three such switches. To test them, disconnect the wires from one of the switches. Using a voltmeter set to resistance mode, measure the continuity across the switch's terminals. With the door open, a working switch should show an open circuit ('OL'). When the door is manually closed (or simulated as closed by pressing the switch mechanism), it should show a very low resistance (around 0.1-0.2 ohms). Repeat this for all three door switches. The video highlights that one of the bottom switches has a visibly burnt connector, which often causes intermittent or complete failure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kkRkviUg4-I 336 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11016-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0tkgXnve044/hqdefault.jpg Test Door Micro Switches — Microwave Repair Locate the door micro switches, which are small, plunger- or lever-activated switches typically positioned around the microwave door latch mechanism. Most microwaves have three such switches: a primary, a secondary, and a monitor switch, each playing a role in ensuring safe operation. Set your multimeter to continuity mode. Test each switch individually by connecting the probes to its terminals. For normally open (NO) switches, they should demonstrate continuity (a beep or low resistance) when the door is closed (meaning the switch is physically activated by the door latch) and no continuity when the door is open. Conversely, for normally closed (NC) switches, they should show continuity when the door is open (switch not activated) and no continuity when the door is closed. Manually activate each switch by pressing its plunger or lever to observe the change in continuity. Faulty door switches are a very common cause of microwave malfunction, preventing it from starting or even causing fuses to blow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0tkgXnve044 30 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11017-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kkRkviUg4-I/hqdefault.jpg Replace Faulty Door Interlock Switch/Connector — Microwave Repair The root cause of the microwave malfunction was identified as a burnt connector on one of the door interlock switches, as indicated by visible charring. This connector prevents proper electrical contact, leading to the heating failure. To fix this, first, remove the two screws (one top, one bottom) that hold the entire front panel assembly of the door switches. Carefully slide this panel upwards and then outward. The individual microswitches are then disconnected from the panel by carefully prying a small plastic tab and sliding the switch out of its housing. The damaged switch or connector should be replaced, and then the entire assembly reinstalled in reverse order of removal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kkRkviUg4-I 280 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11017-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Z5VBeiFIUKM/hqdefault.jpg Replace Switch and Reconnect Wiring — Microwave Repair After identifying the faulty switch(es), purchase replacement parts. The video suggests looking for part numbers on the switch itself or searching online retailers like Amazon by microwave model or switch description. Once you have the new switch, reinsert it into the housing until it clicks securely into place. Reconnect the electrical wires to the prongs, ensuring they match the orientation documented in your earlier reference photo. Repeat this for all switches if multiple were removed or tested. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z5VBeiFIUKM 48 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11017-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Z5VBeiFIUKM/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Microwave and Test — Microwave Repair Ensure all switches are securely in place and all wiring is properly connected. Once confirmed, reassemble the microwave casing by sliding the panel back into position and fastening all the screws. Finally, plug the microwave back into the power outlet. Test the microwave by opening and closing the door and attempting to run it to ensure the issue is resolved and it operates safely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z5VBeiFIUKM 32 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11018-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/euwH51KvZGk/hqdefault.jpg Reattach Microwave Casing and Review Documentation — Microwave Repair After confirming the microwave's functionality, carefully place the outer casing back onto the microwave. Ensure it aligns properly with all mounting points. Reinstall all the screws that were removed earlier using a cordless drill or screwdriver, tightening them securely to hold the casing in place. The presenter also highlights that many microwaves, especially older models, may have technical data sheets and wiring diagrams tucked inside the casing, often containing crucial warnings about high-voltage components and specific fuse information. https://www.youtube.com/embed/euwH51KvZGk 56 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11018-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6ISZrYGn0Xc/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Microwave Casing (If Successful) — Microwave Repair If the microwave is now working correctly after the fuse replacement, slide the outer metal casing back onto the microwave chassis. Align it properly and then reinsert all the anti-tamper Torx screws using the specialized bit to secure the casing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6ISZrYGn0Xc 9 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11018-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MD9UYM3s3fM/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble the Microwave Components — Microwave Repair After confirming the microwave is working, unplug it again to continue with the reassembly. First, position the small metal cover back over the fuse compartment and secure it with the Phillips head screw. Next, align the top vent cover with its mounting slots and push it into place until it snaps securely. Reinstall and tighten the two Phillips head screws that hold the top vent cover in position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MD9UYM3s3fM 39 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11019-1 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/f2pIExbxQMI/hqdefault.jpg Test Repaired Microwave — Microwave Repair With the microwave fully reassembled and plugged in, set the clock if it reset due to being unplugged. To test, input a short cooking time, such as 10 seconds, and press the 'Start' button. Observe the microwave to ensure the internal light is on, the turntable is spinning, and you hear the characteristic humming sound of the magnetron. If all these functions are present, the repair was successful. https://www.youtube.com/embed/f2pIExbxQMI 31 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11019-2 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kkRkviUg4-I/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Microwave and Final Functionality Test — Microwave Repair After successfully cleaning or replacing the faulty door switch/connector and reassembling the front panel, slide the outer metal casing back onto the microwave and secure it with all the screws. Plug the microwave back into the wall outlet. To test, place a small amount of water in a microwave-safe container inside the unit. Set a short cooking time, such as 2 or 5 seconds, and press start. Observe if the microwave heats the water and if the internal light turns on. The video demonstrates the microwave successfully heating, indicating the repair was effective. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kkRkviUg4-I 103 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11019-3 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sSmn1iWdXL4/hqdefault.jpg Reconnect Power and Test Microwave — Microwave Repair With the new mica wave-guide cover securely installed, the microwave oven's power cord is plugged back into the electrical outlet. A bowl containing water is then placed inside the microwave, and the appliance is set to run for 30 seconds. This test run is performed to verify that the arcing issue has been resolved and that the microwave is operating safely and effectively without any sparks or unusual sounds. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sSmn1iWdXL4 18 2026-09-19T14:22:15.159Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11012-1 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11012-2 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11012-3 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Treads — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Starting from the bottom step of the staircase, carefully align the first prepared stair tread onto the wooden step. Ensure the tread is centered, positioned straight, and covers the desired area of the step. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down across its entire surface, paying close attention to the edges and corners, to securely bond the adhesive to the wood. The installer in the video kneels and crawls up the stairs, applying significant body weight to ensure good contact. Repeat this alignment and pressing process for all remaining stairs, working your way up the staircase one tread at a time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 6 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11010-1 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11010-2 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1zDgEcG9ENk/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads with Template Tool — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Utilize a specialized stair measuring tool, often referred to as a stair jig or tread template tool, to accurately capture the exact length and precise angles of each individual stair tread. Carefully adjust the tool to fit snugly against the walls and any existing nosing, ensuring that it provides a perfect, custom template for the laminate cut that will follow. This step is critical for ensuring a seamless and gap-free fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1zDgEcG9ENk 25 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11010-3 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11009-1 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Staircase — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Before installing the carpet stair treads, thoroughly clean the entire staircase. Begin by sweeping all wooden steps to remove any loose dust, dirt, or debris. Once swept, use a damp cloth to wipe down each step and the front edge (riser/nose) to ensure no fine dust or residue remains. This creates a clean, smooth surface for the adhesive treads to bond effectively. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 3 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11009-2 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Before installing the stair treads, ensure the stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris from the surface of each stair. A clean surface is crucial for the adhesive on the treads to bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 6 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11009-3 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sfgZWTtWnVc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Stairs — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Begin by removing any existing stair coverings, such as old runners or individual treads, to reveal the bare wooden stairs. Once clear, thoroughly vacuum each stair to remove dust, dirt, and any debris that might prevent the new treads from adhering properly. Ensure the surface is clean and dry. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sfgZWTtWnVc 9 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11011-1 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11011-2 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Treads — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Starting from the bottom step of the staircase, carefully align the first prepared stair tread onto the wooden step. Ensure the tread is centered, positioned straight, and covers the desired area of the step. Once satisfied with the placement, firmly press the tread down across its entire surface, paying close attention to the edges and corners, to securely bond the adhesive to the wood. The installer in the video kneels and crawls up the stairs, applying significant body weight to ensure good contact. Repeat this alignment and pressing process for all remaining stairs, working your way up the staircase one tread at a time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 6 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11011-3 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Split Level Stairs Upgrade Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11007-1 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/S2bSJvfLR4g/hqdefault.jpg Evaluate and Choose Flooring Style — Split Level Stairs Upgrade The initial step in any flooring DIY project is to select the aesthetic. This video presents two distinct flooring options for consideration. The first option is a light wooden-looking floor, characterized by lighter tones and a contemporary feel, which is shown from [0:02.220] to [0:04.559]. The second option is a darker, more natural-looking brown floor, offering a richer and potentially more traditional or rustic appearance, shown from [0:07.139] to [0:09.000]. Carefully observe both options, considering factors such as existing decor, room size, natural lighting, and personal preference. The goal is to make an informed decision on which style best suits the space and desired outcome of your DIY flooring project before moving on to material purchase and installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/S2bSJvfLR4g 9 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11007-2 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ixUVbgutJ_M/hqdefault.jpg Research and Identify Flooring Needs — Split Level Stairs Upgrade After returning the previous flooring, the homeowner visits Lowe's to find a suitable replacement. They begin by examining various flooring displays, specifically looking for features like "100% waterproof," "kid & pet-friendly," "DIY-Friendly Install Quick, Easy & Stress-Free," and a "30-Year Warranty." They observe a sample of "MATRIX Seasalt Hickory" flooring (5.9-in x 48.03-in, 23.63 sq ft/carton, $1.99/sq ft) to understand the product specifications and benefits. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ixUVbgutJ_M 15 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11007-3 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z3t2SHw-0ko/hqdefault.jpg Select and Order Flooring Samples Online — Split Level Stairs Upgrade To select new flooring, the couple uses Revel Woods, an online flooring company. They navigate to the website, initiate a quiz designed to understand their personal style and space requirements, and input project details like the room's activity level (low for a bedroom) and desired design style (rustic). They also specify preferences for light-colored, wide planks. Based on their selections, the website recommends various collections, allowing them to order up to four samples to physically evaluate in their home. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z3t2SHw-0ko 144 2026-09-19T07:55:17.933Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10998-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eJM0ctipors/hqdefault.jpg Locate Furnace Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Next, locate the furnace filter within your heating system. The filter is typically found in the cold air return duct or positioned directly next to the blower compartment. It might be hidden behind an access door, a large return air vent, or a dedicated slot on the side of the furnace unit itself. Carefully inspect the area around your furnace and air ducts to find its exact position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eJM0ctipors 6 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10998-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YaGJiF_t1Fs/hqdefault.jpg Locate the Air Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement The most challenging part of this task is locating the furnace filter, as its placement can vary significantly between different furnace models. The host points to his Carrier brand furnace unit, indicating that filters can sometimes be found behind the main panel, on the side, or at the bottom. In his specific setup, the filter is conveniently located at the bottom of the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YaGJiF_t1Fs 14 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10998-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a-uH19eqd8g/hqdefault.jpg Locate HVAC Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Next, you need to identify the location of your home's HVAC air filter. The placement can vary significantly between different homes and HVAC system configurations. The video demonstrates two common locations: it might be found behind a return air grill in the ceiling of a central living area or hallway, or it could be directly with the main HVAC unit itself, often housed in an attic or a hall closet. The person in the video first points to a large ceiling vent as a potential filter location, then proceeds to a hall closet where the main HVAC unit and its filter are located near the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a-uH19eqd8g 11 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10999-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rz8uVr5zIik/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Furnace Power — Furnace Filter Replacement Before proceeding with any internal inspection or cleaning, it is absolutely essential to cut off power to the furnace to ensure safety and prevent electrical shock. Locate the dedicated power switch for the furnace, which might be an internal switch or an external power switch near the unit. Flip this switch to the 'off' position. Additionally, move to your home's thermostat and confirm that the system selector switch is set to 'off'. This double-check ensures no unexpected power surges or activation while working inside the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rz8uVr5zIik 31 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10999-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJz6P8uAIEc/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Power — Furnace Filter Replacement The first and most crucial step is to shut down the power to the furnace for safety. Usually, there is a red power switch located directly on the furnace unit; flip this switch down to the 'off' position. If a switch isn't on the furnace, check the wall directly next to it. In cases where no local switch is found, proceed to the main fuse panel for your residence and turn off the corresponding breaker for the furnace. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJz6P8uAIEc 21 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10999-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RkN5KLd-U8w/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Power to Furnace — Furnace Filter Replacement Before beginning any work on the furnace, ensure electrical safety by shutting off the power. This can be done by flipping the dedicated furnace switch, usually located near the unit, to the 'off' position. Alternatively, if no such switch is present, locate and switch off the corresponding circuit breaker in your home's main electrical panel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RkN5KLd-U8w 4 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11000-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U80dTEGe-d0/hqdefault.jpg Open Filter Access Panel — Furnace Filter Replacement The video begins with the demonstrator highlighting the convenience of modern furnace systems for filter changes. He then shows how to access the filter compartment by locating and pulling down two 'thumb tabs' positioned on the bottom access panel of the furnace unit. This action releases the panel, allowing it to swing open and reveal the filter slot. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U80dTEGe-d0 4 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11000-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ED3bfesbE_Y/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Access Panel and Old Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the filter location is identified, you need to access it. For a furnace-mounted filter, this usually involves loosening a couple of simple wing nuts on the sheet metal access panel of the return air duct. Carefully loosen these nuts and set them aside in a safe place so they are not lost. Gently pull down the access panel to reveal the old filter, then slide the old filter out of its slot. Be cautious when handling sheet metal, as the edges can be sharp. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ED3bfesbE_Y 29 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11000-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pqg4c67oiVQ/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Old Furnace Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Locate the front panel of the furnace filter housing. Gently pull the panel straight out to remove it, exposing the old furnace filter. Once exposed, grasp the old filter and pull it straight out of the housing to completely remove it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pqg4c67oiVQ 30 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11001-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a-uH19eqd8g/hqdefault.jpg Replace Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Once you've located the filter housing (in this case, in a hall closet near the floor), carefully slide out the old, dirty air filter. Before discarding it, take a moment to observe the small arrow printed on the filter's frame. This arrow indicates the direction of airflow, which is critical for proper installation. Retrieve your new HVAC filter (the video shows a standard pleated air filter). Align the new filter so that its airflow arrow points in the same direction as the old one (typically towards the furnace or air handler, or into the main HVAC unit). Gently slide the new filter into its designated slot until it is fully seated. Finally, close any access doors or covers that were opened to reach the filter housing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a-uH19eqd8g 7 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11001-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SGYrVgFSzV4/hqdefault.jpg Replace Old Filter with New One — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the furnace is accessible, slide out the old, dirty furnace filter from its designated slot. After removing the old filter, take the new, labeled filter and carefully slide it into the same slot. It is crucial to ensure that the 'Air Flow' arrows, which are printed on the cardboard frame of the filter, are pointing in the correct direction. These arrows should always point toward the furnace's blower and away from the cold air return, ensuring proper air filtration. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SGYrVgFSzV4 14 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11001-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1MPJu-fFKAc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Air Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the access door is removed, carefully slide the old, dirty air filter out of its slot. Note the direction of the airflow arrow on the old filter before removal, as the new filter must be installed in the same orientation. Dispose of the old filter responsibly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1MPJu-fFKAc 12 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11002-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6jV6zSP75tA/hqdefault.jpg Clean Around Filter and Vents — Furnace Filter Replacement After inserting the new filter, take the opportunity to clean any excess dirt and grime accumulated in the area around the filter inside the furnace, using a vacuum cleaner. It's also a good practice to clean the floor vents throughout your house to remove any dust and debris, improving overall air quality and furnace efficiency. Once all cleaning is complete, close the access panel and turn the furnace back on at the thermostat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6jV6zSP75tA 18 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11002-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gvE2vQF0KvQ/hqdefault.jpg Clean Inside Filter Chamber — Furnace Filter Replacement Using a dry, soft cloth, wipe down the inside surfaces of the filter chamber. This helps remove any lingering dust or particles that may have settled within the unit's interior, ensuring a cleaner environment for the filters. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gvE2vQF0KvQ 5 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11002-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ekzTJThiAOk/hqdefault.jpg Install the New Filter and Close Compartment — Furnace Filter Replacement Carefully slide the new filter into the compartment, making sure the 'AIRFLOW' arrow is pointing correctly towards the furnace. The filter should slide in smoothly and fit snugly. Once the filter is fully inserted and seated, reinstall the filter compartment cover. Secure the cover by re-engaging its tab or tightening the containment screw, ensuring it is properly closed to prevent air leakage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ekzTJThiAOk 8 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11003-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bAj77lQSM7Q/hqdefault.jpg Insert New Furnace Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement The new Filtrete filter is carefully inserted into the filter slot of the furnace. The critical point is to ensure the air flow direction arrow on the filter's frame points towards the furnace/air handler, indicating the path air takes when drawn into the system. The video shows the person checking the arrow before pushing the filter fully into place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bAj77lQSM7Q 9 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11003-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TVt00HJrZQU/hqdefault.jpg Install New Furnace Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement With the old filter removed, take your new furnace filter. It is crucial to observe the airflow graphic, typically an arrow, printed on the side of the filter. This arrow indicates the direction in which air should flow through the filter. Always ensure this arrow points towards the furnace or air handler, meaning it should point in the direction of the air moving *into* the heating/cooling unit. Carefully slide the new filter into the designated slot until it is fully seated. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TVt00HJrZQU 5 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11003-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YaGJiF_t1Fs/hqdefault.jpg Install the New Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement When installing the new filter, it is crucial to pay close attention to the 'airflow' arrow printed on its frame. The host demonstrates that for his furnace, the air comes in from the bottom and goes up into the furnace. Therefore, the airflow arrow on the new filter must point upwards, towards the furnace assembly. He then slides the new filter into the slot and closes the latch, securing it in place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YaGJiF_t1Fs 21 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11004-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mGM5GGMSr2U/hqdefault.jpg Close Vent Cover — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the new air filter is properly seated in the vent housing and correctly oriented, close the HVAC return air vent cover. Ensure that all latches or clips are securely fastened to hold the cover firmly in place. This prevents the cover from accidentally falling and ensures that all return air passes through the newly installed filter for optimal filtration. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mGM5GGMSr2U 3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11004-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dhIKgoyTb30/hqdefault.jpg Close and Secure Compartment — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the new filter is properly seated inside the compartment, reattach the metal access cover. Ensure it's aligned correctly. Then, flip the two plastic latches/clips back into their original, locked position to secure the cover firmly. This completes the air filter replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dhIKgoyTb30 5 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11004-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/soIj__onLLc/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Filter and Secure Grille — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the filter is clean, carefully slide it back into its original position within the return air grille. Ensure it is seated correctly and securely. Then, close the grille door firmly, ensuring it latches properly. With the filter reinstalled and the grille closed, your HVAC system is ready for operation with improved air quality and efficiency. If you require further assistance or suspect your appliance needs service, contact a professional. https://www.youtube.com/embed/soIj__onLLc 20 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11005-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJz6P8uAIEc/hqdefault.jpg Close Furnace and Restore Power — Furnace Filter Replacement After the new filter is securely in place, retrieve the furnace door. Align the door with the bottom of the furnace and the corresponding screw holes. Insert the screws and tighten them, either by hand or with a flathead screwdriver, until the door is firmly secure. Once the door is properly reattached and sealed, return to the power switch (on the furnace, wall, or fuse panel) and flip it back up to the 'on' position to restore power to your furnace. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJz6P8uAIEc 25 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11005-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sOcfx5o9-B4/hqdefault.jpg Restore HVAC Power — Furnace Filter Replacement With the new air filter securely in place, turn the power back on to your HVAC unit. If you used the furnace's dedicated switch, simply flip it back to the 'On' position. If you turned off the power at the circuit breaker, flip the corresponding breaker back to 'On'. Your HVAC system should now be ready to operate with its new, clean filter. You can leave spare filters conveniently stored near the furnace so they are always accessible for future replacements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sOcfx5o9-B4 17 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11005-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/oXCT5F3ub7c/hqdefault.jpg Restore Furnace Power — Furnace Filter Replacement Once the new filter is securely in place and any covers or strips are re-attached (if applicable), return to the furnace power switch and flip it back to the 'on' position. Your furnace is now ready to operate with a fresh, clean filter, ensuring better indoor air quality and efficient performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/oXCT5F3ub7c 12 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11006-1 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WJz6P8uAIEc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement With the bottom door removed, you will have a clear view inside the furnace. The old air filter is usually located on the side of the compartment. Grasp the exposed edge of the filter and firmly pull it straight out of its slot. Once removed, discard the old, dirty filter in the garbage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WJz6P8uAIEc 14 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11006-2 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B32w6dg-v6Y/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement Once you have your new filters, return to your furnace. The actual replacement process is straightforward. Simply pull the old, dirty filter out from its slot in the furnace system. The old filter will likely be covered in dust and debris, which indicates it was effectively doing its job. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B32w6dg-v6Y 13 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/11006-3 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IKySBZ9esWQ/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Filter — Furnace Filter Replacement With the filter housing open, carefully slide the old HVAC filter out of its slot. Depending on how much dust and debris it has accumulated, you may want to immediately place it into a trash bag to prevent airborne particles from spreading throughout the room or falling back into the ductwork. Remove the filter slowly and smoothly to avoid dislodging any captured dirt. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IKySBZ9esWQ 14 2026-10-07T14:17:12.052Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10995-1 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Stair Tread Measurement Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10995-2 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Stair Tread Measurement To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10995-3 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10994-1 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10994-2 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10994-3 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10996-1 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Stair Tread Measurement Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10996-2 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10996-3 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10997-1 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Measurement Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10997-2 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Stair Tread Measurement Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10997-3 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Stair Tread Measurement Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-10-18T09:33:45.746Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10992-1 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — Measure Staircase for Treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10992-2 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Measure Staircase for Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10992-3 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nCu4uIwBOOE/hqdefault.jpg Measure the Stairs — Measure Staircase for Treads To ensure the carpet runner is long and wide enough, accurate measurements are essential. First, select one stair tread (the horizontal top surface of a step) and measure its depth. Next, measure the height of the riser (the vertical part of the step). Multiply the height by the number of risers and the depth by the number of treads on your staircase. Add these two sums together, then add an additional 6 to 8 inches to account for waste. This total will be the required length of the runner. If using more than one runner, add an additional 12 inches to the total length to account for seams where the two carpet pieces will join. If your staircase includes a landing and you plan to install the runner there, ensure you include the landing area in your measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nCu4uIwBOOE 47 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10993-1 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Measure Staircase for Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10993-2 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — Measure Staircase for Treads Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10993-3 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/81IEkg7WWGQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Treads — Measure Staircase for Treads Begin by accurately measuring the width and depth of each existing stair tread. For precision, especially if not using riser covers, use a tape measure and a pencil to mark the required dimensions on the new vinyl stair treads. A stair tread template tool, which helps measure both the width and angle of both sides of the tread simultaneously, is highly recommended for efficiency and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/81IEkg7WWGQ 24 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10991-1 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — Measure Staircase for Treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10991-2 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — Measure Staircase for Treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10991-3 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Measure Staircase for Treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10990-1 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QaMuXCbXfks/hqdefault.jpg Determine Staircase Dimensions — Measure Staircase for Treads Before cutting, ensure the stair location has a flat, solid landing base. Accurate measurements are crucial for planning and material costs. When constructing in the framing stage, remember to factor in the thickness of the finished flooring (e.g., hardwood, tile) to prevent the bottom step from being too tall and non-code compliant. First, measure the total vertical rise from the top floor to the bottom floor. For this example, the rise is 85 inches. Next, estimate the number of steps by dividing the total rise by an estimated riser height (typically between 7 and 7 3/4 inches maximum, per code). Round up any uneven result to the nearest whole number to get the total number of steps. In this example, 85 inches divided by 7 3/4 inches (estimated) equals 10.96, which rounds up to 11 steps. Then, calculate the exact riser height by dividing the total rise (85 inches) by the total number of steps (11), resulting in an exact riser height of 7 3/4 inches. Finally, determine the total horizontal run of the staircase by multiplying the number of steps by the required tread depth (at least 10 inches deep, per code). For 11 steps, this yields a total run of 110 inches. The total length of the stringer board needed can then be estimated by multiplying the number of steps by 14 inches (a general rule of thumb), which comes out to 154 inches for 11 steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QaMuXCbXfks 123 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10990-2 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/JVcVfU7Zwb4/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Calculate Stair Dimensions — Measure Staircase for Treads First, measure the total height of the area where the stairs will be installed. Using this total height, and considering local building codes for rise and run, calculate the exact number of steps (treads) you will need. Simultaneously, determine the required width for each tread and the consistent rise (height) for each step to ensure a comfortable and safe ascent/descent. This pre-calculation is vital for accurate stringer layout and material estimation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JVcVfU7Zwb4 10 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10990-3 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FMLIFJgz3CE/hqdefault.jpg Measure Total Rise — Measure Staircase for Treads The first step is to accurately measure the total vertical distance that the stairs will cover. Use a tape measure to measure from the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor, depending on the final flooring material) on the lower level to the top surface of the subfloor (or finished floor) on the upper level. This measurement is crucial for calculating the rise and run of each step. In this video, the measurement is 109 inches. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FMLIFJgz3CE 14 2026-09-17T18:53:29.209Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10984-1 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/k9vmqg95MUg/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Grout Lines — Grout Cleaning Begin by preparing a cleaning solution. The video suggests using a high-concentration dish soap, approximately 30ml (about 1 fluid ounce) or more mixed with 1 liter (about 33.8 fluid ounces) of water. Alternatively, bleach can be used for more stubborn stains. Using a Scotch-Brite scrubbing sponge or similar scrubbing tool, thoroughly clean all grout areas on both the shower walls and the floor where water can reach. Focus on removing any dirt, mold, or mildew that has accumulated in the grout. https://www.youtube.com/embed/k9vmqg95MUg 20 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10984-2 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8FWBj5xZBtI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Cleaning Solution — Grout Cleaning Fill two buckets with warm water. Add a generous amount of dish soap into one of the buckets, ensuring enough soap to create bubbles when mixed. Use the mop to thoroughly mix the dish soap into the warm water until a soapy solution is formed. The dish soap acts as the main cleaning agent. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8FWBj5xZBtI 21 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10984-3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eUhk7Ho6KMo/hqdefault.jpg Deep Clean the Grout — Grout Cleaning Perform a deep cleaning of the grout lines. This involves getting down on the floor and scrubbing the grout directly. Use a bowl of hot or very warm water mixed with a suitable detergent. Apply the solution to the grout lines and scrub with a scrubbing pad, an old toothbrush, or a specialized scrub brush. Allow the solution to sit for a few minutes to break down grime, then wipe it away with a clean cloth. For high-traffic or heavily soiled areas, you may need to repeat this scrubbing and wiping process multiple times. After the grout lines are visibly clean, mop the entire floor to remove any residual cleaning solution and dirt. The homeowner used various common household cleaners including Dawn dish soap, OxyClean, Borax, Barkeeper's Friend, Pine-Glo (a Pine-Sol alternative), and even Lysol toilet bowl cleaner for very stubborn areas in the entryway. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eUhk7Ho6KMo 143 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10985-1 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eUhk7Ho6KMo/hqdefault.jpg Deep Clean the Grout — Grout Cleaning Perform a deep cleaning of the grout lines. This involves getting down on the floor and scrubbing the grout directly. Use a bowl of hot or very warm water mixed with a suitable detergent. Apply the solution to the grout lines and scrub with a scrubbing pad, an old toothbrush, or a specialized scrub brush. Allow the solution to sit for a few minutes to break down grime, then wipe it away with a clean cloth. For high-traffic or heavily soiled areas, you may need to repeat this scrubbing and wiping process multiple times. After the grout lines are visibly clean, mop the entire floor to remove any residual cleaning solution and dirt. The homeowner used various common household cleaners including Dawn dish soap, OxyClean, Borax, Barkeeper's Friend, Pine-Glo (a Pine-Sol alternative), and even Lysol toilet bowl cleaner for very stubborn areas in the entryway. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eUhk7Ho6KMo 143 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10985-2 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ULt0qdhtoXU/hqdefault.jpg Apply Grout Cleaner — Grout Cleaning Apply the grout cleaner directly into the grout lines on the tile floor. Allow the cleaner to penetrate the grout. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ULt0qdhtoXU 3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10985-3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YiLw30HOfTY/hqdefault.jpg Scrub Grout Lines — Grout Cleaning Following the initial scrub of the tile surface, the presenter focuses on the grout lines. He uses a small brush to thoroughly scrub the dark, dirty grout. He reiterates that because the grout was properly sealed, the dirt has not penetrated but is merely sitting on the surface, making it easy to agitate and lift with the cleaner and brush. The scrubbing action helps to dislodge the trapped dirt from the grout crevices. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YiLw30HOfTY 20 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10986-1 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YiLw30HOfTY/hqdefault.jpg Scrub Grout Lines — Grout Cleaning Following the initial scrub of the tile surface, the presenter focuses on the grout lines. He uses a small brush to thoroughly scrub the dark, dirty grout. He reiterates that because the grout was properly sealed, the dirt has not penetrated but is merely sitting on the surface, making it easy to agitate and lift with the cleaner and brush. The scrubbing action helps to dislodge the trapped dirt from the grout crevices. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YiLw30HOfTY 20 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10986-2 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/B9N1UIw-tN8/hqdefault.jpg Apply Grout Cleaner and Scrub — Grout Cleaning Spray a suitable cleaner directly onto the dirty grout line. Immediately after application, use a scrubbing brush with stiff bristles to vigorously scrub the cleaner into the grout. This action helps to agitate and break down the accumulated dirt and grime within the porous grout material. https://www.youtube.com/embed/B9N1UIw-tN8 4 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10986-3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lLcXqjFaLfc/hqdefault.jpg Deep Clean Grout Lines with Brush — Grout Cleaning Apply a pH-neutral stone and grout cleaner, which appears as a white foam in the video, directly to the dirty grout lines. Allow the cleaner to dwell for a few minutes as per product instructions to loosen contaminants. Using a small, stiff-bristled grout brush, meticulously scrub all grout lines on both the walls and floor. The scrubbing action helps to agitate the cleaning solution and lift deep-seated dirt, mold, and soap scum from the porous grout. Ensure thorough coverage and scrubbing for effective cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lLcXqjFaLfc 48 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10987-1 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BuaP0v1l888/hqdefault.jpg Perform Initial Clean-up — Grout Cleaning Prepare two buckets of water: one for initial rinsing and one with clean water. Begin the initial cleaning of the tiled surface using a well-wrung-out sponge. Wipe the tiles gently, focusing on removing the bulk of the grout film from the surface without pushing too hard into the newly applied grout lines. Rinse the sponge frequently in the initial bucket of water, wringing it out thoroughly each time. The goal at this stage is to remove the majority of the surface grout and residue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BuaP0v1l888 17 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10987-2 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cT1Ap9ZPKRU/hqdefault.jpg Mop Up Dirty Solution — Grout Cleaning Once a section of tile has been thoroughly scrubbed, use a string mop and a bucket filled with clean water to mop up the dirty cleaning solution. It is essential to frequently rinse the mop in the bucket and change the water as it becomes dirty. This prevents reapplying grime to the cleaned areas and ensures a sparkling finish. This mopping action is shown in sequence after scrubbing each section. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cT1Ap9ZPKRU 90 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10987-3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U754kIgjhus/hqdefault.jpg Rinse the tub and tiles — Grout Cleaning After scrubbing, rinse the entire tub and tile area thoroughly with warm water. You can use a bucket to pour water over the surfaces or run the shower for a short period. This step removes any remaining cleaning solution and loosened grime. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U754kIgjhus 12 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10988-1 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fVticOkPGL0/hqdefault.jpg Wipe Clean and Dry — Grout Cleaning After scrubbing, wipe down the cleaned surfaces with a clean cloth to remove any remaining mold debris and excess solution. The video also shows wiping down areas like washing machine seals, which are prone to mold growth, to ensure all affected spots are addressed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fVticOkPGL0 7 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10988-2 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-btf2dUqXg0/hqdefault.jpg Rinse and Dry — Grout Cleaning After scrubbing, pick up any residue from the floor. This can be done with a damp mop or a damp cloth. Ensure the floor is thoroughly clean before allowing the surface to dry completely. Drying typically takes 2 to 4 hours, but floor fans can be used to speed up the process. Make sure seams are dry. Once dry, perform a final wipe-down with a dust mop or a Swiffer mop to pick up any remaining dust, footprints, or pet hair, as you do not want to seal these into the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-btf2dUqXg0 38 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10988-3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AowpxrGY9TQ/hqdefault.jpg Thorough Drying and Final Inspection — Grout Cleaning After extraction, thoroughly dry the cleaned fabric surfaces to prevent the growth of mold or mildew and to avoid unpleasant odors. Use clean, dry microfiber towels to blot and absorb as much residual moisture as possible. For faster drying, use a shop vacuum to further pull moisture from the fabric, or use a fan or air mover. Once dry, perform a final visual inspection of all cleaned areas to ensure no stains or dirt were missed. The goal is a clean, dry, and fresh-smelling interior. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AowpxrGY9TQ 13 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10989-1 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xKzkVKaYq8I/hqdefault.jpg Apply Grout Sealer for Protection — Grout Cleaning After the newly applied grout has completely dried and cured, which typically takes 24 to 48 hours according to product instructions, it's time to apply a grout sealer. The presenter recommends 511 Impregnator Sealer by Miracle Sealants. This specific sealer is a penetrative type, meaning it soaks into the grout rather than forming a layer on top, thus preserving the grout's original look without adding a glossy finish. To apply, use a clean rag or cloth to spread the sealer over the grout lines. Allow it to penetrate for 3 to 5 minutes, then wipe off any excess with a separate clean rag. For enhanced and longer-lasting protection, apply a second coat, ensuring the first coat is fully dry (approximately 2 hours) before applying the next. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xKzkVKaYq8I 119 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10989-2 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9phEzzMX_-w/hqdefault.jpg Apply Grout Sealer — Grout Cleaning After the grout is completely dry (this can take 24-72 hours depending on the product and humidity), it is highly recommended to apply a sealer. The video specifically suggests STONETECH BulletProof Sealer. Apply the sealer using a roller or a paintbrush. Ensure an even coat, then immediately wipe off any excess product with a clean cloth. This step provides maximum stain protection and inhibits the growth of bacteria, mold, and mildew, keeping your grout looking pristine. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9phEzzMX_-w 13 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10989-3 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6Izxx9t1yhA/hqdefault.jpg Apply Sealer — Grout Cleaning Once the grout has fully cured (typically 24-72 hours, consult product instructions), apply a penetrating sealer to protect both the grout and tiles from moisture and stains. The video uses FILA MP90 ECO PLUS High Performance Penetrating Sealer. Pour the sealer into a small container and use a paintbrush to apply it evenly over all grout lines and tile surfaces. Ensure full coverage, but avoid excessive pooling. Always refer to the specific sealer's instructions for application technique and recommended drying times, as these can vary significantly between products. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6Izxx9t1yhA 27 2026-09-17T14:24:05.322Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10977-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Place Test Vials and Remove Caps — Radon Testing On your chosen surface, place both radon gas detector test vials about 6 inches apart. Carefully remove the caps from each of the test vials. This exposes the charcoal inside, allowing it to begin absorbing radon gas from the air. Ensure the vials remain upright and stable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 8 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10977-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Mfa0kF3d7SQ/hqdefault.jpg Place the Radon Sampler — Radon Testing Locate the lowest living area of your home, typically the basement or the first floor if there's no basement. Open the sealed plastic bag that contains the 'Radon Sampler.' Carefully remove the paper pouch from the bag. Place the radon sampler on a flat surface in the chosen test area, ensuring that the side labeled 'THIS SIDE MUST FACE UPWARD DURING TESTING' is facing up. Leave the sampler undisturbed for 2 to 4 days, as directed by the kit's instructions. The presenter suggests leaving it for 4 days to maximize sample collection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Mfa0kF3d7SQ 74 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10977-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vEAVLbd_v-M/hqdefault.jpg Place the Radon Sampler According to Guidelines — Radon Testing Carefully read the placement guidelines for the radon sampler. Place the sampler on the lowest level of your home that is suitable for occupancy (e.g., a finished or unfinished basement). It should rest on a flat surface with the paper side facing up. The sampler needs to be positioned 2 to 7 feet above the floor, at least 3 feet away from any exterior doors or windows, and at least 6 inches from any wall or large object taller than 6 inches. Do not puncture, rip, tear, peel, or remove the paper side of the sampler. Avoid placing it near heating or air conditioning vents, in areas of constantly moving air, or in high-humidity areas like bathrooms, crawlspaces, or sumps, as these conditions can alter the test results. In humid areas, only test for 48 hours. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vEAVLbd_v-M 56 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10978-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jObxT3We5jg/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Deploy the Test Kit — Radon Testing Carefully open the plastic seal of the test kit. Fill out all the required information on the back of the test envelope or card, including the start date, time, and the specific location within your home where the test is being conducted. Insert the provided cardboard opener into the envelope (if your kit design requires it) to ensure proper airflow for radon sampling. Hang the test kit in the lowest lived-in level of your home, away from drafts, direct sunlight, and high heat sources. The kit should be exposed to the air for a minimum of 3 days but no more than 7 days, as explicitly shown in the video's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jObxT3We5jg 5 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10978-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vEAVLbd_v-M/hqdefault.jpg Start the Test and Record Information — Radon Testing Once the radon sampler is properly positioned, carefully remove it from its plastic bag. This action officially starts the radon test. Immediately record the exact start time (hour, minute, AM/PM) and date (month, day, year) on the 'Short Term Radon Test Information Form'. Locate the test kit serial number (in this case, starting with 'F') which is typically found on the back of the sampler. Fill in the serial number on the form. It's recommended to take a photograph of the completed form for your personal records, as the serial number is required if you need to contact the lab for any reason. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vEAVLbd_v-M 109 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10978-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/l63zv5aOdNE/hqdefault.jpg Perform and Submit the Test — Radon Testing To perform the test, expose the kit for a duration between 48 and 96 hours. Exposure times less than 2 days or more than 7 days will render the test invalid. Accurately register the start date and time, as well as the stop date and time, on the information form provided with the test kit. After completing the exposure, seal the sample in its designated mailer and send it to the lab as soon as possible. The lab typically needs to receive the sample within 10 days of the stop time to process it as valid. If postal services are slow, consider using an expedited shipping method like FedEx or overnight delivery to meet this deadline. Ensure each test kit is returned in its own individual mailer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/l63zv5aOdNE 92 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10979-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vEAVLbd_v-M/hqdefault.jpg Observe Closed House Conditions — Radon Testing Before starting the test, ensure your home adheres to 'Closed House Conditions' for at least 12 hours. This means all exterior doors and windows must be closed for this period and remain closed throughout the test. Normal entry and exit from the home are permitted, but avoid leaving doors or windows wide open. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying systems should be run normally. However, avoid using vent or exhaust fans, as these can interfere with air circulation and radon levels, leading to an invalid test. This preparatory step is crucial for accurate results. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vEAVLbd_v-M 75 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10979-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Lock Down Your Home — Radon Testing Before starting the test, ensure that all exterior doors and windows of your home are closed. This 'lockdown' period should last for at least 12 hours prior to initiating the radon test. Maintaining a closed environment helps to obtain an accurate sample of the air in your home. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 15 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10979-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZJ5VBc0xNcw/hqdefault.jpg Maintaining Home Environment During Test — Radon Testing During the radon testing period, it is permissible to maintain normal entry and exit routines from your home. However, it is crucial that all windows remain closed. Opening windows can introduce ventilation into the home, which will cause the radon level displayed on the detector to be artificially lower than the actual concentration, resulting in an inaccurate reading. Keeping windows closed ensures the test environment is stable and representative of typical indoor conditions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZJ5VBc0xNcw 29 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10980-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Monitor the Test — Radon Testing Leave the activated radon test vials undisturbed for a period of 2 to 4 days. The ideal exposure time is typically between 48 and 96 hours. During this period, it is crucial not to move the vials, open any windows or doors (except for normal entry/exit), or operate any fans or fireplaces. Frequent opening of doors should also be avoided as much as possible to maintain a stable indoor air environment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 21 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10980-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vEAVLbd_v-M/hqdefault.jpg Stop the Test and Complete the Information Form — Radon Testing Allow the radon test to run for the recommended period, typically between 48 and 96 hours. Once the testing period is complete (in this case, 48 hours later), record the exact stop time (hour, minute, AM/PM) and date (month, day, year) on the 'Short Term Radon Test Information Form'. Also, indicate the 'Test Floor' (Basement in this instance), confirm 'Closed House Conditions' were met, and select the 'Testing Reason' (Personal Knowledge). If the test address differs from your shipping address, complete the relevant section. Note that additional fees apply for testing in New Jersey or for purchasing a 'Lab Rush Service'. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vEAVLbd_v-M 44 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10980-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-_iEEUC9Apg/hqdefault.jpg Conduct the Test Period — Radon Testing Allow all the radon monitors and test kits to operate for the recommended duration. For short-term test kits like Air Chek, this is typically 3 to 7 days. Continuous digital monitors will record data throughout this period. Maintain a 'closed-house' condition as much as possible during the test, meaning windows and doors should remain closed except for normal entry and exit, and household fans that draw air out of the house (like bathroom or kitchen exhaust fans) should be used sparingly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-_iEEUC9Apg 1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10974-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Open the Test Kit — Radon Testing Carefully open the packaging of your EPA-approved, short-term, charcoal radon kit. You may need a pair of scissors to cut through the plastic or sealed edges. Inside the kit, you should find two radon gas detector test vials, an information card for data recording, a pre-addressed envelope for mailing the samples to the lab, and a payment form/information for the laboratory analysis. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 23 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10974-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RKIYR1sFfUQ/hqdefault.jpg Obtain a Radon Test Kit — Radon Testing To address potential radon exposure, the project requires acquiring a radon test kit. The video displays an "RAdata Radon Test Kit" as an accessible option. These kits are generally affordable and can be obtained from state health departments, local hardware stores, or online vendors. It's crucial to select a kit that is certified by recognized organizations, such as the National Radon Proficiency Program (NRPP) or the National Radon Safety Board (NRSB), to ensure the reliability and accuracy of your test results. The video mentions that testing is "very easy to test" and "inexpensive." https://www.youtube.com/embed/RKIYR1sFfUQ 5 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10974-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jObxT3We5jg/hqdefault.jpg Obtain a Short-Term Radon Test Kit — Radon Testing Acquire a short-term radon test kit. The video specifically showcases an "AprilAire Short-Term Radon Test" kit, which can be purchased from AprilAire.com for approximately $25. It is crucial to ensure the kit's plastic seal remains unbroken until you are ready to initiate the test to maintain its integrity and accuracy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jObxT3We5jg 2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10975-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Select Test Zone and Surface Height — Radon Testing Select an appropriate location for your radon test. This 'test zone' should be an area where you and your family spend a significant amount of time, such as a living room, family room, or bedroom. Avoid testing in kitchens or bathrooms due to potential air disturbances and humidity. If your home has a basement, it is often recommended as a prime test location. Once you've identified a spot, find a surface that is approximately 20 inches off the floor. Use your measuring tape to confirm the height from the floor to ensure proper placement of the test vials. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 17 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10975-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZJ5VBc0xNcw/hqdefault.jpg Proper Device Placement — Radon Testing To ensure accurate radon readings, the device's placement is critical. It should be positioned in the lowest habitable area of the home, which is most often the basement. Furthermore, the detector needs to be placed at least 20 inches (approximately 50 cm) off the ground and a minimum of five feet (approximately 1.5 meters) away from any doors, windows, or air vents. Good placement examples include a chair in the middle of a room, a workbench, or a sturdy shelf. It is essential to ensure there are no obstructions, such as boxes, around the sides of the detector that could impede proper airflow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZJ5VBc0xNcw 42 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10975-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SGaoUKLpWu4/hqdefault.jpg Basement Scenarios and Professional Placement — Radon Testing The speaker analyzes scenarios in unfinished and finished basements. An unfinished basement with a washer/dryer, lacking other 'livable' features, might necessitate placing the test in a more habitable area upstairs. Conversely, a finished basement with a bed and entertainment setup is clearly a 'livable' space, making it suitable for testing. The key is to assess if the area is regularly occupied or could be occupied, even if it's currently used for storage. The speaker emphasizes that professional radon monitors should be positioned at least 20 inches off the floor and away from sumps or other potential interference, avoiding unprofessional setups like placing a monitor on a 5-gallon bucket. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SGaoUKLpWu4 177 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10976-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jObxT3We5jg/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Deploy the Test Kit — Radon Testing Carefully open the plastic seal of the test kit. Fill out all the required information on the back of the test envelope or card, including the start date, time, and the specific location within your home where the test is being conducted. Insert the provided cardboard opener into the envelope (if your kit design requires it) to ensure proper airflow for radon sampling. Hang the test kit in the lowest lived-in level of your home, away from drafts, direct sunlight, and high heat sources. The kit should be exposed to the air for a minimum of 3 days but no more than 7 days, as explicitly shown in the video's instructions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jObxT3We5jg 5 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10976-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Place Test Vials and Remove Caps — Radon Testing On your chosen surface, place both radon gas detector test vials about 6 inches apart. Carefully remove the caps from each of the test vials. This exposes the charcoal inside, allowing it to begin absorbing radon gas from the air. Ensure the vials remain upright and stable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 8 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10976-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Mfa0kF3d7SQ/hqdefault.jpg Place the Radon Sampler — Radon Testing Locate the lowest living area of your home, typically the basement or the first floor if there's no basement. Open the sealed plastic bag that contains the 'Radon Sampler.' Carefully remove the paper pouch from the bag. Place the radon sampler on a flat surface in the chosen test area, ensuring that the side labeled 'THIS SIDE MUST FACE UPWARD DURING TESTING' is facing up. Leave the sampler undisturbed for 2 to 4 days, as directed by the kit's instructions. The presenter suggests leaving it for 4 days to maximize sample collection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Mfa0kF3d7SQ 74 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10981-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Mfa0kF3d7SQ/hqdefault.jpg Complete Paperwork & Mail for Lab Analysis — Radon Testing After the 2-4 day testing period, retrieve the radon sampler. Immediately fill out the 'Radon Test Information Sheet,' ensuring all personal details, the exact test start and stop times, and the kit serial number are accurately recorded. Place the exposed radon sampler and the completed information sheet into the provided 'Alpha Energy Laboratories Return Mailer' envelope. Tightly seal the envelope, using tape if necessary, and attach the appropriate postage. Mail the kit to Alpha Energy Laboratories for analysis. Results are typically processed and sent back within 5-7 business days. The video advises against using First Class Mail due to potential delays and recommends faster shipping options like FedEx, UPS, or USPS Express/Priority with tracking, especially since delayed return can invalidate results. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Mfa0kF3d7SQ 7 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10981-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qYg55xdnhwo/hqdefault.jpg Package and Mail Sampler — Radon Testing Once the designated testing period (between 48 and 96 hours) has elapsed, retrieve the radon sampler. Place the exposed sampler into the pre-addressed return mailer that came with the kit. Ensure the Test Kit Serial ID is clearly written on the mailer. According to the instructions, the laboratory (Alpha Energy Labs) must receive the sampler within 10 days of the test's completion to ensure accurate analysis. If you used the online registration method, remember not to include the paper information form inside the mailer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qYg55xdnhwo 18 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10982-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lJWGrCSOlLA/hqdefault.jpg Ship Test Kits via Different Carriers — Radon Testing Proceed to ship the prepared test kits. Drop the two kits packaged for standard mail into a USPS mailbox. Take the two kits designated for expedited shipping to a UPS service center or drop-off point and send them using a 2-day shipping option. Note the date and time of shipping for both methods. This step initiates the transit period, which will later be correlated with the accuracy of the lab results. The goal is to observe how different transit durations affect the final radon readings. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lJWGrCSOlLA 37 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10982-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jObxT3We5jg/hqdefault.jpg Seal and Mail the Test Kit — Radon Testing Once the designated testing period (ranging from 3 to 7 days) has concluded, retrieve the test kit from its placement. Follow the instructions provided with your specific kit to properly seal it. This usually involves peeling off an adhesive backing strip and firmly pressing the envelope or card together to form an air-tight seal, as demonstrated in the video. It is essential to mail the sealed test kit to the designated laboratory address promptly for analysis to ensure the most accurate results. The video shows the test being placed into a mailbox for shipment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jObxT3We5jg 3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10982-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Cap Vials and Prepare for Mailing — Radon Testing Once the designated testing period has elapsed (between 48 and 96 hours), retrieve the test vials. Immediately put the caps back onto both test vials securely. Then, meticulously fill out the provided data card with all necessary information, including your contact details, test location, and the start/end times of the test. Complete any payment forms or enclose payment if required by the lab. Finally, place both capped test vials, the filled-out data card, and any payment information into the pre-addressed envelope. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 13 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10983-1 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2E30MpLogjg/hqdefault.jpg Read Your Results — Radon Testing After a few weeks, your test results will typically be mailed to you, or in some cases, you can access them online through the testing company's website. Understand that radon levels are measured in picoCuries per liter (pCi/L). The average indoor radon level is about 1.3 pCi/L, and some experts consider 0.4 pCi/L to be ideal. If your test results indicate a level of 4 pCi/L or higher, it is recommended to get another test kit and redo the test to confirm the elevated levels. This second test will help ensure the accuracy of your initial findings. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2E30MpLogjg 39 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10983-2 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jObxT3We5jg/hqdefault.jpg Receive and Interpret Results — Radon Testing Within a few days of the laboratory receiving your test kit, you will typically be notified of your results via email. The results report, such as the one from AprilAire shown in the video, will state your home's radon level, usually measured in picocuries per liter (pCi/L). According to the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), any radon level under 4.0 pCi/L is considered safe. If your test results indicate a radon level of 4.0 pCi/L or higher, it is recommended to take further action, such as contacting a qualified radon mitigation professional to discuss reduction strategies for your home. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jObxT3We5jg 3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10983-3 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qYg55xdnhwo/hqdefault.jpg Review and Interpret Radon Report — Radon Testing After submitting the sampler and updated information, you will typically receive your radon test results via email within about a week. The results will often come as a PDF attachment. Open the 'Radon Test Report' to view your home's radon level. The video shows a result of 2.1 pCi/L. Based on EPA guidelines, if radon levels are 4 picoCuries per liter (pCi/L) or above, fixing your home is recommended. If levels are between 2 and 4 pCi/L, considering mitigation or retesting is advisable. In the video's example of 2.1 pCi/L, the presenter decides to retest at a different location in his basement, as per the suggested action for levels between 2 and 4 pCi/L. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qYg55xdnhwo 40 2026-10-07T14:17:13.361Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10964-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7SxDTxFLdFE/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Window Trim (Brick Mold) — Window Replacement After cutting the caulk, use a pry bar to carefully remove the exterior brick mold or trim around the window frame. Insert the pry bar between the trim and the brick/siding and gently leverage it away. Work slowly to avoid damaging the exterior finish. Once the trim is loose, pull it away completely. Repeat this process around the entire perimeter of the window. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7SxDTxFLdFE 36 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10964-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1qAdrxsL0k8/hqdefault.jpg Remove the old window — Window Replacement Before installing a new window, you must first remove the old one. Start by carefully scoring around the old window casing and any interior wall trim with a utility knife to prevent damage to the surrounding finishes. Use an oscillating saw to separate the casing and reveal the board inside. Remove any existing molding and siding around the window using a pry bar. Unscrew any screws holding the old window frame in place with a drill and appropriate drill bits. Carefully remove the old window from the opening. If the old window glass is broken or jagged, exercise extreme caution to avoid injury. After removal, thoroughly clean the window opening of any debris, old caulk, or insulation to prepare for the new installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1qAdrxsL0k8 35 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10964-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8AVLgBRcQDI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Window and Trim — Window Replacement Begin by removing the existing exterior window trim. Use a pry bar to carefully loosen and remove the old trim pieces. Next, use a drill to remove any screws securing the old window frame. Utilize a reciprocating saw to cut through any remaining nails or fasteners that hold the old window in place. Once all fasteners are loose, carefully remove the old window frame from the opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8AVLgBRcQDI 14 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10965-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8vpLg_NKY0U/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Window Sashes and Tracks — Window Replacement Once the sash stops and parting strips are removed, you can lift out the old window sashes. Start by tilting and removing the upper sash, then the lower sash. After the sashes are out, remove the remaining window track components, including any old weights or spring balances. The goal is to clear the entire window opening down to the rough framing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8vpLg_NKY0U 16 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10965-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/d7G749dDBeE/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Bottom Sash — Window Replacement With the bottom sash tilted, apply upward force to one side of the sash. This action disengages a small tab from its track, which is connected to a spring mechanism designed to help move the window up and down. Once one side is disengaged, the sash can be manipulated to completely remove it from the window frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/d7G749dDBeE 45 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10965-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BbEMx_2huWc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Window Sashes — Window Replacement To begin the removal process, take out the movable sashes from the old window. For double-hung windows, typically there are small mechanisms or clips on the sides of the sashes that allow them to tilt inwards. Tilt the sashes and then twist them slightly to release them from their hinge pins or tracks, allowing them to be lifted out of the frame. This step facilitates easier access to the remaining frame and reduces the weight of the old window. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BbEMx_2huWc 17 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10966-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BbEMx_2huWc/hqdefault.jpg Demolish the Old Window Frame — Window Replacement Use a reciprocating saw (Sawzall) to cut the old window frame. The presenter recommends cutting the frame right in half, down the middle of one of the vertical jambs. This allows the frame to be 'peeled open like an onion' for easier removal. After cutting, use an impact driver or drill to remove any remaining screws holding the frame in place. A hammer and pry bar can be used to loosen and remove any stubborn parts of the frame, including any jamb extensions. Finally, clean out any old insulation, debris, or dried expansion foam from the rough opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BbEMx_2huWc 271 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10966-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7SxDTxFLdFE/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Old Window Unit — Window Replacement With the caulk cut and the exterior trim removed, the old window frame should now be accessible. The video indicates that old windows may have interior screws or even lumber frames installed around them that are nailed into the main house framing. Use the reciprocating saw again to cut any remaining nails or screws that secure the old window frame directly to the rough opening. Once all fasteners are cut, carefully remove the entire old window unit from the opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7SxDTxFLdFE 120 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10966-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KIvSDaR9EVg/hqdefault.jpg Demolish and Remove Window Frame — Window Replacement With the sashes and visible screws removed, use a reciprocating saw to cut through the remaining window frame sections. Wear a respirator and safety glasses to protect from dust and debris. Employ a hammer and pry bar to carefully pry the frame pieces out of the rough opening. If the underlying lumber is old or damaged (e.g., 100-year-old 2x4s), completely remove it to expose the original rough opening for a clean start. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KIvSDaR9EVg 96 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10967-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYdJa8L-Vc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Rough Opening — Window Replacement Before installing the new window, confirm that the rough opening is square. Use a level to check the sill; if it's not level, insert wedges (shims) as necessary until the rough opening is perfectly level. This preparation ensures the new window will fit correctly and operate smoothly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYdJa8L-Vc 13 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10967-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z1zR_k4GGBs/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Window Opening — Window Replacement With the old sashes and frame removed, inspect the remaining window opening for any damaged or rotten wood. Replace any compromised sections to ensure a solid foundation for the new window. Fill any existing holes to create a smooth, continuous surface where the new window will be screwed into the frame. Clean the entire opening thoroughly, removing all dust, debris, and loose paint chips, possibly using a vacuum cleaner. Next, apply flashing tape to the sill. Ensure the tape fits the full length of the sill and extends up the vertical leg of the stool, working the tape into the corners for maximum protection. Use a level to check the sill for levelness and any bowing. If necessary, place sill shims to correct any bowing and ensure proper leveling. Attach these shims with flashing tape to prevent any future movement once they are level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z1zR_k4GGBs 49 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10967-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/72hzdFAuEag/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Rough Opening — Window Replacement Before installing the window, prepare the rough opening. First, ensure the bottom sill of the rough opening is level. Then, install a cedar clapboard under the future window sill, tapering it from the inside to the outside to create a slight pitch. This pitch allows any water that may get into the opening to drain outwards. Next, place small shims along the bottom of the rough opening to provide support for the window and maintain an air space between the window and the sill. This also allows for air circulation and helps with drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/72hzdFAuEag 23 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10968-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8AVLgBRcQDI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Exterior Flashing Tape — Window Replacement Apply flashing tape, specifically ZIP System Flashing Tape, to the exterior window opening. Start by applying a strip across the bottom sill, extending it beyond the frame on both sides. Next, apply vertical strips up each side of the opening, overlapping the sill tape. Finally, apply a strip across the top of the opening, overlapping the side strips. Ensure all tape is firmly pressed down to create a watertight seal, especially at the corners. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8AVLgBRcQDI 20 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10968-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/C7m5iGzLBDo/hqdefault.jpg Apply Side Flashing Tape — Window Replacement Next, apply standard flashing tape, such as 'ZIP System Flashing Tape', to the vertical side jambs of the window opening. Begin by peeling back a portion of the release liner and aligning the tape vertically along the edge of the rough opening, overlapping the previously installed sill tape. Press the tape firmly onto the sheathing and into the frame, ensuring it is smooth and wrinkle-free. Repeat this process for both vertical jambs. The tape should extend slightly beyond the top and bottom of the rough opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/C7m5iGzLBDo 15 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10968-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WN9RC7hkedo/hqdefault.jpg Apply Sill and Side Flashing Tape — Window Replacement First, cut a section of 'Moistop PF Flashing' tape to cover the bottom sill of the rough opening, extending it up the side jambs slightly. Secure it in place. Next, cut vertical strips of flashing tape for the side jambs. These strips should overlap the sill tape at the bottom and extend up past the top of the rough opening. Affix these side pieces securely. This overlapping technique directs water outwards and prevents moisture intrusion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WN9RC7hkedo 5 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10969-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8AVLgBRcQDI/hqdefault.jpg Install New Window — Window Replacement Carefully lift the new window into the prepared opening, ensuring it seats properly on the leveled shims and into the sealant. From the exterior, check the window with a level to ensure it is plumb and level in all directions. Once satisfied with its position, use a drill/driver to secure the window frame to the wall studs through the pre-drilled holes in the window's nailing fins. Drive screws at the top, bottom, and sides of the frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8AVLgBRcQDI 10 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10969-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mPviy1JUuOc/hqdefault.jpg Install New Windows — Window Replacement Carefully lift the new window unit into the prepared rough opening. Ensure the window is centered and flush with the exterior sheathing. Use shims to achieve a perfectly level and plumb installation. Secure the window to the rough opening's framing using approved mounting screws through the pre-drilled holes in the window frame or flange. Periodically check the window with a level and speed square as you secure it to ensure it remains perfectly aligned. Repeat this process for all windows being installed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mPviy1JUuOc 19 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10969-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8vpLg_NKY0U/hqdefault.jpg Install and Secure New Window Frame — Window Replacement Carefully place the new window frame into the prepared opening. Start by inserting the bottom of the frame first, resting it on the sill, then tip the frame upright and push it firmly against the exterior stops. Check the frame for squareness and ensure even gaps around all sides. Insert shims (small wooden wedges) into the gaps between the window frame and the rough opening at the top, bottom, and middle on both sides. This ensures the frame is level and plumb. Once the frame is correctly positioned and leveled, use a drill to drive screws through pre-drilled holes in the frame, through the shims, and into the window jamb. Finally, use a utility knife to score the shims and then break off any excess shim material flush with the frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8vpLg_NKY0U 79 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10970-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8AVLgBRcQDI/hqdefault.jpg Install New Window — Window Replacement Carefully lift the new window into the prepared opening, ensuring it seats properly on the leveled shims and into the sealant. From the exterior, check the window with a level to ensure it is plumb and level in all directions. Once satisfied with its position, use a drill/driver to secure the window frame to the wall studs through the pre-drilled holes in the window's nailing fins. Drive screws at the top, bottom, and sides of the frame. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8AVLgBRcQDI 10 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10970-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TB3p9jI410s/hqdefault.jpg Level, Shim, and Secure Window — Window Replacement Once the new window is in place, use plastic packers (shims) to adjust its position until it is perfectly level, plumb (vertical), and square within the rough opening. Check alignment with existing interior finishes, such as kitchen tiles, to ensure a seamless integration. Once the alignment is satisfactory, secure the window frame to the wall studs using screws. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TB3p9jI410s 79 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10970-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kuN7h6-i9hY/hqdefault.jpg Level and Secure Window — Window Replacement Carefully lift and place the prepared window into the rough opening, resting its bottom frame on the previously placed shims. Once the window is roughly in place, use a long spirit level to check that the bottom sill of the window is perfectly level. Adjust the shims as necessary to achieve a level surface. After confirming the bottom is level, use an impact driver or power drill to fasten the bottom nailing flange to the framing with screws. Next, use the spirit level to check that the vertical sides of the window frame are plumb (perfectly vertical). Make any necessary adjustments using shims or by gently shifting the window. Once the sides are plumb, secure them by fastening the side nailing flanges to the framing with screws. It is recommended to use screws for fastening the window as they provide a more precise and secure installation compared to nails, and reduce the risk of damaging the window frame with a hammer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kuN7h6-i9hY 8 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10971-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/k0prTdwArlY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Exterior Sealant — Window Replacement Using a caulk gun, apply a heavy and continuous bead of high-quality sealant around the exterior perimeter of the window opening, directly on the existing frame. This sealant creates a primary weather barrier for the new window. https://www.youtube.com/embed/k0prTdwArlY 4 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10971-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/k0prTdwArlY/hqdefault.jpg Tool Exterior Sealant — Window Replacement Once the new window is securely in place, apply a final bead of sealant along the exterior perimeter where the new window frame meets the house siding. Immediately after application, carefully tool the sealant bead using a finger or a specialized tooling tool to create a neat, smooth, and professional appearance. This further enhances the weather seal and improves aesthetics. https://www.youtube.com/embed/k0prTdwArlY 5 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10971-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1qAdrxsL0k8/hqdefault.jpg Apply silicone caulk — Window Replacement Apply a final bead of paintable silicone caulk around the edge of the installed window, where it meets the wall or trim. This step creates a clean, finished look and provides an additional seal against moisture and drafts. Make sure to fill any small gaps or nail holes as you go, creating a smooth and continuous line of caulk. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1qAdrxsL0k8 7 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10972-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/k0prTdwArlY/hqdefault.jpg Install Interior Flat Vinyl Trim — Window Replacement Carefully measure, cut, and place flat vinyl trim around the interior of the new window, ensuring it completely encases the old window frame. This trim covers the gap and the foam backer rod, providing a clean and finished look to the interior window opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/k0prTdwArlY 6 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10972-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mQ74FVB9JSI/hqdefault.jpg Seal Interior Window Trim Gaps — Window Replacement Move to the interior of the window. Check if the window trim board is tightly secured against the drywall. If there are any visible gaps, apply a clear, paintable caulk. This not only seals air leaks but also ensures a clean finish if you plan to paint the trim, as the caulk will be barely visible or can be painted over. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mQ74FVB9JSI 25 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10972-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sy63k24_ubU/hqdefault.jpg Install Casings and Caulk — Window Replacement Transport the finished white oak casings upstairs to the loft. Carefully fit each casing into its respective window opening, ensuring it sits flush with the newly mudded drywall. Secure the casings in place using a hammer and finishing nails or a nail gun. Finally, apply caulk (such as DAP brand Flex Dry) along the seam where the casing meets the drywall to fill any small gaps and create a perfectly seamless, trimless look. This completes the modern window casing installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sy63k24_ubU 20 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10973-1 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/72hzdFAuEag/hqdefault.jpg Verify Window Functionality — Window Replacement With the window fully installed and sealed, test its operation. Gently raise and lower both the bottom and top sashes. Ensure they move smoothly without sticking or binding, indicating a properly aligned and squared installation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/72hzdFAuEag 5 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10973-2 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nN0A1OU13V4/hqdefault.jpg Test and Adjust Window Operation — Window Replacement After installation, test the window to confirm it opens and closes smoothly. If the sash is rubbing against the window stop or is too far from it and not sealing properly, you can make adjustments. Place the SWISCO 75-034 hinge wrench under the hinge pin at the base and turn it a 1/4 turn at a time. This will adjust the sash alignment. Continue making small adjustments until your sash is properly aligned and the window operates without issue and seals correctly. Once adjusted, check the window's operation one final time to confirm it can close and lock without any problems. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nN0A1OU13V4 35 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10973-3 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kuN7h6-i9hY/hqdefault.jpg Functionality Check — Window Replacement After all exterior sealing and flashing are complete, test the functionality of the newly installed window. Open and close the window several times to ensure it operates smoothly without sticking or binding. Check that it latches securely and that there are no visible issues with the frame or glass. This final check confirms that the installation was successful and the window is ready for interior finishing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kuN7h6-i9hY 4 2026-10-07T14:17:10.404Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10960-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xbc7X1O_hQY/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Prepare Garage Door Surface — Garage Door Insulation Before installing any insulation, ensure the interior surface of your garage door is clean and dry. Use a damp cloth to wipe away any dust, dirt, grease, or grime. Allow the surface to dry completely. A clean surface is essential for proper adhesion if your insulation kit utilizes adhesive pads or double-sided tape. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xbc7X1O_hQY 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10960-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tK2_756lVfA/hqdefault.jpg Clean Surfaces — Garage Door Insulation The first step is to ensure that all surfaces of the garage door panels where the insulation will be applied are thoroughly clean. Use isopropyl alcohol and a clean rag to wipe down these surfaces, removing any dirt, grease, or grime that could hinder the adhesive's bond. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tK2_756lVfA 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10960-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yi3I2xQBmp0/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Surfaces by Cleaning — Garage Door Insulation Before applying any adhesive, thoroughly clean all surfaces of the garage door where the double-sided tape will be placed. The creator uses Windex and a microfiber rag to remove dirt, dust, and any other contaminants. This step is crucial to ensure optimal adhesion of the tape and prevent the insulation from falling off prematurely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yi3I2xQBmp0 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10961-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PTJNKody2Tw/hqdefault.jpg Measure, Cut, and Install Main Insulation Panels — Garage Door Insulation Measure the width of the main section of the garage door panel, typically around 47.75 inches, and mark this dimension on a polystyrene foam insulation panel using a Sharpie. Use a sharp razor knife to cut the panel to the precise measurement. The panels often have pre-scored ridges on the back to aid in bending. Carefully install the cut panel into the main section of the garage door by gently bending it along these ridges and snapping it into place. Repeat this measuring, cutting, and installation process for all remaining main panels of the garage door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PTJNKody2Tw 118 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10961-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LJfQofn-rbU/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Insulation Panels — Garage Door Insulation After preparing the door frames, measure the internal dimensions of each individual garage door panel. Use the tape measure to get both the width and height of the main panel areas. With these measurements, use the straight edge and box cutter to precisely cut the rigid foam insulation panels to size. The insulation material is designed to have a slight flexibility, allowing for a snug fit. For the narrow side frame columns, measure their dimensions and cut thin strips of insulation foam to fit inside them. This helps create a complete thermal barrier and a clean look. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LJfQofn-rbU 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10961-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_uEyP_3lxz0/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Insulation — Garage Door Insulation Using a tape measure, carefully measure the dimensions (height and width) of each individual panel or the support frames of your garage door. Accuracy is crucial for a snug fit. Once measured, unroll the Reflectix insulation and, using the straight edge as a guide and the utility knife, cut the insulation to precisely match the measured dimensions of each panel or frame section. Repeat this process for all sections that will be insulated. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_uEyP_3lxz0 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10962-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/yi3I2xQBmp0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Insulation Panels — Garage Door Insulation Begin by measuring the width and height of the first garage door panel section. Unroll the reflective foam insulation and use a box cutter to cut a panel to the measured dimensions. Carefully peel off the backing from the double-sided tape on the garage door and align the cut insulation panel. Press the insulation panel firmly onto the exposed tape, ensuring it adheres smoothly and completely to the door surface. This process is repeated for each section of the garage door until all panels are covered. A ladder may be necessary for higher sections. https://www.youtube.com/embed/yi3I2xQBmp0 112 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10962-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TSgXAXIVhss/hqdefault.jpg Adhere Insulation Panels — Garage Door Insulation Starting from the top panel of the garage door, peel back about two feet of the double-sided tape backing at a time. Carefully align the pre-cut insulation panel with the top edge of the garage door section. Press the insulation firmly onto the exposed tape, working your way across the panel. Repeat this process, peeling back more tape backing and pressing the insulation until the entire panel section is covered. The presenter emphasizes working in smaller sections to prevent the tape from sticking prematurely or getting tangled. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TSgXAXIVhss 71 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10962-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Xbc7X1O_hQY/hqdefault.jpg Install Insulation Panels — Garage Door Insulation Carefully take each cut insulation panel and align it with the corresponding garage door section. For kits that fit into rails, carefully slide the panels into place between the horizontal and vertical rails. For kits using adhesive, press the insulation panel firmly onto the applied adhesive pads or tape. Ensure each panel is centered and flush against the door surface. Once in place, the insulation should provide an effective barrier against temperature fluctuations and reduce sound transfer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Xbc7X1O_hQY 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10963-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kzvAxgg-GGE/hqdefault.jpg Seal Insulation Seams with Foil Tape — Garage Door Insulation Once all the Reflectix insulation panels are stapled to the wall, apply Nashua foil tape along all the vertical seams where the insulation strips meet. This step is critical to create a continuous vapor barrier and prevent any air leakage, maximizing the insulation's effectiveness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kzvAxgg-GGE 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10963-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/o93IFuUkPhs/hqdefault.jpg Seal Main Panel Seams — Garage Door Insulation Once all the insulation panels (both bubble foil and rigid foam) are in place, use Reflectix foil tape to seal the seams where the insulation meets the garage door frame or where panels butt against each other. Apply the tape firmly, pressing down to ensure good adhesion and create an effective vapor barrier and thermal seal. This prevents air leakage and further improves the insulation's performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/o93IFuUkPhs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10963-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ghtOAmSDFRQ/hqdefault.jpg Tape Gaps (Optional) — Garage Door Insulation As an optional step to further enhance insulation and prevent air leakage, tape any gaps that may exist between the installed Foil Board panels or where the panels meet the garage door's framework. Use Foil Board joint tape for this purpose, applying it smoothly and firmly over the seams to create a continuous thermal barrier. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ghtOAmSDFRQ 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10952-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a-uH19eqd8g/hqdefault.jpg Locate HVAC Filter — AC Filter Replacement Next, you need to identify the location of your home's HVAC air filter. The placement can vary significantly between different homes and HVAC system configurations. The video demonstrates two common locations: it might be found behind a return air grill in the ceiling of a central living area or hallway, or it could be directly with the main HVAC unit itself, often housed in an attic or a hall closet. The person in the video first points to a large ceiling vent as a potential filter location, then proceeds to a hall closet where the main HVAC unit and its filter are located near the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a-uH19eqd8g 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10952-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eJM0ctipors/hqdefault.jpg Locate Furnace Filter — AC Filter Replacement Next, locate the furnace filter within your heating system. The filter is typically found in the cold air return duct or positioned directly next to the blower compartment. It might be hidden behind an access door, a large return air vent, or a dedicated slot on the side of the furnace unit itself. Carefully inspect the area around your furnace and air ducts to find its exact position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eJM0ctipors 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10952-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sOcfx5o9-B4/hqdefault.jpg Locate Filter and Identify Airflow — AC Filter Replacement Once the power is off, locate the air filter within your HVAC system. It is typically found in the return plenum (the large metal duct) directly before the blower or main unit of the furnace. In some less common cases, the filter might be located behind an air return vent in a wall or ceiling. After locating the filter, carefully pull it out. Observe the 'airflow' arrow printed on the filter's cardboard frame; this arrow indicates the direction air should flow through the filter. For future reference and convenience, it's highly recommended to use a permanent marker, like a Sharpie, to draw an arrow on the return plenum itself, indicating the correct airflow direction towards the furnace. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sOcfx5o9-B4 92 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10953-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a-uH19eqd8g/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off HVAC System — AC Filter Replacement The video begins by emphasizing the importance of regularly replacing your home's air filter. The first step in this process is to ensure safety by turning off the entire HVAC system. Locate your wall thermostat, typically found in a central area of your home. Using the thermostat's interface, navigate to the 'Mode' setting and switch it to the 'Off' position. This action prevents the system from unexpectedly turning on while you are working near the filter, ensuring both your safety and preventing dust from being circulated when the filter is removed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a-uH19eqd8g 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10953-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IKySBZ9esWQ/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off HVAC System — AC Filter Replacement Locate your home's thermostat. On the thermostat, switch the system setting from 'Cool' or 'Heat' to 'Off'. This is a critical safety step to prevent the HVAC system from accidentally turning on while you are working on the filter, which could cause injury or damage to the unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IKySBZ9esWQ 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10953-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sOcfx5o9-B4/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off HVAC Power — AC Filter Replacement Before beginning any work on the HVAC unit, it is crucial to turn off its power to ensure safety. Most modern units have a dedicated power switch, often located on the side of the furnace unit, which can be simply flipped off. If such a switch is not present or easily accessible, the unit can also be turned off via the thermostat by setting it to 'Off' or 'Automatic' mode. As a last resort, or for added safety, locate the circuit breaker corresponding to the furnace in your home's electrical panel and flip it to the 'Off' position. This prevents the unit from accidentally turning on and causing injury or damage during the filter replacement process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sOcfx5o9-B4 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10954-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qN0h5kzrXTU/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Air Filter — AC Filter Replacement Carefully remove the old, dirty air filter from its slot. Observe the direction of the airflow arrow on the old filter before discarding it; this will guide you in properly installing the new filter. The video demonstrates pulling out a visibly soiled pleated filter, emphasizing how much dust and contaminants it has collected, highlighting the importance of regular changes for both air quality and HVAC system efficiency. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qN0h5kzrXTU 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10954-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1MPJu-fFKAc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Air Filter — AC Filter Replacement Once the access door is removed, carefully slide the old, dirty air filter out of its slot. Note the direction of the airflow arrow on the old filter before removal, as the new filter must be installed in the same orientation. Dispose of the old filter responsibly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1MPJu-fFKAc 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10954-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a-uH19eqd8g/hqdefault.jpg Replace Filter — AC Filter Replacement Once you've located the filter housing (in this case, in a hall closet near the floor), carefully slide out the old, dirty air filter. Before discarding it, take a moment to observe the small arrow printed on the filter's frame. This arrow indicates the direction of airflow, which is critical for proper installation. Retrieve your new HVAC filter (the video shows a standard pleated air filter). Align the new filter so that its airflow arrow points in the same direction as the old one (typically towards the furnace or air handler, or into the main HVAC unit). Gently slide the new filter into its designated slot until it is fully seated. Finally, close any access doors or covers that were opened to reach the filter housing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a-uH19eqd8g 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10955-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sOcfx5o9-B4/hqdefault.jpg Select Replacement Filter — AC Filter Replacement When choosing a new air filter, you'll encounter various types with different filtration ratings, such as MERV (Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value) or FPR (Filter Performance Rating). Higher numbers on these ratings indicate greater filtration capability, capturing smaller particles like allergens, mold spores, and even some bacteria. However, a higher rating also means the filter is denser, which can restrict airflow. Most HVAC technicians recommend using a filter in the middle to low-end range (e.g., FPR 4-7 or MERV 7-10) for optimal balance between air quality and system efficiency. If someone in your home has severe allergies, a higher-rated filter might be beneficial, but be aware that it might require more frequent changes and could potentially strain your blower motor if your system isn't designed for it. Ensure the new filter's dimensions (e.g., 16x25x1 inches) perfectly match the old filter's size; a filter that is too small will allow unfiltered air to bypass it. Writing the filter size on the plenum is also a useful tip. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sOcfx5o9-B4 171 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10955-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IKySBZ9esWQ/hqdefault.jpg Identify Correct Filter Size and Airflow Direction — AC Filter Replacement Examine the old filter for printed dimensions, which usually indicate the nominal size (e.g., 20" x 20" x 1"). Also, look for the 'Actual Filter Size,' which may be slightly smaller (e.g., 19-3/4" x 19-3/4" x 7/8"). If the old filter is unreadable or missing, use a tape measure to determine the exact width, length, and depth of the filter slot in the housing. Next, locate the 'AIR FLOW' arrow printed on the new filter's cardboard frame. This arrow indicates the direction the air should flow through the filter. For ceiling-mounted returns, the arrow typically points upwards, towards the ductwork. For wall-mounted returns or filters located on the HVAC unit itself, the arrow should point towards the blower motor or into the system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IKySBZ9esWQ 78 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10955-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_k6N3g_swog/hqdefault.jpg Identify Existing Filter Size — AC Filter Replacement Before purchasing any new air filter, it is crucial to determine the correct size required for your HVAC system. The expert demonstrates this by showing a standard filter with its dimensions clearly printed on the frame, for example, '16x25x1' inches (length x width x thickness). Always check this information on your existing filter to ensure the new one fits properly into the designated slot in your furnace or air handler. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_k6N3g_swog 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10956-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qN0h5kzrXTU/hqdefault.jpg Install New Air Filter — AC Filter Replacement Slide the new air filter into the designated slot, making sure it goes in smoothly and the airflow arrow continues to point in the correct direction (towards the HVAC unit). Exercise caution during this step to prevent the filter from snagging on any metal edges or tearing the filter material. A torn filter will not function effectively and will need to be replaced. Once fully inserted, the filter should fit snugly within the slot, creating a seal to prevent air from bypassing it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qN0h5kzrXTU 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10956-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GOm6pAYG_do/hqdefault.jpg Install New Filter with Correct Airflow Direction — AC Filter Replacement Take the new air filter and carefully examine the cardboard frame for an arrow indicating "AIR FLOW". This arrow is critically important and must point towards the furnace or air handler unit (the component that heats or cools the air) and away from the return air duct (where air is drawn into the system). Slide the new filter into the filter slot, ensuring the arrow is correctly oriented. If the filter is installed backward, it will not filter effectively, placing unnecessary strain on your HVAC system and reducing its efficiency. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GOm6pAYG_do 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10956-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gfYnyz5f1Dc/hqdefault.jpg Install New Air Filter — AC Filter Replacement After removing the old filter, the presenter picks up the new air filter. He re-iterates finding the airflow arrow and ensuring it points directly towards the furnace. He then slides the new filter into the filter box. If your furnace system has a door covering the filter slot, close it securely after inserting the new filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gfYnyz5f1Dc 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10957-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IKySBZ9esWQ/hqdefault.jpg Close Housing and Turn On HVAC System — AC Filter Replacement After the new filter is securely in place, close the filter housing door. Make sure both pull tabs or latches snap firmly into their locked position to ensure the door is properly sealed. Finally, return to your thermostat and switch the HVAC system back to your desired 'Cool' or 'Heat' setting. The system should now operate with the new, clean filter, improving air quality and efficiency. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IKySBZ9esWQ 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10957-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/06raRUL5bGc/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Filter Rack Door — AC Filter Replacement Once the new air filter is securely in place within the filter rack, carefully reattach the access door or cover. Engage any latches or clips to ensure the door is closed tightly and forms a proper seal. An airtight seal is important to prevent air from bypassing the filter, which would reduce its effectiveness and allow unfiltered air into your system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/06raRUL5bGc 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10957-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/soIj__onLLc/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Filter and Secure Grille — AC Filter Replacement Once the filter is clean, carefully slide it back into its original position within the return air grille. Ensure it is seated correctly and securely. Then, close the grille door firmly, ensuring it latches properly. With the filter reinstalled and the grille closed, your HVAC system is ready for operation with improved air quality and efficiency. If you require further assistance or suspect your appliance needs service, contact a professional. https://www.youtube.com/embed/soIj__onLLc 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10958-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sOcfx5o9-B4/hqdefault.jpg Restore HVAC Power — AC Filter Replacement With the new air filter securely in place, turn the power back on to your HVAC unit. If you used the furnace's dedicated switch, simply flip it back to the 'On' position. If you turned off the power at the circuit breaker, flip the corresponding breaker back to 'On'. Your HVAC system should now be ready to operate with its new, clean filter. You can leave spare filters conveniently stored near the furnace so they are always accessible for future replacements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sOcfx5o9-B4 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10958-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ED3bfesbE_Y/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power to the Heating System — AC Filter Replacement After successfully installing the new filter and securing the access panel, it's time to restore power to your heating system. Return to your circuit breaker panel and flip the heating system's breaker back to the 'on' position, or switch your thermostat from 'off' back to your desired heating/cooling mode. Your furnace should now resume normal operation with a clean, efficient air filter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ED3bfesbE_Y 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10958-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/a-uH19eqd8g/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Enjoy — AC Filter Replacement With the new filter securely in place and the housing closed, return to your wall thermostat. Change the mode from 'Off' back to your desired operating setting, such as 'Cool' or 'Heat', or 'Auto' for automatic temperature management. Your HVAC system is now ready to operate with a fresh, clean filter, which will contribute to improved indoor air quality, better system efficiency, and reduced energy consumption. Now you can breathe easier! https://www.youtube.com/embed/a-uH19eqd8g 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10959-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1MPJu-fFKAc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Air Filter — AC Filter Replacement Once the access door is removed, carefully slide the old, dirty air filter out of its slot. Note the direction of the airflow arrow on the old filter before removal, as the new filter must be installed in the same orientation. Dispose of the old filter responsibly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1MPJu-fFKAc 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10959-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IKySBZ9esWQ/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Filter — AC Filter Replacement With the filter housing open, carefully slide the old HVAC filter out of its slot. Depending on how much dust and debris it has accumulated, you may want to immediately place it into a trash bag to prevent airborne particles from spreading throughout the room or falling back into the ductwork. Remove the filter slowly and smoothly to avoid dislodging any captured dirt. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IKySBZ9esWQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10959-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ytIQS82yAZg/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Filter — AC Filter Replacement Once the air filter's location is identified and power is off, carefully slide the old, dirty filter out of its slot. Be mindful that the filter may be covered in dust and debris. If the filter is particularly dirty, you may want to wear gloves to avoid direct contact with the accumulated particles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ytIQS82yAZg 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10942-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TablS2U_Vqs/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Concrete Floor — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Begin by thoroughly cleaning the concrete floor. Use a floor scraper to remove any high spots or hardened debris, such as dried adhesive, joint compound, or paint spills. After scraping, use a stiff-bristled broom to sweep all larger debris and loose particles out of the area. Finally, use a shop vacuum to vacuum the entire floor surface, ensuring all dust and small particles are removed, creating a clean base for the next steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TablS2U_Vqs 61 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10942-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CgbDEQ7U8wM/hqdefault.jpg Sweep the Surface — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Before applying any cleaning solutions, sweep the entire concrete surface thoroughly. Use a push broom to remove all loose dust, dirt, leaves, and any other debris that may be present. This step ensures that cleaning solutions can directly contact the surface and are not diluted or contaminated by loose particles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CgbDEQ7U8wM 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10942-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GmsvmUFi7jI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Clean the Concrete Floor — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Before applying any sealant, it is crucial to prepare the concrete floor thoroughly. Begin by sweeping the entire area with a stiff-bristled broom to remove loose debris, dirt, and any larger particles. Next, use a scraper or a suitable tool to chip away any hardened cement, spills, or other snots and imperfections from the floor surface. Finally, use a shop vacuum or industrial vacuum cleaner to vacuum the entire floor to remove as much fine dust as possible. This ensures optimal adhesion of the sealer. If a double garage door is open, be mindful of dust blowing back in. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GmsvmUFi7jI 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10943-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sEUEUG7Vh48/hqdefault.jpg Degrease and Scrub the Concrete Floor — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After wetting the floor, grab a suitable concrete degreaser, such as 'Krud Kutter', and apply it generously to the wet concrete. Then, use a stiff-bristled scrub brush, ideally one with a long handle, to vigorously scrub the entire floor. Focus on areas with oil stains, grease, or heavy dirt buildup to ensure all contaminants are lifted and removed from the concrete's pores. The goal is to clean the surface thoroughly so the epoxy can adhere properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sEUEUG7Vh48 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10943-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GvKKqeUFJsI/hqdefault.jpg Clean and Degrease the Concrete — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After removing everything from the garage, thoroughly clean and degrease the floor. First, use a leaf blower to clear any large debris, then sweep the entire floor with a floor broom to remove remaining dust and loose particles. It is extremely important to start with a clean floor to ensure the epoxy adheres properly. Next, prepare a degreaser solution by diluting a garage cleaner/degreaser in a bucket with water, following the product's instructions. Wet the concrete floor with a pressure washer or a garden hose. Pour the diluted degreaser onto the areas needing cleaning, especially stained spots, and scrub vigorously with a stiff brush. Rinse the scrubbed area with clean water, then use a floor squeegee to push the water out of the garage. For stubborn or heavy stains, repeat the scrubbing and rinsing process until the floor is visibly clean. This prep work is crucial as epoxy will not adhere to grease, oil, or any other residue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GvKKqeUFJsI 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10943-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UdolrDw4GUs/hqdefault.jpg Clear Garage and Degrease Floor — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Before beginning any work, ensure the entire garage floor is completely clear of all vehicles, tools, and any other items. Inspect the floor for any oil or grease spots. Use Rust-Oleum EpoxyShield Heavy-Duty Degreaser directly on these spots. Scrub the areas thoroughly with a stiff bristle brush to lift the grease. Absorb any excess degreaser with rags or paper towels. After addressing the spots, rinse the entire floor twice using a hose to remove all degreaser and any remaining contaminants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UdolrDw4GUs 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10944-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/takc-e6Q8a0/hqdefault.jpg Repair Concrete Cracks — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Carefully apply a crack patch material, such as Stonecoat Crack Patch, into all prepared concrete cracks. Ensure the material fully fills the cracks and then use a trowel or flat edge to smooth and level the patch with the surrounding concrete surface. Allow it to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions. Once cured, you may need to lightly grind the patched areas again to ensure they are perfectly flush with the rest of the floor, as shown in the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/takc-e6Q8a0 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10944-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QFEo0sOw7Yw/hqdefault.jpg Patch and Repair Concrete — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Once the floor is clean and dry, inspect it for any cracks, chips, or divots. Use the Rust-Oleum Concrete Patch & Repair kit to fill and level any damaged areas. This step ensures a smooth, even surface for the epoxy application, preventing imperfections from showing through the final coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QFEo0sOw7Yw 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10944-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jzU2HHFnZyw/hqdefault.jpg Repair Concrete Damage — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Inspect the stairs for any chips, cracks, or spalling. Using a suitable concrete repair compound (such as a two-part epoxy patch or a quick-setting cementitious patch), fill and level these damaged areas. Apply the patching material with a trowel or spatula, ensuring it is flush with the surrounding concrete surface. Allow the repair material to cure according to the manufacturer's instructions before proceeding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jzU2HHFnZyw 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10945-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/takc-e6Q8a0/hqdefault.jpg Grind and Prepare Concrete Surface — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Use a concrete grinder fitted with a diamond cup wheel to thoroughly grind the entire concrete floor surface. This process creates a clean, porous profile for optimal epoxy adhesion. For enhanced dust control, attach the grinder to a shop vacuum with a dust shroud. Additionally, use a chisel or a crack chaser tool to open up any existing cracks in the concrete, preparing them for repair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/takc-e6Q8a0 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10945-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/HFZhyOzvmUQ/hqdefault.jpg Concrete Grinding — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating The initial and crucial step for any epoxy floor coating project is thorough surface preparation. This involves using a concrete grinder to mechanically profile the entire concrete surface. Grinding ensures the removal of any contaminants, sealers, or weak concrete, creating a porous and clean substrate that allows for optimal adhesion of subsequent epoxy layers. It also helps to smooth out minor imperfections in the concrete. A powerful dust extractor or industrial vacuum is typically connected to the grinder to collect dust and maintain a clean working environment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/HFZhyOzvmUQ 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10945-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GvKKqeUFJsI/hqdefault.jpg Etch the Concrete Surface — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After cleaning, the concrete surface needs to be made porous to ensure proper bonding of the epoxy. This can be achieved either by grinding the surface or by acid etching. The video demonstrates the acid etching method, which is generally more DIY-friendly. The epoxy kit often includes a concrete etch powder. First, mix the concrete etch powder with the correct amount of water in a separate 5-gallon bucket, stirring until it is completely dissolved. Always wear rubber gloves and protective eyewear during this step. It is crucial NOT to use the same mixing buckets designated for the epoxy for the acid etching solution. Pre-wet the entire floor with a hose or pressure washer before applying the acid etch solution, as the concrete must remain damp throughout the entire etching process. Pour the diluted etching solution onto a small section of the floor, either directly from the bucket or more precisely with a plastic watering can. Immediately scrub the section vigorously with a stiff brush to ensure the product penetrates the concrete. Continue this process across the entire garage, paying close attention to high-traffic areas. The etch solution must remain on the surface for a minimum of 15 minutes or longer to properly work. Once etching is complete, rinse the entire garage floor thoroughly with a hose or pressure washer to remove all traces of the acid and any loosened concrete particles. Finally, use a squeegee to push out any standing water and allow the floor to dry completely for 24 to 48 hours. Ensure the floor is bone dry before proceeding to epoxy application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GvKKqeUFJsI 94 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10946-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fIn9OtPcLxs/hqdefault.jpg Remove Excess Water and Dry — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After the final rinsing, use a squeegee to remove any excess moisture from the concrete surface, which will help to expedite the drying process. Once excess water is removed, the floor must be allowed to dry completely. A crucial step is to wait a full 24 hours for the floor to be entirely dry before applying any topcoat, paint, or stain. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fIn9OtPcLxs 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10946-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vByKIq0xpUk/hqdefault.jpg Post-Grinding Cleaning and Drying — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After all grinding is complete, thoroughly clean the entire floor to remove residual concrete dust. Use a garden hose to wet down the floor, paying special attention to washing out the ground-down cracks. Use a broom to scrub and direct the water and remaining dust towards the drain. Once the floor is clean, set up a heater and a fan to circulate air and expedite the drying process. Allow the floor to dry completely overnight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vByKIq0xpUk 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10946-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UdolrDw4GUs/hqdefault.jpg Allow Floor to Dry and Test for Cleanliness — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After etching and rinsing, allow the entire concrete surface to dry completely. This typically requires allowing it to dry overnight. To test for dryness and cleanliness, wipe your fingers over the clean, dry floor. If you observe any dust or powder on your fingers, it indicates that the floor is not thoroughly cleaned or dry enough. In this case, repeat the rinsing and scrubbing steps until no dust or powder is visible on your fingers after wiping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UdolrDw4GUs 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10947-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/l9qQW40qTmE/hqdefault.jpg Mix the Epoxy Coating — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Epoxy coatings are typically a two-part system: a resin (Part A) and a hardener (Part B). It is critical to precisely measure and mix these components according to the manufacturer's specified ratios. Pour the Part A resin into a large mixing bucket, then add the Part B hardener. Use a drill equipped with a mixing paddle to thoroughly blend the two components for 2-3 minutes. Scrape the sides and bottom of the bucket during mixing to ensure all material is fully incorporated. Mix slowly to avoid introducing air bubbles, which can cause imperfections in the final coating. Once mixed, the epoxy has a limited 'pot life' (working time), so prepare to apply immediately. https://www.youtube.com/embed/l9qQW40qTmE 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10947-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Dl-Kxvu7ow/hqdefault.jpg Mix Epoxy Base Coat — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating The epoxy base coat consists of at least two components (Part A and Part B) that must be mixed thoroughly in specific ratios to initiate the curing process. In a clean bucket, first add Part A, then carefully pour in Part B, ensuring all material is added according to manufacturer specifications. Using a heavy-duty drill equipped with a spiral mixing paddle, mix the components for several minutes (typically 2-3 minutes), scraping the sides and bottom of the bucket to ensure uniform blending. Proper mixing is critical for the epoxy to cure correctly and achieve its intended properties. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Dl-Kxvu7ow 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10947-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZmTKLCnv9Xw/hqdefault.jpg Mix Epoxy Resin Components — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Begin by mixing the two liquid components (A and B) of the epoxy resin in a clean bucket. Use a drill fitted with a mixing paddle to ensure the two parts are thoroughly combined. Adequate mixing is crucial for the epoxy to cure properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZmTKLCnv9Xw 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10948-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-kJPJJO7KSE/hqdefault.jpg Apply Epoxy Base Coat — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Wearing spiked shoes, begin applying the mixed epoxy base coat. Use a paintbrush to 'cut in' the perimeter of the floor, carefully applying epoxy along the taped edges. Once the edges are done, pour the epoxy onto the floor in long, continuous ribbons. Use a squeegee to spread the epoxy evenly across the surface. Immediately after spreading, use a roller with an extension pole to back-roll the epoxy, ensuring a uniform thickness and smooth finish. Work quickly within the epoxy's working time. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-kJPJJO7KSE 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10948-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/p5fir7QA9YU/hqdefault.jpg Apply Epoxy Base Coat — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Once the floor is thoroughly prepped and dry, begin applying the epoxy base coat. Use a two-part epoxy kit (like Benjamin Moore Corotech). Carefully mix the two parts according to the manufacturer's instructions. Pour the mixed epoxy directly onto the clean, dry concrete floor in small sections. Use a long-handled paint roller or squeegee to spread the epoxy evenly across the surface. Work efficiently as epoxy has a limited pot life once mixed. Repeat this process for the entire floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/p5fir7QA9YU 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10948-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Lpo2dmjC75s/hqdefault.jpg Apply 1st Epoxy Coat & Dry Overnight — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Once the epoxy solution is mixed, immediately begin applying the first coat. Use a paintbrush to carefully cut in around the edges of the floor, along the masked areas, and any tight corners. Then, use a roller with an extension pole to evenly apply the epoxy across the main floor surface. Work in small sections to maintain a wet edge and ensure consistent coverage. After the first coat is applied, allow it to dry completely overnight, as recommended by the presenter. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Lpo2dmjC75s 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10949-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i4XeVwAAbNA/hqdefault.jpg Sprinkle Decorative Flakes — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating While the epoxy is still wet, take the decorative flakes and sprinkle them over the newly applied patch. It's recommended to use only two fingers to pick up and sprinkle the flakes, allowing for greater control over the distribution. Apply flakes in small quantities initially; you can always add more if needed. Avoid over-applying, as excess flakes are difficult to remove once they adhere to the epoxy. The goal is to match the density and pattern of the surrounding floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i4XeVwAAbNA 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10949-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Dm_9vzXipWw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Decorative Flakes — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating Once the epoxy is evenly spread and rolled, it's time to apply the decorative flakes. Take a small amount of flakes in your hand from the bag. Throw the flakes straight up into the air, allowing them to fall naturally onto the wet epoxy. This method ensures an even and random distribution. Work in small sections, moving across the floor. When flaking near doors or walls, avoid throwing flakes directly at the surface, as they will drop straight down and create an unnatural straight line. Instead, open the door, throw flakes into the opening, or move away from the wall and toss them upwards, allowing them to drift over the edge. Ensure a consistent quantity of flakes is applied throughout to avoid blotchy areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Dm_9vzXipWw 105 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10949-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CgbDEQ7U8wM/hqdefault.jpg Decorative Flakes Application — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating While the second coat of epoxy paint is still wet, apply the decorative flakes. Take handfuls of decorative flakes and toss them lightly upwards into the air, allowing them to fall randomly onto the wet paint. This method creates a natural, uniform distribution. Continue tossing flakes evenly over the entire wet section you just painted. The flakes will adhere to the wet epoxy, creating a unique speckled, decorative look. Do not walk on the flakes or try to place them precisely; allow them to fall organically. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CgbDEQ7U8wM 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10950-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/l9qQW40qTmE/hqdefault.jpg Allow to Cure — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After the epoxy has been applied, it must be allowed to cure undisturbed. The curing process is crucial for the epoxy to reach its full hardness, durability, and chemical resistance. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for specific cure times, which typically include a 'walk-on' time (light foot traffic), a 'recoat' window (if applying multiple coats), and a 'heavy traffic/chemical resistance' time. Generally, light foot traffic is allowed after 24-72 hours, while heavy vehicle traffic and full chemical resistance may take 5-7 days or even longer. Maintain consistent temperature and good ventilation in the area during curing, as extreme temperatures or high humidity can affect the curing process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/l9qQW40qTmE 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10950-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DRzQsSTe-p8/hqdefault.jpg Allow Epoxy to Dry and Cure — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After applying the clear top coat, allow the epoxy coating to dry for a minimum of 18 hours before walking on the surface. For full curing and maximum durability, you must allow 72 hours before parking vehicles on the coated floor. Adhering to these drying times is crucial to ensure the longevity and performance of your new garage floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DRzQsSTe-p8 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10950-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UdolrDw4GUs/hqdefault.jpg Allow Epoxy to Cure — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After the epoxy coating and decorative chips have been applied, allow sufficient time for the floor to cure before resuming normal use. The surface should be ready for light foot traffic in approximately 12 to 16 hours. For heavy item placement, such as storage shelves or tools, wait 24 to 48 hours. Most importantly, allow the floor to cure for a full three days before parking vehicles on the surface. This ensures maximum durability and prevents hot tire pickup or damage to the coating. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UdolrDw4GUs 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10951-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rWGB41OICf0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Clear Topcoat — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After the epoxy base coat and decorative flakes have dried overnight, apply a clear topcoat. This final layer seals in the flakes, provides extra durability, and gives the floor a high-gloss, protective finish. Similar to the epoxy application, use a paint brush for carefully coating the edges and corners, and a paint roller with an extension pole for the main floor areas. Ensure an even and consistent application to avoid streaks or uneven gloss. Wear a safety mask or respirator. This step typically takes 1 to 2 hours. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rWGB41OICf0 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10951-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QFEo0sOw7Yw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Clear Coat with Anti-Skid — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After the initial epoxy base coat has dried for 24 hours, it's time to apply the clear topcoat. This step follows a similar application process: mix the two-part clear coat kit thoroughly. The kit typically includes an anti-skid additive; make sure to mix this into the clear coat to provide slip resistance. Start by using a fresh paint brush to cut in the edges of the floor. Then, use a clean paint roller with an extension pole to roll the clear coat evenly over the entire epoxy surface. This clear coat significantly enhances the durability, adds a protective layer, and provides a beautiful shine to your newly coated garage floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QFEo0sOw7Yw 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10951-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3nV2UvUoRk0/hqdefault.jpg Apply Clear Coat — Garage Floor Epoxy Coating After the epoxy coating with flakes has cured for 24 hours, prepare to apply the clear coat. Put on a 'respirator' and 'gloves'. In a clean 'Home Depot' bucket, combine the 'Armor Ultra Wear clear coat' components (Part A and Part B). Mix them thoroughly with a 'drill with a mixer attachment' for the recommended time. As with the previous steps, use a 'paintbrush' to carefully cut in the edges of the floor first. Then, use a 'paint roller' on an 'extension pole' to apply the clear coat evenly over the entire epoxy floor. Ensure the coat is applied smoothly and without puddles. Allow the clear coat to cure completely for the time recommended by the manufacturer, typically 24-72 hours, before resuming normal garage use or driving on the floor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3nV2UvUoRk0 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10935-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DIIcQ9zDwSw/hqdefault.jpg Select the Right Hedge Shears — Hedge Trimming Select the appropriate hedge shears for the job. The video recommends using a telescopic hedge shear with Teflon-coated, hardened steel blades. Look for blades with an edging that helps grab, hold, and move foliage directly off the blades. Telescopic handles are beneficial for reaching taller hedges, and aluminum handles aid in lightweightness, reducing fatigue. A rubber stopper between the handles can also help absorb shock and reduce forearm strain during extended use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DIIcQ9zDwSw 54 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10935-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_Dc3B2I7bu4/hqdefault.jpg Select Appropriate Trimming Tools — Hedge Trimming The first step is to choose the appropriate tools for trimming your hedges. You have two main categories: power tools (electric or petrol hedge trimmers) and manual tools (hand shears). Power tools are faster and require less effort, making them suitable for large hedges or when time is limited. However, they can sometimes tear leaves, leading to a ragged finish, especially on larger-leafed plants like cherry laurel or Griselinia. Manual hand shears, while more labor-intensive and requiring upper body strength, provide a razor-sharp, cleaner cut. This cleaner cut allows the plant to heal quicker and results in a neater finish, which is important for plants susceptible to leaf damage from rough cuts. The presenter personally recommends electric hedge trimmers for most tasks and reserves hand shears for detailed work like topiary or small sections of hedges. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_Dc3B2I7bu4 85 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10935-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/aclTF92F1eg/hqdefault.jpg Choose a Hedge Trimmer Based on Key Features — Hedge Trimming Consider several factors when selecting a hedge trimmer. First, assess your hedge size and type; small trimmers won't handle large, mature hedges with thick growth. It's recommended to purchase from a garden machinery specialist to physically handle and compare different tools, ensuring you can operate the trimmer safely and comfortably. For large hedges or prolonged use, consider models with a rotating handle, which allows for different working positions and easier high trimming (most have three positions, some five). Pay attention to noise levels; all machines have a decibel rating, with cordless models being significantly quieter than petrol ones. Trimmers with shorter blades are often lighter and easier to handle but take longer to complete jobs. Tooth spacing indicates the maximum stem width the trimmer can cut. Many trimmers include a tip protector on the blade end to prevent damage to garden structures, fences, or the blade itself if it contacts the ground. Don't overlook the blade cover; quality varies from thin plastic (prone to distortion) to rigid molded plastic or aluminum guards that fully encase the blade and are easier to use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aclTF92F1eg 79 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10936-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OtFSP27RFcM/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Hedge and Work Area — Hedge Trimming Prepare the hedge for trimming by ensuring a clear and safe working area. Lay down tarps or large sheets along the base of the hedge and the adjacent footpath to easily collect all trimmings. This minimizes cleanup time later. Inspect the hedge for any hidden obstacles, debris, or wildlife nests. Ensure you have a stable ladder or platform for safely reaching the top and upper sections of the hedge. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OtFSP27RFcM 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10936-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FoUaPJ9Pu7Y/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Area for Trimming — Hedge Trimming Before beginning the trimming process, lay out blue tarps along the base of the hedge on both sides of the area to be trimmed. This crucial step will collect the majority of the fallen hedge trimmings, significantly simplifying the cleanup process later on and protecting the ground covering beneath. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FoUaPJ9Pu7Y 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10936-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FuVjlGIxKsY/hqdefault.jpg Prepare for Trimming and Ensure Safety — Hedge Trimming Before beginning any trimming, gather all necessary tools and ensure you have appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE). Inspect the hedge for any hidden obstacles such as wires, sprinkler heads, or debris that could damage the trimmer or cause injury. Familiarize yourself with the hedge trimmer's operating instructions, especially regarding safety features and handling. For safety, it's recommended to wear eye protection, gloves, and sturdy footwear. The hedge trimmer featured in the video is described as having 'sharp dual blades' for 'clean precision'. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FuVjlGIxKsY 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10937-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0YvSEPFCxrI/hqdefault.jpg Set Up String Line Guide — Hedge Trimming To ensure your hedge is trimmed evenly, start by setting up a string line as a guide. First, determine the desired height for your hedge. Then, drive one stake into the ground at each end of the hedge, making sure they are stable and positioned at the same height. If your hedge is particularly long, place additional stakes in between to prevent the string from sagging. Next, tie a roll of garden string to the first stake, stretch it across the entire length of your hedge, and then tie it securely to the second stake at the same height. This tight string will serve as your reference for keeping the top of the hedge level. Before starting to trim, step back and visually confirm that your line is straight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0YvSEPFCxrI 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10937-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Hm6qb0-RGsY/hqdefault.jpg Set Up String Line Guide — Hedge Trimming To achieve an even trim, begin by setting up stakes at both ends of the hedge. Insert the stakes into the ground or planter boxes. Once the stakes are in place, tie a string or twine to the first stake at the desired height for the top of your hedge. Stretch this string across the entire length of the hedge to the second stake and secure it at the same height. Before proceeding, double-check the string line to ensure it is perfectly straight and level, as this will act as your visual guide for trimming. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Hm6qb0-RGsY 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10937-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OtFSP27RFcM/hqdefault.jpg Visualize and Plan the Desired Hedge Shape — Hedge Trimming Before beginning any trimming, take time to visualize the final desired shape of the hedge. For this project, the goal is to transform an overgrown conifer hedge into a well-defined rectangle, approximately 18 feet long by 8 feet high, with a curved archway integrated into one section. The video demonstrates this by overlaying an animated outline onto the existing hedge, showing the rectangular perimeter and the semi-circular arch that will serve as a through-way, following the natural curve of the footpath. This planning stage is crucial for ensuring symmetry and the correct dimensions before making any cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OtFSP27RFcM 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10938-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0YvSEPFCxrI/hqdefault.jpg Trim the Sides of the Hedge — Hedge Trimming Before you begin trimming, ensure you are wearing appropriate safety gear including hearing protection and safety glasses. Begin trimming the sides of the hedge using a hedge trimmer. Start at the bottom of the hedge and systematically work your way upwards. This technique is beneficial as it prevents trimmed debris from falling onto sections you've already completed, resulting in a cleaner and more efficient cut. As you move the trimmer, aim to keep its blades level and try to maintain a consistent angle along the hedge's vertical surface to achieve a professional-looking finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0YvSEPFCxrI 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10938-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/S17lPHZk_sQ/hqdefault.jpg Bottom-Up Side Trimming — Hedge Trimming For trimming the sides of the hedge, the recommended technique is to start from the bottom and move the trimmer upwards. This should be done in a pattern, gently laying the trimmer on the bottom of the bush and moving it up, then moving over and repeating the process. This method helps in gradually shaping the bush and creating a consistent form by following the developing shape. https://www.youtube.com/embed/S17lPHZk_sQ 70 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10938-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Hm6qb0-RGsY/hqdefault.jpg Trim the Hedges Evenly — Hedge Trimming Using a hedge trimmer, start trimming the hedge from the bottom section and work your way upwards. Maintain a steady hand and keep the hedge trimmer level, aligning its cutting blades with the string line guide you previously set up. Trim gradually and evenly across the hedge, avoiding cutting too much at once. This gradual approach helps prevent stressing the plant and ensures a uniform finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Hm6qb0-RGsY 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10939-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OtFSP27RFcM/hqdefault.jpg Trim the Hedge to a Rectangular Form — Hedge Trimming Using electric or petrol hedge trimmers, begin shaping the hedge into its main rectangular form. Start with the sides, ensuring they are plumb and straight by using string lines or visual guides. Then, trim the top of the hedge to the desired height, aiming for a flat and even surface. The time-lapse in the video shows this process, quickly reducing the overgrown conifer into a neat, tall rectangular wall. Work methodically, taking small cuts at a time, and regularly step back to check the overall form and make adjustments. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OtFSP27RFcM 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10939-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0YvSEPFCxrI/hqdefault.jpg Trim the Top of the Hedge — Hedge Trimming With the sides complete, it's time to trim the top of the hedge. Use the previously established string line as your guide to ensure you're cutting straight across. Gently and steadily move your hedge trimmer along the string line. The goal is to keep everything uniform and create a perfectly level top surface. Be cautious not to trim too much at once, as over-trimming can cause stress to the plant. It's best to cut gradually and evenly, making small adjustments to achieve the desired shape and height. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0YvSEPFCxrI 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10939-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RPORbvAbX9E/hqdefault.jpg Trim Hedges with Hand and Powered Tools — Hedge Trimming Begin trimming the top of the hedge using hand shears. For a cleaner cut and to reduce sap buildup, regularly dip the shears' blades into a bucket of water. This helps to lubricate the blades and wash away sticky residues, making the job easier and more efficient. Once the initial cuts are made with hand shears, switch to battery-powered hedge trimmers for faster and more even trimming along the established string line. The key is to keep the trimmer blade flat against the hedge surface to replicate a straight cut. If trimming the sides, remember to maintain the correct aspect: for north-facing hedges, a straight edge is fine; for north-south oriented hedges, make the top narrower and the bottom broader to ensure all foliage receives adequate sunlight. After using the powered trimmer, return to hand shears to tidy up any loose bits or missed areas for a perfectly crisp finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RPORbvAbX9E 71 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10940-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c5DB7d8W8Iw/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up Clippings — Hedge Trimming Once all trimming is complete, carefully gather the blue tarp, ensuring all the collected hedge clippings remain contained. Lift the tarp and transport the clippings to an appropriate disposal area, such as a compost pile, green waste bin, or designated yard waste collection point. After removing the tarp, perform a final check around the hedges for any stray clippings and sweep them up if necessary to leave the area pristine. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c5DB7d8W8Iw 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10940-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qhuhO0GM3NM/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up Trimmings — Hedge Trimming After trimming, clean up the fallen hedge trimmings. Use a rake to gather the majority of the clippings into piles or directly into a large trash bag. Then, use a leaf blower to clear any remaining small debris from the ground and ensure the area is tidy. This final step leaves a neat and professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qhuhO0GM3NM 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10940-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Q6RmbBJZ85o/hqdefault.jpg Collect and Dispose of Trimmings — Hedge Trimming Once all the hedge trimming is complete, carefully gather the edges of the tarpaulin, pulling them inwards to consolidate all the collected trimmings into a central pile. Roll up the tarpaulin into a more compact form, shaping it into a 'cone' or funnel shape to effectively contain the debris. Gently lift the rolled-up tarpaulin, carrying it to your designated waste bin. Position the cone-shaped tarpaulin directly over the opening of the bin and funnel the collected trimmings downward into it. This technique allows for quick, clean, and completely mess-free disposal, eliminating the need for tedious sweeping and bagging. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q6RmbBJZ85o 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10941-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0CxCRmXIwTk/hqdefault.jpg Final Detailing and Cleanup — Hedge Trimming After the main trimming of the top and sides is complete, perform a thorough inspection of the entire hedge. Look for any uneven spots, missed branches, or areas that need fine-tuning. Use hand pruners or small hedge shears for precision trimming of individual branches or for perfecting the overall shape. Once satisfied with the trim, rake up all trimmed debris from the ground around the hedge. Collect and dispose of the trimmings properly, ideally by composting or through a municipal yard waste program. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0CxCRmXIwTk 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10941-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5R3yocprhmg/hqdefault.jpg Finish by Trimming Stubborn Twigs — Hedge Trimming Conclude the trimming process by going back over the hedge and carefully addressing any remaining stubborn twigs or small, unruly branches that might detract from the hedge's polished appearance. Use the hedge shears to meticulously snip these off, refining the hedge's surface and ensuring a smooth, clean finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5R3yocprhmg 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10941-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FuVjlGIxKsY/hqdefault.jpg Review Trimmed Hedge and Clean Up Clippings — Hedge Trimming Once the trimming is complete, step back and visually inspect the hedge from various angles to ensure an even, consistent shape. Make any necessary minor touch-ups. After trimming, gather all the hedge clippings from the ground. Use a rake to collect them into piles, and then use a tarp or wheelbarrow to transport them for disposal. Promptly cleaning up clippings not only maintains the aesthetic appeal of your landscape but also prevents them from smothering underlying plants or creating a breeding ground for pests. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FuVjlGIxKsY 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10926-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QMK-Kq6HV0E/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Damaged Drywall Surface — Drywall Repair Begin by preparing the damaged drywall surface. Use a putty knife or a wide-bladed scraper to carefully remove any loose or crumbling plaster, paint, or drywall material from the area surrounding the hole or crack. The goal is to create a clean, stable surface for the new compound to adhere to. If necessary, use a utility knife to score and remove any particularly stubborn peeling paint or protruding fragments. This ensures a smooth base for the patch. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QMK-Kq6HV0E 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10926-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4anifphxDnk/hqdefault.jpg Prep the Area — Drywall Repair Carefully remove any loose edges of the torn drywall paper using a putty knife or drywall knife. This ensures proper adhesion of the patching compound. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4anifphxDnk 100 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10926-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/czkWV6BvoS0/hqdefault.jpg Surface Preparation — Drywall Repair Use a putty knife or sandpaper to remove any loose pieces of paint or drywall around the damaged area. This ensures that the spackle adheres properly and creates a smooth finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/czkWV6BvoS0 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10927-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c85wcsn4nf4/hqdefault.jpg Apply Drywall Patch — Drywall Repair Unpack the drywall repair patch, revealing the metal mesh on one side and a sticky backing on the other. Carefully peel off the protective paper from the sticky side of the patch. Position the patch directly over the hole in the drywall, ensuring it completely covers the damaged area. Apply gentle pressure from the center of the patch outwards towards the edges to adhere it securely to the wall and prevent any wrinkles from forming. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c85wcsn4nf4 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10927-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jxvvNyI4IOk/hqdefault.jpg Mesh Tape and Joint Compound Application for Larger Holes — Drywall Repair For holes larger than approximately half an inch, or those that require more structural support, start by applying self-adhesive mesh wallboard tape over the damaged area. The tape can be easily torn to your desired size by ripping it against the edge of your taping knife. Position the tape to completely cover the hole, overlapping each piece slightly if multiple pieces are needed, as demonstrated in the video where three pieces were used and overlapped. Once the mesh tape is securely in place, apply all-purpose joint compound over the tape, spreading it thinly and evenly to embed the mesh and begin smoothing out the area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jxvvNyI4IOk 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10927-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uvQK7WTkKpI/hqdefault.jpg Using a Patch — Drywall Repair For fist-sized holes, use an 8"x8" mesh adhesive patch. Clean up the edges of the hole and press the patch firmly into place, ensuring no creases or wrinkles. Then, use a putty knife to apply a generous amount of drywall compound, pushing it into the hole and over the patch. Let it dry completely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uvQK7WTkKpI 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10928-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RC1K26lpOR8/hqdefault.jpg Apply First Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Repair Scoop a generous amount of all-purpose joint compound into a mud pan. Using a 6-inch taping knife, apply the joint compound directly over the mesh tape. Ensure the mud completely covers and embeds the tape, filling any gaps around the patch. Apply a sufficient amount of mud to fill the recesses created by the mesh tape. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RC1K26lpOR8 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10928-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EbL0yeZpRDk/hqdefault.jpg Apply Joint Compound — Drywall Repair Apply a thin, even first coat of joint compound over the mesh tape and the drywall patch using a drywall knife. Feather the edges into the existing wall texture to create a smooth transition. Allow this coat to dry completely. Joint compound shrinks as it dries, so a second coat will be necessary. Apply a second, thin coat to fill in any shrunken areas and further smooth the patch. Allow this second coat to dry as well. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EbL0yeZpRDk 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10928-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9DKCzroGdV8/hqdefault.jpg First Coat Application — Drywall Repair Apply a thin layer of joint compound over the patch using a 6 inch taping knife, smoothing it out to create a smooth, even surface. Overlap the surrounding area slightly to blend it with the existing wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9DKCzroGdV8 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10929-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N_YTNoLKnqs/hqdefault.jpg Drying — Drywall Repair Let the joint compound dry completely (overnight or use a hair dryer). https://www.youtube.com/embed/N_YTNoLKnqs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10929-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N_YTNoLKnqs/hqdefault.jpg Drying — Drywall Repair Let the joint compound dry completely (overnight or use a hair dryer). https://www.youtube.com/embed/N_YTNoLKnqs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10929-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N_YTNoLKnqs/hqdefault.jpg Drying — Drywall Repair Let the joint compound dry completely (overnight or use a hair dryer). https://www.youtube.com/embed/N_YTNoLKnqs 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10930-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/tROm2mI3cKo/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Drywall Repair — Drywall Repair Once all coats of joint compound are thoroughly dry, sand the repair area. For the main flat surfaces, use a power sander (like a dust-free drywall sander) to efficiently remove lap marks and achieve a general smoothness. For the edges and corners, use a sanding sponge. The key is to tilt the sponge and apply most of the pressure on the outer edge, feathering it out to prevent creating a sharp ridge or gouge in the finish. The goal is to achieve a gentle, rounded hump with perfectly feathered edges that seamlessly blend into the surrounding wall. After sanding, clean up any dust. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tROm2mI3cKo 3102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10930-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/unJ3kIS3jnU/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Joint Compound — Drywall Repair Once the second coat of joint compound is dry to the touch, prepare your dustless drywall sanding sponge. The video recommends wetting the sponge slightly. Use the abrasive side first to sand down the edges and blend the repair smoothly into the existing wall surface. Switch to the softer side for finer finishing. Regularly rinse the sponge in a container of water as it collects joint compound to maintain its effectiveness. Continue sanding until the entire feathered area is smooth and the transition is imperceptible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/unJ3kIS3jnU 57 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10930-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DXqkab97mTg/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Clean Second Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Repair After the second coat of joint compound has thoroughly dried, sand the area again with sandpaper (e.g., 120-grit or a finer grit for a smoother finish) until it is perfectly smooth and level with the surrounding wall. Once sanded, wipe away all dust using a damp rag. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DXqkab97mTg 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10931-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U3ISTc3tpxw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Repair After allowing the first coat of joint compound to dry for at least an hour, apply a second coat. Using a taping knife, spread a layer of joint compound over the patched area. Instead of a tight skim, apply a slightly thicker layer, about 1/16th of an inch, to effectively cover the transition between the new patch paper and the existing painted wall. This prevents a visible ridge after sanding and painting. Use smooth, consistent strokes to apply the mud, feathering the edges outward from the center of the patch to create a seamless blend with the surrounding wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U3ISTc3tpxw 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10931-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/U3ISTc3tpxw/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Repair After allowing the first coat of joint compound to dry for at least an hour, apply a second coat. Using a taping knife, spread a layer of joint compound over the patched area. Instead of a tight skim, apply a slightly thicker layer, about 1/16th of an inch, to effectively cover the transition between the new patch paper and the existing painted wall. This prevents a visible ridge after sanding and painting. Use smooth, consistent strokes to apply the mud, feathering the edges outward from the center of the patch to create a seamless blend with the surrounding wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/U3ISTc3tpxw 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10931-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dWq18CGF6OE/hqdefault.jpg Second Coat and Smoothing — Drywall Repair Using the putty knife, apply a second coat of joint compound over the patch, feathering the edges out to blend with the surrounding wall. Use the hawk to support your work. Smooth the joint compound until the patch is completely covered and the surface is relatively smooth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dWq18CGF6OE 60 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10932-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vOq_XbVzV5c/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Second Coat — Drywall Repair Once the second coat of joint compound is completely dry, sand the entire feathered area again using a sanding sponge. To ensure a perfectly smooth and level surface, hold a flashlight parallel to the wall. The light will cast shadows that highlight any high spots or imperfections, allowing you to sand them down until the surface is uniform. The goal is to make the repaired area as flat as possible, matching the existing wall's level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vOq_XbVzV5c 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10932-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DXqkab97mTg/hqdefault.jpg Sand and Clean Second Coat of Joint Compound — Drywall Repair After the second coat of joint compound has thoroughly dried, sand the area again with sandpaper (e.g., 120-grit or a finer grit for a smoother finish) until it is perfectly smooth and level with the surrounding wall. Once sanded, wipe away all dust using a damp rag. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DXqkab97mTg 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10932-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GRzbOO5Sc_Y/hqdefault.jpg Sand the Surface — Drywall Repair Once the first coat of joint compound is completely dry and hard, use a sanding sponge to lightly sand the repaired area. Focus on smoothing out any high spots, ridges, or imperfections left from the taping knife. The goal is to create a flat, uniform surface for the subsequent skim coat. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GRzbOO5Sc_Y 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10933-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YU1z2y11KZY/hqdefault.jpg Prime the Repaired Area — Drywall Repair Once the final coat of joint compound is dry and sanded perfectly smooth, it's time to prime. Pour an appropriate amount of white primer into a paint tray. Using a small roller, apply the primer over the entire patched area. Start rolling in the middle of the patch and work your way outwards, feathering the edges into the surrounding wall. This technique helps to blend the new primer with the existing paint, preventing a harsh line once the final paint is applied. Allow the primer to dry for at least an hour, or as recommended by the product manufacturer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YU1z2y11KZY 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10933-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nDUDJdfQKis/hqdefault.jpg Prime the Repaired Area — Drywall Repair After the final coat of drywall compound has fully dried (which may take a few hours), it's time to prime the repaired area. Pour Zinsser Drywall Primer into a paint tray and use a roller (the 1/2-inch nap roller for textured walls is appropriate here) to apply an even coat over the entire patch and slightly onto the surrounding wall. Priming is a critical step as it seals the compound, provides a uniform base for paint, and most importantly, highlights any remaining imperfections or uneven spots that might not have been visible before. This allows for final touch-ups before proceeding to texturing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nDUDJdfQKis 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10933-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KNJLPBfGu4s/hqdefault.jpg Prime and Paint — Drywall Repair With the joint compound repair fully dried, smoothed, and cleaned, the area is ready for painting. Apply a coat of primer, especially if the joint compound is a different color or texture than the surrounding wall, to ensure even paint absorption. Once the primer is dry, apply the desired paint to match the rest of the room. This final step will make the crack completely disappear, leaving a robust and beautiful wall. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KNJLPBfGu4s 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10934-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nBeDa3OWzN8/hqdefault.jpg Paint Repaired Area — Drywall Repair After the primer has dried completely, take a small paint roller and apply paint to the primed areas. Make sure to use paint that matches the existing wall color. Apply the paint in a way that blends the repaired spots with the rest of the wall, ensuring seamless coverage. You may need to apply a second coat if necessary, allowing adequate drying time between coats. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nBeDa3OWzN8 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10934-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YU1z2y11KZY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Paint to the Repaired Area — Drywall Repair After the primer has dried completely, apply the final paint coats. Pour the wall paint (matching the existing wall color) into a clean paint tray. First, use a paintbrush to carefully 'cut in' along the edges where the wall meets the cabinets or trim. Then, use a small roller to apply the paint to the main patched area, again starting in the middle and feathering out to blend seamlessly with the surrounding wall. Apply a second coat of paint if necessary, following the same cutting-in and rolling technique, to ensure complete coverage and a uniform finish. The goal is to make the repaired crack completely disappear. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YU1z2y11KZY 69 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10934-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7iHTs5U7CXI/hqdefault.jpg Apply Topcoat Paint — Drywall Repair Once the primer is completely dry, apply the final topcoat of paint. Use paint that matches the color and finish of the existing wall. Apply the paint evenly over the primed patch, extending slightly beyond its edges to blend seamlessly with the surrounding wall. Depending on the paint and desired coverage, you may need to apply two coats, allowing adequate drying time between each. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7iHTs5U7CXI 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10921-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ltfYVjIRCa8/hqdefault.jpg Securely Position the Ladder — Gutter Cleaning Before raising the ladder, assess the ground conditions. If the ground is hard and flat (like gravel), ensure the ladder's anti-slip grips are down. If the ground is soft dirt or has a slight slope, flip the ladder feet up to expose pointed ends that can dig into the ground for better stability. To check the proper angle, place your feet at the base of the ladder, then extend your arms straight out in front of you at shoulder height. If you can comfortably touch the rung directly in front of you, the ladder is at approximately a 75-degree angle, which is ideal. Additionally, ensure the top of the ladder extends at least 3 feet (about 0.9 meters) above the roofline to provide a secure handhold and easy transition to and from the roof. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ltfYVjIRCa8 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10921-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uhaO2uyVWdU/hqdefault.jpg Set Up Ladder Safely — Gutter Cleaning Before beginning the roof inspection, safely set up your ladder. Extend the ladder so that it reaches well above the edge of the roof, providing stability and a secure handhold when ascending and descending. If working in snowy or icy conditions, ensure the ladder's base is on a surface that provides adequate grip. Check the ladder's angle to ensure it is proper and stable. Some ladders may have a designation on the edge indicating the correct angle; if so, refer to it. Confirm overall stability before climbing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uhaO2uyVWdU 77 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10921-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hr-JW3lxyPk/hqdefault.jpg Ensure Ladder Safety — Gutter Cleaning Before beginning the cleaning process, ensure crucial safety measures are in place. Always position the ladder's base firmly on solid ground to prevent instability. The ladder should also extend at least 3 feet above the roofline, providing a secure grab point and ensuring you don't have to overreach. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hr-JW3lxyPk 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10922-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IX-pv3cH6Y4/hqdefault.jpg Clear Large Debris — Gutter Cleaning Starting near a downspout, put on your work gloves, optionally layering latex gloves underneath to keep your hands dry. Begin by manually removing large debris such as leaves, twigs, and pine needles. Deposit this debris into one of the buckets attached to your ladder. For more compacted or stubborn debris, use a trowel or gutter scoop to scrape and remove it effectively. Pay close attention to the downspout strainer and remove any trapped debris to ensure clear passage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IX-pv3cH6Y4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10922-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KdT2wxwZ0Po/hqdefault.jpg Clear Large Debris by Hand — Gutter Cleaning Once safely on the ladder, use your gloved hands to clear out all large debris from the gutters. This includes leaves, twigs, pine needles, and any other loose materials. Collect the debris in a bucket or on a tarp on the ground for easy disposal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KdT2wxwZ0Po 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10922-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4sXY5AN0hv0/hqdefault.jpg Remove Large Debris — Gutter Cleaning Begin by safely ascending a ladder to reach the gutters. The first task is to remove large debris such as twigs and dried leaves from the gutter trough. The presenter demonstrates using bare hands for this initial removal of bulkier items. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4sXY5AN0hv0 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10923-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4sXY5AN0hv0/hqdefault.jpg Flush Gutters with Water — Gutter Cleaning Once the majority of the solid debris is removed, use a garden hose with a spray nozzle to flush out any remaining grime and small particles. Start flushing from the end of the gutter opposite the downspout, directing the water flow towards the downspout. This ensures that any residual dirt is pushed down the gutter and out through the downspout, leaving the gutter clean. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4sXY5AN0hv0 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10923-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IX-pv3cH6Y4/hqdefault.jpg Flush Gutters — Gutter Cleaning After clearing the solid debris, attach a spray nozzle to your garden hose. Turn on the water and begin flushing the gutters. A helpful technique is to start flushing at the end farthest from the downspout, allowing the water to carry any remaining small particles towards the downspout. Observe the water coming out of the downspout. If the flow is significantly less than the amount of water going in, it indicates a clog in the downspout itself. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IX-pv3cH6Y4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10923-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KdT2wxwZ0Po/hqdefault.jpg Wash Gutters with Hose — Gutter Cleaning With all visible debris removed, use a garden hose with a high-pressure nozzle to wash out the gutters. Start from the end opposite the downspout and systematically flush the remaining grit and dirt towards the downspout. Observe the water flow to ensure it drains properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KdT2wxwZ0Po 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10924-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IX-pv3cH6Y4/hqdefault.jpg Remove Downspout Clogs — Gutter Cleaning If you identified a clog in the downspout during the flushing step, you'll need to address it. Guide your garden hose up the downspout from the bottom, or down from the top if accessible. Turn the water on at full pressure to attempt to dislodge the clog. Continue flushing until water flows freely and without obstruction. If the clog does not dislodge with water pressure, you may need to use a plumber's snake to break it up and push it through. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IX-pv3cH6Y4 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10924-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nkFf5r7dtF8/hqdefault.jpg Unclog Downspouts — Gutter Cleaning If your gutter is not draining properly after cleaning, there's likely a clog in the downspout. For downspouts that are one solid piece, you will need to remove the bands securing it to the house using a drill. Once detached, slide the downspout out and flush it thoroughly with a garden hose to clear any obstructions. Reattach the downspout to the house. If you have a short piece of downspout running into a drainage system, only remove that short piece. Cover the open pipe of the drainage system with a bucket or measuring cup to catch any dislodged debris. Then, feed a hose nozzle up the downspout, spraying with full pressure to release the clog. If the hose method doesn't work, try using a drum auger, also known as a plumber's snake. Feed the auger up through the downspout until it stops. Lock the collar, then spin the line as you feed it further into the downspout. Once the clog is broken, pull the auger back out. This type of auger can also be used with a drill for added power. After clearing the clog, reattach any removed downspout pieces and flush the gutters again with the hose to ensure complete drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nkFf5r7dtF8 60 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10924-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MBZXinQg3Fo/hqdefault.jpg Clear Downspout Blockages — Gutter Cleaning Begin by addressing the downspouts, as they are crucial for directing water away from your home. First, manually clear any large debris visible at the top opening of the downspout. Then, take your garden hose and insert it into the top of the downspout, blasting water downwards to dislodge and flush out any blockages. If water still doesn't flow freely from the bottom exit of the downspout, insert the hose from the bottom opening and push water upwards. This back-and-forth action helps to break up and remove stubborn clogs that may not clear from the top down. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MBZXinQg3Fo 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10925-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IX-pv3cH6Y4/hqdefault.jpg Check Fasteners and Inspect Gutters — Gutter Cleaning With the interiors cleaned and leaks addressed, inspect the entire gutter system, including all sections and downspouts, for secure attachment to the house. Ensure that all gutter fasteners (e.g., spikes and ferrules, hidden hangers, or straps) are tight and properly holding the gutters in place. If any fasteners are loose or missing, add support hangers or reattach the gutters to the fascia board as needed using appropriate gutter hardware and a drill. Also, take this opportunity to visually inspect for any physical damage, such as dents, cracks, or loose sections, which may require further repair or replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IX-pv3cH6Y4 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10925-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KdT2wxwZ0Po/hqdefault.jpg Replace Gutter Hangers — Gutter Cleaning Check all gutter hangers for any looseness or missing components. Tighten any loose hangers using a screwdriver or a drill with the appropriate driver bit. Replace any missing or severely damaged hangers to ensure the gutters are securely attached to the fascia board and can withstand the weight of water and debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KdT2wxwZ0Po 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10925-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IX-pv3cH6Y4/hqdefault.jpg Check Drainage and Seal Leaks — Gutter Cleaning Once the gutters and downspouts are clear, perform a final flush with the garden hose to confirm proper flow and drainage. As the water flows, carefully inspect all seams and joints along the gutters for any leaks. If you identify any leaks, use gutter sealant in a caulk gun to make the necessary repairs. Apply the sealant directly to the leaky areas, ensuring a watertight seal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IX-pv3cH6Y4 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10912-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WghjpBHmy40/hqdefault.jpg Perform a Soil Test (Perc Test) — Septic System Installation Before installing a septic system, a crucial step is to conduct a soil test, often called a 'perc test' (percolation test) or a soil evaluation. This test helps determine the soil's absorption rate, which dictates the type of septic system suitable for the property. Different soil types have varying capabilities to absorb treated wastewater; for example, some soils might require a holding tank that needs regular pumping, while others can support a drain field system where wastewater is treated and discharged into the soil. The video shows an example of a soil evaluation report, which provides detailed information about soil layers, absorption rates, and recommendations for the appropriate septic system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WghjpBHmy40 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10912-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-naaVVmCQiQ/hqdefault.jpg Site Assessment & Septic System Planning — Septic System Installation Begin by understanding the necessity of a septic system in a rural residential construction project where municipal sewage is unavailable. The system typically comprises a septic tank, a distribution box (often referred to as the 'brain'), and a septic field with multiple trenches. Assess the site's topography to ensure adequate elevation differences for a gravity-fed system, which is crucial for efficient waste flow. For example, the septic field in the video is approximately 75 feet long and contains four trenches spaced about 10 feet apart, positioned lower than the house and the septic tank to utilize natural drainage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-naaVVmCQiQ 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10914-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/t8GUWXsmW54/hqdefault.jpg Building Permit — Septic System Installation The first and most critical stage of any construction project is obtaining the necessary permits. This involves securing both planning permission and building regulation approval. Planning permission requires submitting architectural general arrangement drawings, including floor plans, sections, elevations, and a comprehensive site plan, for review. Building regulation approval, or a building permit, necessitates more detailed architectural drawings, such as specific door and window types, along with structural engineer's drawings and potentially mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) engineer's drawings. These documents must adhere to local building construction codes. All this information is submitted to the local government or relevant department for review and approval. Without these permits, initiating construction is illegal and can lead to severe penalties, including fines, forced demolition of the structure, or even imprisonment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/t8GUWXsmW54 61 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10914-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/44gTPx_ouOM/hqdefault.jpg Submit Permit Application and Await Approval — Septic System Installation After all the required documents are gathered and prepared, submit them to the relevant local self-government body (municipality, corporation, or panchayat) for the building permit. It is crucial to await approval before initiating any construction work. The speaker explicitly warns against starting construction without a permit, listing severe consequences such as: denial of house numbers, inability to obtain permanent or temporary electricity and water connections, difficulty securing home loans, and potential demolition of the structure if building rules are violated. This step underscores the importance of legal compliance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/44gTPx_ouOM 60 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10914-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LP60Tus4okA/hqdefault.jpg Meet with a Permit Technician — Septic System Installation Engage with a permit technician at the building department. They can provide the specific application and information you need to secure a permit. It's crucial to get all the correct information upfront to avoid delays and ensure your project complies with local regulations. Some building departments may send you an email with the application, while others require you to visit in person. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LP60Tus4okA 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10915-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3I1j0x51Wv8/hqdefault.jpg Excavate Trenches and Tank Hole for New System — Septic System Installation Using the mini-excavator, continue digging a series of trenches from the house towards the new septic tank location, which will be about 50 feet away on the other side of the lawn. Carefully dig the trenches to the required depth and ensure a proper grade using a level stick and measuring tape. The old sprinkler lines encountered during excavation should be removed. During this process, a separate deeper hole is also excavated for the new concrete septic tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3I1j0x51Wv8 203 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10915-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PID3bMjXbMI/hqdefault.jpg Excavate and Level Septic Tank Pit — Septic System Installation After the field line trenches are dug, a larger hole is excavated for the two-compartment, 900-gallon concrete septic tank. The bottom of this pit must be perfectly level to ensure the tank settles correctly and functions properly. A worker enters the pit to rake and level the base, preparing it for the tank's arrival. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PID3bMjXbMI 103 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10915-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m0RcNKoENm4/hqdefault.jpg Excavate and Level the Tank Hole — Septic System Installation Excavate the marked area for the septic tank to the required depth. Ensure the hole has straight, clean, and square edges, as this indicates a professional installation. The bottom of the excavation must be precisely leveled and compacted to provide a stable and flat bed for the heavy concrete tank. Use a grade laser or a transit for accuracy. In the absence of specialized equipment, a long 2x4 with a spirit level can be used to achieve a level surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m0RcNKoENm4 73 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10916-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-naaVVmCQiQ/hqdefault.jpg Installing the Septic Tank and Connections — Septic System Installation Position the pre-cast concrete septic tank at a lower elevation than the house but higher than the distribution box and septic field. This large concrete vault is designed to hold household wastewater, allowing solids to settle and floatables to separate, with anaerobic bacteria breaking down organic matter. The tank typically has thick concrete walls (e.g., 3 inches) and a robust top (e.g., 5 inches thick) to withstand ground pressure. Connect the main waste line from the house to the septic tank and the septic tank's outlet to the distribution box, ensuring all connections are watertight. Adherence to local building codes and health department regulations is paramount for septic system installation, and obtaining the necessary permits is a mandatory prerequisite. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-naaVVmCQiQ 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10916-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3I1j0x51Wv8/hqdefault.jpg Install New Concrete Septic Tank and Risers — Septic System Installation Install the new concrete septic tank using a crane truck due to its significant weight (a 1,000-gallon tank can weigh several tons). The tank must be carefully lowered into the excavated hole. Once the tank is settled, install green corrugated plastic risers onto the access openings of the tank. These risers provide an accessible pathway to the tank for future pumping and maintenance, especially useful when the tank is buried deep underground. Apply sealant around the base of the risers to ensure a watertight seal before fitting the lids. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3I1j0x51Wv8 102 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10916-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/m0RcNKoENm4/hqdefault.jpg Verify Tank Placement and Level — Septic System Installation Once the septic tank is settled in the excavation, perform a final check to ensure it is perfectly level. Place a spirit level across the top of the tank to confirm it sits flat. Verify that the inlet and outlet pipes are correctly oriented and that the inspection risers are aligned. The tank should be stable and ready for connecting to the house's waste line and the leach field system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/m0RcNKoENm4 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10917-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8uTuVWrPslU/hqdefault.jpg Installing Perforated Pipes and Washed Rock — Septic System Installation Perforated white PVC pipes are laid in the bottom of the excavated trenches for the drain field. These pipes have holes on the bottom to allow the treated wastewater to drain into the surrounding soil. The pipes are carefully set on wooden stakes to ensure they are at the perfect, level height, which is about 6 inches above the trench bottom. After the pipes are in place, washed rock is carefully poured into the trenches, completely surrounding the pipes. This rock layer provides an area for the water to dissipate and for biological treatment to occur. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8uTuVWrPslU 75 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10917-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/jBZxP09oriA/hqdefault.jpg Lay Permeable Base Layer — Septic System Installation Once the trenches are ready, a base layer of permeable material, typically washed sand or gravel (usually 3/4 inch to 1.5 inch clean stone), is spread at the bottom of the trenches. This layer serves multiple purposes: it provides a stable and level bed for the drainage components and offers an initial filtration medium. This granular material is carefully spread and leveled to ensure uniform depth and support across the entire leach field area. The video shows the excavated trenches with what appears to be a light-colored sandy material forming the base of the leach field area, suggesting this layer has been successfully installed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jBZxP09oriA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10917-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K-5z7D-LDZo/hqdefault.jpg Install Drain Field and Transport Lines — Septic System Installation Excavate trenches for the drain field, ensuring they are deep enough to prevent freezing, especially in cold climates. Lay the black polyline transport pipe in these trenches, leading from the septic tank's pump discharge to the drain field area. Install low-profile infiltrator domes (chambers) in the trenches. These domes provide an open area for effluent to percolate into the soil, and their low profile allows for shallower trenching, reducing excavation time and labor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K-5z7D-LDZo 63 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10918-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K-5z7D-LDZo/hqdefault.jpg Connect House to Septic Tank and Install Internal Components — Septic System Installation Connect the main waste pipe from the house to the septic tank's inlet. Within the septic tank, install a sanitary T fitting on the inlet pipe. This fitting serves to diffuse the velocity of incoming waste and promote better separation of solids from the liquid effluent, preventing disturbances to the settled layers in the tank. Ensure all connections are secure and watertight. The high-head pump will be installed in the second compartment of the tank, with its discharge line leading out towards the drain field. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K-5z7D-LDZo 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10918-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PID3bMjXbMI/hqdefault.jpg Install Septic Tank and Field Lines — Septic System Installation A concrete septic tank is delivered to the site and carefully lowered into the prepared pit. The tank is a two-compartment design, where solids settle in the first chamber, and liquid flows into the second before discharging into the field lines. The 3-inch pipe stubbed out from the house's plumbing is connected to the inlet of the septic tank, including a cleanout access point for future maintenance. The outlet pipe from the septic tank is then connected to the field lines. The presenter notes that they use 'Easy Flow Pipe,' a gravelless pipe system filled with styrofoam peanuts and covered in a mesh, which the subcontractor prefers over traditional chamber pipe for its ease of installation and performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PID3bMjXbMI 150 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10918-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RR9dRzhvUPs/hqdefault.jpg Install PVC Piping for Inlet, Overflow, and Outlet — Septic System Installation Install PVC pipes for the septic tank's functionality. First, place a 4-inch PVC pipe (Series 900) as the inlet from the toilet/CR. Next, connect a 3-inch PVC pipe (Series 1000) with a T-fitting to create an overflow from the first chamber to the second. This design allows solids to settle in the first chamber, with only liquid flowing into the second. Finally, install a 2-inch PVC pipe (Series 1000) as the outlet for the treated effluent, directing it to a drainage canal. Ensure all pipe connections are sealed with solvent cement for a leak-proof system. The outlet pipe should be positioned slightly lower than the overflow pipe from the first chamber to facilitate gravity flow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RR9dRzhvUPs 108 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10919-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PID3bMjXbMI/hqdefault.jpg Inspection, Backfilling, and Grading — Septic System Installation After the septic tank and field lines are installed and all connections are made, a state inspector conducts a final inspection to ensure compliance with all health and safety regulations. Once approved, a bulldozer is used to backfill the trenches and cover the septic tank. The disturbed area is then graded to blend with the surrounding landscape, ensuring proper surface drainage away from the house and the septic system components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PID3bMjXbMI 218 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10919-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8uTuVWrPslU/hqdefault.jpg Backfilling and Final Grading of Drain Field — Septic System Installation The drain field trenches are backfilled with the excavated soil using a skid steer loader. The soil is carefully pushed back over the kraft paper. Once the trenches are filled, the entire area is graded and leveled to prepare for planting grass. The presenter shows the finished drain field with evenly mounded trenches and mentions his plan to plant grass seed to ensure the area remains green and stable, preventing it from becoming a mud pit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8uTuVWrPslU 60 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10919-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QNHPRlW8H2Y/hqdefault.jpg Final Touches and Landscaping — Septic System Installation Complete the project by performing the final touches and landscaping. Backfill the excavated areas around both the septic tank and the soak pit with soil, carefully compacting it to prevent settlement. Ensure that the surrounding ground is landscaped in such a way that rainwater and surface runoff are directed away from the septic tank and soak pit walls. This prevents excess water from infiltrating the system, which can overload it or affect its efficiency. A crucial final rule before using the septic system is to fill the septic tank completely with water. This helps to establish the water level, compact any remaining loose soil, and provide the necessary liquid environment for the initial bacterial action to begin effectively. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QNHPRlW8H2Y 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10920-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PID3bMjXbMI/hqdefault.jpg Inspection, Backfilling, and Grading — Septic System Installation After the septic tank and field lines are installed and all connections are made, a state inspector conducts a final inspection to ensure compliance with all health and safety regulations. Once approved, a bulldozer is used to backfill the trenches and cover the septic tank. The disturbed area is then graded to blend with the surrounding landscape, ensuring proper surface drainage away from the house and the septic system components. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PID3bMjXbMI 218 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10920-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WghjpBHmy40/hqdefault.jpg Finalize Site Grading and System Completion — Septic System Installation The septic system installation is complete, with the tanks buried and the area nicely graded. The video shows the final appearance of the installation site, with the three access covers (manholes) now visible at the surface, ready for future maintenance and inspection. The ground around the system has been smoothed and prepared, indicating the conclusion of the heavy construction phase. The narrator expresses hope that the provided information assists viewers with their own septic system endeavors. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WghjpBHmy40 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10920-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Sk8xHVERh3s/hqdefault.jpg Pass First County Inspection — Septic System Installation After the initial installation and backfilling, the county inspector visits the site. The inspector, being unfamiliar with this specific unconventional system, primarily focuses on verifying the trench's depth and length, relying heavily on the submitted design plans. The system successfully passes this first inspection, marking a significant milestone in the project. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sk8xHVERh3s 86 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10910-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — I want to install carpeted treads on my steps Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10910-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — I want to install carpeted treads on my steps Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10910-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — I want to install carpeted treads on my steps Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10911-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — I want to install carpeted treads on my steps Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10911-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e42OOnatZvs/hqdefault.jpg Align and Install Carpet Stair Tread — I want to install carpeted treads on my steps Begin by taking one pre-made carpet stair tread and positioning it on the first wooden stair. Carefully align the front edge of the carpet tread with the front edge of the stair. Ensure the tread is centered horizontally on the step, leaving an even gap on both sides. Once the tread is perfectly aligned, firmly press it down onto the stair surface, working from the front edge towards the back. This action activates the adhesive backing or secures the non-slip material integrated into the tread, ensuring it adheres securely to the wooden stair. Repeat this process for each subsequent stair, maintaining consistent alignment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e42OOnatZvs 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10911-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Tread — I want to install carpeted treads on my steps Align the stair tread carefully on the wooden stair, making sure it is centered and straight relative to the edge of the step. Once you are satisfied with the positioning, press down firmly on the area where the first adhesive strip was exposed to secure that edge of the tread. Then, reach under the tread, if possible, or gently lift the unadhered portion, and peel off the second protective paper strip from the remaining adhesive backing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10902-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/D0nykYr0poE/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Seal All Ductwork Openings — Air Duct Cleaning Before conducting the test, prepare the house by sealing all supply and return duct openings. This is done by covering each vent with a transparent plastic sheeting or specialized tape to create an airtight seal, preventing any air from escaping or entering the duct system through these openings. The presenter demonstrates sealing a ceiling vent and a floor vent with tape, and another person is shown sealing a large wall-mounted return vent. Once all vents are sealed, insert a pressure probe into one of the sealed registers, ensuring it is properly secured to measure the pressure within the duct system accurately. https://www.youtube.com/embed/D0nykYr0poE 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10902-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2ska48HcMU8/hqdefault.jpg Seal All Plastic Edges — Air Duct Cleaning Ensure all seams and edges of the plastic sheeting are fully sealed to prevent dust leakage. Use painter's blue tape to seal the top edges of the plastic sheeting to the ceiling, creating a tight seal. For the bottom edges, where the wall plastic meets the floor plastic, use a strong, adhesive tape like Gorilla tape to create a robust, plastic-to-plastic seal. This dual-taping method ensures maximum containment efficiency. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2ska48HcMU8 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10902-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Mmp4AyvviHI/hqdefault.jpg Seal Wall-Mounted Vents with Masking Tape — Air Duct Cleaning For wall-mounted vents, particularly those near split system air conditioners or old combustion air vents that are no longer in use, apply masking tape (white painters tape) to temporarily seal them off. Ensure the surface around the vent is clean before applying the tape. Carefully tear or cut strips of tape and press them firmly over the vent grilles. This method is easily removable and reversible, making it ideal for rental properties where permanent alterations are not allowed or desired. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Mmp4AyvviHI 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10903-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Rw4riExWfUQ/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Access Indoor Air Handler — Air Duct Cleaning Return inside the house and locate the indoor air handler unit. This unit is typically found in a utility closet, attic, or basement. The video shows entering a closet, initially dark, and then revealing the air handler. The narrator explicitly states it's an 'indoor unit right behind this door.' Ensure clear access to the unit for further inspection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Rw4riExWfUQ 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10903-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YwFkhTqgazM/hqdefault.jpg Disassemble the Blower Unit — Air Duct Cleaning Begin by removing the panels of the air handler or furnace. Before proceeding, ensure the power to the unit is completely off by switching off the electrical disconnect. Once power is off, disconnect the blower motor wiring plugs and any ground wires or screws holding the blower housing in place. Carefully slide the blower housing out, being cautious not to damage any wires or components that may be in the way. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YwFkhTqgazM 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10903-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4cydNuaY2mI/hqdefault.jpg Introduction and Safety Precautions — Air Duct Cleaning Begin by observing the air handler unit. The video highlights the importance of this maintenance for efficiency and clean air, as dust buildup on the blower fan can significantly impact performance. Before proceeding with any work, locate the main breaker for the HVAC system, typically in the garage or a service panel, and turn it off to ensure safety. Additionally, inside the air handler unit, locate and switch off the local breaker. This dual disconnection provides maximum electrical safety. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4cydNuaY2mI 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10904-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qkeBQlAvHUE/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Blower Wheel — Air Duct Cleaning With the blower unit removed, proceed to clean the blower wheel thoroughly. Use a brush to meticulously remove all the caked-on dirt and debris from each fin of the blower wheel. For heavily soiled areas, a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment or a specialized coil cleaner spray can be used in conjunction with the brush. Ensure all surfaces are clean to maximize airflow and efficiency. After cleaning, the wheel should appear significantly cleaner, as demonstrated in the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qkeBQlAvHUE 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10904-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/MODIBXCGuRE/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Blower Wheel — Air Duct Cleaning Once the blower motor and wheel assembly is out, inspect the blower wheel fins for accumulated dust and debris. Use a shop-vac equipped with a brush attachment to thoroughly vacuum all the dust from between the fins and the surrounding housing. For stubborn or heavily caked-on debris, you may need to use a stiff brush to dislodge it before vacuuming. The video suggests that for very heavy cleaning, the motor could be unbolted from the housing (four bolts and a grounding screw), and the wheel could be hosed off or cleaned with an air compressor outside, then allowed to dry completely before reassembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MODIBXCGuRE 77 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10904-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4cydNuaY2mI/hqdefault.jpg Cleaning the Blower Fan — Air Duct Cleaning Position the blower fan assembly so that the blades are easily accessible. A hard toothbrush is recommended for scrubbing the caked-on dust from the fan blades. Avoid using chemical cleaners, as they are often unnecessary and can potentially damage components. As you clean, pay close attention to avoid disturbing any small metal clips or weights attached to the fan blades; these are factory-installed balancing weights, and removing them can cause severe vibrations and damage to the motor during operation. After manually brushing off the dust, use a leaf blower or similar air blower to thoroughly blow out all loosened dust and debris from the fan and motor assembly. This will clear the fan's vents and ensure optimal airflow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4cydNuaY2mI 109 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10905-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xu7pKLu8e4/hqdefault.jpg Connect Vacuum System and Prepare Agitation Tool — Air Duct Cleaning Attach a large, flexible vacuum hose from a powerful central vacuum system to one of the newly created access points in the ductwork. This creates a strong suction that will draw dislodged debris out of the system. In tandem, prepare the agitation tool, often called a 'whip,' which consists of multiple tentacles that spray compressed air. This tool will be inserted into other access points to agitate and loosen debris from the duct walls, allowing the vacuum to capture it. The process is described as turning the entire duct system into a 'big vacuum cleaner.' https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xu7pKLu8e4 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10905-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qBIU4FDdpBs/hqdefault.jpg Vacuum Interior of Air Ducts — Air Duct Cleaning While the cleaned vents are drying, take the opportunity to clean the interior of the exposed air duct openings. Use a shop vacuum with a hose attachment to thoroughly vacuum out any accumulated dust, debris, and loose particles from inside the ducts. Insert the vacuum hose as far as possible into the openings of wall vents, floor vents, and any other accessible vents such as bathroom exhaust fans, ensuring you capture as much debris as possible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qBIU4FDdpBs 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10905-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xu7pKLu8e4/hqdefault.jpg Clean Return Ducts — Air Duct Cleaning After cleaning the supply side, the focus shifts to the return air side. The technician will 'tighten up' the branches, meaning he ensures all branches leading to the main return trunk are sealed or directed towards the vacuum. He then removes the return air grills upstairs and inserts the agitation tool as far as possible down each return branch. The tool's action dislodges any remaining debris, driving it towards the central vacuum system for final collection. This thorough pass ensures that all parts of the return system are clear of contaminants, including any debris that might have been caught on internal screws or fittings. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xu7pKLu8e4 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10906-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bWCr66fX_k4/hqdefault.jpg Clean Branch Ductwork (Air Wash & Brush) — Air Duct Cleaning Begin the internal duct cleaning by first taking 'before' pictures of the branch ductwork through the open vent. Then, a specialized air washing tool is inserted into each branch line to blast away loose dust and debris. If necessary, a cable-driven rotating brush is used to scrub the interior surfaces of the ductwork, dislodging stubborn buildup. Another air wash then pushes all the loosened particles down the branch line towards the main negative air vacuum system for collection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bWCr66fX_k4 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10906-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xu7pKLu8e4/hqdefault.jpg Agitate and Vacuum Supply Ducts — Air Duct Cleaning Insert the agitator tool into the ductwork through the previously made access points. Activate the air compressor to make the tentacles of the agitator whip around, spraying air and dislodging accumulated debris from the interior surfaces of the ducts. The powerful central vacuum, connected elsewhere in the system, simultaneously sucks up the airborne debris. The video shows the large amount of dust and dirt collected in the vacuum hose after cleaning the supply side, demonstrating the effectiveness of this method. Repeat this process for all branches and sections of the supply ducts, ensuring thorough cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xu7pKLu8e4 48 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10906-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qBIU4FDdpBs/hqdefault.jpg Vacuum Interior of Air Ducts — Air Duct Cleaning While the cleaned vents are drying, take the opportunity to clean the interior of the exposed air duct openings. Use a shop vacuum with a hose attachment to thoroughly vacuum out any accumulated dust, debris, and loose particles from inside the ducts. Insert the vacuum hose as far as possible into the openings of wall vents, floor vents, and any other accessible vents such as bathroom exhaust fans, ensuring you capture as much debris as possible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qBIU4FDdpBs 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10907-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2xu7pKLu8e4/hqdefault.jpg Apply Sanitizing Fog and Final System Treatment — Air Duct Cleaning After all physical debris has been removed, introduce a fogger into the duct system. This device is used to aerosolize and distribute a sanitizing product, such as 'Benefect,' throughout the entire ductwork. Run the fogger for approximately five minutes to ensure adequate coverage. This product is described as a non-toxic, natural, alcohol-molecule based solution that effectively kills mold, bacteria, and viruses. It continues to work for about 4-6 months, inhibiting future microbial growth. This final step significantly improves the air quality by eliminating biological contaminants that contribute to odors and health issues. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2xu7pKLu8e4 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10907-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i9h3wfcg1gk/hqdefault.jpg Apply to HVAC Return Vent — Air Duct Cleaning Apply the prepared Duct Aid spray can to a clean surface of an air conditioning return vent. The can is designed with a magnetic attachment, allowing it to securely adhere to the metal surface of the vent. Once positioned, firmly press down on the deployment valve (the button on the cap) to release the deodorizer and sanitizer into the air duct system. The product, which contains Thymol, is effective in treating bad odors and mold, working the 'natural way' to improve air quality. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i9h3wfcg1gk 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10907-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/i9h3wfcg1gk/hqdefault.jpg Read Instructions — Air Duct Cleaning Begin by familiarizing yourself with the Duct Aid HVAC Air Duct System Deodorizer with Thymol spray. Carefully read the instruction panel located on the side of the can to understand the product's usage, safety precautions, and specific directions for optimal results. This ensures you are aware of how to properly and safely apply the deodorizer and sanitizer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/i9h3wfcg1gk 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10908-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YwFkhTqgazM/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble and Test the Blower Unit — Air Duct Cleaning Once the blower wheel and housing are completely dry, bring them back inside. Reassemble the motor to the blower housing, making sure it's fastened securely. Grease the motor shaft with silicone grease or another appropriate lubricant before reattaching the blower wheel. Slide the blower wheel back onto the shaft, ensuring it is perfectly centered and aligned. Spin the wheel by hand to check for any rubbing or abnormal noises before tightening the set screw. Reinsert the entire blower assembly back into the air handler, fastening it with the screws. Reconnect all electrical wiring, ensuring they are properly routed and securely connected. Finally, restore power and run test the blower motor to check for abnormal noises and check the current draw. Test the rest of the HVAC equipment to ensure full functionality. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YwFkhTqgazM 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10908-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4cydNuaY2mI/hqdefault.jpg Reinstallation and Final Checks — Air Duct Cleaning Once the blower fan is clean, carefully slide it back into the air handler, aligning it with the slider mechanisms. Re-secure the fan assembly with the bolts you removed earlier. Reconnect all electrical wires to their original positions, referring to your photos or labels to ensure accuracy. Make sure all connections are secure. Finally, reattach the top cover of the air handler unit. After confirming everything is properly reassembled, return to the main breaker and turn the power back on. Then, switch on the local breaker inside the air handler. Your HVAC system is now ready to operate with improved efficiency and cleaner airflow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4cydNuaY2mI 57 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10908-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GNdwsD-ZCeA/hqdefault.jpg Final Reassembly and System Testing — Air Duct Cleaning Once all cleaning is complete, reattach the main front cover to the unit, ensuring all clips engage securely and it clicks into place. Power on the unit using the remote control. Set it to fan mode first to check the new blower motor's operation, listening for a smooth and quiet sound. Then, switch to heating mode (or cooling, depending on desired operation) and confirm that the unit is blowing air at the correct temperature and operating efficiently. Observe the blower wheel to ensure it's spinning cleanly and quietly, indicating successful repair and cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GNdwsD-ZCeA 53 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10909-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bWCr66fX_k4/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Grills and Vacuum Work Areas — Air Duct Cleaning After all internal duct cleaning and any necessary encapsulation are complete, the cleaned HVAC grills are reinstalled into their original, marked positions. Following reinstallation, the areas around the vents and any other locations where tools or equipment were used are thoroughly vacuumed to remove any remaining dust or debris, ensuring a clean finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bWCr66fX_k4 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10909-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xIIgQlLJYh0/hqdefault.jpg Clean Grille and Inspect Ductwork — Air Duct Cleaning While the filter is drying, take the opportunity to clean the return air grille that remains in the ceiling. Use a vacuum cleaner (like a Dyson handheld vacuum shown in the video) to thoroughly clean off any accumulated dirt, dust, cobwebs, or other debris from the grille's surface and the visible interior of the return air box. For a final touch, you may want to use a feather duster to remove any remaining fine dust. Also, take a moment to inspect the return air box and the ductwork connected to it. Ensure they appear clean and undamaged. If you notice any damage, such as tears in the ductwork or significant rust, contact your air conditioning installer for professional assistance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xIIgQlLJYh0 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10909-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qBIU4FDdpBs/hqdefault.jpg Vacuum Interior of Air Ducts — Air Duct Cleaning While the cleaned vents are drying, take the opportunity to clean the interior of the exposed air duct openings. Use a shop vacuum with a hose attachment to thoroughly vacuum out any accumulated dust, debris, and loose particles from inside the ducts. Insert the vacuum hose as far as possible into the openings of wall vents, floor vents, and any other accessible vents such as bathroom exhaust fans, ensuring you capture as much debris as possible. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qBIU4FDdpBs 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10895-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SYT-Jc0jAvc/hqdefault.jpg Thoroughly Pre-Vacuum the Carpet — Carpet Shampooing Before any wet cleaning, thoroughly vacuum the carpet multiple times to remove as much dry dirt, dust, and debris as possible. The speaker emphasizes that this is a critical step to prevent loose dirt from turning into muddy residue when wet solutions are applied. She demonstrates using both a Dyson and a Shark Navigator vacuum, showing the significant amount of dirt that can be collected even from seemingly clean carpets. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SYT-Jc0jAvc 76 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10895-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1WBiBRhc6EI/hqdefault.jpg Perform Initial Vacuum — Carpet Shampooing After removing large debris, perform an initial vacuum pass over the entire carpeted area. Use a powerful vacuum cleaner, such as a shop vac, with a crevice tool or general carpet nozzle to pick up smaller, loose dirt, dust, and particles. This step clears the surface layer of contamination. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1WBiBRhc6EI 5 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10895-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GsY2NrTGluk/hqdefault.jpg Initial Vacuuming — Carpet Shampooing Begin by thoroughly vacuuming the car's floor mats and carpeted areas. The goal is to remove all loose debris and larger particles that can be easily picked up by the vacuum. Do not spend excessive time trying to remove deeply embedded dirt at this stage, as the subsequent steps will address that. The video demonstrates vacuuming one side of the car's rear floor to allow for a comparison of the before and after results. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GsY2NrTGluk 44 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10896-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lMA6tC0hJfk/hqdefault.jpg Pre-treat Stubborn Stains — Carpet Shampooing Before starting the main cleaning, inspect the carpet for any particularly stubborn or visible stains. Apply a suitable pre-treatment solution, such as Bissell Professional Pet Stain & Odor remover, directly to these 'trouble spots'. Allow the pre-treatment to sit for the recommended time (check product instructions) to help break down the stains, which will make them easier for the carpet cleaner to remove during the hot water extraction process. This step is crucial for achieving the best possible cleaning results on heavily soiled areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lMA6tC0hJfk 12 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10896-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lbf9ZCLay5s/hqdefault.jpg Apply Carpet Cleaning Solution — Carpet Shampooing After vacuuming, apply a generous and even layer of dedicated carpet cleaning solution directly onto the floor mat. The solution should lightly saturate the carpet fibers, ensuring full coverage of any stained areas. The video shows the solution being applied via a spray bottle, but a pump sprayer can also be used for larger areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lbf9ZCLay5s 1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10896-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GsY2NrTGluk/hqdefault.jpg Apply Carpet Cleaners and Light Scrub — Carpet Shampooing Identify and spray heavily stained areas with an enzyme cleaner, such as P&S Enzyme Cleaner, especially for organic stains like milk or sweet tea. Allow it to dwell to break down the organic material. Then, follow up by spraying a general carpet cleaner, like P&S Carpet Bomber, over the entire carpet area, including the enzyme-treated spots. Lightly mist the carpet without oversaturating it. For less dirty or dry areas and edges, lightly spray a microfiber towel with the carpet cleaner and gently rub to clean without excessive effort, as these areas often have floor mats covering them and require less aggressive cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GsY2NrTGluk 110 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10897-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WLbs-Af8vzA/hqdefault.jpg Mix the Solution by Shaking — Carpet Shampooing Once all ingredients have been added to the container, securely screw on the lid. Then, shake the container vigorously for several seconds. This action ensures that all the powdered ingredients are fully dissolved and thoroughly mixed with the liquid components, creating a uniform and effective carpet cleaning solution ready for use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WLbs-Af8vzA 13 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10897-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SYT-Jc0jAvc/hqdefault.jpg Review Important Tips for Carpet Cleaning — Carpet Shampooing To summarize the key learnings for effective DIY carpet refreshing: always vacuum the carpet thoroughly multiple times before any wet cleaning to remove loose dirt, as this is crucial for preventing muddy residue. Ensure you use hot water in your cleaning solution, as heat significantly enhances the cleaning power of both homemade and commercial solutions. To save money, consider making your own solutions with hot water and either white vinegar (for general cleaning) or OxiClean powder (for tough stains). Remember to exercise caution when using OxiClean, especially on colored carpets, as strong concentrations may lead to color loss. By following these essential tips, you can achieve professional-level carpet cleanliness and save on costs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SYT-Jc0jAvc 76 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10897-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SYT-Jc0jAvc/hqdefault.jpg Prepare OxiClean & Hot Water Solution — Carpet Shampooing For carpets with visible and stubborn stains, a more powerful solution can be prepared using OxiClean Versatile Stain Remover powder and hot water. Add about one-quarter of the provided OxiClean scoop into the carpet cleaner's solution reservoir. Then, fill the reservoir with hot water and shake it thoroughly to ensure the powder dissolves completely. This solution is particularly effective for tackling difficult stains, but a cautionary note is given that higher concentrations of OxiClean can potentially lead to color loss on some carpets, so use with discretion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SYT-Jc0jAvc 93 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10898-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/g8oi99gKkfI/hqdefault.jpg Wash Carpet Areas — Carpet Shampooing Begin cleaning by setting the machine to the "wash" cycle. Pull the trigger on the handle while pushing the machine forward and backward over the target area (e.g., high-traffic areas in a bedroom or hallway). This action dispenses both water and cleaning solution onto the carpet. After a few passes, release the trigger and make one or two dry passes to extract the dispensed liquid from the carpet. This ensures the cleaning solution isn't left in the carpet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/g8oi99gKkfI 42 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10898-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/SYT-Jc0jAvc/hqdefault.jpg Clean Carpet with Proper Technique — Carpet Shampooing When actively cleaning the carpet, use a slow and deliberate technique. Make a long, slow forward pass, simultaneously releasing the chosen cleaning solution (vinegar or OxiClean mixture) onto the carpet. This allows the solution sufficient time to penetrate the carpet fibers and begin to break down embedded dirt and stains. After the solution has been applied, let it dwell on the carpet for several seconds, or even up to a minute, to maximize its working time. Then, make a slow backward pass, allowing the carpet cleaner to effectively suction up the dirty solution and any dislodged grime. For very dirty carpets, this entire process may need to be repeated multiple times until the water extracted into the dirty water tank appears visibly cleaner, indicating thorough cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/SYT-Jc0jAvc 102 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10898-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lMA6tC0hJfk/hqdefault.jpg Operate the Carpet Cleaner — Carpet Shampooing Position the carpet cleaning machine in a corner of the room, facing the wall. Engage the handle release to lower the handle into an operating position. Turn on the main power switch, typically located at the back of the machine. To activate the cleaning solution and scrubbing brushes, pull the red trigger on the handle. While holding the trigger, slowly pull the machine backward in a straight line towards you. The clear spinning wheel (flow indicator) will confirm that solution is being applied. Overlap each pass slightly to ensure comprehensive coverage. Once you complete a pass, release the trigger, reposition the machine, and repeat the process. Continue this method across the entire carpeted area. The clean water tank will need frequent refilling, and the dirty water tank will need to be emptied as it fills. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lMA6tC0hJfk 160 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10899-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/x1Un9fApPsI/hqdefault.jpg Extract Cleaning Solution and Dirt — Carpet Shampooing Use a heated carpet extractor to thoroughly rinse and remove the cleaning solution, dirt, and excess moisture from the carpet. Make sure to perform multiple, slow passes over each section of the carpet. The presenter uses a Mighty Light 807 heated carpet extractor, which further aids in the cleaning process by applying heat during extraction. It is important to continue extracting until no more dirty water is being pulled up, and only clean water and minimal suds are visible. Pay close attention to areas that were previously covered by floor mats, as these will likely show a significant difference in color due to prolonged exposure to elements and wear. Communicate these potential permanent discolorations to the customer beforehand to manage expectations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/x1Un9fApPsI 584 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10899-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/g8oi99gKkfI/hqdefault.jpg Rinse and Extract Carpet Thoroughly — Carpet Shampooing After the wash cycle, switch the knob on the clean water reservoir to the "rinse" cycle. Pull the trigger and perform one or two passes forward and backward over the same area. This dispenses clean water without cleaning solution, helping to rinse the carpet. Next, release the trigger and slowly move the machine over the carpet to extract as much liquid as possible. It is crucial to go very slowly during the extraction passes to maximize liquid removal. The carpet should feel damp, not soaking wet, once finished. After cleaning, allow the carpet to dry completely, possibly using a box fan to speed up the process. Avoid stepping on the wet carpet to prevent re-soiling with dirt from feet or shoes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/g8oi99gKkfI 65 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10899-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wtdEei2RhK0/hqdefault.jpg Final Rinse and Water Extraction — Carpet Shampooing Thoroughly rinse the entire carpet surface with clean water from a hose, making sure to flush out any remaining cleaning solution and embedded dirt. Immediately follow with the heavy-duty squeegee tool to extract as much rinse water as possible, promoting faster drying and leaving the carpet fibers in a clean, restored state. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wtdEei2RhK0 4 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10900-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lMA6tC0hJfk/hqdefault.jpg Allow for Proper Drying — Carpet Shampooing Once the carpet cleaning is complete, the carpet will be damp. It is crucial to allow sufficient drying time before moving furniture back into the room. Ideally, let the carpet air dry for several hours, or even overnight, to prevent mildew and damage. To speed up the drying process, you can use a box fan or other circulating fans to blow air across the cleaned area. Ensure the carpet is completely dry to the touch before placing any furniture back, or place plastic or foil under furniture legs to prevent moisture transfer and potential stains. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lMA6tC0hJfk 23 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10900-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Axi7w0Oinxw/hqdefault.jpg Dry and Finish — Carpet Shampooing After applying the dye, allow the carpet to dry completely. This process can take anywhere from 12 to 24 hours, or even longer, depending on the amount of dye applied, carpet thickness, room temperature, and humidity. Maximize airflow by opening windows, using fans, and running a dehumidifier if available. Avoid walking on the carpet during this drying period to prevent disturbing the dye and causing uneven results or footprints. Once the carpet is dry to the touch, carefully remove all painter's tape. Finally, vacuum the newly dyed carpet to fluff up the fibers and remove any dry residue, revealing the uniform and refreshed color. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Axi7w0Oinxw 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10900-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-XdYB7FI8FE/hqdefault.jpg Dry and Groom Carpet for Final Finish — Carpet Shampooing After completing the wet extraction, reel in all hoses (red and blue) back to the truck-mounted unit. Position a powerful air mover (fan) to accelerate the drying process of the cleaned carpet. For a final touch, use a carpet groom brush to gently rake the carpet pile in a uniform direction. This helps to stand the fibers up, remove any remaining wand marks, and leave the carpet looking fresh and even. The final appearance shows a significantly cleaner carpet with no visible stains. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-XdYB7FI8FE 202 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10901-1 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/os3Op41kyEE/hqdefault.jpg Dry and Vacuum Carpet — Carpet Shampooing Once you have scrubbed all the stained and dirty areas, allow the carpet to air dry completely. This step is essential; sufficient drying time prevents potential issues like mold, mildew, or a lingering damp smell. Depending on room ventilation and humidity levels, drying can take several hours. Once the carpet is thoroughly dry, use a vacuum cleaner to thoroughly vacuum the entire carpet. This final pass will remove all the dried baking soda, any remaining loosened dirt, and other residues, leaving your carpet deep-cleaned and refreshed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/os3Op41kyEE 6 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10901-2 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1WBiBRhc6EI/hqdefault.jpg Final Vacuuming — Carpet Shampooing Perform a final, thorough vacuum pass over the entire carpet area. This step is crucial to pick up all the dirt and debris that was loosened by the drill brush and blown out by the cleaning gun. Ensure you vacuum every section to achieve the cleanest possible finish, making sure to go over the areas where debris was concentrated. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1WBiBRhc6EI 6 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10901-3 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/pw3S6GwnJ_4/hqdefault.jpg Final Steam and Vacuum — Carpet Shampooing Perform one final steaming session, followed by a thorough vacuuming, to ensure all remaining loose dirt and any moisture from the cleaning solutions are removed. The presenter demonstrates the final result, highlighting that while some areas might appear lighter due to sun exposure over time (not staining), the embedded dirt and stains are effectively gone. The carpet is left significantly cleaner and refreshed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/pw3S6GwnJ_4 37 2026-10-07T14:17:09.306Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10891-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — measure stairs for carpet treads Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10891-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — measure stairs for carpet treads Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10891-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure stairs for carpet treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10892-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — measure stairs for carpet treads Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10892-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure stairs for carpet treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10892-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/IOgUldDtg1c/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — measure stairs for carpet treads Measure the width of the stair tread from stringer to stringer (e.g., 36 1/8 inches) and the depth from the nose to the back riser (e.g., 13 inches). To allow for trimming and a snug fit, cut the carpet pieces slightly larger than these measurements (e.g., 37 inches wide by 14 inches deep). Use a utility knife and a straight edge to ensure clean, straight cuts. You will need one carpet piece per tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/IOgUldDtg1c 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10894-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — measure stairs for carpet treads Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10894-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — measure stairs for carpet treads Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10894-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1KWo6xmAbSA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Mark Tread and Nosing — measure stairs for carpet treads With the riser confirmed, proceed to measure the stair tread. Use the stair tread templating tool to get precise measurements. When marking the flooring, remember that the stair nosing will line up with the front edge of the tread. Position the nosing and the flooring piece together as they will be installed and trace the template onto both simultaneously. This ensures the angles and length match perfectly across both components. Remember that each side of the stair tread may have a different angle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1KWo6xmAbSA 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10893-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — measure stairs for carpet treads Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10893-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Visualize Tread Size with Tape — measure stairs for carpet treads To ensure you are happy with the chosen carpet tread size, use painter's tape to outline the calculated width and depth on your actual stair treads. This allows you to visually account for elements like corner posts, spindles, and walls. If you find you want to see more carpet, you can adjust the tape outward and add a couple of inches to your order. Conversely, if you prefer to expose more wood, you can move the tape inward and make your tread smaller. This visual step is a reliable way to finalize your desired carpet stair tread dimensions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10893-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — measure stairs for carpet treads Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10882-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ygmP3UBnLLU/hqdefault.jpg Choose the Right Paint Sprayer — Painting Begin by selecting the appropriate paint sprayer for your project. The video highlights three common types: airless sprayers, suitable for large surfaces like interior walls and house siding; pneumatic sprayers, often used for commercial and industrial applications such as motor vehicle body parts; and HVLP (High Volume Low Pressure) sprayers, which are ideal for detailed applications requiring accuracy and a smooth finish, and are also a good choice for touch-up work. The presenter uses an HVLP sprayer for the demonstration. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ygmP3UBnLLU 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10882-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/crv2Det_ysg/hqdefault.jpg Set Up Airless Paint Sprayer — Painting Although not fully detailed in the video, setting up the airless paint sprayer is a critical precursor. This involves connecting the suction tube to the paint container, attaching the high-pressure hose to the sprayer and spray gun, and ensuring the correct spray tip is installed. The sprayer then needs to be primed according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove air from the system and fill it with paint. Once primed, the sprayer is ready for application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/crv2Det_ysg 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10882-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1J7oOHXnoiM/hqdefault.jpg Introduction and Initial Preparation — Painting Before starting, gather all necessary tools and materials. Understand that an airless sprayer is ideal for larger jobs like cabinets and fences, while an HVLP sprayer is better suited for smaller items such as tabletops or doors. Put on latex gloves to protect your hands. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1J7oOHXnoiM 31 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10883-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ze6cFS3SivY/hqdefault.jpg Paint Preparation (Straining and Thinning) — Painting Strain the undercoat paint using a paint strainer to remove any lumps or debris that could clog the sprayer. Then, thin the paint by gradually adding small amounts of water and stirring. The ideal consistency is when the paint flows smoothly off a stirring stick and disappears into itself without clumping or being too watery. Regularly check the consistency and add water as needed. After filling the paint container, clean the threads to ensure a proper seal when reattaching it to the sprayer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ze6cFS3SivY 142 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10883-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vOmB0yzJ0m8/hqdefault.jpg Thin and Filter Paint — Painting Before loading paint into the spray gun, proper preparation is essential. Begin by thinning the paint to the correct viscosity if needed, following the paint manufacturer's recommendations. The video demonstrates adding paint thinner to the paint can and mixing it thoroughly with a stirring stick. Once the paint is thinned, carefully pour it through a paint filter funnel into the spray gun's cup. This straining process removes any potential clumps, debris, or dried paint particles that could clog the nozzle and disrupt the spray pattern, ensuring a smooth and even application. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vOmB0yzJ0m8 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10883-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/46fZlH8Wbqg/hqdefault.jpg Preparing the Paint — Painting Thoroughly stir the paint to ensure consistent color and viscosity. Since this is new, water-based paint, straining it is not strictly necessary but is highly recommended for older paint or paint that may contain impurities to prevent clogs in the sprayer. If using old paint, strain it through a paint strainer bag to remove any clumps or debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/46fZlH8Wbqg 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10884-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/H-IknxchgPE/hqdefault.jpg Prime the Sprayer Unit (Purge Air from Machine) — Painting Take the intake tube, which is equipped with a filter screen at its end, and fully immerse it into your container of paint. Position the smaller prime return tube into a separate empty waste bucket or, for convenience, back into the same paint bucket if you prefer to conserve paint (though a waste bucket is generally recommended to prevent paint contamination during purging). With the intake tube in the paint and the prime return tube directed, turn the sprayer's On/Off switch to the ON position. Let the sprayer run in the prime setting. Continue running the sprayer until you observe a consistent flow of paint emerging from the prime return tube, free of any air bubbles. This process effectively purges all air from the internal pump and lines of the sprayer unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/H-IknxchgPE 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10884-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/46fZlH8Wbqg/hqdefault.jpg Priming the Sprayer with Paint — Painting Move the sprayer's suction hose from the water bucket and place it directly into the stirred paint bucket. Ensure the drain hose is still positioned to return paint to the paint bucket (closed-loop priming). Turn the sprayer to the 'ON' position and keep the prime/spray switch in the 'PRIME' position. Allow the paint to circulate until it appears consistently in the drain hose, indicating the system is fully primed with paint. Once primed, turn off the sprayer and then move the prime/spray switch to the 'SPRAY' position. https://www.youtube.com/embed/46fZlH8Wbqg 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10884-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/eXM5Oz7jYj0/hqdefault.jpg Load Paint into Sprayer — Painting Now, carefully remove the suction hose from the bucket of water or flushing solvent and place it into your pail of prepared paint, ensuring it reaches the bottom. Verify that the prime/spray lever on the unit is set to 'prime'. Turn on the pump. You will observe water flowing from the priming hose initially. Keep the unit running until you see paint starting to exit consistently from the priming hose, indicating that the system is now filled with paint. Once paint is flowing, turn the spray lever to the 'spray' position. The pump should run briefly to build pressure and then stop. https://www.youtube.com/embed/eXM5Oz7jYj0 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10885-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/46fZlH8Wbqg/hqdefault.jpg Testing Spray Pattern and Adjusting Pressure — Painting Before spraying the house, test the spray gun on a scrap piece of cardboard or a discreet area. The creator first tests the horizontal spray pattern. If you observe a 'gap' or 'tails' in the spray pattern (where the paint is thin or uneven at the edges), it indicates that the pressure setting is too low. Adjust the pressure knob on the sprayer to a higher setting and retest until an even, consistent spray pattern is achieved. The creator adjusts the pressure until the spray is uniform without gaps, ensuring proper paint atomization. https://www.youtube.com/embed/46fZlH8Wbqg 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10885-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ygmP3UBnLLU/hqdefault.jpg Practice Spraying Techniques — Painting If this is your first time using a paint sprayer, it's highly recommended to practice until you are comfortable with its operation. Use a large piece of cardboard or another scrap surface for practice. Experiment with both vertical and horizontal spray movements to get a feel for the sprayer. Adjust the tip of the sprayer to achieve your desired horizontal or vertical spray pattern, depending on the surface you're painting. Remember that holding the sprayer closer to a surface will apply more paint and create a narrower spray pattern, while holding it farther away will result in a thinner coat and a wider spray pattern. To prevent paint build-up, always start moving the sprayer before pulling the trigger and continue moving it after releasing the trigger. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ygmP3UBnLLU 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10885-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/u9IF-FFjSkM/hqdefault.jpg Adjust Spray Pressure and Test Pattern — Painting Use scrap pieces of cardboard to test the spray pattern. Begin with the minimum spray pressure setting on your equipment. Gradually increase the pressure until a smooth and even spray pattern is achieved, free of 'fingers' or 'tails' (uneven finish at the edges). Optimal pressure will ensure an even distribution of material without overspray or uneven application. Using the lowest effective pressure possible helps prolong the life of your pump and spray tip. https://www.youtube.com/embed/u9IF-FFjSkM 51 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10886-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7nxuKJa2hf4/hqdefault.jpg Mask Off Areas for Overspray Protection — Painting Mask off all areas not intended for paint, such as walls, windows, and floors. Use masking paper with pre-attached tape for windows for efficiency. To speed up the first row of painter's tape application, use a 2-inch putty knife to firmly press the tape into corners and along edges, ensuring a clean and precise line. For furnished rooms, cover all furniture and flooring with drop cloths due to significant overspray. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7nxuKJa2hf4 76 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10886-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/61cjGAhSxlc/hqdefault.jpg Mask and Cover the Room — Painting After preparing the trim, protect the surrounding areas. Use lightweight plastic sheeting and masking tape to cover any walls and ceilings adjacent to the trim, preventing overspray. Securely tape the edges of the plastic sheeting to create a clean barrier. Lay down drop cloths over the entire floor area and any remaining furniture in the room to protect them from paint. Ensure all surfaces not meant to be painted are adequately covered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/61cjGAhSxlc 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10886-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/46fZlH8Wbqg/hqdefault.jpg Masking and Area Preparation — Painting Before painting, carefully mask off all areas that should not be painted. This includes windows, doors, trim, and any adjacent surfaces. Use painter's tape to secure plastic sheeting or masking paper around windows and doors, ensuring a tight seal to prevent overspray. The creator uses a ladder to reach higher areas, covering the window frames and the entire glass pane with plastic, and extending coverage to the porch ceiling and main entry door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/46fZlH8Wbqg 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10887-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/r3P-gzYOco8/hqdefault.jpg Apply Paint with Proper Technique — Painting Now you are ready to apply paint. Take off the spray gun's safety lock. Hold the spray gun approximately 10 to 12 inches from the surface you intend to paint. The most crucial aspect of achieving a consistent and smooth finish is to move your entire arm consistently across the surface, maintaining an even distance. Avoid flicking or arcing your wrist, as this will lead to inconsistent paint coverage with thicker edges and thinner centers in your spray passes. Ensure each spray pass overlaps the previous one by about 50% to prevent streaking and ensure uniform coverage. Maintain a steady hand and arm movement throughout the painting process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/r3P-gzYOco8 96 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10887-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3a-gOOhvub8/hqdefault.jpg Apply Paint with Proper Technique — Painting Apply paint using complete and full passes, holding the gun consistently 6 to 8 inches away from the surface. Initiate the spray just before reaching the target surface and release the trigger just after leaving the target surface. Overlap each spray pattern by 30% to 50% for even coverage. For optimal coverage, spray with the grain on the first pass and then spray across the grain on subsequent passes. It is always better to apply two thin coats rather than one thick coat to ensure a great finish and prevent drips or runs. If the target surface has openings, back them up with cardboard or plastic to prevent paint from going through. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3a-gOOhvub8 39 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10887-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NotMhXx4gPY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Paint with Consistent Technique — Painting With the spray gun properly adjusted, begin applying paint to your surface. The key is to apply the paint in a consistent pattern, moving the gun at a steady speed and distance from the surface. Overlap each stroke by approximately 50% to ensure even coverage and avoid streaks or thin spots. Maintain a consistent distance from the surface being sprayed throughout the entire application process. This technique helps achieve a smooth, professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NotMhXx4gPY 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10888-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/g7SReg-IH_o/hqdefault.jpg Apply a Second Coat — Painting It is recommended to apply two coats of paint for the best coverage and durability. Always check the paint can for the manufacturer's recommended drying times between coats. It is critical to wait until the first coat is completely dry before adding the second coat to ensure proper adhesion and a smooth finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/g7SReg-IH_o 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10888-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Z-VDrJ8tAGY/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Coat of Paint — Painting Once the first coat of paint is dry, apply a second coat following the same technique as the first. Work the paint in horizontally, ensuring thorough coverage and a smooth, even finish. This second coat will enhance the color, hide any streaks from the first coat, and provide better durability. Allow the second coat to dry completely before disturbing the area. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z-VDrJ8tAGY 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10888-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wp92TbOa2DQ/hqdefault.jpg Apply Second Paint Coat — Painting After the first coat of paint has completely dried according to the manufacturer's instructions (which typically takes several hours), apply a second even coat. This additional coat is essential for achieving full coverage, enhanced durability, and a richer, more uniform finish. Ensure the second coat is applied as carefully and evenly as the first. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wp92TbOa2DQ 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10889-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/N9elN6Xz7sc/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Paint Sprayer — Painting For water-based paints, if a liner was used, simply remove and discard the liner (pouring any excess paint back into the paint can if desired). If no liner was used, clean the cup and suction tube with warm, soapy water. For oil-based paints, use mineral spirits to clean the cup and suction tube. Rinse all components thoroughly. Allow all parts to dry completely before reassembling the sprayer for storage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/N9elN6Xz7sc 107 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10889-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RGt9ipl6VJQ/hqdefault.jpg Clean Sprayer and Work Area — Painting After all painting is complete, immediately and thoroughly clean the airless paint sprayer. This is critical to prevent paint from drying inside the machine and causing clogs or damage. Begin by flushing the system with an appropriate cleaning solution – water for latex (water-based) paints or mineral spirits for oil-based paints – until the solution runs clear. Disassemble the spray tip, filters (in the gun and manifold), and the gun itself, cleaning each component separately with a brush and solution. Finally, remove all masking tape, plastic sheeting, and drop cloths, and dispose of them properly. Clean any incidental paint drips or splatters from unprotected areas. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RGt9ipl6VJQ 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10889-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/fNTviUyKleU/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Sprayer Components — Painting Thorough cleaning of the sprayer after each use is essential for its longevity and performance. Begin by unscrewing the reservoir from the paint attachment. If there's any remaining paint, pour it back into its original tin for later use. Fill the reservoir with water (for water-based paints) and allow the paint attachment to soak briefly. Then, carefully disassemble the paint attachment by removing the suction tube, unscrewing the nozzle ring, and detaching the air cap. The internal components, including the needle and O-ring, should be checked for paint residue. Rinse each part thoroughly under running water, ensuring all paint is removed from all surfaces, especially the intricate areas of the nozzle and suction tube. Continue rinsing until the water runs completely clear. The reservoir should also be scrubbed clean, as its smooth, machined interior makes cleaning easy. https://www.youtube.com/embed/fNTviUyKleU 95 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10890-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DelLXXS9ppo/hqdefault.jpg Unmasking and Final Cleanup — Painting Once the paint has dried sufficiently according to the manufacturer's instructions, carefully remove all painter's tape, plastic sheeting, and drop cloths. Begin by gently pulling the tape at a 45-degree angle to minimize the risk of peeling off fresh paint or leaving adhesive residue. Collect all masking materials and dispose of them properly. Inspect the newly painted surfaces for any missed spots or areas needing minor touch-ups. Finally, clean the paint sprayer thoroughly according to its manual to ensure its longevity and readiness for future projects. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DelLXXS9ppo 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10890-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uu_DvXFlpgU/hqdefault.jpg Remove Masking and Clean Up — Painting Once the final coat of paint is dry to the touch, carefully remove all masking tape and paper. Peel the tape off slowly at a 45-degree angle to prevent tearing and lifting of the freshly applied paint. If any hardware was removed, reattach it. Thoroughly clean the paint sprayer according to the manufacturer's instructions. This usually involves flushing it with water (for latex paint) or appropriate cleaner/thinner (for oil-based paint) until all paint residue is removed. Clean any tools used during preparation. Dispose of masking materials and paint waste responsibly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uu_DvXFlpgU 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10890-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EuE3uhkcKSw/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up and Demask — Painting Once the final coat of paint has been applied and is dry to the touch, carefully remove all painter's tape. It's often best to remove the tape when the paint is still slightly wet (but not tacky) to prevent peeling, or after it's completely cured. If the paint is completely dry, you can score the edge of the tape with a utility knife to ensure a clean break. Roll up the drop cloths or plastic sheeting, being careful to contain any dried paint flakes. Clean the paint sprayer immediately after use according to the manufacturer's instructions. This usually involves flushing it with water (for latex paint) or appropriate cleaning solution (for oil-based paint) until all paint residue is gone. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EuE3uhkcKSw 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10874-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/7d_a7wJekAs/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Dryer Repair Before beginning any repair on your dryer, ensure it is completely disconnected from its power source. If your dryer has a power cord, simply unplug it from the wall socket. If the dryer is hardwired, locate the circuit breaker in your home's electrical panel and switch it off to cut power to the appliance. Confirm that the power is off before proceeding to the next steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/7d_a7wJekAs 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10874-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I5WEzmClRjE/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Dryer Repair Before beginning any work on the dryer, ensure that the unit is safely disconnected from its power source. This can be done by either unplugging the dryer from the wall outlet or by turning off the corresponding circuit breaker in your home's electrical panel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I5WEzmClRjE 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10874-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/whFYs7Tg9Uw/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Power — Dryer Repair Before beginning any work on the dryer, it is crucial to disconnect it from its power source. If your dryer has a power cord, simply unplug it from the wall socket. If it is hardwired, locate the circuit breaker for the dryer in your home's electrical panel and switch it off. This prevents electric shock during the repair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/whFYs7Tg9Uw 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10875-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zpNFEHxTxNU/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Top Panel — Dryer Repair To access the internal components, you first need to remove the top panel of the dryer. Locate the two screws on the top side of the dryer, which are usually covered by small plastic caps. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry off these plastic caps, revealing the screws underneath. Once the caps are removed, unscrew the visible screws. Then, move to the back of the dryer and locate any additional screws securing the top panel. Remove these screws as well. With all screws removed, carefully lift the top panel off the dryer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zpNFEHxTxNU 55 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10875-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Edaqxh2AmCg/hqdefault.jpg Open Dryer Top and Remove Front Panel — Dryer Repair To gain full internal access, the dryer's front panel must be opened. Insert a putty knife into the small gaps on the sides of the dryer's top panel, near the front. Press down on the clips on each side to release the top. This allows the entire top of the dryer to hinge backward, exposing the drum. The front panel, or bulkhead, is held in place by screws at the very bottom corners and by small metal catches on the bottom edge of the metal housing. Carefully remove the screws and unclip the moisture sensor harness located in the lower right corner before fully removing the front door by rolling it forward and up. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Edaqxh2AmCg 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10875-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/BO8IBoY-wlU/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Top Panel — Dryer Repair To access the dryer's internal components, start by removing the top panel. Locate the two 1/4-inch screws on the back of the dryer that secure the top panel. Use a nut driver to unscrew and remove these screws. Once the screws are out, slide the top panel slightly backward, then lift it completely off the machine and set it aside in a safe place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/BO8IBoY-wlU 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10876-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/S9KaJeV_bMQ/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Blown Thermal Fuse — Dryer Repair Begin by checking the thermal fuse. This is a crucial safety device designed to protect your dryer from overheating. It's typically located on the blower housing, though some dryer models might have an additional fuse on the heating element. If the dryer overheats, this fuse will blow, cutting off power to the heating element. Use a multimeter set to continuity mode to test the fuse. Place the probes on the fuse's terminals. If the multimeter indicates no continuous electrical path (e.g., an analog meter doesn't move or a digital meter shows 'OL' or '1'), the fuse has blown and will need to be replaced. Remember that a common cause for a blown thermal fuse is a clogged dryer venting system, which restricts airflow and leads to overheating. Regular cleaning of your dryer vent is recommended to prevent this issue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/S9KaJeV_bMQ 43 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10876-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3DcMhOMZlj4/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Heating Circuit Components — Dryer Repair With the heating components exposed, use a multi-meter set to continuity mode to test each part of the heating circuit. For accurate readings, disconnect at least one wire from each component before testing. Test the thermal fuse, the heating element, the cycling thermostat, and the high-limit thermostat. All components in this specific dryer were found to have good continuity, indicating they are functional and not the cause of the drying issue. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3DcMhOMZlj4 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10876-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/S9KaJeV_bMQ/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Defective Heating Element — Dryer Repair Next, inspect and test the heating element. The heating element is responsible for warming the air before it enters the dryer drum. If this component is burned out or otherwise defective, the dryer will not produce heat. To test it, use a multimeter set to continuity mode. Place the probes on the terminals of the heating element. If the multimeter shows no continuity, indicating an open circuit, then the heating element is defective and will need to be replaced to restore heating functionality to your dryer. https://www.youtube.com/embed/S9KaJeV_bMQ 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10877-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lTqbw2HegBA/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Broken Dryer Belt — Dryer Repair First, verify that the dryer's drive belt is broken. With the dryer door open, press and hold the door safety switch (located on the door frame) and press the 'Push to Start' button on the control panel. If you can hear the motor running but the drum is not spinning, it indicates a broken belt. Additionally, try spinning the drum by hand; if it turns very easily with no resistance, this also confirms a broken belt. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lTqbw2HegBA 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10877-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Oa_xqgTdeCM/hqdefault.jpg Troubleshoot Drum Not Turning — Dryer Repair If the dryer powers on but the drum fails to rotate during any cycle, the most probable cause is a broken or frayed drive belt. Inspect the drive belt; if it's damaged, it will need to be replaced. This is a common DIY repair that can be done with mechanical skills. Accessing the belt usually involves opening the dryer casing. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Oa_xqgTdeCM 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10877-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kHOuRwzOjCU/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose Non-Turning Drum — Dryer Repair If the dryer's drum does not turn during any cycle, the most probable cause is a broken or frayed drive belt. This component is typically accessible for replacement, which can often be done by a mechanically skilled individual without calling for professional service. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kHOuRwzOjCU 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10878-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TnXlJsVIoYw/hqdefault.jpg Identify Unusual Dryer Noises — Dryer Repair Begin by listening carefully to your clothes dryer while it is operating. Pay close attention to any abnormal rumbling or thumping sounds that may be emanating from the appliance. These noises are the primary indicator of a potential issue with internal components. The sound might change in pitch or intensity depending on the dryer's cycle or the size of the load inside. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TnXlJsVIoYw 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10878-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QydJ25pGA2w/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Internal Components for Noise — Dryer Repair With the dryer largely disassembled, you now have full access to inspect various internal components for potential noise culprits. First, check the idler pulley for any damage, flat spots, or grinding noises when rotated. The entire idler assembly (metal arm and pulley wheel) is typically replaced as one purchasable piece. Next, inspect the blower housing and its fins by manually rotating it slowly and rapidly. Look for smooth spinning, intact fins, or any binding that could cause noise. Some blower housings are one-piece units, requiring full replacement if damaged. Finally, examine the motor by spinning its pulley to listen for persistent noise, which could indicate worn motor bearings needing motor replacement. If any loose foreign objects are found in the blower housing, try to vacuum them out from the rear if inaccessible from the front. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QydJ25pGA2w 95 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10878-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TnXlJsVIoYw/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Drum Rollers for Wear — Dryer Repair After identifying a rumbling noise, turn off and unplug the dryer from its power source to ensure safety. You will need to access the interior of the dryer to inspect the drum rollers. These rollers are typically located at the front or rear of the dryer's drum assembly, often requiring the removal of the front panel or lifting the drum. Visually inspect each drum roller for signs of wear and tear, such as flattened spots, cracks, excessive looseness, or deterioration of the rubber/plastic material. The video shows an example of a worn drum roller, indicating these are a common source of noise. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TnXlJsVIoYw 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10879-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Hq_D2YEyXyQ/hqdefault.jpg Replace Defective Heating Element — Dryer Repair Unplug the dryer from the power source. Disconnect the moisture sensor plug. Remove the three screws that secure the blower housing cover and carefully remove the cover. Unscrew the four screws that hold the front bulkhead in place. Lift the front bulkhead up and out of its slots and set it aside. Gently release the drum belt and remove the drum from the dryer. (This is an excellent opportunity to clean out lint from the dryer base and blower housing). Locate the heater housing on the right side of the dryer. Remove the screws on both sides of the heater housing that secure the cover. Lift off the top portion of the heater housing; it is not necessary to disconnect the wires to the high limit or thermostat at this point. Using needle-nose pliers, bend the tabs on the heating element terminals and push them through towards the inside of the housing to release the old element. Remove the old heating element. Insert the new heating element into place, push its terminals through, and bend the tabs back with needle-nose pliers to secure it. Attach the two wires to the new heating element terminals. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Hq_D2YEyXyQ 94 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10879-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I5WEzmClRjE/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Heating Element Assembly and Sensors — Dryer Repair Now, place the assembled heating element canister back into the dryer, securing it with the two main screws (one top, one front) as it was originally. The canister's thin metal might require slight bending to align with the screw holes. Once the canister is in place, install the new high-limit thermostat and thermostat onto the unit, matching the wiring properly as you documented earlier. Only two screws hold these sensors in place. For the thermistor, which is located behind the blower housing next to the motor and idler pulley, you'll similarly replace it by unscrewing the old one and installing the new one, which is typically held by one screw. Test the old thermistor with a multimeter for a dynamic resistance range (approx. 12k ohms at 70°F/21°C, varying with temperature). If it's outside the expected range, replace it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I5WEzmClRjE 125 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10879-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3FZBKcbj-eg/hqdefault.jpg Replace Faulty Thermal Fuse and Thermostat — Dryer Repair If the thermal fuse (and potentially the thermostat) tests faulty, carefully remove the old components. Install the new thermal fuse and thermostat in their respective positions, ensuring all electrical connections are secure and correctly reattached. It's crucial to replace both components as a set, even if only one tests as blown, to prevent recurring issues. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3FZBKcbj-eg 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10880-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Edaqxh2AmCg/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble the Dryer — Dryer Repair To reassemble the dryer, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order. Begin by installing the drum back onto the rear rollers and reattaching the drive belt to the idler pulley, ensuring it's properly looped. Then, install the front bulkhead panel, making sure to reconnect the moisture sensor harness and secure all screws. Next, close the dryer's top panel. Finally, reattach the console, securing it with the two screws on the back. Once fully reassembled, plug the dryer back in or turn on the circuit breaker to test if it's now heating properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Edaqxh2AmCg 1200 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10880-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3FZBKcbj-eg/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble and Test Dryer — Dryer Repair After replacing any faulty components and thoroughly cleaning the dryer, carefully reassemble the dryer's panels, ensuring all wires are reconnected correctly according to the pictures taken earlier. Once fully reassembled, restore power to the dryer at the circuit breaker. Perform a test cycle to ensure the dryer is now heating and operating correctly. Observe the drying process and confirm that clothes are drying efficiently. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3FZBKcbj-eg 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10880-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ajrZTmZWFv8/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble Dryer Components — Dryer Repair Once testing is complete (and replacement if necessary), begin reassembling the dryer in reverse order of disassembly. Start by reinstalling the dryer drum, then reattach the drive belt to the idler pulley. Next, reinstall the front door panel, ensuring the door springs are connected correctly. Then, install the blower housing vent and the bottom access panel. Finally, reinstall the top panel, making sure it slides into place, and secure the control console by replacing the two console screws using a Phillips screwdriver. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ajrZTmZWFv8 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10881-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3FZBKcbj-eg/hqdefault.jpg Reassemble and Test Dryer — Dryer Repair After replacing any faulty components and thoroughly cleaning the dryer, carefully reassemble the dryer's panels, ensuring all wires are reconnected correctly according to the pictures taken earlier. Once fully reassembled, restore power to the dryer at the circuit breaker. Perform a test cycle to ensure the dryer is now heating and operating correctly. Observe the drying process and confirm that clothes are drying efficiently. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3FZBKcbj-eg 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10881-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wsl2Y7UbNGo/hqdefault.jpg Final Test and Reassembly — Dryer Repair Once all components are reassembled and wired correctly, plug the dryer back into the wall outlet. Select a drying cycle and press the start button. Listen for the dryer to start and after a few minutes, carefully open the dryer door to check for heat inside. If the dryer runs and produces heat, the repair is successful. Remember to fully reassemble all panels and covers before regular use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wsl2Y7UbNGo 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10881-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/OpQMgdrL3Tg/hqdefault.jpg Test Dryer Functionality — Dryer Repair After all panels and components are securely reassembled, plug the dryer back into the electrical outlet. Power on the dryer and select a cycle, such as 'Air Dry,' and press start. Listen for smooth operation of the drum. After about a minute, check to ensure that the heating elements are working and the dryer is producing heat. If everything functions correctly, the drive belt replacement was successful. https://www.youtube.com/embed/OpQMgdrL3Tg 24 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10873-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — installing stair treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10873-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10873-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Landing Pad — installing stair treads Select an Oak Valley Designs landing pad that best fits the dimensions of your stair landing. These pads also come with a built-in pad and the same pressure-sensitive adhesive on the back, removing the need for separate padding. Remove the protective backing from the landing pad. Position the pad on the landing area, adjusting as necessary due to the repositionable adhesive. Once satisfied with the placement, press down firmly across the entire surface to smooth it out and ensure good adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10872-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — installing stair treads Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10872-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10872-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10870-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — installing carpet stair treads Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10870-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10870-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10871-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10871-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — installing carpet stair treads Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10871-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Place the First Stair Tread — installing carpet stair treads Begin the installation by taking one carpet stair tread and carefully positioning it on the desired step. Ensure the tread is centered, straight, and leaves an even border of exposed wood on the sides and front of the stair. Once properly aligned, firmly press down across the entire surface of the tread, especially focusing on the edges and corners, to activate the non-slip backing and securely bond it to the clean wooden stair. The video shows a foot pressing on the tread and a hand lifting it slightly to confirm its non-slip nature. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10866-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Gather Tools and Materials — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps Begin by gathering all the necessary tools and materials required for the stair tread installation. This includes various cutting saws (circular, table, or miter saw with a fine-tooth blade), a rubber mallet, a hammer, a caulking gun, a finish nailer, polyurethane construction adhesive (do NOT use water-based adhesives), an angle gauge, a tape measure, wood putty, caulk, and/or clear silicone. Having everything readily available will streamline the installation process. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10866-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6wRU8piN_z4/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps Before beginning the installation, ensure your work area and existing stairs are clean. Always start the installation process with the bottom stair and work your way up the staircase. Using a tape measure, carefully measure the overall width and height of each individual stair. Once measured, cut your 'Performance Accessory stair tread' to the correct depth, leaving an 1/8 inch space on the back side and a 1/16 inch gap on both sides of the tread. This precise cutting should be done for each individual stair to ensure a proper fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6wRU8piN_z4 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10866-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b9vp18TbNaI/hqdefault.jpg Prepare and Measure Stairs — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps Before installing the carpet treads, thoroughly clean the staircase to ensure there is no dust, dirt, or debris on the wooden treads and risers. This can be done with a vacuum cleaner and a damp cloth. Next, inspect the stairs for any loose elements or imperfections that might affect the tread installation. Then, measure the width and depth of each stair tread. It's crucial to measure each step individually as slight variations can occur. Decide on the overhang length for the carpet tread over the nose of the step, if any, and mark this on the stairs or note it down for cutting. Also, determine the desired spacing between the edge of the stair and the carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9vp18TbNaI 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10868-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Width — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps Start by measuring the entire width of your stair tread. This measurement typically goes from a spindle to the wall, or simply wall-to-wall if there are no spindles. For example, if the full width is 43 inches. Next, decide how much exposed wood you want to see on either side of the carpet stair tread. The recommendation is 2 to 4 inches per side. If you choose 4 inches per side, that's a total of 8 inches (4 inches + 4 inches). Subtract this total from the full stair width (e.g., 43 - 8 = 35 inches). This final number is the ideal width for your carpet stair tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10868-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10868-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal ste Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10869-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10869-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gaGNL9MM7a8/hqdefault.jpg Mark and Cut Your Treads — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps a With the nosing removed, prepare the replacement treads for installation. Begin by measuring each tread individually using a tape measure, as stairway widths can vary from one step to the next. Mark the length that needs to be cut off using a sharpie or pencil. If the tread is a double return tread, you will not need to make any further cuts as it has been manufactured to your provided dimensions. As a pro tip, use a piece of scrap wood to push the tread out at the return area. This allows you to properly scribe the skirt before cutting, which will help give you an exact fit and cut for your tread. Use a miter saw to make the necessary cuts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gaGNL9MM7a8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10869-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LLYpECZS7lI/hqdefault.jpg Repeat Measurement and Cutting for All Stairs — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, inclu Continue the measuring and cutting process for all remaining risers and treads on the staircase. It's crucial to measure and cut each piece individually, as stair dimensions can vary slightly. As a pro tip, mark each cut piece on the back (e.g., R1, T1, R2, T2) to easily identify its corresponding location during installation, preventing confusion and ensuring a perfect fit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LLYpECZS7lI 12 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10867-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Tread Depth — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps Measure the full depth of your stair tread, from the back of the tread to the front edge (bullnose). For instance, if the measurement is 11 and 1/4 inches. It is crucial not to order this exact depth. Instead, subtract a small amount, typically 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch, from the total depth. This slight reduction ensures that the carpet stair tread sits tightly against the bullnose without hanging over, which is important for both aesthetics and safety. For example, subtracting 1/4 inch from 11 and 1/4 inches results in an 11-inch depth for your carpet tread. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9Jd0pJ8zZvQ 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10867-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10867-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9It2NMPjH6c/hqdefault.jpg Measure Stair Treads — how to measure stairs for custom stair treads, including diagonal steps and v Begin by using a stair jig, also known as scribe tools, to accurately measure the dimensions of each stair tread. Place the stair jig firmly against the side and back of the tread, adjusting its arms to match the exact angles and lengths. Lock the jig's position to capture the precise measurements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9It2NMPjH6c 18 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10860-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TAnR3KLocsE/hqdefault.jpg Grind the First Stump — Stump Grinding With the stump grinder running, position it over the tree stump. Slowly lower the cutting head onto the stump and begin moving the machine back and forth across the stump. The rotating cutting head will chip away at the wood, reducing its size and creating wood chips and dust. Continue grinding until the stump is below ground level. The first stump in the video was initially burned with charcoal to reduce its height before grinding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TAnR3KLocsE 75 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10860-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/C6MTlbWR8HA/hqdefault.jpg Stump Grinding — Stump Grinding Once the tree trunk has been mostly removed, a powerful 'Bandit Stump Grinder Model 2100' is brought in to grind the remaining tree stump down below ground level. The machine uses a rotating cutting wheel to chip away at the stump and roots, turning them into sawdust and wood chips. This step completely removes the visible part of the tree and its major root ball, leaving the area clear for future construction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/C6MTlbWR8HA 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10860-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RHiSMBlDcGA/hqdefault.jpg Rent a Stump Grinder — Stump Grinding For a faster method of stump removal, consider renting a stump grinder from a local home improvement or equipment rental store. These machines use a powerful rotating blade to chip away at the stump. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RHiSMBlDcGA 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10861-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ZU8x6WOlUlg/hqdefault.jpg Assess Stump and Prepare Area — Stump Grinding Begin by observing the tree stump that needs to be removed. Ensure the area immediately surrounding the stump is clear of any large debris, rocks, or other obstacles that could interfere with the stump grinder or be projected during operation. The video shows a stump that has been recently cut, sitting slightly above ground level. Before operating any machinery, it is crucial to don appropriate personal protective equipment including safety glasses or goggles, hearing protection, and gloves. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZU8x6WOlUlg 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10861-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YlbxU-22pQA/hqdefault.jpg Clear Debris from Around Stumps — Stump Grinding After cutting the stumps, it's crucial to clear the area around them. The presenter demonstrates scraping away leaves, small branches, and digging around the stump to expose the base and check for any hidden rocks or buried debris, such as an old piece of wood. This cleaning step prevents foreign objects from being thrown by the grinder or damaging its cutting teeth, which are expensive to replace. Creating a clean working area also allows for better visibility during grinding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YlbxU-22pQA 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10861-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e0bp43WxwqU/hqdefault.jpg Grind Additional Stumps — Stump Grinding If there are multiple stumps to remove, repeat the entire sequence of steps for each one: clearing the surrounding area, meticulously checking for metal objects with a metal detector, setting up safety screens, operating the Vermeer SC30TX stump grinder to cut the stump 5-6 inches below grade, and then cleaning up the resulting wood chips and refilling with topsoil. This systematic approach ensures all stumps are removed efficiently and the property is thoroughly restored. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e0bp43WxwqU 316 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10862-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wfyvTsw1gXw/hqdefault.jpg Wear Appropriate PPE — Stump Grinding Before beginning any grinding task, don all necessary personal protective equipment (PPE). This includes heavy-duty work gloves to protect hands from heat, sharp edges, and vibrations; ear defenders or earplugs to prevent hearing damage from loud noise; clear safety glasses (or a full face shield) to shield eyes from sparks and debris; robust safety boots to protect feet from falling objects or sparks; and flame-retardant overalls to protect clothing and skin from burns and direct contact with sparks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wfyvTsw1gXw 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10862-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/AnBN00vnS6E/hqdefault.jpg Wear PPE and Connect Vacuum — Stump Grinding Prioritize safety by wearing appropriate personal protective equipment, which typically includes safety gloves, eye protection (safety glasses), a dust mask or respirator (e.g., 3M 2097 P100), and hearing protection. Connect a vacuum to the dust containment shroud on your angle grinder to effectively eliminate airborne dust during operation, ensuring a cleaner and safer working environment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/AnBN00vnS6E 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10862-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KYhGC7WauVs/hqdefault.jpg Don Personal Protective Equipment — Stump Grinding Before operating the angle grinder, always don the necessary personal protective equipment. This includes heavy-duty work gloves (such as leather gloves) to protect your hands from vibrations, sharp debris, and potential contact with the spinning brush. Crucially, wear safety glasses to shield your eyes from flying metal particles, rust, and wire fragments that can be ejected during operation. The video demonstrates putting on the gloves and then the safety glasses. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KYhGC7WauVs 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10863-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RHiSMBlDcGA/hqdefault.jpg Grind the Stump — Stump Grinding Position the rented stump grinder over the tree stump. Slowly and carefully operate the machine to grind away the stump. Continue grinding until the stump is about 6 to 8 inches (15 to 20 cm) below the soil surface, ensuring that all visible parts of the stump are gone. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RHiSMBlDcGA 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10863-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e0bp43WxwqU/hqdefault.jpg Operate Stump Grinder — Stump Grinding Don your personal protective equipment (PPE), including an orange safety helmet with integrated hearing protection and a face shield. Approach the Vermeer SC30TX stump grinder, which is a powerful, tracked machine designed for this task. It features an articulating cutting head equipped with robust carbide teeth. Using the machine's joysticks, carefully maneuver the cutting wheel to begin grinding the stump. Employ a controlled sweeping motion across the stump's surface, gradually lowering the cutting head with each pass. The goal is to grind the entire stump down to approximately 5-6 inches below the surrounding ground grade. The tracks of the machine allow it to move across the lawn with minimal disturbance compared to wheeled models. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e0bp43WxwqU 130 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10863-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TAnR3KLocsE/hqdefault.jpg Grind the First Stump — Stump Grinding With the stump grinder running, position it over the tree stump. Slowly lower the cutting head onto the stump and begin moving the machine back and forth across the stump. The rotating cutting head will chip away at the wood, reducing its size and creating wood chips and dust. Continue grinding until the stump is below ground level. The first stump in the video was initially burned with charcoal to reduce its height before grinding. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TAnR3KLocsE 75 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10864-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e0bp43WxwqU/hqdefault.jpg Clean Up Grinding Debris — Stump Grinding After the stump has been completely ground down, it's time to clean up the resulting wood chips and soil. Use a rake to gather the majority of the wood chips into manageable piles. These piles can then be scooped into a wheelbarrow using a shovel and transported away from the work area. The collected wood chips can be repurposed as mulch for garden beds or disposed of. For any remaining fine debris and dust scattered across the lawn, use a leaf blower to thoroughly clear the area, leaving a clean and tidy surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e0bp43WxwqU 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10864-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/NEgZWI3LE2w/hqdefault.jpg Final Cleanup and Site Restoration — Stump Grinding After all stumps and problematic roots have been ground down, the area will be covered with a significant mound of wood chips mixed with some soil. Use shovels and rakes to gather and separate the wood chips from the surrounding soil. The video shows a huge mound of wood chips that will need to be picked up and hauled away. Once the chips are removed, the remaining hole can be filled with fresh soil and compacted to prepare the ground for future landscaping, such as planting new grass or garden beds. The goal is to restore the area to a usable and aesthetically pleasing state. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NEgZWI3LE2w 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10864-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/YoaG7j8DogI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Bulk Debris and Rough Level — Stump Grinding Once the majority of the wood chips and soil have been raked into a pile, use a shovel to scoop the material into a garden utility cart or wheelbarrow. This allows for easy transportation of the debris. After removing the bulk of the material, use the garden rake again to further level the ground. The narrator suggests that the collected debris, which is a mix of wood chips and organic soil, can be repurposed to fill low spots in a backyard or added to a compost pile, highlighting its value as a natural soil amendment. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YoaG7j8DogI 17 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10865-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RHiSMBlDcGA/hqdefault.jpg Fill the Hole After Grinding — Stump Grinding Once the stump has been ground down, fill the resulting hole with loam or a mixture of soil and compost. This will create a level surface and prepare the area for new grass or plants. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RHiSMBlDcGA 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10865-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/e0bp43WxwqU/hqdefault.jpg Refill and Level the Ground with Topsoil — Stump Grinding After clearing the wood chips, the area will have a depression where the stump once stood. Use a tractor with a front-end loader to bring in fresh topsoil. Carefully deposit the topsoil directly into the hole. Once the topsoil is in place, use rakes and shovels to spread it evenly and level the ground surface. Ensure the filled area matches the surrounding grade, accounting for any potential settling. This prepares the spot for new grass seed or other landscaping elements. https://www.youtube.com/embed/e0bp43WxwqU 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10865-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/REWiLa3XRtw/hqdefault.jpg Backfill the Hole — Stump Grinding After removing the cut section of the stump, use the shovel to backfill the hole with the soil that was previously dug out. Level the area to match the surrounding ground. Over time, the remaining wood underground will rot and decompose, which may cause the ground to sink slightly. If this happens, you can simply add more soil to level it again. https://www.youtube.com/embed/REWiLa3XRtw 26 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10854-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2RsnLbqcEVU/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Toilet Flapper Replacement Locate the water shut-off valve, typically on the wall behind the toilet. Turn the valve handle clockwise all the way to stop the flow of water to the toilet tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2RsnLbqcEVU 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10854-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lQQ8j0dIgIs/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Toilet Flapper Replacement Locate the water supply valve, typically found on the wall or floor beneath the toilet tank. Turn the valve clockwise until the water flow stops completely. This cuts off the water supply to the toilet. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lQQ8j0dIgIs 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10854-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/P6smVwsoDqE/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Water Supply — Toilet Flapper Replacement Locate the water supply valve on the wall behind the toilet. Turn the valve handle clockwise until it stops to shut off the water flow to the toilet tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/P6smVwsoDqE 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10855-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ta99sWz9zXQ/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Water and Drain Tank — Toilet Flapper Replacement First, turn off the water supply to the toilet using the shut-off valve located on the wall behind or beside the toilet. Flush the toilet to drain most of the water from the tank. Hold the flush lever down to empty as much water as possible. Then, use a large sponge or towel to soak up and remove the remaining water from the bottom of the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ta99sWz9zXQ 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10855-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R_70JdZtn3A/hqdefault.jpg Turn off water and drain tank — Toilet Flapper Replacement Turn off the water supply to the toilet. Flush the toilet and hold the lever down to drain the tank. Sponge out any remaining water. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R_70JdZtn3A 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10855-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8qCqUaqoojE/hqdefault.jpg Empty Toilet Cistern — Toilet Flapper Replacement With the water supply off, flush the toilet to empty most of the water from the cistern. Since the water supply is off, it will not refill. Then, use a sponge to soak up any remaining water at the bottom of the cistern. This ensures a dry workspace for the next steps. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8qCqUaqoojE 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10856-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/gVu2WzAJcw4/hqdefault.jpg Remove the Old Flapper — Toilet Flapper Replacement With the toilet tank drained, carefully remove the old flapper. First, unhook the chain that connects the flapper to the toilet's flush handle lever. Then, detach the flapper from the overflow tube. This usually involves unclipping the flapper's 'ears' or hinges from the pins on either side of the overflow tube. Some older models might have rubber that slides over the tube. https://www.youtube.com/embed/gVu2WzAJcw4 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10856-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VJAGm3EipRk/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Flapper — Toilet Flapper Replacement The old flapper is typically attached to the overflow tube with small clips or tabs. Gently unsnap or slide the old flapper off these attachment points to remove it from the toilet tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VJAGm3EipRk 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10856-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/lQQ8j0dIgIs/hqdefault.jpg Remove Old Flapper — Toilet Flapper Replacement The flapper is attached to the flush valve assembly by small 'ears' or clips on either side. Gently unhook or unclip these ears from their posts on the flush valve to remove the old flapper entirely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/lQQ8j0dIgIs 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10857-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/R46iPSypNp4/hqdefault.jpg Install the New Flapper Valve — Toilet Flapper Replacement Take your new toilet flapper valve. Align its mounting pegs or ears with the corresponding pegs on the overflow tube inside the toilet tank. Securely attach the new flapper by clipping or sliding it onto these pegs. Ensure it sits flush over the drain hole. Then, connect the new lift chain to the flush lever. It is crucial to leave a small amount of slack in the chain (about 1/2 to 1 inch) to allow the flapper to seal properly after flushing, but not so much that it gets caught. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R46iPSypNp4 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10857-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3W3u2O1dZws/hqdefault.jpg Install the New Flapper Valve — Toilet Flapper Replacement Take the new flapper valve and carefully connect each side of the valve to the pegs located on the side of the overflow tube. Once attached, ensure the flapper valve is properly positioned directly over the tank's drain opening leading to the toilet bowl. Next, clip the lift chain of the new flapper valve to the flush lever. Make sure to leave a small amount of slack in the chain; too much tension will prevent the flapper from closing, and too much slack can cause it to get tangled. Gently test the flush lever to confirm that the flapper valve moves with the proper range of motion, opening fully and closing completely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3W3u2O1dZws 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10857-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/LkJS-uQDXog/hqdefault.jpg Install New Flapper — Toilet Flapper Replacement Install the new flapper into the toilet tank. First, re-attach the flapper's 'ears' or hinges onto the overflow tube at the base of the flush valve, ensuring they are securely seated. Next, connect the adjusted chain to the flush handle lever, making sure there is appropriate slack and the chain doesn't interfere with the flapper's movement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LkJS-uQDXog 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10858-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FGMoFRI8mJc/hqdefault.jpg Turn on Water Supply — Toilet Flapper Replacement Go back to the water supply shut-off valve. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to turn the water back on. You will hear the toilet tank begin to fill with water. Open the valve completely to ensure full water pressure. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FGMoFRI8mJc 23 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10858-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_YMzEgk9e14/hqdefault.jpg Turn on Water Supply and Check for Leaks — Toilet Flapper Replacement Slowly turn the water supply shut-off valve counter-clockwise to open the valve and allow water to flow back into the toilet tank. Observe all connections, especially at the fill valve and supply line, for any signs of leaks. Let the tank fill completely, then check the water level. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_YMzEgk9e14 90 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10858-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/rxiORdnOc7Q/hqdefault.jpg Restore Water Supply — Toilet Flapper Replacement Turn the water supply valve counter-clockwise to restore water flow to the toilet tank. Allow the tank to fill completely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/rxiORdnOc7Q 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10859-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/I05uOB5DOFw/hqdefault.jpg Test the flush — Toilet Flapper Replacement Flush the toilet and observe the filling process and the seal of the new flapper. The water should stop filling at the correct level, and there should be no water continuously running into the bowl. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I05uOB5DOFw 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10859-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PqC2uaB8YJI/hqdefault.jpg Test for Leaks — Toilet Flapper Replacement Once the new flapper is installed, turn the water supply valve back on to allow the toilet tank to refill. Listen carefully for any sounds of running water once the tank is full. Flush the toilet a few times and observe closely to ensure the flapper drops and forms a tight seal after each flush. If the toilet stops running and the water level in the tank remains stable, the leak is fixed. If the toilet continues to run, double-check the flapper's alignment and chain tension. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PqC2uaB8YJI 13 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10859-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/6W8nT4e5uT0/hqdefault.jpg Test the New Flapper — Toilet Flapper Replacement After the new flapper and chain are installed, turn the water supply back on to the toilet. Allow the tank to fill completely. Once filled, observe closely to ensure that no water is leaking from the tank into the bowl. If there are no leaks, flush the toilet a few times to confirm proper operation. The toilet should no longer be running continuously. https://www.youtube.com/embed/6W8nT4e5uT0 1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10852-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing new stair treads on wood stairs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10852-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Prepare the Self-Adhesive Stair Tread — installing new stair treads on wood stairs Take one self-adhesive stair tread and turn it over to expose its backing. Carefully peel off the clear plastic protective film from the entire adhesive surface of the tread. This action prepares the tread for immediate application, exposing the sticky side. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10852-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing new stair treads on wood stairs Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10853-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing new stair treads on wood stairs Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10853-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — installing new stair treads on wood stairs With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10853-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EXjC9H1O-uA/hqdefault.jpg Install the Stair Tread onto the Stair — installing new stair treads on wood stairs Carefully position the prepared self-adhesive stair tread onto a clean wooden stair. Ensure the tread is centered and aligned properly with the front edge of the stair. Once correctly placed, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands. Apply even pressure across the tread to ensure proper adhesion and remove any air bubbles. Repeat this process for each stair, working your way up or down the staircase. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EXjC9H1O-uA 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10842-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uUQQuVitEdo/hqdefault.jpg Disconnect Electrical Power — Dishwasher Repair Before undertaking any further inspection or repair, it is absolutely essential to disconnect the dishwasher from its electrical power source. This prevents the risk of electric shock. You can do this by either unplugging the dishwasher from its electrical outlet (often found under the kitchen sink) or by switching off the corresponding circuit breaker at your home's main electrical panel. If unsure which breaker controls the dishwasher, it's safest to turn off the main circuit breaker for the entire house. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uUQQuVitEdo 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10842-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Hu_RjKIcaqw/hqdefault.jpg Safely Shut Off Power and Water — Dishwasher Repair Before proceeding with any disconnection, it is crucial to safely shut off both the electrical power and the water supply to the dishwasher. First, locate the electrical breaker box and identify the circuit breaker for the dishwasher. Turn this breaker to the 'OFF' position. To verify that the power is indeed off, use a non-contact voltage tester (like the Southwire 40120N) on the electrical wires connected to the dishwasher. The tester should not light up or beep, confirming no power. Next, locate the water shut-off valve, typically found under the kitchen sink. Turn this valve to the 'OFF' position to stop the water flow to the dishwasher. Failure to shut off both utilities can result in electrical shock or water damage. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Hu_RjKIcaqw 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10842-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ft7lXDPCEug/hqdefault.jpg Shut Off Power and Water — Dishwasher Repair Before beginning any work on the dishwasher, ensure your safety. Unplug the dishwasher from its electrical outlet. If the dishwasher is hard-wired, locate its circuit breaker in the house's main panel and switch it off. Verify that the power is disconnected by attempting to turn on the dishwasher or pressing its control panel buttons; the panel should not light up. Finally, close the water supply valve that feeds water to the dishwasher, typically located under the sink. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ft7lXDPCEug 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10843-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dglhg1gcfJ4/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Dishwasher Repair Before attempting any work on the dishwasher, it is crucial to turn off its water supply. Locate the water shut-off valve, which is typically found under the kitchen sink. Depending on your plumbing setup, there might be a separate valve specifically for the dishwasher. Turn this valve all the way to the right (clockwise) to ensure the water supply is completely off. The video narrator demonstrates twisting the valve until it's completely closed, using the mnemonic 'Lefty Loosey, Righty Tidy' to emphasize the correct direction. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dglhg1gcfJ4 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10843-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/s6DluU6KM98/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Dishwasher Repair Before performing any plumbing work, it is crucial to turn off the water supply to the dishwasher. For most dishwashers, this line is connected to the hot water supply under the kitchen sink. Locate the shut-off valve on the hot water line and turn it clockwise until it is fully closed. To confirm the water is off, turn on the kitchen hot water tap; the flow should stop. https://www.youtube.com/embed/s6DluU6KM98 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10843-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cP4rRbhNkz0/hqdefault.jpg Turn Off Water Supply — Dishwasher Repair Next, turn off the water supply to the dishwasher. Access the area under your kitchen sink, where you'll find the water lines. Locate the dedicated shut-off valve for the dishwasher's hot water line and turn it clockwise until it's fully closed. If there isn't a dedicated valve, you may need to turn off the main water supply to your entire house. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cP4rRbhNkz0 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10844-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8FPhgal_UYI/hqdefault.jpg Remove Dishwasher Access Panels — Dishwasher Repair To gain access to the dishwasher's internal components and connections, you must remove the lower access panels. Locate the two Phillips head screws on the bottom left and right sides of the lower panel (toe kick). Remove these screws using a Phillips head screwdriver, noting that a magnetic tip is helpful to prevent dropping screws. Once the lower panel is removed, carefully shift and pull out the upper access panel, as it is held in place by tabs. Removing these panels provides much better access for inspection. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8FPhgal_UYI 64 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10844-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/_WWgUmdC_2Q/hqdefault.jpg Remove Dishwasher Lower Access Panel — Dishwasher Repair Locate the bottom access panel of the dishwasher. Using a screwdriver (typically Phillips head or flathead, depending on the screws), remove the screws securing the lower access panel. Once screws are removed, carefully detach the panel to expose the internal components, including the drain pump solenoid and motor assembly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_WWgUmdC_2Q 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10844-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uUQQuVitEdo/hqdefault.jpg Remove Dishwasher Front Panels — Dishwasher Repair To access the underside components of the dishwasher, you'll need to remove the bottom front service panel and the toe panel. These panels are typically secured by mounting screws; use a screwdriver to remove them, then carefully pull both panels off. This provides an initial view of the area under the tub. For a more thorough inspection and better access, especially to internal door mechanisms, you may also need to remove the main front door panel. Open the dishwasher door and locate the Torx screws positioned along the outer edges of the inner door panel. Use a screwdriver to remove these screws. As you remove the last few screws, support the outer door panel with one hand to prevent it from swinging open or falling. Gently separate the outer door panel and the control panel slightly from the inner door panel. Locate and carefully disconnect the user interface control wire harness from its connection point. Once the harness is disconnected, you can fully remove the outer door panel and control panel. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uUQQuVitEdo 41 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10845-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uUQQuVitEdo/hqdefault.jpg Visual Leak Inspection with Flashlight — Dishwasher Repair After checking the primary connections, use a flashlight to conduct a detailed visual inspection of the entire underside of the dishwasher. Look carefully for any water trails, active drips, or old water stains on the floor, the base pan, or around any of the components under the appliance. This step aims to pinpoint the exact location of the leak if it's originating from an area other than the direct connections. Common leak points to check include the heating element, the sump, and the diverter motor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uUQQuVitEdo 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10845-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/nvnVIK7O26E/hqdefault.jpg Operate Dishwasher to Observe Leaks — Dishwasher Repair With the kick plate removed, the dishwasher's internal plumbing and electrical components are visible. To actively search for the leak, the appliance is turned on and set to a full 'normal wash' cycle. The presenter advises against using shorter cycles like 'rinse and hold' because some leaks might only manifest during specific phases of a complete wash cycle (e.g., during the main wash or draining). Use a flashlight to carefully inspect all exposed connections, hoses, and the pump area for any signs of dripping water as the dishwasher runs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/nvnVIK7O26E 70 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10845-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KU7898nPXAg/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Fill Hose — Dishwasher Repair Inspect the fill hose, a shorter hose that carries water from the water inlet valve to the dishwasher's tub. This hose is located underneath the dishwasher. Pull the dishwasher out to gain access. Check the fill hose and its connections for any signs of damage, cracks, or leaks. If the hose is damaged and leaking, it needs to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KU7898nPXAg 21 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10846-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wSqhrqlq2T0/hqdefault.jpg Check Water Inlet Valve — Dishwasher Repair The water inlet valve controls the flow of water into the dishwasher. It consists of a bracket, a valve body, and a solenoid. To access it, remove the dishwasher's front access panel. Check if the water supply valve under the sink is fully open and that there's good water pressure. If you have a valve with a screen, you can disconnect the water line to inspect and clean the screen for clogs. If water pressure and screen are fine, the solenoid might be faulty. Test the solenoid for continuity using a digital multimeter set to continuity mode. Disconnect the wires from the solenoid's terminals and touch the multimeter probes to each terminal. A good reading indicates continuity (typically a low resistance or a 'beep'), while an 'OL' (over limit) reading indicates no continuity, meaning the solenoid is bad and the valve needs replacement. The video shows a good reading as '0.000' and a bad reading as 'OL'. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wSqhrqlq2T0 89 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10846-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9UxFcTXFewQ/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Water Inlet Valve — Dishwasher Repair The water inlet valve controls the flow of water into the dishwasher. It is typically located behind the lower access panel of the dishwasher, near the front. Two common issues with this valve are a clogged inlet screen or a defective solenoid. First, visually inspect the inlet screen for any debris or sediment that may be restricting water flow. Clean it if necessary. Second, use a multimeter to check the continuity of the solenoid on the water inlet valve. A lack of continuity indicates a faulty solenoid. If either the screen is blocked beyond cleaning or the solenoid is defective, the water inlet valve will need to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9UxFcTXFewQ 30 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10846-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KU7898nPXAg/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Water Inlet Valve — Dishwasher Repair Locate the water inlet valve, usually found behind the access panel at the front bottom of the dishwasher. This valve controls water entry into the dishwasher. Inspect the valve body for any cracks or visible signs of water leakage. In some cases, an internal diaphragm might be damaged, or the solenoid could be stuck open, causing continuous water filling and overflow. If the valve is leaking or malfunctioning, it needs to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KU7898nPXAg 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10847-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xjMdAqpU20I/hqdefault.jpg Troubleshoot Dishwasher Drainage Issues — Dishwasher Repair If your GE dishwasher is not draining and you observe standing water at the bottom of the tub, first check for blockages. On models equipped with fine and ultra-fine filters, remove and inspect these filters for any debris or obstructions. For models without an ultra-fine filter, 1-2 cups of clean water covering the bottom of the tub is considered normal, but excessive water indicates a problem. Ensure there are no large food items, such as noodles, lettuce, or bones, covering or blocking the sump area in the rear of the tub. Next, inspect the drain hose where it connects below the sink for any blockages or kinks. New GE dishwashers come with a white corrugated drain hose, which should be used; old, worn-out hoses can kink and cause blockages. Finally, confirm that the kitchen sink drain itself is not clogged. If a garbage disposer is installed, run it to clear the drain system. Always exercise caution and do not put hands into the garbage disposer to avoid serious injury. It is recommended to run the garbage disposer prior to operating the dishwasher to clear any food or debris. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xjMdAqpU20I 94 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10847-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Z8F6MFi3ryA/hqdefault.jpg Troubleshoot Dishwasher Not Draining - Debris and Hose Check — Dishwasher Repair Next, inspect the bottom of the dishwasher tub for large food pieces such as noodles, lettuce, or bones. These can obstruct the sump area and prevent proper drainage. Carefully clear out any large objects found. Additionally, examine the drain hose where it connects below the kitchen sink. Look for any blockages or kinks in the hose. Newer dishwashers typically come with a white corrugated drain hose, which should always be used. Reusing old, worn-out drain hoses can lead to kinking and blockages. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z8F6MFi3ryA 22 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10847-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-wyp0RU1M20/hqdefault.jpg Diagnose and Fix Drain Pump (If Sensor Cleaning Fails) — Dishwasher Repair If cleaning the pressure sensor did not resolve the 'failure to drain' error, the issue might be with the drain pump itself. First, turn off the circuit breaker again. Locate the drain pump underneath the dishwasher (it's often a larger motor-like component connected to the drain hose). To remove it, you typically need to push a locking clip and then twist the pump assembly to detach it. Disconnect any electrical connectors attached to the pump. Once removed, you can use a multimeter set to ohms to test the pump's resistance, comparing the reading to the specifications in your dishwasher's manual (e.g., 0.3-5.0 mega-ohms). Also, check the impeller inside the pump for any obstructions or damage. Sometimes, simply dislodging a stuck impeller by gently tapping the pump can fix the issue. If the pump tests bad or is damaged, it will need to be replaced. Remember to clear large food particles from dishes before loading to prevent future clogs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-wyp0RU1M20 154 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10848-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/CI7SPHzh7j0/hqdefault.jpg Test Heating Element — Dishwasher Repair To test the heating element, first, remove both terminal connectors from it using needle-nose pliers. Set your multimeter to ohms resistance. Place one lead on each of the heating element's spade connectors. A good heating element should show approximately 10 ohms of resistance. If your multimeter displays 'OL' (overload) or a significantly different value, the element is likely bad and needs to be replaced. Additionally, test for continuity or ohms resistance between one of the spade connectors and the heater canister itself. If you get any value here, it indicates that the heating element wiring is touching the canister, causing a short circuit, and the element needs replacement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/CI7SPHzh7j0 48 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10848-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ev-Vyh9xKHg/hqdefault.jpg Test Heating Element and Thermostats — Dishwasher Repair Use a multimeter to test the continuity of the heating element. Set the multimeter to the ohms (Ω) setting, or use the continuity test function if available (which often beeps). A healthy heating element should measure between 10 to 50 ohms. The video demonstrates how to test across the two terminals of the heating element. If the multimeter shows an 'OL' (open loop) or '1' (infinite resistance) and does not beep, the element is broken. Then, test the thermistor and thermostat (which are typically attached to the heating element housing) by checking continuity across their leads. They should show continuity if healthy. If any of these components fail the continuity test, they need to be replaced. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ev-Vyh9xKHg 99 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10848-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/noUWYyylNJ0/hqdefault.jpg Test the Heating Elements — Dishwasher Repair The final major electrical components to test are the heating elements. Switch your multimeter to resistance mode (ohms, Ω). Carefully place the probes across the terminals of each individual heating element. A healthy heating element should present a specific resistance reading. The video shows readings of approximately 11.8 ohms and 12 ohms for two different elements, indicating they are in good condition. Significant deviation (e.g., very high or infinite resistance) suggests a faulty element. https://www.youtube.com/embed/noUWYyylNJ0 25 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10849-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/uUQQuVitEdo/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Door Gasket — Dishwasher Repair If you observe water leaking from the dishwasher door, the first step is to open the door and visually inspect the gasket, also referred to as the door seal. Carefully check along its entire length for any signs of tears, cracks, or missing sections. Any damage to this seal can compromise its ability to contain water within the tub, leading to leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uUQQuVitEdo 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10849-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zmYUJQtr6lc/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Side Door Gasket for Damage — Dishwasher Repair Open the dishwasher door completely. Perform a thorough visual examination of the rubber door gasket (seal) running along the sides of the dishwasher's tub opening. Look for any visible tears, cuts, or signs of wear. Additionally, check if any section of the gasket has been pulled out of its retaining channel. The presenter demonstrates pressing the gasket back into its channel if it's loose or dislodged. He also explains that over time, these gaskets can become hard and brittle, losing their flexibility, which may necessitate replacement. The video shows the presenter bending a section of the gasket to illustrate how a healthy, flexible gasket should feel compared to a hardened one. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zmYUJQtr6lc 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10849-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/P3d1G_4NcqM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect the Door Gasket — Dishwasher Repair The door gasket, usually made of rubber or vinyl, creates a watertight seal around the dishwasher door when closed. Inspect the gasket for any signs of brittleness, cracks, tears, or hardening, which can compromise the seal. Also, check for any food particles or debris lodged in the gasket that might be preventing a proper seal. Clean any debris and if the gasket is damaged, it will need to be replaced to stop leaks from around the door. https://www.youtube.com/embed/P3d1G_4NcqM 15 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10850-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/v-DekPW78ck/hqdefault.jpg Concluding Recommendations — Dishwasher Repair If all the components you've checked (door switch, overfill float switch, and water inlet valve) appear to be functional based on your tests, the problem might be a wiring break elsewhere in the circuit or a defective electronic control board. These issues can be more complex to diagnose and repair. In such cases, it is recommended to have a professional service technician diagnose and repair your dishwasher to ensure it is done correctly and safely. https://www.youtube.com/embed/v-DekPW78ck 38 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10851-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/l3uCrKXQHRk/hqdefault.jpg Restore Utilities and Test — Dishwasher Repair With all connections re-established and the panels replaced, turn the water supply back on to the dishwasher. Then, return to your circuit breaker panel and switch the dishwasher's breaker back to the 'On' position. Finally, run a short test cycle on your dishwasher to confirm that it is functioning properly, checking for any leaks or unusual noises. https://www.youtube.com/embed/l3uCrKXQHRk 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10851-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KU7898nPXAg/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Water, Test Dishwasher — Dishwasher Repair Once the leak issue is resolved and any necessary parts have been replaced, plug the dishwasher back into the electrical outlet or switch on the circuit breaker. Turn the water supply back on from the shut-off valve under the sink. Run a test cycle to ensure the repair was successful and there are no further leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KU7898nPXAg 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10851-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5HbBclI9jjE/hqdefault.jpg Restore Power and Test — Dishwasher Repair With all connections secured and panels in place, turn the water supply back on by rotating the valve under the sink. Then, return to the circuit breaker and turn the power supply to the dishwasher back on. Finally, run a short cycle or test the dishwasher's functions to confirm that it is working properly, that there are no leaks from the water supply or drain hose connections, and that all features are operational. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5HbBclI9jjE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10840-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Peel First Adhesive Strip — installing peel-and-stick carpet stair treads Carefully peel back the protective paper strip from one of the adhesive sections on the back of the carpet stair tread. This exposes the adhesive for initial placement. Try to handle the adhesive surface as little as possible to maintain its stickiness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10840-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing peel-and-stick carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10840-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing peel-and-stick carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10841-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qszbznpGFS4/hqdefault.jpg Press Down Firmly — installing peel-and-stick carpet stair treads With both adhesive strips removed and the tread positioned, use your hands to firmly press down across the entire surface of the carpet stair tread. Apply consistent pressure to ensure that the entire adhesive backing makes strong contact with the wooden stair surface. This will securely fasten the tread in place, preventing shifting and providing a non-slip surface. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qszbznpGFS4 5 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10841-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — installing peel-and-stick carpet stair treads Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10841-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — installing peel-and-stick carpet stair treads Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10838-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qlFGteqDXFA/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Tread — Stair Tread Installation Using a tape measure, accurately measure the width of the stair tread where the carpet will sit. The installer measures 12.5 inches. He then decides to add a half-inch to the measurement, cutting the carpet to 13 inches, to ensure a very snug fit, noting that a previous piece was 'a little tight.' Unroll the carpet and use scissors to carefully cut a straight line across the carpet, following the measured width. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qlFGteqDXFA 45 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10838-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Us8Ga7_MYUI/hqdefault.jpg Measure Treads and Mark Laminate — Stair Tread Installation Using your measuring tape, accurately measure the width and depth of each individual stair tread. The depth measurement is taken from the very edge of the bullnose (the rounded, protruding part of the stair tread) to the face of the existing riser (the vertical board at the back of the step). It is crucial to measure each tread separately, as stairs are rarely identical in size or perfectly square. Once measurements are taken, record them on a notepad. Then, transfer these precise measurements onto the Cap-A-Tread laminate material, marking the cut lines clearly with a pencil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Us8Ga7_MYUI 19 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10838-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/vCyH1WZUDpE/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet Sections — Stair Tread Installation Begin by thoroughly cleaning the existing wooden stairs to remove any dust, debris, or old adhesive residue. Then, use a measuring tape to accurately determine the dimensions of each stair tread (the horizontal part) and riser (the vertical part). Also, measure any landing areas. Lay out the bulk carpet material on a clean, flat surface. Using a measuring tape and a long straight edge, mark the precise cutting lines for each individual carpet section required for the treads, risers, and any curved or landing areas. Carefully cut the carpet along these lines using a sharp utility knife, ensuring all pieces are accurately sized for their specific locations on the stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/vCyH1WZUDpE 11 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10837-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/cO_ZnMP1kIM/hqdefault.jpg Cut Carpet Pieces — Stair Tread Installation Using a sharp utility knife and a T-square or long straight edge, carefully cut the carpet pieces along the marked lines. Ensure your cuts are precise and clean. For the connecting edges between steps, a perfectly straight cut is essential for seamless joins. For other edges, maintain the extra inch of material you marked earlier. The presenter demonstrates cutting the carpet pieces, emphasizing the importance of accuracy for a professional finish. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cO_ZnMP1kIM 75 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10837-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dLwqNHREkrQ/hqdefault.jpg Measure and Cut Carpet — Stair Tread Installation A large piece of carpet is rolled out on the floor. The width of each stair step is carefully measured using a tape measure. A straight edge is then aligned with the measurement, and a utility knife is used to precisely cut the carpet to the required size for each step. This ensures that each carpet piece fits snugly across the width of its respective stair. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dLwqNHREkrQ 21 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10837-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/bCDU2rmBE8c/hqdefault.jpg Plan and Cut Carpet Pieces — Stair Tread Installation Carefully plan out your carpet cuts to maximize material usage and ensure a consistent look. Draw a detailed diagram of your stairs on graph paper, labeling each tread and riser with its exact dimensions. Then, use this plan to cut your carpet roll into individual pieces using a utility knife and a long, sturdy straight edge. Cut from the back of the carpet for cleaner edges and to protect the pile. https://www.youtube.com/embed/bCDU2rmBE8c 49 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10836-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Complete Tread Application — Stair Tread Installation Continue the application process by slowly and steadily peeling back the remaining backing paper from the anti-slip tread while simultaneously pressing down with the roller. Work your way along the length of the tread, ensuring consistent pressure to eliminate air bubbles and create a strong bond. Once all the treads are in place, give each one a final firm press with the roller, starting from the center and working outwards. This ensures they are perfectly secure and free of any trapped air, making your stairs safe and ready for use. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 16 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10836-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10836-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10833-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Before installing the stair treads, ensure the stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust, dirt, pet hair, or debris from the surface of each stair. A clean surface is crucial for the adhesive on the treads to bond properly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 6 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10833-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FAXkwFKyfuc/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Staircase — Stair Tread Installation Before installing the carpet stair treads, thoroughly clean the entire staircase. Begin by sweeping all wooden steps to remove any loose dust, dirt, or debris. Once swept, use a damp cloth to wipe down each step and the front edge (riser/nose) to ensure no fine dust or residue remains. This creates a clean, smooth surface for the adhesive treads to bond effectively. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FAXkwFKyfuc 3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10833-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/UKogM4HOVCw/hqdefault.jpg Clean the Stairs — Stair Tread Installation Begin by ensuring your stairs are thoroughly clean. Use a dust pan and brush to sweep away all dirt, dust, and debris from top to bottom. Follow up by wiping down the surface of each stair with a damp rag to remove any lingering unwanted stains or marks. This critical step ensures optimal adhesion for the anti-slip treads. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UKogM4HOVCw 13 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10839-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin installation by peeling off the clear plastic liner from the back of the first carpet stair tread to expose the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Carefully align the rounded front edge of the tread with the front edge of your stair step. Ensure it is centered and snug against the step riser. Once positioned, firmly press down on the entire surface of the tread with your hands to activate the adhesive and secure it in place. The presenter demonstrates that if alignment isn't perfect, the tread can be peeled off and repositioned without damaging the wooden stairs. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 67 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10839-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/wlrZJhNKDF8/hqdefault.jpg Place the First Stair Tread — Stair Tread Installation Begin the installation by taking one carpet stair tread and carefully positioning it on the desired step. Ensure the tread is centered, straight, and leaves an even border of exposed wood on the sides and front of the stair. Once properly aligned, firmly press down across the entire surface of the tread, especially focusing on the edges and corners, to activate the non-slip backing and securely bond it to the clean wooden stair. The video shows a foot pressing on the tread and a hand lifting it slightly to confirm its non-slip nature. https://www.youtube.com/embed/wlrZJhNKDF8 3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10839-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Secure the First Tread — Stair Tread Installation Once the first tread is accurately positioned, secure it in place. If the treads are self-adhesive, carefully peel off the backing and firmly press the tread onto the stair, ensuring good contact across its entire surface. If not self-adhesive, apply double-sided carpet tape to the back of the tread before pressing it down. Ensure the tread is smooth and free of wrinkles. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10835-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zb2dGhifZhE/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Use — Stair Tread Installation After all the carpet treads have been installed, take a moment to visually inspect the entire staircase to ensure each tread is properly aligned and firmly adhered. The video concludes by showing a dog confidently walking both down and up the newly carpeted stairs, demonstrating the improved traction, safety, and comfort provided by the new treads, particularly for pets and potentially young children or the elderly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zb2dGhifZhE 6 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10835-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0l3UWfmoDiY/hqdefault.jpg Final Inspection and Enjoyment — Stair Tread Installation Once all carpet stair treads are installed, conduct a final visual inspection to ensure that each tread is securely in place, properly aligned, and that the staircase has a uniform appearance. The newly installed treads significantly improve the safety of the stairs, particularly for children, the elderly, and pets, by providing a non-slip surface. The video demonstrates this enhanced safety by showing dogs confidently using the now-covered staircase. The treads also add a cozy and beautiful touch to the home decor. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0l3UWfmoDiY 5 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10835-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/9QUWoHirsVE/hqdefault.jpg Final Review and Enjoyment — Stair Tread Installation Once all stair treads are installed, step back and visually inspect the entire staircase. Check for uniform spacing, straight alignment, and secure adhesion of all treads. Walk up and down the stairs to ensure they feel stable and comfortable. The video showcases the completed staircase with all treads installed, demonstrating the aesthetic and functional improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9QUWoHirsVE 11 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10834-1 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FgsoDLpyMl8/hqdefault.jpg Install Subsequent Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the installation process for the remaining stair treads, repeating the steps of peeling the liner, aligning, and firmly pressing each tread onto the subsequent steps. This easy installation method makes the product highly pet-friendly, as dogs and cats can run up and down without slipping, and it also adds a layer of safety for children and the elderly by reducing the risk of slips and falls. The quick delivery for some styles (within a week, at most two) allows for a swift home improvement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FgsoDLpyMl8 35 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10834-2 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3C52iwS6dh4/hqdefault.jpg Install Remaining Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Repeat the cleaning, marking (if necessary), and installation process for each remaining stair. Use the template or marks created earlier to maintain consistency in placement. Peel the backing, align, and firmly press each tread into place until all stairs have been covered. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3C52iwS6dh4 14 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10834-3 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/sfgZWTtWnVc/hqdefault.jpg Install Remaining Stair Treads — Stair Tread Installation Continue the process of installing the stair treads, one step at a time, moving up the staircase. For each tread, repeat the centering and securing steps as outlined for the first tread. Consistency in placement is key to a uniform and professional look. Use the measuring tape to verify each tread is centered and positioned identically to the previous one. Press down firmly to ensure proper adhesion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sfgZWTtWnVc 6 2026-10-18T13:25:07.194Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10815-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VmKR1n-iWrw/hqdefault.jpg Position Outdoor Condenser — Air Conditioner Installation Go outside to the planned location for the outdoor condenser unit. Place the equipment pad on a flat, even, and sturdy surface. With the assistance of another person (due to the weight), carefully lift and place the condenser unit onto the equipment pad, ensuring it is centered and stable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VmKR1n-iWrw 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10815-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K4DX3Dq1eGw/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Outdoor Condenser Unit — Air Conditioner Installation Carefully lift and position the outdoor condenser unit onto the prepared concrete pad. This step typically requires two people due to the unit's weight and bulk. Mark the mounting bolt locations on the concrete pad through the unit's feet. Drill holes into the concrete using a masonry bit, then insert and hammer in the provided mounting bolts. In this video, the installer initially drove the bolts too deep, preventing proper nut attachment with the rubber pads, so he opted to secure the unit directly without the pads. It's important to ensure the bolts are driven to the correct depth to allow for the rubber pads if desired. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K4DX3Dq1eGw 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10815-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K4DX3Dq1eGw/hqdefault.jpg Prepare Outdoor Unit Site and Concrete Pad — Air Conditioner Installation Identify the ideal location for the outdoor condenser unit, ensuring sufficient clearance for airflow and maintenance. In this video, the installer clears overgrown bushes using a riding lawnmower and pruning shears to create a suitable, open space. Next, construct a concrete form using 2x4 lumber and rebar for reinforcement. Dig a shallow trench, lay down gravel for drainage, and secure the form with stakes before pouring concrete to create a stable, level pad for the outdoor unit. Allow the concrete to cure overnight. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K4DX3Dq1eGw 174 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10816-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K4DX3Dq1eGw/hqdefault.jpg Position and Secure Outdoor Condenser Unit — Air Conditioner Installation Carefully lift and position the outdoor condenser unit onto the prepared concrete pad. This step typically requires two people due to the unit's weight and bulk. Mark the mounting bolt locations on the concrete pad through the unit's feet. Drill holes into the concrete using a masonry bit, then insert and hammer in the provided mounting bolts. In this video, the installer initially drove the bolts too deep, preventing proper nut attachment with the rubber pads, so he opted to secure the unit directly without the pads. It's important to ensure the bolts are driven to the correct depth to allow for the rubber pads if desired. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K4DX3Dq1eGw 47 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10816-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/zmEuI-dZ5BI/hqdefault.jpg Place Outdoor Condenser — Air Conditioner Installation Carefully transport the outdoor condenser unit to the location you previously selected during Part 1, Step 1. Gently place the unit in its designated spot, making sure it is level and stable on the firm ground, and adheres to all recommended spatial requirements for proper air circulation and maintenance access. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zmEuI-dZ5BI 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10816-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VmKR1n-iWrw/hqdefault.jpg Position Outdoor Condenser — Air Conditioner Installation Go outside to the planned location for the outdoor condenser unit. Place the equipment pad on a flat, even, and sturdy surface. With the assistance of another person (due to the weight), carefully lift and place the condenser unit onto the equipment pad, ensuring it is centered and stable. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VmKR1n-iWrw 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10817-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/O0D8t5Ruxqw/hqdefault.jpg Install New Evaporator Coil with TXV — Air Conditioner Installation The old evaporator coil has been successfully removed, leaving a clear space for the new unit. The technician then applies a bead of caulk to the bottom edges of the new evaporator coil, ensuring a tight seal when it's placed into the transition box. This prevents air leaks and improves system efficiency. The new Rheem evaporator coil is then carefully positioned and installed, ensuring proper alignment within the existing ductwork. A key feature of the Rheem unit is its built-in TXV (Thermostatic Expansion Valve), which simplifies installation by eliminating external TXV connections. The sensing bulb for the TXV is mounted onto the suction line (large copper line) at the 2 o'clock position (or 10 o'clock), with a specialized clip and foam insulation to protect it from ambient air, ensuring accurate temperature readings. https://www.youtube.com/embed/O0D8t5Ruxqw 213 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10817-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/8OzGRAvJO7Y/hqdefault.jpg Install New Indoor A-Coil and Seal Ductwork — Air Conditioner Installation Carefully slide the new A-coil into the furnace plenum, ensuring it sits securely and correctly on the fabricated platform. The platform includes runners to guide the coil into place and prevent movement. Then, seal any gaps or openings around the installed coil with metal tape to ensure an airtight seal and efficient airflow. https://www.youtube.com/embed/8OzGRAvJO7Y 146 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10817-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/GU2RMVF-Ihg/hqdefault.jpg Install New Evaporator Coil — Air Conditioner Installation The new Bosch evaporator coil is carefully placed into the existing furnace cabinet in the attic. The technician notes the use of mastic tape and aluminum tape to seal the connections between the new coil, the furnace, and the supply plenum trunk, ensuring a tight seal for airflow. The existing condensate drain is reconnected to the new coil, and the refrigerant lines are temporarily bent into place. https://www.youtube.com/embed/GU2RMVF-Ihg 235 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10818-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DzVJiSQNbew/hqdefault.jpg Connect Outdoor Unit Wiring and Refrigerant Lines — Air Conditioner Installation Remove the panel that covers the refrigerant valves and wiring connections on the outdoor unit. Some models may already have these components exposed. Then, remove the protective screw caps from the refrigerant valves. Connect the pipe joint of the outdoor unit to the copper line set, starting the union nut by hand to avoid cross-threading. Use a torque wrench to tighten the connection to the specifications provided in your manual. Next, connect the multi-conductor wire that runs from the indoor air handler to the associated terminals on the outdoor unit, ensuring careful color-coding matches. Double-check all wiring connections for correctness. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DzVJiSQNbew 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10818-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/twV-c5i0MjM/hqdefault.jpg Connect Line Set to Indoor Unit and Route Through Wall — Air Conditioner Installation The indoor unit's cover is carefully opened or removed to access its internal connections. The pre-charged line set, which consists of insulated copper refrigerant lines, a communication wire, and a condensate drain hose, is then connected to the appropriate ports on the indoor unit. Once connected, the bundled line set is carefully fed through the prepared wall opening, guiding it from the inside of the building to the exterior. https://www.youtube.com/embed/twV-c5i0MjM 4 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10818-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/2bMb-K_baOI/hqdefault.jpg Install Outdoor Condenser and Test System — Air Conditioner Installation On the exterior of the house, secure the specialized wall bracket for the outdoor condensing unit. This bracket is often designed to mount to the house structure and may require blocking behind it to protect vinyl siding. Use a drill and appropriate fasteners (like screws or lag bolts) to firmly attach the bracket to the building. Ensure the bracket is level and capable of supporting the weight of the condenser. Next, drill holes through the exterior wall for the refrigerant lines, condensate drain, and electrical wiring to pass through. Carefully lift the outdoor condensing unit and mount it onto the installed wall bracket. Connect the electrical wiring to the unit, ensuring a water-tight connection to protect internal circuit boards. Connect the refrigerant line sets, and the condensate drain line. Install a service switch and, optionally, a surge protector near the outdoor unit for safety and system longevity. Before adding refrigerant, perform a crucial test: pressurize the line sets with nitrogen to check for any leaks. Then, use a vacuum pump to evacuate all air, impurities, and nitrogen from the lines. This ensures a clean, dry system ready for refrigerant. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2bMb-K_baOI 89 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10819-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xPhO330avBw/hqdefault.jpg Connect Outdoor Unit Electrical Wiring — Air Conditioner Installation Connect the main electrical wiring from the house to the outdoor unit's electrical panel. Ensure the main breaker for the circuit is off. Connect the black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground) wires to their corresponding terminals (L, N, and ground symbol) within the unit. Secure the wiring with a clamp to prevent it from being pulled out. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xPhO330avBw 69 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10819-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/FditJqUenAk/hqdefault.jpg Wire the Outdoor Unit and Quick Disconnect Box — Air Conditioner Installation Proceed with wiring the outdoor unit and the quick disconnect box. Use a suitable connector (e.g., from a previous project heat treating oven) to ensure a watertight connection for the cables running from the indoor unit to the outdoor condenser. Open the outdoor unit's electrical panel. The outdoor unit's wiring is also labeled on the panel: connect the green ground wire to the green ground screw on the left, the yellow wire to port number one, the white wire to port number two, and the black wire to port number three. For the main power side, the creator used a pre-made 6-foot, 10 American Wire Gauge (AWG) whip. Verify that the 20 amp breaker (from Step 1) is turned off. Wire up the quick disconnect box: note that the red wire on the whip will serve as the neutral. The white wire goes to one line, black to the other. Apply PVC adhesive to the flexible conduit and fittings for a watertight fit. Finally, at the outdoor unit, feed the wires from the whip, cut them to a shorter length, strip the ends, and add appropriate connectors. Connect the green wire to the green ground screw on the right side of the panel, the red/white wire to the neutral terminal, and the black wire to the load terminal. Once all connections are made and verified, close the electrical panel covers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FditJqUenAk 105 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10819-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0gMVZxI5jRQ/hqdefault.jpg Wire Outdoor Unit Main Power — Air Conditioner Installation Connect the outdoor AC unit's main power supply. The outdoor unit's phase (red wire) and neutral (black wire) power terminals should be connected to the output terminals of the isolator switch. The input terminals of the isolator switch should then be connected directly to the main incoming phase and neutral lines from your electrical panel or distribution board. This connection is typically separate from the circuit feeding the indoor unit's socket, providing dedicated high-current power and a local disconnection point for the outdoor unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0gMVZxI5jRQ 7 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10820-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qYiaKRgCREI/hqdefault.jpg Evacuate System and Activate Refrigerant Charge — Air Conditioner Installation After all brazed connections have cooled, a vacuum pump (Robinair VacuMaster) is connected to the service ports using a manifold gauge set. The pump is turned on to evacuate the refrigerant lines, removing all air, moisture, and non-condensable gases from the system. This step is crucial for the proper operation and longevity of the AC unit. Once a deep vacuum is achieved and held (indicating no leaks), the vacuum pump is disconnected. The service valves on the outdoor unit are then slowly opened, allowing the factory-charged refrigerant to fill the newly connected refrigerant lines and the indoor evaporator coil. Once the system is charged, the manifold gauges are removed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qYiaKRgCREI 312 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10820-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/EY77sPyVM2c/hqdefault.jpg Evacuate, Charge, and Secure Refrigerant System — Air Conditioner Installation After connecting the refrigerant lines, it is critical to evacuate the system to remove all air and moisture. This is done by connecting a manifold gauge set, like the 'MASTERCOOL' brand shown, to the service ports and attaching a vacuum pump (not shown). The gauges indicate the vacuum pressure. Once the desired vacuum is reached and held, then the vacuum pump is disconnected. Then, the service valves on the outdoor unit are fully opened using an Allen key to allow the factory-charged refrigerant to flow into the entire system. Finally, replace and tighten the protective caps on the service ports with an adjustable wrench. https://www.youtube.com/embed/EY77sPyVM2c 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10820-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/QlOS_SA0QCI/hqdefault.jpg Charge Refrigerant and Finalize Connections — Air Conditioner Installation After successfully holding a deep vacuum (below 500 microns), the system is ready for charging. First, attach the refrigerant cylinder (containing R-454B) to the manifold gauges. Carefully open the liquid line service valve (the larger line) fully, and then fully open the suction line service valve (the smaller line). This releases the factory pre-charge from the outdoor unit into the entire system. Next, use a digital scale to add the precise amount of additional R-454B refrigerant required for the specific line set length, following the manufacturer's charging instructions. Once charged, close all service valves and remove the hoses, ensuring all caps are re-secured to prevent leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/QlOS_SA0QCI 63 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10821-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/WY9KxQgHEGY/hqdefault.jpg Test the Connection for Leaks — Air Conditioner Installation Perform a leak test on the newly connected line set points. Prepare a soapy water mixture in a spray bottle. Generously spray the mixture over both line set connection points. Carefully observe these areas for the formation of any bubbles, which would indicate a refrigerant leak. If bubbles are seen, you must close the valves, re-tighten the line set connections with wrenches, re-open the valves, and then re-apply the soapy water to re-test for leaks. https://www.youtube.com/embed/WY9KxQgHEGY 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10821-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/K4DX3Dq1eGw/hqdefault.jpg Release Pre-Charged Refrigerant and Check for Leaks — Air Conditioner Installation Using an Allen wrench, carefully open the service valves on the outdoor condenser unit. This action releases the pre-charged R410A refrigerant from the outdoor unit into the newly connected line set and indoor air handler. Listen for the sound of refrigerant flowing. After releasing the refrigerant, spray a soapy water solution (or a specialized leak detector spray) onto all the newly made connections (both on the outdoor unit and where the line set exits the wall). Look for bubbles, which would indicate a leak. If no bubbles appear after several minutes, the connections are sealed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/K4DX3Dq1eGw 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10821-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/TI1FlB2U46Y/hqdefault.jpg Release Refrigerant and Check for Leaks — Air Conditioner Installation After connecting the refrigerant lines, open the service valves on the outdoor unit to release the pre-charged refrigerant into the system. Immediately after, use soapy water in a spray bottle to check all connections for leaks. Apply a generous amount of soapy solution to each joint; if bubbles appear, there is a leak. Initially, no leaks were detected. However, a faint hiss was later heard from inside the air handler, prompting further investigation. This suggests a potential leak within the unit itself, necessitating removal of an access panel to locate it. https://www.youtube.com/embed/TI1FlB2U46Y 27 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10822-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/xPhO330avBw/hqdefault.jpg Connect Indoor Unit Electrical Wiring — Air Conditioner Installation The installer demonstrates connecting the electrical wiring to the indoor unit before mounting it. This is done by matching the numbered wires (1, 2, 3, and ground) from the wire harness to the corresponding terminals on the unit's electrical block. A small plastic clip is used to secure the wires inside the unit. This step is performed before final mounting for easier access. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xPhO330avBw 42 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10822-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0gMVZxI5jRQ/hqdefault.jpg Connect Indoor Unit to Power and Control — Air Conditioner Installation Connect the indoor AC unit's power cable. The green wire (earth), black wire (neutral), and red wire (phase) from the indoor unit's cable should be connected to an AC plug. This plug will then be inserted into the 16 Amp power socket wired in the previous step. Additionally, connect the two communication/control wires from the indoor unit (yellow and blue, as indicated in the diagram) to their respective terminals on the outdoor AC unit. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0gMVZxI5jRQ 6 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10822-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/5trJX6Ef1iI/hqdefault.jpg Wire the Indoor Unit — Air Conditioner Installation Before mounting the indoor unit, it's essential to connect the electrical wires. Open the front cover of the indoor unit to access the terminal block. Feed the communication cable through the designated hole and connect the individual wires (typically labeled 1, 2, 3, and ground) to their corresponding terminals on the block. Ensure each connection is secure with lots of surface area and no insulation is caught under the terminal. Once wired, you can close the terminal block cover. https://www.youtube.com/embed/5trJX6Ef1iI 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10823-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VmKR1n-iWrw/hqdefault.jpg Initial Power On and System Testing — Air Conditioner Installation After all connections (including electrical by a licensed professional) are complete and secured, turn the main power back on at the breaker for the outdoor unit. Go back inside and use the provided remote control to turn on the Mr. Cool system. Once the system powers on, thoroughly test each operational mode: Heat, Cool, Dry, and Fan. Allow the system to run in each mode for at least 5 minutes to confirm proper functionality and ensure that all features operate according to the product manual's descriptions. Verify that the indoor unit is blowing air correctly and that the outdoor unit is operating as expected. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VmKR1n-iWrw 19 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10823-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/c9VivD3h6J0/hqdefault.jpg System Activation and Testing — Air Conditioner Installation After all mechanical and electrical connections are made, perform a thorough system check. Ensure the outdoor condenser unit is running, the indoor air handler fan is operating, and cool air is being discharged from the supply vents. The video shows the outdoor Goodman brand condenser unit running and confirming it's working perfectly after the installation. This step indicates the completion of the physical installation and initial operational verification. https://www.youtube.com/embed/c9VivD3h6J0 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10823-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/DzVJiSQNbew/hqdefault.jpg Initial System Startup and Check — Air Conditioner Installation After all connections are complete, the system has been properly evacuated, and refrigerant has been released, it's time to power up the unit. Start the system using the handheld remote control. Observe the indoor unit's display and check for proper operation by feeling the airflow and temperature output. The system should begin heating or cooling efficiently, providing comfortable air as intended. https://www.youtube.com/embed/DzVJiSQNbew 10 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10824-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/qODV6X6JCu4/hqdefault.jpg System Startup and Final Checks — Air Conditioner Installation With the system charged and all connections complete, turn on the outdoor condenser unit. Listen for proper fan and compressor operation. Ensure the suction line feels cold, indicating the system is pulling heat effectively. The new system should be quiet and operate efficiently. Once temperatures are warmer, re-check the refrigerant charge and top it off if necessary to optimize performance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/qODV6X6JCu4 66 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10824-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/mhorI4nHCFU/hqdefault.jpg Verify Proper System Operation — Air Conditioner Installation With the new condensing unit in place, power restored, and the system properly charged with refrigerant, verify proper operation. Observe the unit to ensure it is running smoothly and cooling effectively. Check all connections one final time for any signs of leaks or loose fittings. https://www.youtube.com/embed/mhorI4nHCFU 8 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10824-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/kJNOjuZBswY/hqdefault.jpg Final Checks and System Restart — Air Conditioner Installation To finalize the maintenance, connect manifold gauges to the service ports of the outdoor unit to measure the refrigerant pressures, ensuring they are within the manufacturer's specifications. After recording the readings, safely disconnect the gauges. Conduct a thorough check of the entire work area, ensuring all tools are collected and any drop cloths or protective materials are removed. Return to the main electrical panel to switch the circuit breakers for the HVAC system back to the 'ON' position. Lastly, return to the outdoor unit to verify that it starts up and operates correctly, confirming the success of the maintenance. Give a 'thumbs up' gesture to indicate completion. https://www.youtube.com/embed/kJNOjuZBswY 52 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10805-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Locate Septic Tank Access Points — Septic System Maintenance The first step involves carefully locating the buried inlet and outlet access lids of the septic tank. This typically requires probing the ground and then digging to expose the lids. The video shows the process of excavating the soil to reveal these access points. Special care must be taken to avoid damaging any existing buried utility lines or irrigation systems during excavation. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10805-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/KiThznLYJ2U/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Access Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Maintenance Begin by locating the septic tank lids. In this case, the customer had already dug up the outlet side lid. If the lids are buried, carefully excavate the soil around the access points until both the inlet and outlet lids are exposed and accessible. The video shows a shovel being used to clear soil around the access point. Note that septic tank lids can be heavy and require care when opening. https://www.youtube.com/embed/KiThznLYJ2U 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10805-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0Z5KAIuMIBQ/hqdefault.jpg Locate Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Maintenance The video begins by showing a dug-out area, indicating prior knowledge of the general septic tank location. The presenter identifies the septic tank lid, noting that his tank has two. He mentions needing a rough idea of the tank's location to start. He then uses a metal pry bar to probe the ground. By listening for the distinctive sound of the bar hitting the concrete lid, he identifies the precise location of the tank. He then outlines the tank's perimeter with white spray paint based on these probe points. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Z5KAIuMIBQ 44 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10814-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Avoid Flushing Harmful Substances — Septic System Maintenance To maintain the beneficial microorganisms crucial for your septic system's function, it is critical to avoid flushing or draining certain harmful substances. Never use anti-bacterial soaps, automatic toilet bowl cleaners (which can release harsh chemicals into the tank), flushable wipes, or other sanitary products, as these do not break down and can cause clogs. Avoid liquid fabric softeners, harsh chemicals, food scraps and coffee grounds (which add unnecessary solids), oils, greases, and fats (which solidify and cause blockages), drain decloggers (which can kill bacteria and damage pipes), cigarette butts, and pharmaceuticals. Instead, opt for natural and biodegradable cleaning products that are phosphorus-free. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 86 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10814-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/PUP8_IY-Sgs/hqdefault.jpg Identify and Avoid Harmful Waste — Septic System Maintenance Introducing non-biodegradable or harmful substances into the septic system can severely disrupt its natural biological processes and lead to costly failures. For instance, if the internal T-baffle (which directs flow and retains scum) were absent, the floating scum layer (composed of grease, non-biodegradable wipes, etc.) would flow directly into the perforated pipes of the leaching field, quickly clogging them and preventing proper drainage. Similarly, chemicals like paint or excessive amounts of solid materials like kitty litter (made of clay) and coffee grounds can kill the beneficial bacteria in the septic tank, halting the essential decomposition process. When the system's ability to process waste is compromised, the tank fills up, causing sewage to back up into the house, and necessitating expensive professional pumping and cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/PUP8_IY-Sgs 79 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10814-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/1SeIl9kSGx0/hqdefault.jpg Only Flush Waste and Toilet Paper — Septic System Maintenance Exercise extreme caution regarding what you flush down the toilet, especially if your property is connected to a septic system. Septic systems are delicate and designed to handle only human waste and toilet paper. Avoid flushing any other items, including feminine hygiene products, so-called 'flushable' wipes, or any other non-biodegradable materials. These foreign objects can clog the system, damage pumps, and disrupt the delicate bacterial balance in a septic tank. Even if you are on a municipal sewer system, practicing these habits is beneficial as it reduces the strain on wastewater treatment plants and saves taxpayer money by preventing costly blockages and maintenance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/1SeIl9kSGx0 40 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10806-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Maintenance Begin by inspecting the septic tank lids. Ensure that all lids are accessible, not buried under excessive growth, and securely fastened with bolts. Unbolted lids can be extremely dangerous due to the risk of falling into the tank. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10806-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/RBwcWvGoULc/hqdefault.jpg Remove Lids and Inspect Baffles — Septic System Maintenance Using a specialized tool like the T&T Top Popper, the heavy concrete septic tank lids are carefully lifted. Below the main lid, internal baffle caps are also removed. This provides clear access to both the outlet and inlet baffles for visual inspection. The inspection reveals significant root intrusion and sludge in the outlet line, indicating a severe blockage, and confirms the presence of an existing inlet baffle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RBwcWvGoULc 63 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10807-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Open Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Maintenance Once the septic tank lids are exposed, carefully remove them to access the tank's chambers. The video demonstrates using a tool, possibly a small pickaxe or lid lifter, to pry open the lids. Special attention is required for the outlet side lid, as irrigation lines may be closely situated. The operator carefully shimmies off the lid to avoid breaking these lines. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10807-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j5ORNB1Yp3g/hqdefault.jpg Remove Septic Lid — Septic System Maintenance To access the filter, locate the screws around the perimeter of the middle septic lid. Use an impact driver to efficiently remove these screws. The presenter explicitly mentions using a Makita brand impact driver, but any suitable impact driver or even a hand screwdriver can be used. Once all screws are removed, carefully lift the lid to expose the inside of the septic tank and the filter. Observe the water level; it should be below the filter line. If it's above, do not pull the filter out, as this indicates a potential issue with the leach field that needs to be resolved before cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j5ORNB1Yp3g 73 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10807-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/hPu7yybzyr8/hqdefault.jpg Locate and Open Septic Tank Access — Septic System Maintenance Proceed outdoors to locate your septic tank. The presenter notes that most septic tanks typically have three access points. For adding the mixture, it's generally recommended to access the tank closest to the house, which is primarily responsible for holding solids. Using a suitable tool, such as a pickaxe or crowbar, carefully lift and move the heavy concrete lid to reveal the access hole. Be prepared, as some tanks may have a secondary, lighter plug cap underneath the main lid that also needs to be removed. https://www.youtube.com/embed/hPu7yybzyr8 59 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10808-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dZ9xUgOOElM/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Inlet Sanitary Tee and Scum Layer — Septic System Maintenance Inspect the inlet sanitary tee inside the septic tank. Look for any large accumulations of plastics, wipes, or other non-flushable items that could cause blockages or system issues. Also, check the scum layer for any unusual items that indicate improper flushing habits in the household. The presence of a mature scum layer is generally a good sign of proper system function. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dZ9xUgOOElM 49 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10808-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Cq3zoN7kfI/hqdefault.jpg Access and Prepare Sludge Tank — Septic System Maintenance After inspecting the pump tank, proceed to the sludge tank. Use a cordless impact driver to unscrew and remove its lid. Observe the contents of the sludge tank; often, a thick crust forms on the surface. To prepare the sludge for pumping, use a 'Crust Buster' tool, which is a specialized mechanical agitator, to break up these thick solid layers. This makes the sludge more liquid and easier for the vacuum truck to pump out effectively. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Cq3zoN7kfI 37 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10808-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/Ar9G5JWAK7g/hqdefault.jpg Inspect Septic Tank and Clean Lid — Septic System Maintenance With the test port lid removed, the video shows the open port, allowing a direct view into the septic tank. You can observe the sewage (indicated by toilet water flushing) draining into the tank, confirming the system's function and providing an opportunity for visual inspection of the tank's contents, such as scum or sludge levels. The removed lid, which is likely covered in accumulated sludge and debris, should be placed into a bucket filled with water to begin soaking and facilitate cleaning. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ar9G5JWAK7g 11 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10809-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Consult Professional Septic Services — Septic System Maintenance For tasks requiring specialized knowledge, such as septic system design, installation, pumping, or complex servicing, always seek assistance from a qualified professional. You can often find certified experts through local associations or directories, such as the 'Find a Professional' directory mentioned in the video. Remember, when it comes to your septic system, choosing the cheapest option isn't always the best approach, as quality of service directly impacts the system's longevity and your home's safety. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 29 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10809-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/4Cq3zoN7kfI/hqdefault.jpg Pump Out Sludge — Septic System Maintenance Once the sludge has been thoroughly agitated and liquefied by the 'Crust Buster', insert the large diameter suction hose from the septic pump truck into the sludge tank. Ensure the hose reaches the bottom of the tank to remove as much solid material as possible. Activate the pump truck to begin vacuuming out the sludge and effluent. Monitor the pumping process to ensure efficient removal. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4Cq3zoN7kfI 58 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10809-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Pump Septic Tank Regularly and Monitor Sludge — Septic System Maintenance Regularly pump out your septic tank to remove accumulated sludge and scum. The frequency of pumping depends on your household's usage, typically ranging from every three to five years. When a professional pumper services your tank, ask them to record the depth of the sludge layer. This information allows you to monitor your system's waste accumulation rate and make informed decisions about future pump-out schedules, promoting proactive maintenance. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10810-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ybeEpLYsS14/hqdefault.jpg Clean Septic Tank Opening — Septic System Maintenance After the old lids are removed, thoroughly clean the concrete rim of the septic tank opening. This involves removing any surrounding soil, debris, and especially any tree roots that may have grown into the area, using tools like a shovel or a pickaxe. Once larger debris is cleared, use a wire brush to scrub the concrete ring to ensure a clean, smooth surface. Finally, use a powerful shop vacuum, such as the Craftsman Wet/Dry 17 Gallon model shown, to suck up all remaining dirt, dust, and small particles, ensuring the surface is pristine for the new adapter ring. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ybeEpLYsS14 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10811-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/z8BDBsLYbYI/hqdefault.jpg Secure and Maintain Access Lids — Septic System Maintenance Ensure all septic system access lids are easily accessible for maintenance and inspection, but most importantly, securely fastened to prevent accidental entry. These lids should ideally include a safety screen underneath to prevent small animals or children from falling into the tank. This is a critical safety measure for any household with a septic system. https://www.youtube.com/embed/z8BDBsLYbYI 9 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10811-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/3mvpYQZ8NTM/hqdefault.jpg Open Septic Tank Lids — Septic System Maintenance Once the septic tank lids are exposed, carefully remove them to access the tank's chambers. The video demonstrates using a tool, possibly a small pickaxe or lid lifter, to pry open the lids. Special attention is required for the outlet side lid, as irrigation lines may be closely situated. The operator carefully shimmies off the lid to avoid breaking these lines. https://www.youtube.com/embed/3mvpYQZ8NTM 20 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10811-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/j5ORNB1Yp3g/hqdefault.jpg Reinstall Filter and Lid — Septic System Maintenance Once the filter is clean, carefully reinsert it back into the septic tank. Ensure it slides smoothly into its designated slot and the T-handle is properly aligned and seated. Next, retrieve the septic lid. Notice that the lid has small grooves or indentations around its edge. These grooves must align with the corresponding screw holes in the septic tank frame. Once aligned, place the screws back into their holes and use the impact driver to tighten them. Remember not to over-tighten, as the lid is made of plastic, and snug is sufficient. https://www.youtube.com/embed/j5ORNB1Yp3g 79 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10812-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/-prDWaoX6Vc/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Landscaping — Septic System Maintenance Using the wheelbarrow, backfill the excavated area around the newly installed septic riser with the previously removed soil. Gently compact the soil to remove large air pockets, but avoid excessive force that could damage the riser. Then, apply a layer of fresh topsoil, spread grass seed (such as EZ Seed), or lay sod over the area to blend the riser into the surrounding landscape. Finally, water the newly backfilled and seeded/sodded area thoroughly to promote growth and help the soil settle. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-prDWaoX6Vc 16 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10812-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/0Z5KAIuMIBQ/hqdefault.jpg Backfill and Finish — Septic System Maintenance After the risers are installed and the lids are secured, the final step is to backfill the excavated areas with the displaced dirt. The presenter smooths out the soil around the newly installed risers. He suggests that the grass will eventually grow back over the area. Alternatively, grass seed can be applied for faster regrowth. This leaves the septic tank access points level with the ground, making future pumping significantly easier without the need for extensive digging. https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Z5KAIuMIBQ 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10812-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/VtBRSJP48xU/hqdefault.jpg Layered Backfilling and Compaction Technique — Septic System Maintenance Begin the backfilling process by adding soil around the septic tank and into the trench in approximately 12-inch layers. After each 12-inch layer of soil is added, it must be thoroughly compacted. The video demonstrates the use of a mechanical Wacker compactor for this task, but a manual soil compactor, which can be purchased from hardware stores like Home Depot, can also be used. This meticulous process ensures there are no large settling pockets in the future, which could cause structural damage to the tank or pipes. This step focuses on the technique and reasoning, not the full execution. https://www.youtube.com/embed/VtBRSJP48xU 45 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10813-1 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/br0kPtOchzE/hqdefault.jpg Recognize Symptoms of Septic System Failure — Septic System Maintenance Begin by identifying common symptoms of a failing septic system. These may include toilets flushing slower than usual, unpleasant sewage odors in the yard, and visible water pooling in the area above your leach field or drain field. These signs indicate that the system is not properly absorbing effluent. https://www.youtube.com/embed/br0kPtOchzE 14 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10813-2 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/dzEP9hhE7bk/hqdefault.jpg Identify Drain Field Failure — Septic System Maintenance Dominic elaborates on drain field failure. He points out that if there's standing water or a 'swampy' area around the septic system, especially after heavy rain, it's a clear sign that the drain field is saturated and can no longer absorb water. In such cases, the water from the septic tank has nowhere to go but to back up, potentially into the house, such as a bathtub. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dzEP9hhE7bk 46 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no https://idahopainter.stesso.com/videos/10813-3 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z monthly 0.6 https://i.ytimg.com/vi/b4PnEBB1LUw/hqdefault.jpg Visually Inspect for Standing Water — Septic System Maintenance The inspector uses a flashlight to illuminate the interior of the enlarged holes. The key observation is the presence of standing water within the holes, specifically noted as being at least 12 inches deep in several locations. This standing water indicates that the drain field is oversaturated and failing to properly absorb and disperse wastewater into the surrounding soil. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b4PnEBB1LUw 32 2026-09-16T00:00:00.000Z no